GRAMMAR

ARABIC LANGUAGE:
INTENDED MORE ESPECIALLY

FOE THE USE OP YOUNG- MEN* PBEPAEING FOB THE EAST

INDIA CIYIL SEEYICE; AND ALSO FOE THE USE OF
SELF-INSTBUCTltfG STUDENTS IN G-ENEEAL.

DUNCAN FOBBKS,
LAM

LLD.,

OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES IN KING'S

COLLEGE, LONDON J MEMBER OF THE ROYAL
ASIATIC SOCIETY OP GEEAT BRITAIN AND ICELAND AND AWTHOU OR EDITO*
J
OF
WORKS ON THE PKESIAN, HINDtJSTANI, AND BENOAXI LANGUAGES.
l*fi.OWSSOE

LONDON
,

H. ALI/ffiN

&

Co.,

13/WATEBLOO PLACE,

HK&TP0BD
J*Y

WTWHIK

PEEPACE.

drt, at tho

on Arabic
,

or

to this
lo

day, at tart half .

ftananar.-oou.posod

Gorman

** Mt

p,cnt

Tho road w
may, thon no

language*.

-^ *

ouostto

ta

of a

tro.4nt ttan what

^ that

J)lai nor

oMy jn ^

lm(

to tho

Mero

null'

tho subject to bo

more

Kvo yot ot with in

any of the
*. to which I havo
t
ju8 aUudod; and fllis
I havo ondoavourod
to
supply, fa ao following
oBt of
my

alllity.

As' I lay a,

oWm

to

origimlity. in flu. work, with (h,,

""option of tho tat and tat
tetion,, and .ho gonoral a r-'

of tho
subjoot throughout, it is bnt
namo tho souroo, ton, whioh
I haro dm

te

TO.

I-

comprising tho

n U

foUo.

Sy^om

of Ittflotion

181S. pp.
^abo, 2nd od. 2 vol..

_fau

Ca.0.

8.

that I

my

nm
that

**.

VI

i'KEFAt'ft,

works of reference, but they arc utterly unadopted

use of Beginners.
extends;

Do

Sacy's

Dr. Ltimsclen's Grammar, so far as

copious even to the exhaustion of

is

for the

the*

it

ttiihjrat*

equally copious, but exceedingly defi'divn with

is

regard to methodical arrangement, as I havo oecamotially

ThiB drawback in Do

pointed out in the following pago,

Saey

meamm* oomponwttwl

in a great

is

however,

1>y

tho

copious Indices given at the end of each of his volumon*

Such Arahic Grammars as appeared before tho dayn of

Lumsdon and Do Saoy aro of course mijMWculed by thoao

of the latter and Grammars that have boon published
?

the time of the last-mentioned masters, contain Uttlo or

nothing that

is

new*

tions to Bosenmiillert

I must, however, express

Grammar,

4to. Lipsiw,

Be

a very judicious condensation of

It has ? at tho

same time, the

of arrangement
press

stffl,

and bosidcs

with

faults of
y

my

obliga-

1818, which

Saoy's

first

Do Saoy on

in

<tKtfon.

the

abounds in errors of the

it

all its defects, it is

tho only

work of the

kind that I could have hitherto conscicmtioiwly rmmnncmli'cl

to

my
In

pupils

when commencing

compiling

the

the study of Arabia

following

Grammar,

hara^

upon

the whole, adopted the name $eale fith regard to copious?

ness, as that

used by Rosenmiiller

my

the latter, "being to give the student a

all

that

is

important in

In the disposal of
entirely from

my

my

Do

8acy

objoet, like that of

Mr

<xmdeffimti0n of

and Lumadcm'ft wofki*

materials I hare ventured to differ

predecessors,

may he

by a glance

niEFACE.
at

Table of

my

natiu'o,
iit

C 0ntentB.
f

1 holcl

methodical arrangement

assisting the student^

cult of attainment

all

Vii

that in works of this

of very great importance

is

Nor

memory.

IB

this object diffi-

that a "writer lias to do,

is

to discuss

plainly and concisely every part of tho subject under treat-

ment, at

Ae

Ike rig ht lime

tho following

instructing

students

in the proper place.

work
of

intended for

in

tlie

In tho

first

may

printed In tho larger type, for

MB

not bo deemed

Grammar

elementary

1 think ho itiuy ovon omit Sections IV*

as are

Btticly

and IX,

and

altogether.

exorcise himself in reading and trans-

pages of Mr* Schalch's Arabic So-

lati^ji4Uo
lootionH, 4to.

self-

1 would advise tho

then,

place,

learner to peruse Huch parts only of this

After that lot him

use of

Arabic language, a few plain

directions for tho guidance of all such

irrelevant*

tlio

East India College, 1830

or tho first Title in

tho dmwtonuilhiu Arabica of KoBcgurton, 8v<x Lipsito, 1828,

with copious

Both of thoHo works axo

and

1 havo mentioned are poinlod in

tlto

Boc.ondly, lot

ultca*

hnn,

Grammar, including of
in Hinullor typo,

wo may

call

tho Htndy of tho

that

it

road

thut,

the whole of

courso, air tho portions of

and marked

finish tho perusal of tho

ThiH

vocnJniltiricH ?

two

fnir

otc.

not encroach

and

it

vc*rjr

let

him

abovo mentioned,

olomontaay oourwo, or
;

this

it

after

roiwling-ljooks

full-

Jj/tKh^go^ in

has this solid advantage,

heavily on

the

PREFACE.

VU1

The preceding economical

course will prove highly service*

able to three classes of seH-instructing students*

who may wish

To

stationed throughout the

young and middle-aged clergymen,

country,

First,

knowledge of

to acquire a moderate

Arabic, as a valuable atixiliary to the study of

Hebrew

for

now an acknowledged fact, that a man can no more bo a

thorough Hebrew scholar without Arabic? than ho eaia be a
it is

Latin scholar without Greek.

To yotmg mon

Secondly,

paring for the East India Civil Service^ to

whom

pre-

the above

course ought to suffice for passing their examination in thin

country.

Thirdly and

lastly,

To

those

all

who

intend to rait

any of the exteiMve regions where the MiAammtdan

ligion prevails, or

wherever the modern Arabic

is

re-

genemlly

spoken.

The Modern Arabic

differs

from the Ancient or Cteittelj

chiefly in this, that the former has

simplification,

undergone a proeesi of

such as the rejection of the nunatim^ and of

the finat short vowels in general

also the rejection of the

dual number both in nouns and verbs*

is to

IE

faet,

the

Modem

the Ancient Arabic, what the Greek of the presamt day

r*

is to that of

Thueydides,

An

elementary knowledge of tho

Classical Arabic will enable a traveller to acquire, with

and in a very short time, every

dialect of the

cue,

Modern Tongua

spoken between the Atlantic and the Tigris,

For a second and finishing course of reading^

dent procure^ in tho
Dictioimries,

first place,

let the $tii>

one or other of the following

Froytagii (Gfoorgii

WiQwlmi)

PREFACE*

IX

Arabico-Latinum, prsosertim ex Jauharii Firusabadique et

allomm Arabum operlbus

desumttini, etc,;

Voctzm Latiaaram locupletissimus.

accedit Index

Halls Sax-

vols. 4to.

an enlarged and vastly improved

edition of the far-famed Arabic Lexicon of
Gtolius, which
onum, 1830-1838.

used to

Is

For ordinary purposes, the

for ten guineas.

sell

abridged

This

edition, of this

work

will suffice^ vis*

-Freytagii

(G. W*) Lexicon AraMco-Latinnm ex opere sue majore In

iiBum Tironiini excerption,

4 to. Halls Saxonum 1837.

such of the following works as he

-Arabic Reader, SYO.

may

Calcutta,

royal STO. 1812.

royal 8vo

Kur aE

alb^1840*

al>ovo

Bo Saoy

1810*

by Ibn

Aral>

viz.

Shah

no date

eto* ? diligoator disposuit

the following works edited

-Oalila ot

TO,

1842.

4to. Lipsiso ?

wo may add

peruse

Ikhwanu-s-Safa,

Fliigol's edition^ 4to.

Ooncordantia Oorani^

Gustavus Miigelj

To the

may

find convenient

1828*

History of Tlmur,

1817.

By

the aid of either of these Lexicons the learner

Bimna en

Aridbo,

by

4to* PaxiB 3

Chrestomathie Arabo, three thick Toltimes 8vo. 2nd

edition^ Parls y 1826.

This last work

of its numerotis eritieal notes ?

aad

is

illustrations of the text-

Los Seances do Hariri en Arabe aree

Paris, 1821*

To

theso? again,

works printed at Calcutta

iimluablo on aeooimt

tin

Oommentaire, foL

we may add

sereral raluable

m the course of i3xe present century,

Tiz,~l"afhatn4-Yaman, a Selection of Easy Stories in Prose

ani Terse from the best Authors.

4to* 1811.

Hadlkatu4-

tbo Writings of the most

dfetiit*

PREFACE.

guided Arabian

Poets, Oratory

1813. All Lailah,

or.

Book

and HislorianH.

of the Thousand

Thin

The

work,

first

literally into

W.

II.

Mac*

4 vola. royal 8vo.

naghtcn, assisted by learned Mouluvics.

Gale. 1839-42.

and Om* Nights,

Edited by Sir

(Arabian Nighte* Entertainment).

Itoyul 4 to,

the most complete edition of tho

Is

Fifty Nights

English by

II.

have been tnuutluted v<ry

Torrens.

8vo.

London, 1838,

There arc two otter editions of tho Alf Lailoh, vix*~A If

Lailuh

odor Tauaond uud eine Nacht, Arabi0oh, iiaoh uino,

Haudschrift

aiis

Ton ML

Tunin, hcrming.

12mo, Brcwlan, 182C-1843.

Ala<>,

12 voln,

Hulrichi,

Alf UiWi, tho Jiulak

oditioE ? from diflferout Arabic MSS,, veiy earefuHy edited

by

some of the most learned natives of Kgypt* 2

Tola. 4 to. Cairo,

Ms

Arabian library

Finally, the learner should

1880,

add

to

the Hu'aUakai) with commentary, royal Bvo. Calo. !B2ii(Mi

To complete

knowledge of Anibic Orammar tho &tu

his

dent should procure,

Do

if posBible,

tho following works

by IL

Sacy^Yi2;*-^GraiEiimiro Arabo, two thick volumes

A&thologie Grammatieala Arabo, 8vo. 3829.

1881.

by Iba MaHk
don's Arabic
?

Mi,at

roy. 8vo* 18SS*

Otammar^

To

through

be safely

this second
loft

Aiilyu,

b ^my id

aJbraady allo4ed to;

Amil, 4to, Calcutta^ 1814-

8m

aai

The mun who hat

course, or eyen a moiety of it?

thenceforth to

Ms own gmdmo*

With regard to the importance of the Arabic laagiig

tho Hebrew student it m sufficient for me to refer Mm to
,

following workij

?k~10t* Di^ortatio do

Origino, eta, Lin-

PREFACE,

guao

Arabic, ojusquo intima

Ilebraica, Svo. Edin.

Lingua
of the

XI

Affinitate et Convcxdeiitm

1769

"by

Dr. James Bobcrtson,

Edinburgh University, the soundest.

sound, Semitic scholar, that Scotland had

2nd. Olavis dialecti

Arabic,

etc.

vorum, 1733, by Albert Sehultons.

of

tibis

cum

till

If

not the only

then produced

sm. 4to. Lugduni Bata-

The most complete work

nature, however, is ihe Oiigincs Ilebra^a),

by Albert

cum

Tudicibufl.

Sohultons. Folio, Lugd. Batt. 1161, pp. 048,

All of these are

works on

first-rate

this particular subject;

and they ought long ago to have been translated into our

own

vernacular,

if,

in our country, Semitic studios

had mot

with that attention which their importance demands.

As a

valuable guide in this department 1 would strongly recom-

moAd

the Arabic

Grammar

by

recently published

my

friend

WiJMftn "Wright, Esq., of the British Museum, formerly

Professor of Arabic in the University of Dublin, 2 yofe.
Svo, Leipzig

and London, 1859 and 1862.

To the general
itself as

civilization,,

between the

Grecian literature, and the not

less brilliant

of the Reformation in

so well expressed
I3L

Arabic language recommends

the vehicle of science and

brilliant oera of

dawn

scholar, the

by an

modern Europe,

This has been

old and esteemed pupil of mine,

B. Beresford, Esq., late of the Bengal Civil Service, that

I cannot here do better than reproduce

Ms

Borosford, in the preface to a translation

on Arabic Syntax,
1848, says,-

entitled,

very words*

by

Mm

of a

Mr,

work

Hidayatu-n-N"ahwi Svo* London,

"In whatever

point of view

wo

regard the

PREFACE.

Xll

Arabic Language, whether as the language of a people who

in the Middle

so materially to the literature

Ages contributed

and refinement of Europe, or as the language of a

which numbers upwards of 100,000,000

followers,

religion

and at the

present day affects greater numbers of mankind than Christianity itself; or

whether

it

be regarded as the medium for

communicating sound European knowledge to the whole body

Muhammadans

of the learned

of India, and as one of the

inexhaustible fountains for enriching some of the Indian

vernaculars, so

as to

European science and

render them competent vehicles of

literature to the great

Muhammadan population throughout

mass of the

British India ; under all

the above, and various other points of view, Arabic

said to be an object of deep

and peculiar interest"

In conclusion, I have to acknowledge

to

my

my

deep obligi&ftas

friends. Professor Francis Johnson, late of

College, Herts

may be

Haileybury

and Dr. Charles Bieu, of the British

Mu-

seum, Professor of Arabic in University College, London.

The kindness shewn

to

me by

and correcting the sheets of

the press,

is

this

these gentlemen in perusing

work

m they passed through,

more than I cam ever adeqtiately repay.

D.

58,

BUETON CEISOBNT,
v,

1863,

FOBBES,

OF

SECTION

r.

"WHICH TBEATS OS THE LETTERS AND SYMBOLS USED

1

Of

******

the Letters of the Alphabet

Of thjj^tmds of the

Letters.

JC'AfU'H

......,,,..

411

*,***,

1415

Of the Primitive or Short

f

Of tho TaEwin

or Nunation
o x
AJsi- Jasnn, or

i?

01 tto Symbol

Of

the

Ampuiatiou

Symbol TasHld-^dJd^lcJI

wX>*Ma

Of

tho Letters of

.
i*

.
J

Prolongation'-^ &^j>.
1

s^

Of iho Symbol Madda

$**.
i OX

J&

Of tho Symbol "Waila

X* X

or K4J&
*Vi/X

UJz>
4?C<*'

J^oriL^

Classificatxoa of the Lottors

,*,*..

.../...,...

Of tho Symbol Hamjsa

..*

*.**,,

Of thoITiimerioalTaliiooftheliottea*

.#.*,,
*,

10

-21

2122
2S**SS

..,...,,.

Of tho Various Arabic

Handwritings

1510

2324
24

50

20- 2ft
sn^ao

XIV

CONTENTS.

Of the Accent

................
PtsS<*S

Of the

Paiise

ujwjll

........

Exercise for Practice in Beading

.....

SECTION

3031

3132
3234

II.

WHICH TBEATS OF THE AKTICLB, THE SUBSTANTIVES,

OTMEEALS, ADJECTIVES, AND PBONOTJNS.
PS

Of

tfa

O sts

Artich^&JijX^\

..... ..,,*,
..... .......
.....
Nouns

3757

.......***.

4143

3637

.P^-O/-

Sufatwfwe

*Jtl

Of

tfo

On

the Forms and Measures of

y

Of Gender

On

c^

ij^\

the Formation of Feminine from Masculine

Of Numbers

Of the

Of

Nouns

....

.,..........,.*
Nouns
^xt"^O

4546

......>.....

5157

^ Ox

......
........
*

.,.,.*,....,,
.,**,.,,..,.
...... ,,,....*

The Ordinal Numbers.

Fractional

Numbers

Distribuiivo

Numbers

Eolative Numerals

.....
<V

Of

fto Atfwtfot

......

..,.,*,

Periodic Numerals.

Numeral Adverbs

tf

&?))

45

4650

0ftfaffm&ak^$^\*\***\.
The Cardinal Numbers

43^

*,,,..,*

Irregular or Broken Plurals

the Declension of

3841

5764
5850
6061
61

61

62

,.,..

02

63

0864

....... ,**,**

405

CONTENTS,

J&V
"PAGES

Of

tJie

Pronoun

13

j+*aA\*

65

..*,..........
.....,,.,.,.

Personal Pronouns*

Demonstrative Pronouns

..

Belative Pronouns .

Interrogative Pronouns

*....

..............

Eeciprocal Pronouns

C5 -68

68

-69

707!

7172

73

72- 73

SECTION III
WHICH TREATS OP THE
Of Radical and

Of

,****,

Servile Letters

the Conjugation of a Begular Triliteral Verb

Active Toiee

VERB,

*,..*.

,***,,,**

Passi^5foico

Of the

Preterite

Of the Aorist

7r>

-7U

70-*

77

77~78

79~88

>

Observations on tto Tenses, etc, of the Regular Triliteral Verb,

7476

...,,,.,..,,
...*.*...*,*
n

Of the Imperative'

7080
8085
8i5*80

*......,..,,,.,
NOUE .,,*.,,,,.

Of the

Participles

Of the

Infinitive or Verbal

Of the Derivative Formations of tho

Ecgolor

Triliteral

Tort

8687
87 -8S

88~9!

General Significations of tho Derivative Verb with reference to the

-.....,.,,.,

Primitivo

On

Quadriliteral Torbs
{ix^ox

Of

the Surd Yorb

*Jt

**,,.,
/ x

also called

91~97
Qg^jQ],

yFOx-

uicUUt

,*,

"doubloa."

101108

XVI

CONTENTS.

SECTION

IV.

WHICH TEEATS OF THE INFIRM OR IMPEEFECT

YEBBS, ETC.
PAOES

General Bules on

tlie

Nature and Permutation of the Letters

j,andu5

Bules peculiar to the Letter

Alif

..,,*,*

Rules peculiar to the Letter ^ JF&w.

............

Bules peculiar to t^ Fa

Waw

Eules peculiar to ^

\ ,

and

Yd

in

common

OftLoEamzatod Vcrb-^j^fi
Of tho Simile Verb*
Of Concave Yorbs

118121

122124

,.,,*,..*
.,**#,*

,.,..

126

127

128130
ISO

13S

13$

184

**

Terb^K
/

Of tho Defective

114-^115

.,..*.

Derivativo Formations from, Concave Boots

114

General Bomarks on tho Concave Verbs

Of the Defective

113

124127

Conjugation of the Concave

^s

^U1

Of the Defective Terb

113

115118

Conjugation of the Concave ^

The Substiitiv

110

..*...,....,

110118

..,...,...

135^141

*.*...*,.,.*

.,,*

Passives of Defective Yerbs

...........
*.,,.,,*,

Defective Derivative Formations

Of Yarbs Doubly Imperfect

Of Yorbs Triply Imperfect

185

1881 39
1$0

140

141142
142145
146

XVI

CONTENTS,

PAGES

Of the Negative Verb

Verbs of Praise and Censure

Of Verbs of Admiration

or Surprise^

14614
14

147

14

Explanation of "Useful Tables of Trilateral Verbs, "both regular

and Irregular

14!

Fiye Useful Tables exhibiting at one view the Conjugation of

every species of the Primitive Trilateral Verb

SECTION

Propositions

149

PARTICLES.

....,...
,....*

^SM c-J*^

Of Adverbs, Conjunctions^ and

Inteijoctions

SECTION

15\

V.

WHICH TREATS OF THE INDECLINABLE

Of

155

16C

168

IT'S

VI.

WHICH TBEATS OF THE DERIVATION AND FORMATION

OF NOUNS.

N"oTin of

Noun

U KJ1

Time and Place

UT

of Instrament

III

Noun

of Unity

^Jl

JToun of Specification
Intensity

-*

of Abundance

&!LiJl

of Singularity

180

182183

18318^1

.....

18S

184

184

185

^31 ^1
x

Noun

^^

x-PO**0 -

x/xo-*o

Noun

PC

%jd\
xx

Noun of

'

<s

0xO-O

^UjJl

xt.*o^ o

-Ifj^yi

135

XV111

CONTENTS.
M

Noun

of Capacity

Tho Diminutive

*J

*Uj!|

.......

..... ...
......
from
.....
Broken Plurals-^*^
t^T .....

Noun-yL2^

Substantives

t,

ft*~a p

u\

ThePluralof tie Hural

0-3 <*of

Formation of the

186

**j8!

Adjectives Derived irorn Verbal Boots

Adjectives derived

186

o s

<*>>

SECTION

186

188

188

189

*89

200

>

.......

201202

VII.

WHICH TREATS OF THE SYNTAX OF THE

ARTICLE,

SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, &

Analysis of Sentences

ArrangomeEt of

tlio

.,.,..,..,.,

"Words in a Sentence

Syntm

of fh& Article

SynUx

of

Of the Nominative Case

Of the

Genitive Ca*o

Of the Accusative Case

Cardinal

Numbers

Of the Ordinal Numbers

Of the Arabian Months

.........
.......
,

205

205

206

2gfc-208

,.**..,*

*..,..*,

20B

254

208200

...

209210

210212

,*,**,****

212214

,,,",.....,.

214222

Substantives in Apposition

Of the

Adjectives

..,,.

.....

Sutstmtim and

.....

203

...... ...,.
........
.

**.
....*.

222-227

227228

Concord of Adjcctiras with their Substantives

228240

Concord of the Attribute with tho Subject

240241

Of

tho Begreog of Comparison

.,..,,,.,.

241247

CONTENTS,
PAGES

..........

Government of Foiins
Syntax of

the

......

Pronouns

Personal Pronouns

***.,,
,

Demonstrative Pronouns

Of the Belative Pronouns

...*.,.

Of the Interrogatire Pronouns

SECTION

247

264

254

271

254

261

261262
262-

-269

269- 271

VIII.

WHICH TREATS OF TEE SYNTAX OF TEEBS

A3TO PABTICIES.

.,.,..,
....,*,..

Use and Application of the Proterito Tcnso

272278

Uso and Application of tho Aorist

278

287

287

290

Uso and Application of tho

*.,.

Infixdtivo

Use and Application of the Participles

Conco*

a Verb with

GoYcrnment of Verbs

Of Abstract

its

......,

290294

.***.

204302

Wominatiyo

.....,

or Snbstantiye Verbs

Verbs of Praise and Censure

Verbs of Admiration and Surprise

Inchoative and Approximate Verbs

Syntax of Indeclinable Particles

***,

.,
.....,,

30^

,$^

306

308
308
309

309- 311

311320

SEOT10H IX
"WHICH TEEATS OP THE PBOSODY,
O /

Of

the Metrical Feet

xu *

f^>. (pi fT^.|

Of tho Perfect or Standard Feet

322326

COMWTS.

XK

PAGES

Of Imperfect Feet

? ?

Of

tie Metres

jjssd\

Classification of the

Of

?<S

(pi.

Batffe or the

Extended

Of the Metre

TDiaflf, or the

Of the Metre

Sar!

the

Of

the Biff&rmt

d&Uih

Rhyme

Of the Kifah
the

iw

Ka!dah

Of the Bubi't

^^

Poetio Licence

328329

..,.,,

*.....

334
334-^.335

335

335336

336337
337338

338342

and tho Ghazal

* **"

330

339340
340

B41

341-342

,.,,.,,

342343

'

333^,334

336

.......,.,.,

^i3Ji

325

326337

*.*

ifju^l

Of the Muzdawj

Conclusion

l&nti of Poems
V

Of

or the Proximate

oy

324-

,......

the Metre Bajaz;, or the Tremulous

Of

Of

Nimble

or the Eapid

...,*,,
..,.....

or the Perfect

Of

Of the Metre Kamil,

Of the Moire Muta^arib,

333

or the Exuberant

long

Of the Metre Wafir,

...,..,.

of^es?).

Metres

foe Metre Tawil, or the

Of the Metre

<*

S43-

344

EBRATA.
pu.r

UNI

17

2-3

21

f>

29

1.3

30

39

11

42

19

Jot'

"on,"

>; "of

rt'ttrf

"of the

frtzrf

vowel.'*

nw

"thus,"
"
"
for
begin/* read
begin with."

for "as,"

>' C^Jj'J

read

"an

>r U^^

48, last line but one, fop

SO

"niuVi "

vowel,"

/or

JliLO

<

old

rm^

man,"

^^aJi

"old men,"

i^jL)
v

50

13

ybr "quicwcnt,"

55

11

for

wad

"inert."

road "jwuticloK."

**partIciploH,"

57

u thoir
17 ^br^'in other," rea$
oilier/*

58

25

omit the two words,

(H

19

"
for "positive," read
comparative."

G<ft

17 and 20, omit the

**

J^^

or."

word "both,"

21

80

OG

19

for "Grammar,"

102

24

jfor

129

17

165

14

,/br

/;>

mtf "AoSfwt."
wad " Ortunmawi."
"Indefinite/* r^/ "Aorist."
"future/'

"*

omit the two wowlb, "or

"
)j|

215

19

/ar "adwtributiou of individuality," road w distribution or individuality* 1 '

284

24

for "conjunction

raw?

<*

particle tj

ARABIC GRAMMAR.
SECTION
the Letters

Of
1.

THE

Arabs, like

I.

and Symbols used

tlie

in

Writing.

ancient Phoenicians, the Jews and

Samaritans, write and read their letters from right to left

The
hence their books tegin at what we should call the end.
Arabic Alphabet* consists of twenty-eight letters, all of
which are considered as consonants. Most of these assume
different forms

(some three, and a few others

four), according

commencement, middle, or end of

a combined group of letters, as may be seen in the following
Thus, in a combination of three or more
Table, Column T.
as they are situated at the

letters,

the

first

of the group, on the right-hand side, will

haye the form marked Initial ; the

the

first

last,

and

on the

last will
left,

character

be learned

Column

I.

Arabic character ;

III* the detached

first;

between

have the form marked Medial ; and the

will have the Final form.

that in this Table,

letters in the

letter or letters

contains the
II.

Observe,

also,

names of the

the same ia

form of the

letters,

and IY. the corresponding English letttou

* The
Alphabet here* described is used, generally speaking, By all those nations who
have adopted the religion of Muhammad ; riz-, the people inhabiting the North-west,
the North, and the East of Africa, the Turks, the Arabs, tho Persians, the Afgpns, and
the

Husalm&n portion of the psople

'

j>f

India and

THE ALPHABET.

THE ARABIC ALPHABET.

I

II.

in,

V.

IV.

VI.
roRM.

DETACHED
FOEM.

Final

Mod ImU

Final.

iul,
;

U
L-S

\3

ts

tha

|WVW

th

fim

u.
dal

Mi

J*
de

tl

dh

cX

J
j
nn
sh

u6

ImfutL

THE ALPHABET.
THE ABABIC ALPHABET

Continued.

OF THE SOUND** OF THE LETTERS,

Besides tho foregoing twenty-eight letters

additional
(--), (

),

here are live

marks or symbols used in writing, viz. (

and (~), with which the student may hero

The

familiarise himself.

firt

is

culled F<tthti(--)

),

),

at oiwe

whieh when

placed over a letter Indicates the presence of the short vowoi

uXU

tlnis,

und indicating

()

2nd, Kanra

fftfafc.

taidc r a

Idler

plueed

%
^ biki 3rd. Dauuwt
which when placed over a letter indicates the* ]>r<js<'n<?o
f
short w HH in tho word u*^ Jcntub.
*lih, *./^;w. (
),
a,

short

UH in

)?

of*

whciii

pkeoil

ovc^r

n letter denote that none of

the*

vowels immediately tblloww; <lni, &j> JhnL

h\\\* T<whtfitl(~ ), whieh when placed over a letter indicate that mich

nliort

letter in (toubU^l, aw in the

3,

Perliupn the

First, to

best

mode

//-arr.

of learning the Alphuhot,

wtile out several tinier the dcitached or

1

the letters in Column. Ill*

(if

word

tranfifoir,

in

(jxliil)it(*d

is,

foniw of

Secondly, io olwerve wliut eliungen

any) theso uiHlorgo, wlien combiiuul

words, UH

full

Column V,

in ilic

fonnution of

Luslly, to endeavour Io

into their corresponding Englisli

given as oacompliiioutions in Column

VL

l(tU<jj*H,

Th(*H<?

the words

wordn are

three in rmml>or, and are to be road, of coiuw*, from right

to loft.

Tlioy

tho leading

show

Icsttor,

at once the yuriouK phaneH tisHuined

whether

initial,

nm!m!$ or Jinal.

At

by
the

an exercise for tho student we have givou u

sprinkling of the fivo Bymboln above noticed.
Biiirio

time, as

Of
4,

the

The following

of

ih0

twolvcj letters

n^itm

very

litllo

notice

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS,

as their respective sounds are sufficiently represented

by the

English letters opposite to each in Column IV. The letter

"
c_> b has the sound of our I in
ball;" LJ th^ that of our tk
"
"
"
thin

in

that of oiir

/,

as in "zeal;"

$,

uJ

;"

/, as in

w, as in

?/ ?

as in

* h,

jar ;"

"sin;"

r,

as in

sh, as in

river ;"

"shin;

J?

"kin;" J /, as in "land;" *
"hand." To these we may add

^ when

beginning a word or syllable

u
being that of our iv in war," and that of

the consonants j and

the sound of

as in

in

L!//^ ? as in

"fin;"

"man;"

s,

These

our y in "yard."

last,

however, when not

initial,

contribute to the formation of long vowels and diphthongs,

of

which we

shall treat hereafter, in their proper place.

There are some instances in which the letter J lam of the

ox
"
article Jl al,
the/' changes its proper sound in accordance with the
initial letter of the substantive to which the article is prefixed (See
a.

5.

"We

shall

now endeavour

to give a concise description of

such Arabic letters as have no exact corresponding sound in

our

own language

premising, at the same time, that

it is

rather a difficult task to convey in writing, in such cases, a

correct idea of the pronunciation of foreign letters.

only do so approximately,
guages,
site

among our

sounds.

of students

by us

by having

"We can

recourse to such lan-

neighbours, as happen to have the requi-

It is highly probable, however, that the majority

may be unacquainted with the languages employed

as illustrations

rule, that the correct

hence, it clearly follow^ as a general

sounds of such letters as differ from our

own, must be learned by

the e#r~-we

may

say,

by a good ear;

OF THE 80XJNDS OF THK LETTERS,

und, c0nscqueiitly? a long description

applies in particular to tho letters cj> 3

-,
?

43
?

j, and tho various sounds assumed by the

At

The remark

is needless.

3U^

letter

c,

^.

beginning of a word or syllable, the letter alif^

like any other consonant, depends for its sound on tho accompanying vowel of itself, it is a very weak anpiratc, like our
6.

tlie

h in

words

tlio

honour^

Jierl,

and

Unu

identified witli the spiritus

as a7To eVlj op$o9

?

In

whon we

fact,

Blight

where

tlio

It IB

/tour.

of

rejnmmiB Hut

mencomout of utterance

<tlif,

and ub tlmro

utter the syllables ah, ib $

movement of the

elonoly

uch words

Greek, in

llio

apostrophe

more

still

IB

nuiscloH of tlie throat at the com;

and

t3io

part Vhoro that

movcnumt

takes place, the Oriental grammarians conider to bo the ma$i-

of utterance" of tho comontmt

fm\ or "place
*
w

c,

words

4-^1

a5 ?

L^\

ib^

and

c->\ nb^

form the w&KhrQj of

5,

iwd

may bo

or

Phially, tlio

weak

juat the

in the nyllablcsB

Rtim<*

tlio

^/i/fltm tente,

above examples ought

to ImTe been accompanied with tho symbol called luimsm

It

prcBcnt stage of

Ms

iiBeless

t^jl &&,

tliuft,

would to quite preposterous however,

some and

to

The very

prjlx

Iho

best Arabic

5.

"

f ka

Bfiiilitut

Ks***

n^raj

irn'&'al

denotes

J)5) as

at tlio

thin etiiiibur-

Ommmnr

laugiiiigOj llml of I)r* Jkumadeu, eschews throughout

la combination with the

(Be

c^l M, and <^1 ub*

progress by carrying along with tw

symbol.

iu4 jJ

a. Strictly spoakiug, tlio initial &lif In the

mark

an tho lips

bw{) oj M/,

considered as

aspirate of tho letter

well as tho essoutial vowel

us in iho

i*

tlio

iu

urn of

our
tlio

^//I

"

the place of f'tuiwiou/' or

place of utterance* of a nyllabh consl^iug of a

ancl

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS,

Thus, in the syllable L.J Id, L~>

'

vowel.

II,

and

cL>

or of * m&, +

t>&,

\,

mi,

and * m&, the place of utterance

raj of the letters

ha,

and

is

c 'ain is

between the

lips

so the

maKh-

in the lower part of the throat,

and their true sounds can be acquired only from the rnouth of an Arab.
7.

c^

t.

Tlte

sound of

than that of the English

?r;

or with the

this letter is softer

t.

It corresponds

of the Italians in the

and more dental

with the Sanskrit

words "$0#fo" and

"petto"
c*j th is

8.

"

sounded, as has been said

thin," or the Q theta of the Greeks

and Syria frequently confound

The Turks,

described.

it

4, like

our th in

but the natives of Egypt

with the letter c^> t, just
;

and other Musalman people

the sound of $.
In fact, it would

Persians,

to the eastward, give it

appear that most nations haye an aversion to the aspirate

which to us seems such an easy sound.

_ h

9.

is

a very strong aspirate,

somewhat

tk,

like our h in the

word "haul," but uttered by compressing the lower muscles

of the throat.

It will be represented in the

Boman

character

by k
10.

has a sound like the ch in the word "loch" as

pronounced by the Scotch and IrisE ; or the final German #4

"
in the word
buch."
It will be represented in the Boman
character

by M*

Grammar published at Vienna, in 4to. 1813, by a

*'
Trireverend gentleman named Antonio Aryda, who $tyles himself
*'
polis Syrise Archipreslbyter/' we ara told, sensibly enough, that
f
a,

In an Arabic

promiaciatur nti

% Gwcorum* sa

foti

w velnti Germaniouin oh

TO-

smcms

OF Tire

calem a subsoquens."
author adds,

explicit, tlic

d lias a

softer

corresponds to the

languages except

utl chrr

relation

we

i,o

aliall

tLut

c^

had

if w<j

etc.,

it in

like

CL^
it

It Tbearn ilio naino

z*

^rr/A,

According

by

Eoman

14*

rofij)ccliv(ly,

wliih

th<s

A
it

mund
ilut

by

W^

upp<r ginnn.

uitrl

////

of

wight hstw

Ibun our
tip of

j?.

th
it in

ni>r<%Kcnt

?.

pronouncod by the Arabs

IB

Alphabet hud two

exactly (o flic *jtj

Dr. J/ums<lon it IB fonriccl

character "by

<}

ctlut-

r/A,

retained*

Btill

tongue preswid against

tlio

Unman

In the

/,

33, ^0 $ has a ntrongor or nioro hissing

to

European

words "thy "

HoinHimos wmndod

that the Anglo-riuxou

fiir/t

Arabs, viz, p ///% and

tlio

of most

/7

It

<l.

Boft th in llio

has to

/A

distinct characters corrcBpomling

been as well

qwin, nd

English.

uniformly rtijnx^ont

a ouriouH

Ji is

rfuliieieully

HOIIO

! / /

or the

ig[,

and in Turkey, Porsia,

like d,

not

enm

and more dental sound than our

Sanskrit

tlio

WTO

however,

thw,

In Egypt and Syria

or "ihino."

If

ad amiiBsmi congruit

sounded like our

12. J dh is

raetc^r

"

so prseparans, clicet

spuondum
11. A

AB

OF THE

like*

a hard

by

tongue against the upper tooth on, ono wdo of

the month, generally the loft*
Tn the Itoiaan diameter wo
pressing

uso for
15,

it d.

cj and

Eoman

tlio

j,

The

and

fe

PcTOian^, ota, SOTIIK!

&

Tlioso letters aro woundcsd

or vory nearly

character
etc*

it like 1 &.

by

and ^

BO,

Wo

Hom<what

roproflont

tlii^in

like

in the

Tlio consonant

has

UM

miru*

wktion

to

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS.

the strong aspirate

\

a spiritus

is

lenis

that
or

has to

weak

that

aspirate

is,

the

like the

but the makhraj] or

down in the muscles of

With this distinction, its

place of utterance, of the c is lower

the throat than that of the

sound,

we may

if

alif.

use the expression, depends as in the case

on the accompanying vowel, as c-^c 'ab y i_~^

$, u-^c ^# which, in the mouth of an Arab, are different
from c-jj ab, LJ\ ib, and Lj\ ub. In the Eoman character the
of the letter
?

At

the same

time, it is impossible to explain in writing the true

sound of

be represented by the spiritws

'ain will

).

not to be found in any European language,

we know.

The student who has not the advantage

as

of a competent teacher,

may treat

the

he has the opportunity of learning

from the mouth of a native.
a.

it is

this letter

so far as

lenis (

its

as

he does the

true sound

by

\,

until

the ear,

ISome grammarians have favoured us with descriptions, most

MemnsM says that

amusingly absurd, of this indescribable Tetter,
"
the sound of it is
instar vocis vituli niatrem vocantis,"
Yriemoet, a
Dutch savant, in his Arabic Grammar published at Tranequer, 1733,
"
calls it an
adspiratio forfcissima/' and represents it by hhh 111 which
I suppose. means h to the third power.
Most grammarians tell us
that
is

it is

the

same

as the

Hebrew y ain; but then

a very disputed point, even

one of the sounds given to

it

among

by

the Jews

the latter, viz.

the

Hebrew ain

itself

and most assuredly

nyf

is

not that of
*

$&

'

'
i

Arabs.

has a sound somewhat like

"

sagen"

in the

Ctenaa word

About the banks of the Tweed, $ie natives sound

what they fancy

to

be the

letter

r v&ry like the Eastern i

?

a peculiarity well kaowft as the j^ot&umbrian lurr, or

OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LE1TBRH.

ID

the EomaB. character

jk

18.

"

when

r of the French

We

grass&j'e."

shall represent

in

it

by j$.

bears some resemblance to our c hard, in the words

that the j in uttered

"calm," "cup;" with this diftorouco,
In the "Roman chafrom the lower muscles of the tliroat
racter it will

19,

be represented by
This letter

n.

1st

cumstances.

that

consonant,

IB

or

C/

words
letter

it

followed

by

c? ^,

ia,

c^ e^
7

1,

2nd.

When

ontrcz,"

Greek;

o, 3 j,

^5

or

^,

followed

^j

it

and "reudre."

3rd-

it

KoimdiHl

of

by any

<>? ^> ^

naturally bocontcB m, as

for example, the

is

worcl^

written *<tmlur ;

Wluui
the

'antHtr,

cir-

or a guttural

by a vowel

followtul

CJUHC^

tlio

*-*

o^

has a naaal sound like that of the French n

"

variouBly Rounded according to

When

exactly aw in EngliBlu
fifteen letters,

in tlio

the

by

in Lntin and
in

pro-

^^*

"amlM^r,"

imiiml of u^-w

nounced UB if
toW a from tho liouso," they Bay mm-Mli*

4tlu

When

the letter

followed

is

by any

of

tlio

coukwo

or ^ w, tho two IctttTH

^ m,
a
min-rMl f froin
and Greek: thus H??Jj

four liquid*

r,

us in Lntin

?,

notmced mirrMi /

BO

5J
**

er?

my

lonl,"

mm^mkti

in

pro

*M cr*^

^"

,c

in ^ fi IB followed
&0I/4 ote, Lastly, wlum a word ending
or ^ /A tlio wound of f hn ^ n
by a word beginning with ^ w
is scarcely perceptible, Init tlic s and g? aro doubled, tiiun

4/^5
so

crJ nin-wtitidly

ll^

"from

^ M~y&^c(t(Idma

howowr, ^ w

in tho

my

father,"

becomes

middle of a word

in

folk wed

by

tin*

OF THE SHOBT VOWELS.

11

y it retains its natural sound;

words ^\j& Mnwanu and \JJ dunya.

sonants ^

20.

i*

or

The

#.

letter * A, at the

marked with two dots above

exactly like the letter c^>
letter,

and

it,

'i

which case

what

is

is

frequently

we

called a servile

gender of

shall see hereafter.

a peculiar form of lam and alify

la,

sounded

it is

chiefly used to denote the feminine

is

or

in

It is then

t.

substantives and adjectives as

21.

end of a word,

as in the

in

is

many

grammars stuck in at the end of the table of letters, with a

view apparently to puzzle the student.

shew that the

Its purport,

I be-

a or letter of prolongation (see

27) but then any other consonant followed by
alif, such as b 55, \J ta, etc., would have answered the purpose
lieve, is to

alif is a long

equally well

mode

or it

may be

of combining the

intended to exhibit the ordinary

J and

in writing and printing.

*>

the Primitive or

Of
22.

The Primitive Vowels

are three in number,

The

simple notation.
tetijatfyt,
it

and

belongs.

in the word

the
jjj,

Short Vowels

first

is

Its

"

first

briefly noticed in

2,

of the primitive vowels is called

(~) over the consonant

that of a short a ? such as

is

to

which

we h$v

calamus/' which is of Eastern origin, and of wjtjioi.

two syllables or

Dr.

we

SS^S

c^l^Jl,

which are indicated by the following

writen thus,

sound

as

root,

Lmm&den aud

calam or

M0% are

several eminent

have considered the fatka as equivalent to

Aort u in
"
words SUB" aad "rammer," "Wt
Im&Mioj^ howev%
Jwwe^otf

in saying thai
(in the Ara&fe

ta$A$e

especially) our

12

01?

THE SHORT VOWELS.

In pronot generally a true representation of fathn.

nouncing the short it of sun^ the mouth is mow shut than in

is

and calendar ; and

pronouncing the a in the words calamus
so happens, moreover, that the very signification of the

it

term
as

"
fai/ia

we may

unmarked
and
"

In such Arabic words,

open,"

is^

is

calendar.

tinder the

is

called

/rwm

^f

consonant to which

generally that of our nhort

It

erf

a in "ealaimw" or

and

has a sound like our short

limn

IB

((

^ and

written

Bound

IB

" and "

Bin
iin,"

^j.

the words

e in

(~)

Tin

belongs

in tho wordn

which in Arabic would be written

it

5*

The second

23,

tlio

understood always to represent the vowel yW/w,

have no other Bound than that

to

thcivforo,

Roman clwwtors,

have occasion to write in

OcouHioiially

"lxd" and

5)

which words would bo most nearly represented iu

In gcaiowl, liow(^ver the Icmm has the
Arabic as AJ and aJ.
"fed,

sound of out whorl i: the tmimirkod

of this

work

in

understood to

and ^fin,""!!!

tlioroforc^ in

(lie,

t'ourwo

nonnd of

iu

"MU"

lave*, tljo

worcln writfeu

Oriental

all

in the,

character,

24,

Tho

ASU 9 whicli

third is called

written over

its

consonant*
"

short u in tho words

Ite

bull" and

sotmd

busli/

tlnw (-^)

like that of our

in

in

which

in Arabic

would bo written jl and jjfij wo have ite sound ulo in tlio

a
words "foot" and
hood," which would bo writton c^J and
:

43^.

jsotrnd

SomolimcH in the

modem

Arabia

the*

lim a

approaching our short o in tho word "wolomn;"

example tho word

jXi "labour*" IB

for
in-

OF TANWIN OB NOTATION,

We shall,

stead of shughL

however, in this work uniformly

damma by the "unmarked

represent the

Oriental words in the

13

Eoman

which, in

u^

have

character, is understood to

the sound of u in "bull" and

"bush;" but never

"

our u in such words as "usage" and

all

that of

perfume/', or such as

"sun" and "fun."

our u in

Of Tanwm

Nunation

or

Sometimes the preceding short vowels are, in a peculiar

manner, employed for a particular purpose on the last letter
25.

of a word,

which process

called t&nwin or nunation, that

is

the use or application of the letter

in Arabic

grammar

mark the

serves to

The

n.

is,

tanwin, which

inflexions of a noun,

formed by doubling the vowel-point of the last letter,

which indicates at once its presence and its sound ; the last
is

syllable thus

becoming u%

in,

The

labun, <_>U labin, tfb Voban.

fatha, requires the letter

the sound of

he

which does

final syllable.

liiL. hi/cmatan ; or
(in

As a
case

when

which case the

the

only

The

word
is

words

last form, that of the

noun ends with a ham&a or the

the

by

or an y as in the

vowel

not, however, prolong

not iequired

is

letter

as

if,

2^ $hai~an,

pfonounced), as j

In words ending in

without the tmwin

when

ends in J^ ya^ surmounted

denotes the
general rule the termination
the Genitive, Dative, or Ablative ; and !^

the Accusative.

c-^b

^,

surmotinted

or

by

1,

or nunatwn, the alif i& sotuxded like the

alif of prolongation,

Of thi0, however, we

27, a$
shsil

^SU

hate more

i$e$i,

\^i

*ukla, etc,

to &ay further on*

OF THE JAZM,

14

a.

to be a nasal

nJ

This

is

by

26,

When

Koman

final

(Bee

19),

as the latter under

character

we

shall represent

n*

the

Of

when

same modifications

In the

similar circumstances.

nun

said

IB

The tonnlH

simply misleading the learner.

is subject to exactly the

the nUnation

recently printed the tanwln

the sound of the letter

lias precisely

and

Grammars

In some Arabic

+-

Symbol

Jftsm^

or

a consonant Is accompanied "by one of the three

*ssp

it is

primitive vowels,

said to bo

cl^su muMmrri/^ that

i^

Arabian gratnnuuiaus
moving or moveabk by that vowel.
consider a Byllablo as a step or mow in the formation of u

word or sentence
a word

and, in their language the

letter of

always accompanied,, or movoablo, by a vowel

Is

but

with regard to the remaining letters of the word then* in no

certain rule,
"When, in the middle or end of a word,
a
**
1

consonant

^L
I*JSH

not accompanied by a vowel, it in

" or
"inert;" and the mark
resting

is

"
mldn^

jam, which

"
amputation,"

signifies

consonant to shew
a*

when

is

fluid
iu

(-

be

to

called

placed over

this is the case*

For example lotus take the word *xc

"

&at&6tumt

you wrote,"

**

you have written," the letters k&fm(( t& ara moveablc by jfatfa ;
the letter b& is sSMn or inert; tlion tho following tit m movoablo
or

by damma, and
a

lottor

the final fottcr

mlm

is inert.

not followed by a Towel

is

In most Arable

called

t/wmmi: now,

object to the latter term, as it is apt to mislead

befag already applied in English

sounded*

wo

for instance, tho loiter

oaanot; howofer^

my

that

Grammar
is

is tjuiescenf in

in
hi

tlie

It

of

tfao
lite

word

the siuno

virordi

mt
;

though

OF THE TASHBID.

we may say

that

it is inert.

mind, then, that in

followed

work a

this

by a vowel

sounded at

The student

when we

15

will "be pleased to bear in

be inert when

letter is said to

we mean

call it quiescent,

that

it is

not

it is

not

all.

O-GJOX

Of

When

27.

which

word

Symbol Tashdid

the

a letter

is

doubled, the

mark

signifies corrolboration, is placed over

where the

c^I-a> shid-datj

and the next begins with

mode

jjjuuLsJU

*j

d,

called tashdid,

Thus, in the

it.

syllable ends with

first

*>

instead of following the natural

cjj<x, the two dais are united, and the

indicates this union.
Hence, whenever we see a

of writing, as,

mark

by the same one, we may rest assured that

vowel between them thus the word c^>jU with the

letter followed

there

is

on the dal

tashd'id

sounded maddat, but the word

is

<j>li

is

pronounced madad,
In certain instances the symbol tashdld is employed for the sake

a.

of euphony,

when an

inert letter is followed

having a cognate sound, or 'one which

the former, thtis

c^JjU

is

s s

and written c^>iX

the tashdld to
US

shew that

it

o x

u^iJ

c->

In like manner the

J1, "the," coalesces with the

following

when

it is

what

be noticed hereafter when

already pointed out

final

article

capable of coalescing with

inert is subject,

(See I 25).

is

marked with

has coalesced with the preceding j d; so

labitta for labit&ta.

*"

different letter

pronounced, not madadtu, but madattu,

which case the

in

is

by a

is

initial letter

of the definite

of the substantive

technically called a solcvr lettet, as will

we come

to treat of tto A^t^oh.

19) the changes in

a$d the saw

In some instances the

Ms
final

wmA
applies

n&n

is

We

have

to which the final

the

n&natum

changed

into that

to

10

OF THE LKTTER8 OF PROLONGATION.

which

^y

follows, as

It is needless to

mim~mm

say that this

is

for

win-man

; 11

ilia for in-la, etc,

a general rule in the composition of

words in Latin and Greek*

P 9

<wXtr*O

the Letters

Of
The

28.

of ProUngatim-$j&\ uJ^p-

and ^, when ew^, servo

letters 1,^,

the preceding vowel^ as follows

a letter moYcable

when

in Arable might be written

we may

ciple,

also

and

JW

preceded by
alif tog< .tlior form a
k

which

in "haul,"

()u a wmilar prin-

consider the unanpirated h as a letter of pro-

longation in the

may

J\j

to prolong

inert in

l)j faiha, tfofalha and

long sound like our a in "war," or

German words "wahr" and

consider

tho

second

as

inert

^ahi n

in

the

W(\

"aaclien" and "waal."

When

29,

tho letter 3 in&rt

is

ptecc^iKl

by a connouuut

by tho vowc l (fammd, tho dtmmtt and ^ johtctt toour o<? in "tool;" which In Arabic
gether form a sound o like
#
might be written J^? or, which is tho mmiw tiling, like our
rnoveable

w in

"

rule/ which

tlie

Arabs would writo J^J.

If the latter j

be preceded by a consonant movoaWo by fallt^ tho ///// and j

"
united will form a diphthong, nearly like our ou in
Hound,"

o^ in "town " but more exactly like

in tho Gorman
word "kaum," which in Arabic might bo written
^L If
or

tho j be preceded

and tho

by the vowel tor

no

union, takow plaec%

sound as a consonant, as ia
In English, tho ^ is a lottor of pro-

^ prewerves its natural

tho word 1^ siwa.

longation in

many

words, as "draw," "crow," etc.;

contributes to tho formation of a diphthong,

"gown,"

etc.

in

it also

OF THE LETTERS OF PROLONGATION.

When

preceded by a consonant
moveable by kasra, the kasra and the <_$ unite, and form a
30.

the letter

long vowel, like our

written jli

"

or,

ee in

which

inert is

"feel," which in Arabic might be

the same thing,

is

machine," which wonld be written

letter

is

the

letter

as in the

is

say" and "key;"

a diphthong in the

be written
a,

The

of

letter
it

but which, in

reality,

preceded by damma^ no
retains its usual sound as

^
^

word

written j$*
"
size,"
wise,"

is

"

in

to call a vowel,

When

a diphthong.

a consonant,

own

really that of our

union takes place, and the

<f

"When the

^&*.

german word Kaiser, which in Arabic

which we are pleased

the

is

^^

In English
in the words

muyassar.

prolongation

also contributes to the formation of

word "buy," which in Arabic might

^J>

three letters of prolongation

],

and

are occasionally

^,

liable to certain deviations from the rules above laid 'down.

subject will be

more

present that the letters of prolongation

Suffice it for

damma

1,

\ 9

when

This

to treat

us to say at

are said to pos-

fatfya

is

placed

over thai which

^; when

that which, precedes

and
j>

homogeneous or natural vowels,

the consonant that precedes

kasra

when we come

fully elplained hereafter

of the permutation of the infirm letters.

sess their

in

preceded by a consonant, moveable by fatha^

and the ^ unite, and form a diphthong, like ai

This sound

is

inert is

the faffia
in the

like our

is j&ot

tdiis

vowels and

letters of prolongation are said to

dissimilar.

When

be

he^Qff^&>^

or

Atp letters, the

%Whog %,^ J|t^ J^ shown, thus,

a fc$terog<?aeou
>/

vowel pr@cf$H
1

"

*r

two together either fowl a

Ss Ox
SbS

JJ

lattun,

j*^

'

jauharun> o^ fte last

Mw may

remain

silent,

a^

OF THK LETTERS

18

^j

rama

and.

PttOf,ON*.\TlON.

Ol*

in which hvo
AJL* sal&t;

lust

word? the

and

arc really quiescent or not sounded*

what

31. It appears thru, from

preceding paragraphs,
eight in number,

and

3.

ii.

two diphthongB, as may bo HOHI

I,

throe short

/w?/

HIIORT,

**i.

the mine three long;

in th<* following table:

1,

l.OM**

fc4 f^f

fail

foot

Jin

in tho six

wounds in Arabic are

tho voual

thai.

viz., 1.

have Htatfd

we*

fmi

f*k

JU
s.

>

>/

////

Here tho upper

line

comtnoti oo-CTirroiHio,

Bout thoso of

(1) oojilainH

tli<i

Houndn <f

wonln

Kn^Iish

tngfif

tuiifonnly

Hy,s(ii!i

for

of

of w}tif*h fairly rcprcv

c*uc*li

Anibi* words umi<*rm*ath.

lowcnt line (8) exhibitH tbo

wwk

yfr/y

The

<h<* nwp(K'liv<*

in the oourso of lhi

///

///

r<*|in\si*!iliiig

uliiw<l

to

Arabic, wcmls in

tho lloman character.

82*

Wo

Jiavo now,

\n!

tnis< t

vowclw aro to bo repreHented

eonsoiiant ? mieh

words.

In

monemg

a word,

an

tli

orclcr to

havo merely

it

whc*ii

Idler uJ

rc^rri^cmt

tlici

in

effected.

vowels an

withdraw

though not

in

Thk

a/ymranM.

into thcur Iujad

liaro

which

in, i!Al!

in

flie

aw audible

in llu* foregoing lint of

eom*

initial or

io lite Htudont that

tin* letter

tho above wordrt, having cwrrything olne iw

the object

Iiow

<*xplin**(l

flify fulluw

omir

will at once

to annihilate or

fully

it

prcciwly what

tJ

we

from

Minuet^ ami

wo

do

in
i

The Arabian

a tnont nubtln crotohot

w word w m/l/M^ em

oti thi
tt

OF THE LEOTE&S OF PROLONGATION,

we

Therefore, to represent wliat

a vowel

is,

letter

commencing a word or

We

have already stated

as a very

initial

weak

syllable,

6) that they consider

hence

aspirate or spiritus lenis ;

presence supports the above theory, at least to the eye,

preceding paragraph as

or very nearly

so,

we

initial,

the letter uJ /, substitute

not

must, after taking

in its place,

which

away

being nothing,

the process amounts in reality to the with-

drawal of the letter

be considered as next
1.

if

its

In order, then, to exhibit the vowels in the

to the ear.

1.

tliat

vowel,

they employ the

alif (otherwise called Jum&a) as a fulcrum for the

vowel.

the

an

call

19

/,

and the substitution of what may

thus

to nothing^

SHORT.

2.

LONG.

im

in

obt

all

eel

an

in

ut

al

ll

DIPHTHONG.

661

aisle

owl

Ul

ail

aul

3,

#
33.

If,

instead of

we

1.

in the above series,

wo

substitute the

have virtually the same sounds, only that

they must be tittered from the lower muscles of the throat?
letter c

thus

shall

SHORT.

1.

an

in

2.

ut

&l

a. It appears, then, that

with what

w&

LONG*

when

il

3,

*ai

*<&l

in Arabic a

consider to be a vowel, suck

word 6r

letter

we hare

occasion to write mich worete in the

or

to start with.

syllable begins

word or

have the

DIPHTHONG.

Tteot^hout

syllable

this

Boman

must

work, when

character, the

O? THK LETTERS OF HlOLONii VTloX.

20

corresponding place of
sjnntus fails
the

flic

thna, J-LJ* \isal

same from JJS /m/, AjT

lat.

ing lights,

In

consider thorn

such

Gwk

a^

wor<la na

to

erjuivalotit

honour/'

mere pegs whereupon

to

and the

and

st.rictet fttteution, a^

Pruotioally Hpiakiii|/

ihuy

hiidttf,

rontributo in

all

He*

flic

may

thorn as
4

to the

n*fjuiHifi
'

and

//^/

?///# 7^

vaiw* na

{^niflld,*r

Hum,

tltiw follow-

Kn^liVh words

flw vovvols

hang

In other

JJiiilly,

(h<

Ho may

Lastly,

or

in

/*

fllwftngulsh

tnt<1.

tV, r(<.

loiter

tlu*

oic*.

fix

fonnatiou of the nyllnble,

initial,

"hour/' "herb,"

jb

or

ujin.stroplH* or

to

may view iho anil & In any of th*

Ho may consider thorn of the unmo

splfitws lenh

/W

Ja

abtfl,

ait

A*J /WV/

Y?///W t

J^b

respecltf tlio reador

be indicated by

will

n*<jinn

nwt

i*ut*.h

M> tin* f^rniaiion

of several vocal
i.

In concluding our account of the

Arabic consonants and vowelB

down

rules laid

as the language

with the

we

are nioi'oly (tpproirt/Mih*,

Muhammadan

rellgioi^

terns quite aunt a UudibuH

ovr

higher classes,

it

it

forum

it

ri4%^///\

Iwliu,

prmdjiifl braucli
If

Aururum/
othir

atid

and

The

from whom, hownvor,

ilwy

f:ciinbifiiijiriu

l%,

rtili*s

givi% in

iiiiticniH

mnUkf

prevail at

followed in general by Europoon

ato such as have* bocn laid clown

iu

^iliimlmi of tbo

\\\*\

tiircnigh

r.ouiifflim

u ccm^itl^mMc tlMHgrc^niont

should eoiwciu^iitly

modes of pronunciation which

Constantiuo[>lc, Ispahan, and Delhi

those

ronsitont in ov*n*y point,

(Uiinibtm in

n*jri^iiH
l

thoir rospectivo ionguos, te particular l(ttow

Scholiasts

nlong

**

many

(iiiiigi,*ii

can bo no wonder

Yammi

(lum\^mA

tribi'h, IIIH! <ilfl\ii*il*

should bo found iu the prommoiaUon which Hiw*

that an Arab of

tlini the

UBCJIHI

Mauritania^ Egypt, Turkey, IVram*

the East, where

licit

of the dialoctn of vurioim

IB

irununciutifn of the

gi'iuntil

are bound to a<*knovdfro

or

barbfiroui

its

(jnir

which Imvo
iiuil

by old A minim
it

is

diffitr

not
lit

to fonii

nmny

and
ft

from

one

OF MADBA.

21

another, and often give several opposite pronunciations to the

word, owing to the reasons we have just stated.

same time,

the

many

It

must he

same

confessed, at

and grammarians have laid down

and added much perplexity to a

that both the scholiasts

a puerile and tedious rule,

language, not naturally easy, by enlarging on the minute, intricate,

and unsatisfactory theory of the moveable powers of Avowel points,

making

trifles

serious,

embarrassing the learner's mind, and con-

suming, in pursuit of objects comparatively uninteresting, that time

which might be more usefully employed in smoothing the way to
the essential difficulties of the study.
Out of this mass of pedantry

and confusion however

Silvestre de

it

but fair to state that the

is

elicited all the light

and clearness that the student can

Of

the tii/mbol

Madda

34. Instead of writing

*

two

word, to exprosss the long

5, as

at the

alifs

in

i>\\

alif^

desire.

i"

beginning of a

o^

in Dictionaries), to write one

eminent

Book of Ms Grammaire Arabe

Sacy has, in the First

ad, it is usual, (except

and according

to

some

grammarians to lay the other curved over the former; thus,

u
Jf
This symbol ( ) is called *2U madda,
extension," and
.

denotes that the alifis sounded long, like our a in "water,' 7

M.
^

Sacy considers the mark madda as simply the letter

mlm, (the initial of the word),* in a recumbent postered
cle

Either theory

is

plausible,

The

no great importance.

and

after all the matter

mad^

c6nfined to the beginning of a

howerer,as

word ;

it

two difs would come together,

* s
s ^
s
?t~*ss

\\f>-

and

Uw

-/

for

fs

tfe|$%

v4^

iWli

'

of

p^e^Sirily

occurs both

middle and end of words in those rojsta&oes

&0fc

,$s

in the

otherwise
wjwe
V *o^
'

fo#

lUJt

*U~ for

22

OP HAM&V.

The symbol madda

a.

also Inscribed over arithmetical

is

and

i#rw,

likewise over certain abbreviations, said to bo i*x{fiusrdve of Home

mystery,

/bdi "mst

single
:"

if

* *"

word

represented by the

is

final

""^

of the second are used,

"

**

JL*M

for

and the
"
I

am

the initial of the

the most wise God,"

a inMial of

iirttt,

Arabian

Among

\, 1,

uo

arc

for

wliicili

J^V

yauianu.

^^1

km:M

/y/W
to bi) u radical

wo

it

and

<//^r

1,

an

^1

it

i,

11*)

In tho following pages

wo

only in those instances wliero

woxild be improper.

jjjj

an
^

Whim

for
lira

put for

i,

>^i

te> for jjlU

intend to employ tho

it is

Bacli IB tho plan adopted

profomid and oxcelkut wort*

*U

for

for J^tt t#mt/,

4^, an
f

t*Mi,
^

denotes that tlu^ms Id torn

but*

"'*

^^^

written over j or

supplies tho

',

or m5<^
$}wia 9 *^ sua 9 uwt<wl of
^^ji

movoable

*"*
*

uhrayH

flnin

it filiown

the caul of u

in

and

\,

In the Bilddlo, after an inort lotte.r's an

y^
or following another \, a^ j3Jl

a.

and

aftoi tho lottery of prolong^itiou

H*

>*

Ut

wliieli

X-

ma

At

id!!

the conHouanf. alif

attcjiulrt

u^JSf ulhatu; without a vowoi

place of

-V**

Jjs!

of.

employed,

over or under the latter, an

letter, a&

nocoud,

Hevonil word**, their

and

flu*

ft,*

hm^

Peace be

But wlion thoro ar

more commonly known by the numo cif

a
a
n
In bookB
|rancturo.
pressure" or
accompanies the vowol

first

*M

grumimiriatiH

vowc^l-poinls

for

generally tak<n, iw

most commonly made

whoro the

"

final of the third lire

initials are

35,

if three,

*"

tuls,

upon him;"

iw

there are two wortln, the initial loiter of the

A*.^

and the

firwl letter;

or

by

}t

l)r,

In

Mi

23

OF WASLA,
S^s

the

Of

Symbol Wasla

JO

J*y or

Wasla (~) implies conjunction, and

36.

'

Ly

only inscribed

is

beginning of certain words to denote that such

word is united with the preceding one. being then silent, as
Sx^'O 9 Ox
u
the holy house;" in which
^jJUll L^-J laitu-l-muJcaddaS)
over

at the

expression the initial alif of the second word

or

we may

say,

is

not sounded,

sound of the

practically, that it adopts the

yowel terminating the preceding word.

a.

The wasla,

as a matter of course, does not occur at the beginning

of a sentence or after a pause.

In other respects it
t^x

is

the following instances, viz.

With

"the"

1.

the article Jl

always used in
46),

(see

With the imperative of the primitive form of the verb. 3. In the

preterite active, imperative, and infinitive of derived forms of the
2.

verb of the second and third class. 4. In the following ten nouns,
"
"
"
"
a man ;
\j*\ imra,
'^\ imr&t, a woman ; ^\ iln or Jjl ibnam,
"
"a son;" LJ\ i&nat, " a daughter ;" ^^
ithn&n, two "(masculine);
X
X
O

^U

olSl itknat&n, "two" (feminine);

X
?**S

"buttocks;"

^^\

when beginning a

aimun,

^1X

"

ism,

name;"

cuJl!

"an oath;"

in all

which

ist,

cases, unless

sentence, or following the article,, the initial

is

not pronounced, the subsequent letter being always inert, and united:
in pronunciation to the vowel with
XO-^3

which the preceding word ends, as

*

,PX

*\~\ oa" yad-umratin, "the hand of a

& x

even altogether omitted, as x*Uj&

woman;"
x
^

*-</-<>

^ ej;Wl

bnu Ilammaminj "Harith the son of

being sometimes

t6

e->*x>* J$&ddatha4fy$ritfou*

HaminEm

related."

dropped wlien the subsequent letter has a vowel, a&

"extend thou."
precedes
^

If afty word,

such letter

XXX

oj^

is

whose
*^</^J

The

a*

iStoO

fer'a^t

naturally inert,

then pronotmced .geEWaQy

witt kasra,' a&
*^

dambat) "she whipped;"

mother whipped,"

final letter is

tt

affixed

x*XX?

^l/t^-o^

(^rabati-l'+ummu,

"the

pro&0tm$ If and li, also the verbal

THK LKTriMrs

(JLASSIFTOATION OF

terminations

and

\j

take

damma*

The

4i

premonition

from/*

1, j, and o^ (fTOuitatmg* the proAny

ceding word, does not prevent the union, and ho nfirwlion IH rarely

of the letters

takes fatfia*

The

pronounced when wasla follows*

&ltf

of union naturally takes

kasra when beginning a sentence, or after the uHido; excepting IB

the imperative, which sometimes takes (/MW/I, ami iu flu* urticle
"*

9\^

imm

which assumes fatba, an does the single

^A

outli."

\\\\

Olmsifimiion of t/w
87. Arabian grairmiariaiin

following

licacln

or classon, vix.- L

are called gultuml^

^; four

\,

puhlkh)

j, vK,

\\

itrra-ngcs

^ ^
^;

l*rmiuiciitlfan.~~$\\ Iit'

four

*;

oight

and Ungwtfo ate oull<Kl A'0/r hittfi^ tho n*

Of those more hereafter when \ro coin*' to Jrcuf if ih

denials

2.

Strength.~ nw tlm^o letters

r

ooni(lorc(l an

?^/^ being

receive from the

t,

^,

^,

liaving no HOUIK!

accompanying

Hltori

vowdn

themselves or the preceding lottom

/;w

or rolusL

3,

aiv culh^l ////w or

Affinity.

hut

what,

ctit'hnr

All otluw

loltow

Soriu*

itnt

they

utt(nding
jr<

ntyled

/wtwttfablt,

aw fonmul hy tho
O^UIM, as ^
but particularly
^ ^ w }|i mv ^ m

being such in gmoral a

with

j with cj,

Rubstitutocl
^

one for another.

othorK

^m&.

^ C C
?

Thoy

J?

0/^Bmm an*

The

^U?j^ tP^U

aro twoutjMmit in
)

W^^J^'g;

are so called, bcoauHo

thoy awi

ecptiiig k the rootn

ft li

^J ^, C/, J,
f

*wr

or primitive faring of

remaining ovoa arc called ^>w//m IMHSUUW*

5

ii'ii!ii1wr f

<x*

The
tln-y UPC

25

CLASSIFICATION OF THE LETTERS.

and various

in forming the derivatives

from the

The

roots.

',

the radicals are never used as

serviles^

which are sometimes substituted

for

excepting t and j
5.

CL>.

Association.

which may follow one another in the

or primitive word.
The others cannot, and are

are compatible,

same radical

These consist of the gutturals

to
sometimes subjoined to

therefore called incompatible.

however, are often em-

servile letters,

particularly in the imperfect verbs; but

ployed as radicals

Some

inflections resulting

C> t?

->

(though

is

which add the following,

*^> 0*5 u? u*> k, and k

^);

with uJ and *

<-->

viz.,

^ with

^ with

j, and C/; ^ with b,

t, and fe; j with J ;

and u/; o with 3; 3 with ^o,

and ^o ^1 with
with
u^ and 1?
j with
L with fe and C/;
with jjo, t, and ]o
with t and
with i and j ; c with j and u/; j with cl/; J with
^OxXx' X
"
"
he manifested."
no
and
except J
by
means,"
jf,

^ ^
;

a.

The infirm

letters

and

each other, especially in verbs

as

fe

are often liable to be used for

these permutations being considered

an infirmity or imperfection.

In the beginning of ja word, how-

ever, they usually retain

except when,

by

their

original sounds

already described,

the influence of certain prefixed inseparable particles,

they virtually cease to be

fully discuss hereafter

initial.

This, however,

we

shall

more

most grammarians
progress would be altogether

to treat of the subject, as

do, at this early stage of the student's

out of place.
#.

The

viz., \,

servile letters

c^,

(jw, f,

properly so called, are really seven in number,

&i

39

m&

k$

these letters aaad none else are

employed in the inflections of nouns and

j and \s are substituted for CA They

wb^ except that occasionally

afre all

included in the word

OP THE VAIUOttS AIUBK* HANWV IUTINUH,

20

lw

"they

literally

that the final

is

and of

preterite

We

fatten."

nrny

hw

observe, In

not sounded in tho third jimon

tlio

neither

aoript;

in

it

Tlie lour Id few

person plural of the imperative.

O P

J, included in the word ujClb though

scryiles, are

merely

adclod (o
simply a supplementary iKfer

or S

is

to indicate such

rule
is

mere

In fact the

S in

equivalent (n

and

words

and

MM! of words

lint

c^

{ctn<iral

into \\iiich

it

frequently changed,

The

<?.

servile letters alluded

included as incoinpatiblos only

of

<JLf,

words to be of the feminine #(nd<*r, and as u

derivatives.

peroTid

granmmrifiiiB as

inseparable particles preiixeil to other

the

the

wj, uJ

wkoned hy

of tho

pliinil

^minli'd in

for
^

any word;

any

as

letter,

when acting

iow "in

where the

In the pwwilifig pnnifcnspliH aro

con^ituf** |iri of

may

an H<rvilo, tln*y
^ <*^^

silver;"

These observations

incnt*"

if)

whon they

may

111*1*

iwt

be joined with
in

C53y^ "aefonling
ho of HOIUO

flu*

in

thy

niate-

WHiiuwripta,

diacritical points arc either n(*f?lfct(d, or irrrgulitrly jlac<d

ambiguous moamngB; and in dhilu^imMn^ pure

from such as arc cither corrupted or d<triv<'d fVciin foreign

as also in fixing

Arabic woards
sources*

For example, the oceurronco of the

\M^m

Hint

panying each other in the word Jj$ (Lanrlti Mihlka)

suspect that Iho term is not of Arabian origin,

Of

the

Various*

AwJhw

XPI,

Int,

the Kiiflo, though

wo

ancient diaractcr, called the Ilimyaric*

about

tlio

wMoh
cian,

to

which M o uro

ut

roact of

C(*titurio9

from the

was apparently derived from tho

the source of tho Greek alphabet of CadmuK*
iteolf

niill inoro

Tho Kuflc

time of Muljtemunud and dining Homo lour

It in evidently dorivod

after*

tig

Ifan/dwriiiMyx*

83. Tlic oldoBt Arabic handwriting with

all familiar

aceoia*

Ilicini""

2nd. In

OP THE VARIOUS ARABIC HANDWRITINGS.

the second or third centuries after

Muhammad,

27
the Kufic

alphabet was simplified and rounded into the Nasldu^ the

At

form in which

we now have

maintained

ground in the inscriptions on coins,

its

it.

1281, in 'which

still

all

it

Hakim

Sanayi, written in A.D.

the headings are in the finest Earfic.

more recent work in his

long

and in the

For instance, the author

headings of literary compositions.

possesses a unique copy of

the same time

possession, the

In

Dlwani Katibi

transcribed in A.D. I486, the titles or headings of the various

poetical pieces are all in the Kufic character.

the various

we may

used in the East, however,

handwritings
Ox-

^^ NasJdn

Of

say that

which our extract in the larger type, 43,

of the present work, is a fair imitation), is that in which most
Arabic manuscripts, and particularly those of the Kuran, are
the

(of

round and compact form it is generally

used in Europe for printing books in the Arabic, Persian,
The TdWt <j^? * s
Turkish, and Hindustani languages.

written.

Owing

to its

also a beautiful hand,

used chiefly by the Persians in dis-

seminating copies of their more esteemed authors.,

sionally

hand
a.

meet with some

There are several other hands more or

less used,

such as the

99

Thulthl or cl^iS Thulutk, adopted in the titles of boots, royal

edicts, diplomas, or letters of great

much

Arabic MSS. written in this

chiefly transcribed in Persia.

*P

ijAj

fine

"We occa-

the

same purpose

men

as capitals

in illuminated manuscripts.

hand, employed like the

answering among those nations

amongst

The

us, or the flotrrfahed letters

Tu($ir<l

another ornamental

is

Thulthl in expressing ife titles of their

princes in ceremonial letters &nd solemn d$eds.

add the

jx*

Mactferibi

or Mauritanic, which

is

To

these

we may

used by the

OF THE NUMERICAL VALTHK OF THE LETTERS.

28

of North-western Africa,

band

differs

the Klfic

in

many

who

are descendant** of Hie Arabians,

respects from those above* mentioned, resembling

more than any of the

or broken hand, which

and unadaptod

is

Lastly, Urn

others.

used in correspondence.

Wdlm&to

&Lb

It is quite
irregular,

but not inelegant in appearance when

for printing;

For a more ample account of

properly written.

This

thin

subject, see

the Appendix

"Essai de Calligraphic Orientalo,"

Horbin'a
"
la
de
4lo.
dcs
Laitgiw Anihe,"
Prlneipes
Paris,
D6vcloppements
u
Orannaaini Aralm," 2 vole,
1808. Also the 1st volume of do Sacy'a
in

to

works Hjimnu'na of

8vo., Paris, 1881, in both of which

ilia

various

hands arc given*

b.

The term SAMctsta

in

generally appliwl to

fins

inirwc: or running

hand used by the people of Persia and Ilinduntjiu

also

have their own $Mka&t(t> as well as

eastward, as the student will

find

to

Inil

the Arabs

ilicir co-religicnuHtH to the

his cost wlie^i

he COIUCB

to

on
clocyphor ordinary letters

Vdw

Of ih
39.

"Wo jaay

IICTC

mention

tliat

of the
tlm tw(*n<y-<*ight ltitrH of

the Arabic language uro alno nncid for tho purjumc^ of

computation*

Tho Numorical order of

tlui

Nummeal

I^uttiw, how<*vr,

IE this case differs from that given in the Alphuln't

In fact,

the

SamaritaB,

identical

of the

via*, to

the letter c^j 400*

tmli

grouped into eight unmeaning

technics*

letter;

to

far

thdtr

'JTlio

ib! lowing

the order of the Numerical Alphabet with tho

ing number placed above

being,

JlicBiilcslnii,

the Syriao 7 and the Hebrew, so

alphabets extend,
is

amngemont

tlm

word**, to norvu OH

OP THE NUMERICAL VALUE OF THE LETTERS.

III

Wliere

fill

III

denotes one,

c_>

two,

three, a four, etc.

The Arabs of Mauritania

arrange

a.

they have

slight differences, viz.,

x

instead of

29

f>

u^^i

"

j^\

their

^^>

instead of
"

and JL&, instead of

jJi^

the two schemes

agree.

About or soon

the Arabs received from the

with the following

In

after the

^4^; u^lf
>

all

other respects

time of

Muhammad

Hindus the decimal

scale of numeration,
which in time they imported into
The
ten
Europe,
figures or cyphers
are written from left to
right and applied exactly like our own;

thus

r,

r,

P,

c,

i,

v,

A,

r,

\\,

ir,

r.

1,

2,

3,

4,

5,

6,

7,

8,

9,

10,

11,

12,

13.

is

IAI r

For example the Christian year 1862

the last half of which

corresponds with the Muslim year 1279 ja

"

b.

The dssH

is

used chiefly as a "memoria technica" for

recording

the dates of historical events, or the decease of illustrious

personages,
etc.
The plan is to compose a brief sentence or verse of such a

nature that the

Hijra in

sum

of

all

amount

the letters shall

which the event took place.

Jn

to the

year of the

Europe, during the middle

ages, when Latin was the language of literature, such m0m0|isl

verses were common.
The Latin, however, laboured n&4er this

disadvantage, that

its

alphabet contained only seven Euiaerical letters,

V, X, L, 0, D, and

; whereas
every one of the letters in
Arabic counts for something.
A curious coincidence of this kind
is to be found in a line from
Ovid, written more than fifteen centuries

viz., I,

before the event to

which

it to

applied, vte,-*

OF THE ACCENT.

30

"FILI
"Tho

son prematurely makes

amount

put to

to

treason

and

Mud

with which

The

40.

"

on the

**

fa tin T,

I),

JM,

uwnl.

if }>oth

on<

if

Co Hun

the

By

a long nylkblo

wu

of prolongation,

letter

If

iho

otlicmvise

aeconi,

tiic^

,,

language)

long

if

long,

wlii^h,

it,

<>utaiiw

or

inort,

vowel followed by two mmMttut^ of wliich

iaken

tukim

syllable

the

In worcla

a<*<'<iit.

phntiH 1^

or

to

and thi other

nlu^rt

anfcvpontilt

I,

Ambus

nhort or Imfli
bcs

coiu-

ihu lnf^'4 of

in

/.

for

[].,

in

Lafin unit Orook,

<o th<

hero wu*au ono

*'.&,

Philip

alwvo

of Kjsaiu wan

arAIu iiLm% paX

I-

in 1ho

long? the long syllable nul'umlly iak<s ilm

of three or more HyliublcH,

tlu*

L, mid X amount

wn apply

but

aeijutdnled

HyllublcH,
flnst

f hurley

of our Heeoiif! ('Jhnrh

ihoso.

of

Thu following pfluwta

where 0,

Baine a

In words of two
is

am

his Bfeni

IIJH la

Idfw

immorical

which Prince

niloH ri^jK^tinf? the

much the

accent

the,

rebellion,

rexl oration

rogua sorcnat ot agros

are

inquiry into the years of

in

year

mmos."

patrlos, InqVlrfi In

by the comimiwl of

deatli ;

plotting

tlio

15C8,

momoration of the
the

DIcM

ante

bo found that the sum of

It will

line

Ys

(ho

it

rfiort

firnt

fe

inert.

a.

The greater part of iho wordH

short vowiil, except bafore a

yau*c

show;

lioiico

last eyllablo

as

of a

6&0fi other like

OB the
in tho

tt

Ambte

(41)

grfii^rally iint in a

we

it

goncnil rule the

wowi

a siring of

laat ay liable/*

first

in

Moul

a0Bcrtion

vowjo of the Kuran, a

fillip

on the

griitriHiiirkiw, tiff iiw^iifly

rfioep, tall

The

Miitill

iw that
!*

tiio

too

have oftmi

for
JicMinl it

fullowlag

mr

4I

my
falls

xwiplo,

rail hy

llio

OF THE PAUSE.

the accent of the last

word ralnmis most assuredly on the

The pause

LjifiJ,

last syllable,

Pause.

the

Of
41.

31

which takes place

after a word, being

makes

the last of a period, of a phrase, or of a proposition,

manner of reading

in the

alterations necessary to
occurs, the

vowel or nunation of the

**

-^ffM

*~'

>-ox

Ju

tt

^slsr

nouncing in the

'Abd ul Hamid has come

the nunation of
example XO-.O

first

"al Hamid."
^

<3

^ f

If,
/'X

~*^

??

Z&id has struck me,

.&**
^"'-^

second the final Kasrah of

A-^st^l

last letter is suppressed

XX-*

iTO/-

xc-o

In general, when a pause

be noticed.

thus, instead of saying jjj

some

or pronouncing that word,

to me,

juj
Cx-

we say only jjj

pro-

and in the

"

7>

Zaid,

however, the nunation

and

33

is

and

as in

*-r-

We have not seen Muhammad,"

example Ij^si^ \j J
the ^ of the nunation is only dropped, and the fatha followed
this

by

is

preserved, thus

Analogous to the preceding rule "there are certain forms of the

Aorist and Imperative of verbs, which, under the influence of certain
a.

particles, terminate in
is

inert, in

which case the

before the pause

withdrawn in pronunciation, and the word is pronounced as if, the

^ were followed by its homogeneous

vowel immediately preceding the

x ^<>x

Cx'^t'X

letter of prolongation, thus l-oij for ^-suij;

O^C.-"

for

^;

however,

L^l

we

for

shall treat

^?0^

more

bpjtb?

.^^

^; ^ for.^; ^1
OxPCv^

X-CO/

9<*

?(Jp

for

ft*

C-

for

^Vx*

^j-&&; ^j^y,
^V^

^t

Of

this,

fully hereafter, as the Discussion at the

present stage of the student's progress would be altogether premature.

42,

Marks

or symbols coirroapOEdiiig to

our

full

stops,

KXKKCISK IX RKAOLW*

found in any
manuscript,
u
nfhor
ICirnin
In
and
low
the
books, wliero they
excepting
Sj

etc.,

are seldom to bo

by marks

arc expressed

Hunilur fo

.*.

d* Poetic quotations are generally disfinfcutehwi

"5

**

prefixed, as Ja3

Ua3

didielu" c L*^
^*

"stroph(/' otc v Hie yoiwH being clo^ad

lit

Iy

publications*

employed

hi

nty

The ctmwia and mwwfatt

small daIi, thus, -*;

I**ivimt

will

IIH

Ik curvo

Is

bo utlopfod

mul

IIjtuliiHtiinl

ri*fn\4ot!li*d

paruso wlwit

be Been from fb

wo have

howovor,

tlio

text,

said

on the

Article!

tlie

by

mul

unt*

fko

in the

Following extract
hiiu?ttr.

*itud<*iil

in

to

H<jforo

rcnjausted to

4(5,

The following Fablo from

43,
?

will sorvo l>oth a

Illustration of

MTO

may

subjoined n transcript in tho iloiniin

trying to docyplier

linns

will

full stop
by ti t*iar fliun,
and
admiration
by UIWP wit
symbols of interrogation

which

h^iuiHlich/

tlin

European languages, as

certain

"

/<,

In the present work a ayntem of ptHidmtfioti

sucli as 1 adrantagofHiBly

He.

by Iiaving

*t

**

"pooiry/ ci^u

resembling inverted cominurt,

i.

words
5

Cv

;;

ait

om mode of puwottuitiou

adopted for roprosoating

letters.

Lu]<man, tfi
oxoreio lit rtitiliiig und UH an

It will

at tko

tlio

alno of th'

Arabia charnatrr

tliao

principles of orthography 'already

ox<*mt>lify

^inn
lit

we

Homan
of the

EXERCISE

Iff

33

HEADING
O O-*O

>>

Al-insdnu wa-l-Khinzlru.

Insanun marratan hamala

Jtf&mzlrun;

*ala

bah rtma>tin kabskan

wa tama/yaka ila-l madlnati

wa-l-anzu fa-lam yafcUnft yadrib&ni

yhinziru fa-innahu hand
la-ku~l-insanu, ya

li-labaniha ;

wa

li-yabl* a-*l~jam%a*
y

ala~l~b&hlmati ;

yu'amdu daiman, wa

la

'anzan

wa

Fa-l-kabshu

wa amma-l-

yahda*

asharra-l-wuhnshi ! Iima-dha4-kabsh

ktitun? la yadribani,
la~ku~l~Mii%,zlru,

wa

wa

anta la tahdfc rod

la,

ana a'lamu anna~l~kabsha yutlabu

ana-sh-shafylyu la silfa

ll

tastafyirru.
li-sufi/d,

n>& la labana.

wa-l-anzu

Ana

'inda

wusull ila-l-madlnati ^trsalu ila-l-maslaJrfd, la mafyalata*

THE MAN AND THE HOG,

A man

once upon a time was conveying on his quadruped a

a she-goat, and a hog ; and he was proceeding towards the city with a

Now the lamb

and the she-goat molested not the

quadruped ; but the pig constantly resisted, a#d would not be quiet.
(f
Then the man said to him,
How
you most vicious o? beasts

view

to sell the lot,

EXERCISE TH BEADTNf*.

34

comes it that the lamb and the goat arc quiet

They gi vo no annoyance

Tlio pi^

but you neither keep qniet nor take repose,"

know

that the

milk; but

I,

lamb

is

sought after for

The

wool, and

tht

wretched, have neither wool nor milk.

In the city I shall undoubtedly be

a.

its

sent to

ai<l

o him,

"
1

goal for her

On my

arrival

tho

learner is particularly request eci

More

io

he

nindy fl>
furfhor.

of ilw lnn#iwfr<s which

thorough knowledge of the olwwmtB
here, it is to be hoped, fully and cloarly explaiuc*<l, \\\\] cnnblo

arc

Section with the utmost attention

to advance boldly through the rest of fho

and with

profit,

pmmdrf

work

liotii

with

Iiim

SECTION

II.

OF THE ABTICLE, THE SUBSTANTIVES,

ADJECTIVES,

44. According to the

AND

Grammarians of Arabia, as well as those

of ancient Greece, there are only Three Parts of Speech

.$<>
x
<*

ISToun

<?

*J Ism, the Yerb J*3 Ffl^ and the Particle

the

l,

uJ/>~ Ifarf*

Under the term Noun, they include Substantives, Adjectives,

Pronouns, to which I think we may add the Numerals, Parand

Their Verb agrees in

its
OX

nature

their Particle includes the Article J1

the/*

Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections.

They

ticiples,

with ours

Infinitives*

and

consider the

Verb

as the first part of speech,

and the third

person singular masculine of the preterite tense* as the root

or origin from which the other
parts of speech are derived*

There appears, however, to be no impropriety in

following
the

mode generally

practised in teaching the Greek, Iafet%

and other European languages, which I have therefore here

adopted.
a.

We

stall hereafter see the

propriety of

Noun and Pronoun,

Verb.

especially the lalter, before

Certainly the verb has no claim in

leading part of speech.

Jwiftg discussed the

mtur

we come

to the

to rank as the

The yocaM&iy of very young

children,

OF TKK ARTICLE.

30

who

of savages,

are

entirely of iiotins

eluo than in

all
alwimlliy of flawing
5i

Instance of
glaring in tho

worshipped or adored"!

"

11

(tod,

As

if

of iwture, consists

<it)u

ft

mm

particles in tho Orionlul

and probably a few

The

of tho terms.

littles

mnnw from

v*rl>

most

nuhl to lw dfrivml from 41 "ho

tho

numo

of <Jod

di<i

not

oxist

<f

before the vorb

to

The raits

45.

worship."

of Speech in

nine in nuinbor,

tho Pronoun,

Adjective,

tliu

Oonjunction, and

tion, tlie

46, Thic Arabw, like

Article

tho

viz.,

liable to

Wrb,

tin*

however,

tho sound of tho

article

written in

form*

J lion
ite own

with J, tho
alteration,

J
in

of

initial

and tho

own

J^

j^

to

j,

***-bo light,"

llwwi

in

bo
the*

noun

with

it

Urn night;" and

in

18m of Iho nuun

ji,

If

hstfpr of tho noun,

tho wordn UJJI

initial

Greek,

it

^tnw*^

of iho

in

cu, cj, j

tho article*

Definite

pn*fix*rl liappoiis

Of
#

latter ease tho

omittod,

is

But

altered Its

tills

nut,

thc^

or wimbor.

vias. f

not

although the

ia

then inarkcni wltti iMhiid; thus,

proiHHincied

tho

Ailvt-rh, th<*

(JnokH, havt* only

th<?

solar lottcw,
begin 'any ono of tho

is

Siilmlmitivv,

cm account of

any

KtigHfth, arc

lli

tho wulmtantivo to which the article

which,

in

i!u

Articles

4 "tlic,"

j^

Amhic, an

iniirkiHl

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.

The

a.

of the article

the relative pronoun

same

.jJl

of c5lii

etc.,

ought

and in order
is

always omitted in the masculine singular of

is

^^ "the (man) who

;"

the feminine singular of the

and the plural masculine ^JA!\ being so written in the place

the particle
definite,

37

but never in the Dual of the

is

prefixed to

to

have the

to avoid the

same pronoun. When

a noun beginning with

article

"to or

ejaculation,

be praise and glory."

with

the

which,

meeting of three lams, the lam of the

for the night," so,

&*d\
^\*
S

<dl
ff

ai!

for

<dll

by

when

article

tashd&d, as

JJJ

as in the following

Li4lahi~l-hamdu wa-l-wiinnatu,

But,

whe&

the alif of the latter disappears,

dispensed with, or, in other words, represented

for JJi!

"To God

prefixed to nouns $ot beginning

alif ajone is dropped, as ^*Jii!

"
li-l-kamari,

to

the

moon."
b.

In the modern

dialecljf

of

Egypt and Syria the

retains its natural

sound before

thus they say

al~nUr,

The

j^\

"the

all letters,

of the article

whether solar or lunar ,

light," ^/**4vaJt al-$kams9

"the sun."

fanciful classification of the letters of the alphabet into fourteen

solar and as

many

lunar, arose perhaps from the accidental circum-

JJl "the sun," begins with one of th<3 former class,

"
of the latter.
Of course the captious
and^iJ the moon," with one
valid
find
ci5tic might
a thousand equally
reasons for calling them

stance that

by any other terms, such

"black,"

as

"

gold "^ and "silver/' "blue*'

etc.

Of

the

47. Arabic Substantives

have only two

(^tenders

the Masoixline j^j^JS, and the F0$ciiiiiE6 i^-^t^lalso several

words of the common geader ^^1^\

t

There are

They have

TOBM8 AND MBASUEBS OF

38

Numbers

three

olju&l,

They have generally

Plural ju**U

tlic

the Singular *yH, the Dual

and

^^1,

cJU

throe tksen

In the singular, and in aomo of the irregular plurals,

viz.,

the

9 X*0x-

'***

Nominative jJ^ the Genitive

(which also HCTVCH for the
Dative and Ablative of the Lai in by tho addition of the
?

particles
O

J>

There

u-*^aJU

two

IIOUIIH

many

only two caso

(<

liavo

tliat

rininalioim in

only

thn nln-

which wo muy Hpocify us tho Kowinafivo and

Tho Dual,

Oblique.

wo

liow< vc^r ?

arc,

cascBj or rather

giilar?

as

"from") and tho Accusative

"to," and ^*,

tj,

O,,*

an in (Jroofc,

neo w1u*n

sliall

Tocativo caso

wo

is

come* fo

Iw oitluT tlio Baino

invariably a Diptoto,

I)*H<!mi<au

flic*

{ho Noitiinativi^ or

JIB

Iho

The
tin

tho

Aecusative.

ttnd

48*

The

consiwt of

and a

nulical

lhno

still

wowln of

Io((<*rK;

(lu*

fcnv

Arabic laiignii^* gonorally

uro ooiisiHting of four,

t1ic*rc^

mnallor innnbor of llvo

Tlio greater

Iott*rM.

portion of tho trilitonil roots an- V<rbH, tho n*Hi Sulwlautive

or AdjootivoH.

but none of

mode adopted

Thoro oro a fow vorbal rooin of four

fiTOj

the latter Ixnog

for tho

Arabic language

tli(5

development
in

The

all
c?f

Iho

trilitfinl
itucl

highly ingenious

consign not only in adding

?

but also in expanding

either prciflxcnl or inwrtod

and end of a word,

HO

it liy

roots of

plulonophio*

to tho

of certain

somcwhoro

(o

lottoify

produce certain

\\m

/wn^

general a definite reiutiou to fho original root;

bouriiig

cincl

ill

fur that

39

FORMS AND MEASURES OP NOUNS.

reason they are called servile

letters.

The

ployed are seven in number.

These

are, as

stated,

1,

technical

c^

(or

word

*),

^^"

and ^,

^5 ^

\J^J

literally,

letters

thus em-

we have

all

already

contained in the

35
they fatten.

The

serviles

and LU may occur either at the beginning, or in the interior,

of a word (S being always found at the
or, lastly at the end

end), the

^ and ^,

either in the interior or at the end; the

employed in the interior

of a word ; and the (j always as the second letter of a word,
For
and followed by
and it is preceded either by or
* always at the

beginning

the ^

is

&

p,
root
us
take
the
let
verbal
example,

JJ, which

signifies

"

alone,
accepting;" we thence, by means of the servile
Then the various
deduce the forms JLsl Jjli* JU and *L3
& O^O /
& s*
^700
&
POx ^ -"X
forms J-j-^y, Jj***> (j^M? Ss^J^'j JV-^^? an(i J^^? e:s>
hibit a few of the other serviles in their mode of application,
1

<js

of

which more
a.

"$

4T

hereafter.

It is evident, then, as

Arabic word of
ff

its servile letters,

& *>S?
s **

in the words JUA31,

&^*>

j^, and

roots are Jje,

a general

rule, that if

we

at once
& XO

come

and jUfa-d, we see

We

J-c respectively.

tested

letters,

"
(as

gold in the

and only one

fire),

that the root

is

is

of the form

POX

just as that of

however, will enable the learner to

at the

same time had

it

observe,

thus,

c*

8eptfQfo

Now, out

uJ*

We

&e,

off

however,

we

infer

Jj^
gefc

how-

may be employed
Cf
tried/*
&f**

JU^u, already cited; hence

p

dnce that the

contains no fewer than fotor

letter strictly radical, viz.,

5*

word

at

Tlyis the word

these four serviles, two must belong to the root*

that the

to the root

must

ever, that the seven serviles, conjointly or severally,

"

every

strip

<->

as radical letters of the trilateral root.

or

we

*s

over

Jf*

-^

^*^ e

difficulties

practice,

of this sort

been possible for the Arabs, when maau-

40

POEMH ANI> OTASriJKH

Nol'IS'S.

ol-

factoring their Tory artificial language, to Jmvc

letters altogether

from the primitive

tiilltenil

exdinkd

flic

servile

rooU, Arabic would

hayo been the most perfect of human

49 With a view
denote
of so

tlie

to precwion, 1 adopt

flic*

Inm

fnnti to

mere outward uppoaraiwo of a word as eonyistiuo

many

of

indopondnit

consonants,

flu*

nliort

vowols

by which such consonants may hwjmu* movoublo.

various modifications or changes whifh

by

tho application of

m&WHrw

/##?#; 1 call ilio

primitive

y&m JJ

according as

ilio

lmrf,

of

For

uiulcrgo

\volw

<*x?unj>l(*j

tho

clilli'roii

tho tltrco nhort vow^ln nml

Supposing thon the Btudont moct

first

may

io^othor with the

vowc'lH,

of wich /wv//.

IH HUHcopii1>lo

wo apply

//v//

The

tin*

with tho root J*i

timo, IE a book without vowel -points, ho

IIIIH

tin*

for tho

comfort

word may bo pmn<nHut( d in twelve

different ways or m&twre* though it r(nmins nil along undor
one and tho same/wm Thus it tmty fio J-i, J^, or
jlj, By
of knowing that

i!ho

using tlio/a^m on tho middle loiter; or

following nfno

with

/$0

moaroroa

on the

for tho first

first

vowel;

with rktmna on

or,

It

tiinyllablc
;

alno

lastly, it

tlio flrnt letter,

may

ho any of the

vk^ JJ, Jj,

J^, JJ,

J-o, with

may ho J*^ jJ

We

may

al

jij,

the

f
?

or jli ?

wiinit

timo

observe that tho measures

jli

a matter of ^mr// for they

clo

and

^J

nns lurr>

not occur in

flie

as

of

tho language.
50,

Tho Semitic Oraromarkn^ both

and J*iw% have

adopted, $* $ tpeeial fovourit^ the frilitomi root Jiii, with

41

OF GENDER.

exemplify the various forms and measures of their

This root, however, is not the best adapted for
words.
Europeans, not one in a thousand of whom ever can realize

view

to

the true sound of the letter c as the middle consonant.

notwithstanding retain

when

my

as

it

model, generally speaking,

merely to exemplify the form or

measure of a word to the eye; but not when the word is
the object intended

is

intended to be pronounced to the ear, as in the rules of

Prosody,

etc.

be found in

Another cogent reason for retaining it will

But the
94 a. when we come to the Verb.

student must not suppose that J*j or any other root in the

language furnishes us with

about to

detail.

Some

all

the forms and measures

roots furnish us

we

are

with a certain number

and measures which must be determined merely

by prescription; others may give out different forms and
measures, to be determined in like manner; but no single
of forms

root in the language has ever furnished all the forms

by the Grammarians

measttres assigned

to the root J*3.

and

Greek Grammar, in the case

where we are treated to some hundred

similar instance occurs intb.e

of the verb
different

TVTTTO>,

moods

and

tenses,

etc.,

whilst

it

is

perfectly

understood that no single Greek verb ever exhibited the

whole of them,

Of
61.

In the Arabic there

are, as

we taw& atoedy

stated,

only two genders, the masculine anA^e^toifiine; together

with some words that ate

*tf

&e

^patedb, gender, Buok

42

OF

names of the

letter**

alplialx*!,

hy

vix.,

Hhoulclcax"

aro to be

u
1;

flnily

tho

and

4>ji*

niniply the good

Kwto foimw'um quod

hand/

NumoM

Nouns

womon

of

in

doublo

2wHy~Tlm

^S] "tho ear,"

"the

Jla3?

This

wlueli

a mother,"

*\

l{

Grammar,

sola repoBeal"

an

hotly,

"Mary,"

loves her hiwbaud."

old rule of the Latin

lemma

Nam OH

14

female appellatives, as iTp*

woman who

adjectives

(signification or formination*

are feminine Tby signification,

Thcw

Infer that a jiouii Is feminine*

distinguished either

"

and some

There nro certain cliaradcristics by

of a certain form.

wo may

of the

momlww

of the

^1U ''(he

<^y<^

of <*un<ri'H,
towns,

and winds, iwJJU "Egj^t^ ^j> "(Jypnw,^ U^ a

a
a
tho <Mit wind," cl^^r
the nouth wind."
f

Such nouns

52,

the following

tira

heads:
*l

"

cxcoptcHl,

Those ending

in

oxoopt5^jl^

To

neither

many

tliCBO

by

may

Horvilo,

IIH

old man."

like

"firnt;"

adopted by
a*

^,

and pronounced
7/5,

in

Ml

i',

under

aiB

lli^

"^ pptrdnn," *ufe darkn<*H," a very

which wo Bktll mamdhMy noiice.
Sndly
u

J/l

Those ending
*!*!*#
"

1st

4^r

inagniliceiicc,"

few

#*

tmmhmlkm

foniinmo hy

!,

Jji'

tb^lf

3rdly

^^

as

^prido,"

In

/tt/M

"lon^wt;"

fata,

thin toniiinutiaii

is

comparatives and
bo added somo
eighty

signification

nor by termination,

U
o

#<

that
sneli a

^fife/^
a bucket,"

ftia

feminine

J/jl "the earth,"

bitting fl,

JC,

OF THE POBMATION OF FEMININE NOUNS.

43

o
1

"a

Jo "a shoe/'

staff/

Jjtf

<J*v*w&

"the sun/' together with

practice

cup/'

and observation.

(See

"the wind,"
which are

th.e rest

Da

Sacy,

JJ5 "the soul/'

Tome

i.,

be learnt by

to

p. 347.)

53. All substantives and adjectives not comprised under

the foregoing heads are understood to be masculine

"the moon/ uLlo "a house,"

3

There

words having the feminine termination

"a

masculine gender, as ILU,

adjectives to

which

5 is

intensive

"

learned;" &U-*

which

S,

s,

<U*A*

54.

axe of the

Ehalif;" also some verbal

added; so that they become of more

signification,

such

as

&

"

habituated to laugh;"

x-

<ulc

"very

relating from

^ & ^ ss

Verbal adjectives of the forms <DUi

memory."
.sr^-P
.TXXO

as

are, however, a few

avfl

emphatic or

^TX-X

jrx-^--

though ending in

both genders.

5, are of

There are some forty-five words which are of the

common gender

amongst the number are jfy

"

a veil or any-

&
thing that covers nakedness;" JUL "state, condition;"
a
a
knife" (Gaelic sdan)\
"awing;" J-j-J "a path;" ^^C
/

"Si

"a weapon," "armour;" 1L "peace;" IL "a ladder;"

X
/
*
?U^ "heaven;"
"peace;" jj^S? "a path or way;"
f.L?

7C.

r-

"an eagle;" J^i "a horse;"

4^

"night ;"

Of

the

"

salt?" eto -

( See

De

J^jjT

"a bow;"

8ac7? P- 349

Formation of Feminine from Masculine Nouns.

55- Feminines are formed from masculines

transposition,

or

changing

of letters

by the

addition,

but chiefly by the

OP THE I'ORHATIOX OF FEMININE XOVNS.

4i
addition of

"a

queen,"

young man /'changes

** **

do many other nouns of

before

Jtf ./#&,

**

"ayuuitg womun,"as

Some

this form.

**

St*

i',

**

i^.

"great,"

^ to

"

"u woman," ui;

a man,"
**

&U

king,"

J-

as

S,

5V

when

iuljoctivoH,

in

gcrthe positiye degree, follow the second termination (in

the initial I to the
yilo) in forming the feminine, transposing
\

end

&>

as

[^

from

comparatito and suporlativo degree^

changed to

J^

J^i aimih,

in

adjectircs alno forni their f<niinni

"
whilst some oliaugo

ail

<

one/

has
a,

first

jj J^

"intoxicated;"

mate

into

in
^1^.1
"

^UOA

the*

wrvil*

fomhibo

like

l
?

Homo

is

as

othor

^^

^JL,

"another;"
u
irrlttited,"

5f^
kit

iho

initial

^, ^1

^ m

tho

prononuK****!

In

ndi<l."

"longMt*"

"longer,*'

ITdtt,

fc

t<i>l<

liow<*V4*r,

<iiikwcnt and

final,

^Svliito" or

"
*#*\j

i'j

NximborB of adjcciivcB are unod both an

'*

my

without

"rasli,"

"

as

alteration,

^^

slain" (which,

"sho that

is

jp*

"patlimt/

"poor" (making aio

when used

slain"};

Norms implying anything

with

in tlie

ftuUtanlivoly,

many

divisible

ullusrH

into

odorifcnma/

jUai^
fi

in

i!iiiiiii

wriltifu

of tho

fo3pm,
tia

part**
r

t)
t

feminine gender to oxprcfls such

from C^vi&J ''gold."

adjectives

oi

As

**

partis,

as *u43

pi(

co

cif

gold/

tho Arabs have no uimier goiulor, noutial

such as arc coinniou

to

oithor gc^Mlor!

wliciti
*'

indefinitely us substantives, ate

by

the*

fominijw* ts

f<

C/jjisI
b.

On

oiaa is

wanting

to

you."

this itil)jot the reader

*'

IB

referred fo the exo^ll^nl

I*%

OF NUMBERS.
Arabe

"

M. De

of

45

Sacy, page 343-352 of the

Sacy's account at

first

The

volume.

work do not permit us

assigned to us in the present

limits

to translate

De

full length.

Of Numbers.
In Arabic the nouns

56.

liave three

numbers

we have

(as

already stated), viz., the Singular, the Dual, and the Plural.
The Dual is invariably a diptote, i.e., consisting of two cases,

and

generally formed

is

singular,

and adding

oblique cases

"
of, to,

When

a.

tlrasjlj
or in

dual to

"

two

two

the singular

cities."

and J&-

for the

for the nominative^

a house," dual

houses.'

noun ends in

if

the latter

(or

city;"

call moveabte, receiving

some
(t

If

'asan,
1

"a

^Sfatan
staff;"

remains, as

unless,

a youth

^ye*

jm,un,

when under

or c^, in which case

j, as iTjj rid&,un,

them,) are

final,

"
;

u \Zfatayani,

*aan>ani,

"&

"two

"

two youths;"

staffs"

(or

it

hcm%&

*,

ft

,j

jm
tu^pte;&e

either discretionary reniai&s? o* is

a garment;"

staves).

changed to j as *Tpu

part;" yfc

the form of

"

and

become what grammarians

afrawam, "two yellow objects;" b^tif

\jp~

^ two
garments,"

changed in the

alteration, either in the final letter or

servile terminates the singular, it is

"yellow;" ^\^/^
it

is

^tujj^i madmat&nt,

officiating for

quiescent, after fatTia in the singular, they

houses,'

Where ^ and ^,

vowel-points, as

U tjl3 "two

&$** madinatun, "a

as

c->,

of the

u l~
"

by suppressing the nunation

place of j

changed to

46

OP IBBEGUJLAB OK BKOKBN PLUIULS.

The regular masculine

57.

tie nunation of the singular, and adding

tive

and ^j~

"

^U;

for the oblique CUSCH

^J

fathers/'

"of,

regular feminine plural

IB

for

^-u

thus

"a

flit

nomina-

a falhor,"
j^jJJJ

JJJ^

by fathers;" J^U

^>;

"glad,"

&
I

or

to,

by m

plural is formed

'SissiHting,"

^.

prophet,"

TJio

formed by suppressing Iho

final

of the singular, and substituting c^l

and cp\

the oblique; tlm

for

"of,

"meiherfl," cptoUjJ

lor the

*oi^

;"

woman," cili-y "cheorful women,"

cheerful

iwmiinativo,

**u jmrfher,"
ciitdJJj

by mothers

or

to,

lL^ "a

so

"a

*Clj

pro-

phetess," cbtjlJ*

a* If

thrown

^Plf;

a masculltto noun, tenninato

away,, whilo
if in

torn

itfkes

is

in

inwt

cliangod to <famm<i,

futfca

it

algo

lifter

^^
//^

flfoppcHl,

diphthong with j, as ^J&uo* MmtM/ti^ ^^laiHi,

substantives

(that

not derived from

is,

simple, or augmented

only

change in tic plural ilmjazm

as

J^s>-

Jummn "a
9

karate) "a saueer/

wliose

first

or change

by

(*')

to th

woaian's name/*

radical takes

a#w

juclge/^

foriiiing

middle

vorb,*)

w!iit!iar

rtuli<*ul

cjf^I^
saucers

/wm/^tf
ff

UIOHO, however,

or

tlie

ja

It

Of iM Imffut&r

or

68* Besides the regular |>hmil

and

ft

vow<;l of (ho flmt

"

c^liiaf

it is

**

Perfict f<iuino

tmporfki

S, wltoBc

X^mr

14^

the Arabs luivo

oxomplifiod in th
adopttul

Mcvc^rul

words
of

OF IRREGULAR OR BROKEN" PLURALS.

forming

as they call them, broken plurals ^

or,

artificial^

which, the following are a few specimens:

a plural

triliteral root

may be formed

by means of two
"orders;" so
"
additional
)US;

so O^rJ

"a

a man,"

"

>JLft

sage,"

with or without the

plural of the measure

is

<Uii^L "disposition,"

triliteral root

may be formed on
4th

jto^.

another plural,

the measure

^JJ ;

"kings;" so pic "science,"

d(jU

plural

mountains;"

)&>-

Another broken

formed on the measure

*C&. "sages;"

so J^l

"a

plural,

*O

of

thus,

poet," plural

This form of plural arises from singular

"poets."

nouns of the measure

^Jj\3

or

modes of forming broken

tailed

)USl,

"

sciences."

frequent occurrence,

"a

triliteral root,

3^y "men;"

c<U "a king,"

"

of the measure

mountain," plural

of frequent occurrence,

plural

"l&C.

3rd -From the

dispositions."

thus

From the

may be formed a broken

thus, tJ-^f

1st

of

an order," plural ^\Lf

alifs,
"
t^U property," plural C/iW " goods" or
thus

2nd From a

chattels."

47

hereafter^

plurals,

when we

There are several other

^J.
^

which

come

to

shall

be fully de-

our Section

on the

Derivation and Formation of Nouns.

a.

De Sacy enumerates

aereral of these,

In the meanwhile

thirty-one forms of broker! plu3eaMj

especially the last seren, ara

we

ll(

lrftt

of rare ^ectednce.

subjoin a useful table of twenty^fcttf Forms of

4
broken plurals with examples of such singulars ss usually produce

them*

48

OP IRREGULAR OK BHOKKN PLURALS,

POEM OF

HO, KLTTJUt,,

PLtRA

milk

<uL= a

_>lsi"
'/

HO.

14

pail,

a fragment,

a necklace,

a frying pan,

jjj

17

MJ

the loft hand,

J3U&

jUi

Jj>-j

man,

* x

18

a hoy,

f^UU

x^

*>

u a roof,

ii-~j a house,

Ji

.jjj

country,

SO

10

^U* a pod,

'aKadrf

21

'

**a^

ii

22

18

> wounded,

23

a deort,

13

frioml,

for]

an ape,

Jt

>-j

the face^

84

J. It

may bo observed hew, at the same time, that some nouns ban
various forms of
plural,-sometimes a regular plural, and besides thai
one or moro of tho broken
tiras

^
^
^
^ ^'
Tcevand
;

from

an d

tho eyo,"
;

"a

slave,"

SC

JJJf

&

from

forms;

formed the plural

from
,

ft

jii
.

"the

^,5

^'

and

ftlgo

from

-j

^^

Uj and

a &ult

fromj^ "awalV'J^, J,J^

.

soul," are

boy," plu,

from

^,UL

JU5
J-jl^ perfect,

10
7

Jjjji

1C

rod,

5 JUi

" <"

*'

..

A Jib

C s

..

a book,

ftom
,

8ea/

OF IRREGULAR OR BROKEN PLURALS.

from

t;

student
all

is

l&U "a

admit Jwljb
Ju$

^jJ^ub

The

ij^fc.

not to infer, however, that a singular employs indifferently

the plurals of which

S Ju

witness/' Jcfc^,

,49

4.*JJ

etc.

<waj

form

^^^>

is susceptible

is

jU~j

thus <JjJu does not

nor does J^c adopt the plurals itit"

Sometimes one only

man," the only plural

makes onlyjj^

its

formed, as from

is

"

and J^l

an

affair,"

These, however, are "best learnt

by

"

^4y

"a command/'
"When

practice.

a singular, having several meanings, admits several plurals, it will be

generally found that certain plurals are peculiarly, or exclusively at-

tached to certain specific meanings of the singular ; for example,

j^c

"the eye," "a fountain/* "the substance or essence of a

"
a person of rank."
In the plural it has &
,
thing," and
#ct and
signifies

The two

j^Ucl

first

of these forms answer to the two

first

meanings

of the singular respectively, and the third only to the two last.

The

regular plurals, and those of the twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth, and

#

<3j

>^r

fifteenth

are

forms,

to

contradistinction

called

the

"

of paucity,"

plurals

other forms, which are called

in,

%*>"

j^

This observation applies, however, only

to nouns having several forms of plural
when the plural of one of

"plurals of multitude."

these four forms

is its

only one,

it is

employed indiscriminately

like

those of the other forms.

c.

With regard

many

to*the quadriliteral noums, all the simple ones,

of those which are augmented, together with their

form their plurals by inserting

after the
?

fatfya

"

second letter
$

and the third kasra), as cl^l/ from

happens to be the

*****

final letter of the singular, it is

f
xx
xxOx

the plural, as
<bj^

preceded by

1 ,

j and

"

a dunghill," J-!j*

"

w-^

femMnes,

(thefirtfc foirdiig

$ter/*

When

drbpped in forming

"WMi

the last radical i$

^ without a vowel, ^ remains

in the plural,
7

50

OP IEEEGULAR OR BEOKBN PLUEAIS,

"a

^t3cJ?

candle/' Jj^llf

but

L-^JV^

some words,

as

^ISaU

same

at the

XX

O?

.-

of the preceding tern),

end, as jLJjl
^
!

^n d

'>

*^^

ox

"

^ and
xox

tlio

heel/'

taking S at the

\f

"a

uJUL*!
xx

**

shoemaker/'
xx*

a disciple/' j-^l)* and i'j^fc

*V^"

"*

<LJM

the devil/' (j^-Jbl and

"^
,v

"

tlySy?

time, not only follow this rule, but

xv

xx

*, x-

GJJ!

t^w^j

"

^tlL

have another plural formed by dropping tho

>
"
(

^ (on account

and j arc changed to

'*

other words form also their plurala in this inunner, us uJJLjl

xx

IwLU

comprehended under

them

in the

JUfel,

2nd

rf.

4<

xx

x
r,

cJSUl and

bishop/'

few

*'

Some

form

this

plurals of fHHtoral words

same manner, as J*fe "the

plural jlJlb]

Nouns

^^j

unil of tho linger/' 1st

plural

**au artery/" Int plural

consisting of live or

maybe

another plural being formed from

more

letters

and

(i*

J^s

Jind plural

not being numbered as such) follow tho same mode, throwing away
at the

same time

cither tho lant radical or Uiopoimlt, us

J4"jA^

u^-4^ "a

pomegranate," ^J\A^;
T

an ^
)]/
<Jjl/

of bread," "cruinl>/

Ji^i "a

spider/' civile.;
-

^^

P CIUI

"a

piece

w ^f for^

ing a diphthong after/af//#, both the last letter and the penult remain,
"
j being changed to 4^ on account of tho preceding /iasra f
^j&g a

crocodile/'

cepting

/%

^\^

when
^

"

Augmented wortU throw away

servile

along with

'

*'i

a leader/'
e.

Some words form

"a mother/*

as

fi
.<4jX

XX

or u*-*^ as

"**

rj^

"loosed/*

their plural in a Biannor exceedingly irregular,

ftf

the moufch/'
Sgf\
A
**'' *^
4T*'**
*.

woman/

xx

^^

c^l^if ; JU

If/

"*,,

sad ^Uy; ^ys

X

the servilcs^ ex-

tflij,,

J&

;
""*

"water/ Slpt
&

j**

^wJ and^l^uJ; ^UMJ*

*"

gwlil for J^ljl, the final 4^ being c*at off on account of the

use

made

of this word*

//

man/

OF THE DECLENSION OP NOUNS.

Of

51

Woum*

the Declension of

Some grammarians diyide the Arabic nouns into

two,
if not moro, declensions,
I think it much better to view
them under one declension, reducible to five heads or classes
59.

according as they consist in the singular or plural, or "both,

of dip-totes, i.e., two oases, or of
trip lotos, i.o., three cases*

The dual

always a dip tote, so that

is

we need

only to direct

our attention to the singular and plural

CLASS
60.

Under

1*

thin class I include all

substantirea, masculine

and feminine, which form their plurals

in

57.

Thoy

all

aro, u

may

singular and dip totes in Urn plural

Norn. iJVj a father*

Gen.
Ace.

jJlJ

of a father,
Ij

iSlJ a father,

As an example
"

!j

two

reffularly, as described

bo seen,
thus

ityj

trip tote* in

"a

fathers,

father,"

y^tj

of two fathers,

two

ij^

fathers.

of a regular feminine

the

fathers,

of fathers*
fathew*

noun wo subjoin

a mother*"

Nom.i'jJlj a mothoi**

Gen.

JjJ^ofamotLei

two mothers*

mothers*
l^lj
.^

of two mothers*

liiC of mothers,
X"^

'

Acc

$l&\ 9

a no other.

two mothow.

Jilj

mothers*

a. Under this class are

included 1st. All participles, both active
and passiro, masculino and
fbminino, derived from tegular yerf

(which are
generally employed as

52

OF THE .DECLENSION OF NO*UNS.

or "assistant;"

"

nouns form their

&

assisted/

J^ax*

feminities

changing their final

by

and arc declined like SlHj.

etc.,

measures ^Jul and ^53 as 1JU

^-1*

3rd.

etc,

Nouns ending

in

'a

man

"a mannikiu"
To

these

specific

"

or

iiislgulficaut

we might add

heads

.several

and must bo

left

little

in

^ouns of

tills

class,

"a

urr which

carpenter;"

arc

"a man

generally

of Bagdad,"

hypochondriac;"

man;"

plural

othera which cannot

]tf

as

plural

tl^j

^Ju>.j,

etc,

reduced under

cmiirely to practice!,

OLA$B
61.

nouns of the meusitro 0-xi,

4th, Diminutive

etc,

^j^jtdwb,

"a

giren to melancholy/

Fcrans of the

J3n<l,

mariner/' Jlac

patronymic or possessive adjectives, as ^jtlxb

*^jlop

into

ftf

S^U,

plaral

All such

Mnation

S^

as

man's name.

also a

II

like the
preceding, are

triptotet

singular and

di^ioles in tho plural, witli thin diffcronco,

that tho plural Is broken or Irm/ular; ilniB,
"a mosque."
llio

i^

IHTAI,*

a mosque,
of, to,

two

mosques.

or in

of mosques,

a mosque,
mosqties*

62.

Nouns

of this class arc

botli in the
singular

and plural; thus,

N*i
G*
A.

two houses,
|

etc.

ahouse.

house*

of two houses*

two

Iiou0c0*

cy^

houses,

of

OF THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS,

Of Classes

a.

II.

and

III.

we may say

53

in general that
they include

such substantives as have not been

already specified under Class
but it is very difficult, if not impossible, to
them to
subject

The student must be guided

by practice

specific rules.

CLASS

I.

any

alone.

IV.

This class consists of such

adjective nouns (not being
or
as
are diptotes In the
comparatives
superlatives)
singular
"
and triptoUs in the plural; thus,
red."
'J*>>\
63.

SINGULAR*

Nom

& Aec.

Gen.

j^

y]^-1

J^U

JjX4
x

J^Nom.

J.

Gen.

">

\^

1^*^. Acc,

CLASS

V,

This class consists of a few substantives and

snch

64,

adjectives (comparatives
in the singular

and superlatives) as are

"
thus

and plural;

SlNOULAIt,

'j>\

DtJAL,

^cUt Nom,

&

Ace.

j
a,

a.

both

less."

Norn.

Gen.

diptotea

& Ace,

Classes IV. and V. consist

chiefly of adjectives ; those of the

former being in the
positive degree though tinder the form of
comparatives and superlatives; Class V. consists of
fa* fib cm,-.

paratives

65.

Whoa the
r

?,l',

and superlatives,

?'

alS

last letter of

preceded

a noun

^ &%*>

is

^ preceded fcy/rt&o,

and

^^

short

dfa

>jj^ <laH, the three oases aro.attej if it be

preceded
by fan, the nomiaatiT and the
alone
axe
genitive

OF THE DECLENSION OF

in this case the

Thus

P^
of

and

^j

tlio first class,

in

J$

clasfl,

In

i^luj

"a

mill," for

or tiiptoto&

X s

tlio

^13 "a KHd!" or

*^l*^ "donorte,"

for

selves,

iu tho genitive

"a

when

tLl

vk,

fatht^r-in-Iaw/'

"a

jjJJ

Noim ^^s

**poHs<'ss(l of,"

J
^J

tho

JUiii

faUior of

JkM

mouth of 1

affixed

a brother,"

"tho mouth,"

oadowort with," which

the jwouth of 'Umar,

ottdowcd with

..

hroilior,

liis

of

hi**

Ills

brother*

brothor

thy

of Urn raoutlt of 'Uwmr,

*u^J j J

thcan-

bl tho father of

^A U

Ace,

tltci

noun or an
^,1

x j ,j1 of

it

**u thing," 1* or
^1

^A

the fatluT of
Jaj ^!

class

in the nominative

father,"

"

declined an follown

Qeiu

lant

ami accusative, im^gular quad-

in eon8tru<?tion either with

and jJ "having,"

Aec.

plural of the wwoncl claas.

posHOSsivo pronoun,

Oeii.

tlui

Six words linvo a variation of rase

peculiar to

CO,

Nom.

judge'

nominativo, and

of

jW^

'

arc

cc

of tho same

^U,

in th<

^J!/

for

Cj which

J^.j, ^i/J,

mid accusative

goautlvo

mitten

staff," IB

and i^U**
rilit<?ral

now**," for

"good

or diptotes.

ar<s

^J^ "a

nominative and genitive for

^Jl* and

tlio

^.

not "bearing cither tlammn or

in tho three cases

\%

of thy

fiitl

tlij

coiri|iagilorL

tiling*

of thy ttiiag*

thy

OF THE DECLENSION OP NOUNS.

When

a.
first

my

55

these words, however, are prefixed to the

pronoun of the

person there
father,"

is

no change of

When

etc.

your mouth," LlXiJ

^j]

cl^J

your mouth."
9

my

^f "of

father,"

by an affixed pronoun, it
"
"
of
your mouth," dXJ

li is followed

varies only in the vowel-points, as

"

"

case, as

has sometimes a peculiar

idiom, similar in sense to j j as in the following epithet, which the

^UT

in the fable gives to the fox,

you not

Ul

father of the stronghold?"

enter,

UUl "Why do

'jjLZj

lion,

"

thou endowed

i.e.

with strength."

The accusative

b.

is

substituted for the nominative

$

j?As&tc.es6t<

participles

go

before, as ^\ "indeed,"

^4

"as

if,"

*jA>

Jl^J^l "indeed a

king

is

If I "but,"

^ *s

"would

man

"certainly," J\ "that/'

to

will stand

God,"
;"JjtXj

man

its case,

"
as

perhaps;"

tl^Uit

"but the

as *&rj
j\<&\ <** \^ "certainly there

The word

in the house."

immediately preceding any appellative,

accusative termination, as <ui ilJTj 1

"in

certain

powerful;" no other word must intervene, however, except-

ing a preposition with

is

when

it").

gives

it,

in

when

general,

the

there is no doubt of it" (or

In this case the accusative loses the nnnatkm, but the

noun must not be

appellative

"

signifying "is not,"

limited

definite,

by the

either
article

as

"a

noun proper, or as an

Jt, or by a word whloh

it

governs.

67*

The vocative

is

expressed

by the nominative without

nunation, with U prefixed,

% ^Uu

"0

followed

prince !" except

whew

l,

"Q

'Uttxman

??
!

j^.t

by a genitive, where

OF THE DECLENSION OF

56

m employed

accusative

"

NOTOfcJ.

In place of tho nominative^ as

<dl7

JUB t

servant of God."

a,

The nominative thus employed

Hence

rapidity*

is

it

that the affixed pronoun ^-7-

people !" cl/J

naturally pronounced with

n filiation

the

that

is

is

sometimes cut

is

always dropped, and

"
an

off,

lj

my

"

my

Lord

"

Some

words, chiefly proper names

frequent use, throw off a whole syllable at the end, as ~,l*

(f

^~U
Marvun

On

O mj
toz&**

"

friend!"
$

J^

^ "0

MansClr!"

\Z

for

"0

tf

>

etc,

the other hand,

when placed

end of a sentence, and

at the

pronounced more strongly, the vowel is prolonged, and receives a

a
O my boy!* Sometimes this
kind of aspirate, as <uJ^ b for *ic
1

appears as

final

When
pronoun

life

the

as

UlS

name

or a/^ as

between the name and the particle

In calling for help^

-LaS

X-

\i

"help,

\J

or 4^1c for

^1^*

invoked, however, hoars the article

or one of these words,

^Clx

3 ^

lj

\&$

\^ji, Ijwl,

as (jwlS

ft^

Salaclinl"

l^jf

prefixed

the

always comes

^
1

)1,

\j

men

"
t

to the genitive, as

and somotiinos

>1

is

added

for

the same purpose, as *Ub*x* b ^lielp,

sometimes used for ,j] **Q

my father P

friend!"

ui-Jl is howevae

and uLJ$ for ^Ji^ **Qmy

mother/*
03*

The dual and the

tkat letter

when

followed

perfect masctiliEC pltirak in

by

a nouu in

the affixed pronouus, as ^Jjl

tlio

drop

genitive ease? or by

"two fawn%

OF THE NUMERALS.

two fawns of Joseph;" ^UjJ "two

57

"

"

Musulmans," jJJ ^IllX

the town," ^JJ "sons," j4 "kis sons."

feet

When

a.

the

\Jy*\^*

a noun

is

rendered definite

which appears

nttnation,

afc

the Musulmans of

prefixing the article ^Jl

by

the end

>UoJ "his two

feet,"

"

of some of the cases,

dropped and the simple short vowel retained; thus, Worn.

Gen.

father;"

tty$\

"

jj$

"the mother;"

of the father ;" Acc

&$\

"

4$

"
Sty$\

the

the mother."

when one noun governs a

aoun following in the genitive; thus, j^^*^S

"
!

Commander

J^*^

Faithful;" ^SlT^jlJft ''Prosperity of the State/'

the

d$\

is

the father;" so

"

of the mother

In like manner, the nunation is rejected

"

"

The

of

article

jhanges the substantives singular, and irregular plurals, which are

^^^^^

f ^-L.^^O

Ice.

3.

opSl;

Nona,

triptotes, as

liptotes, into

so

is affected

he above circumstances,

a ~^~, as

black;"

in the

same manner

It is also rejected

by

all

be observed with regard to

as

when under

those nouns called

and

which form their nominative in

may

Gen. ^*-31;

Nom. ^li^ "the white;" Gen*U2i;

The nUnation

nvaridble,

o^Sl "the

/5if4^L

A otner cases
the plurals of the 2nd and
l

th classes of nouns.

Of
69,

the

Numerals

$&A\

The Arabic Numerals hold &

sort

etween the Substantives and Adjectives

of middle rank

consequently this

the proper place wherein to introduce them.

lem, as

we

shall see hereafter, are lorn fide

.hers adjectives.

ich as
f

Our

Several of
substantives,

object here is simply to exhibit

them

they are; the application and use of them belong

the Syntax,

The following

axe

THE CAKDI2UL NUMBERS*

THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
FEMININE,
if

t,

MASCULINE,

MAttCTJLINE,

5
or

(&**>

8
9

lUAMj

10

a.

Prom

tlireo to

of the feminine

ten inclusive/ the termination

gender,

here

anarks

the

llio

inaBoiilino.

usual sign
All

these

numbers

arc triptotes, except

ancl
^\xj\x , both of which are
^1151
,>
^^
awl ^^^^^ for (lie genitiye
diptotos, having for their inflexions u
""

'

^t

ami accusative,

numbers

arc

first case,
it

employed

and case

if

****

^>-j

we might say

*$&

"

rale, I 65, for

and

*F(X

in the

employed as subfltantiven, tlioy govern the

and then of coarse lose their

jCu

genitive,

From

"

men/

men/

literally,

When ^UJ

three of men,"

eight/' loses

.J ill

tlio

num*ber ten,

the maiOEline
isJAi ? and in the feminine
smaller aumber being always put first, tkis~

its

to the

in the nomina-

eleven to ninoteon incluflivo, the

bars axo oomposod of uaits, and of

or

*'

which had disappeared according

^.Q we then write

^US in the accusative,

is for

and

three

a trio of

ntlnation, it recovers the

tive

of the thing numbered,

Minaticm, as

three to ten, the cardinal

cither as acljeetlves or sulmtantivcs

they arc placed after the thing numbered, and agree with

in gender

genitive

From

like alt the duals.

Enm-

wMeh id
JJ&J, tte

THE CARDINAL NTJMBEES.

59
MASC.

16

11

17

IV

SjjfL^ j_-**

xx O x

18

xx

xxO X X

19

XX O X

i^Ac J_uJ

13

i>* ^US

X XOX

14
15

Decades from twenty upwards

are,

200.

80.

50.

20.

1000.

90.

60.

30.

2000.

100.

70.

40.

71. Tlie

Ulf

a.

In the numbers composed of decades and of

numbers

the smallest

c4/^j *^J

as

5.

iU

The numbers

^bU

100;

500; it.

.<#

iU
c.

*llj-

for

first,

and both are

accusative

declined,

^/fc^jtSall.

the hundreds are of both genders;

^U cJ

600; it,
*

1^
*>-

300;

700;

JU
^U
^Q
* ' :r

for the thousands are as follows

L/3T Sii 3,000;

O

jLc.

put

thus

400;

&U ^U^

VjUi 800;

or
#

'

900.

thousand.
Ox

is

^ve ^y^j ^';

200;

The numbers

2,000;

U11

S en

number

from twenty
between the two

xinits

to ninety-nine inclusive, the conjunction

j is inserted

\2i\

&Jj 4,000; and

Beyond ten thousand they

12,000; and so

that they are

300,000, etc.

^T

Ub]

on.

up

100,000;

are, iSl

ulall

so

1,000

on up

^Ulf

to

ten

Clc j^l 11 7 000;

^

to ninety7nine thousand.

ui{

l^L, 800,000;

After

uJJ ^UiJj

60

THE OEDINAL NUMBERS,

ORDINAL NUMBEHS.
72.

tlio

The

ordinal

numbers up

exception of the

and iLlj

first)

to ton inclusive,

the measure

^ll

have (with

for the masculine

The compound numbers

the 19th inclusive arc made up of the

for the feminine.

the llth to

from
cor-

responding ordinals of their units with the addition of yLi

for the masculine, and
When these
S^AA for the feminine.
nine compounds arc indeterminate, they both end in a
fath
and are not subject to declension*
If, however, they have
the article prefixed, the units arc regularly declined like a

noun of the

Nom.

first

and the deeado& remain

elasB,

unaltered;

yu

thus,
eJW!; Gen, Jli shp(; Aeo. J&& JLj&i;
and the same ^ rule is observed with regard to the
fominino;

thus, Sj&c, &!>Jt,

and BO

on.
I'KM.

llth

U 18ft

J}

yii

2nd

cLltf

3rd

I4tli

>

XXXX
XX O X XX

1st

4th

1 fftll

U-

Sth

16th

jC

eth

XT

7th

lS

38iU

8th

10th

9th

SOth

10th

^
t?

DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS.

The

73.

pressed

by

are formed

twentieth,

and

61

the decades above,

all

the cardinal numbers

are ex-

and the intermediate ones

prefixing the ordinals of the units with the

by

conjunction ^ between, thus

PEM.

MASC.

or ,.,.-&

or

<.i

21st.

FRACTIONAL NUMBERS.
7,4.

In Arabic fractional numbers from one-third to one-

tenth inclusive are expressed

the corresponding radical,
f

<ll "a

third," JjfJ

sixth," jLJi
fi

JA^

"a

"a

seventh,"

a tenth."

number;

^5

twentieths" they say

"an

"a

eighth,"

fraction

tfjjt,

thus,

J.U

fourth,"

Beyond the

a kind of periphrasis

certain words modified from

by

fifth,"

JJJ "a

recourse

-rV

"a

\*j>

Ac

fJ

SJ

iTj^l

"a

ninth,"

is

thus, to express the fraction

half,"

had

to

u
fteeeliterally,

"three parts out of twenty parts*"

BISTEIBUTIVE NUMBERS,
75.

Distributive

numbers are expressed

either

by twice
"
the
ordinal
one by one,"
repeating
number, as \*^.\j tl^j
or (from one to
tori)

by words

of the meastare

derived from the radical number.

or

by repetition

by one,"

so

These

thus, i\*4 or %(L\

gj

or

numerals are diptotes.

JJJ^

5lL^

may
or

jU* ar

O^X

be^ttsed singly

"

2^J !k^X

^ four
by four,"

one

All such

OF PEIUOJHC

(52

IUSLATIVE NUMERALS.

76* These embrace such adjectives as denote

or "consisting of" aneli or such a

9
9

thus ^513

number from one

to ten;

>*

ft

"

containing two," J^SU "containing tliree/ J^bJ

"

^^

containing four/

"

jectives from one

ten

to

those present no

remarked, however, that from

which, the singular, if

the relative adjective

the singular

^1

In

containing five/* etc.

manner from the cardinal numbers are formed

must be

?)

relating to

^uh

liie

relative adIt

difficulty.

"two," a dual

would be ^1

it

could have

formed by recurring to the form

and <^p, like

otic,

^^\

Prom

of

for yj;
of

eleven to nine-

compoaed of two indeclinable words,

form their relative adjectives from the iirat word only, wholly

teen, the numoxutivoH

it follown that these adsuppressing the second ; whence

those
derived from numerativos
jectives exactly resemble
1

from one

to niao;

Him
XO

^p

is

the relative adjc>ctivo of ^131

"*

ft

,*

"two," and of JAc Wl "twelve;" j^Jii is tkit of Juui.

From l\. "one
iX5- "fifteen."
"five" and of

**"

hundred/* O/. formed the relative adjective

"
and from CJ! a thousand/
is

^JU
*V X

or

FEEIODIC KTTMEEALB,

77*

Numerativo wordH denoting a periodical return,

of the measure

or without

m
?

motttte, oto,)/
?

etc)/

When

j*j.

article,

They arc put in the accusative

a
as \**Jty\ or hB
ov0ry throe

so l&fl or

j^l "every

are
with.

eight (day%

for the sake of precision the day9 ) oto.

must

NUMERAL ADVERBS.

63

be specified they express the same in the following manner

dyL> "he drinks wine once every three
:

years,"
a.

"

Numerative words denoting "simple" or "single," "double,"

are
triple," etc.,

U&&\

S3&

"

JyU

expressed thus,

"
triple,"

c-Jl^i

single,"

"

2$

quadruple,"

Cc^li*

"
double/'

etc.

NUMERAL ADYEBBS.
"Words

78.

"thrice,"

"time"

etc.,

or

are generally expressed

"turn" in the accusative

"once"

requisite numeral, thus

"twice" by
79.

dates

before

our

to

corresponding

^^

"
;

is

"once,"

case preceded

expressed

thrice"

"twice,"

by a word denoting

by cpf^

by

SjZ

by the

or

S^lj

or

<*jM, etc.

The Arabs haye a curious idiom in expressing their

and other large numbers, placing, generally, the units
the tens,

the tens before the

hundreds,

and the

This rule obtains strictly

when the number consists of only two figures, decades and

hundreds before the thousands.

units;

but

thousands

if

may

thousands and hundreds are employed, the

optionally

come

first,

then the hundreds, then

the decades, and lastly the units, though the former

Thus

mode

words the year

1862 they say "two and sixty and eight hundred and one
This idiom is probably owing to the circumthousand."

is

the more common.

in expressing in

stance that the numerical cyphers of the Arabs,

which they

borrowed or adopted from the Hindus, read contrariwise

to their alphabetic characters, ie.

from right to

left

so that

04

when
for

an,

THE

Arab, in reading, comes

from right

naturally doeyphora the group

lie

example,

such a number as 1862

to

to left, for the reasons

we have just
JH-Xw

Of

of figures

stated.

OX

ike A$ectiv&-Jti^\

The Adjective has two genders and generally three

numbers like the substantive, but the explanation of its
80.

concord with the latter belongs more appropriately to our

At present we

Section on Syntax.

Khali confine ourselves to

the mode of forming the Comparative and Superlative Degrees

of Comparison*
81,

fixing

The comparative
1

iiBJU*.

^ "than,"

to exprosfl the

Elnawiiliig

"good,"

than the i>asi"

'j#L\

bettor,"

tlie

punitive

and

tolcofl

in general

tlioti

art greater

Ikal is-Jl

"

Sometimes the mere ponilivo with

by

IB

pro-

used

comparative, an in tho following lino from

^%

^g^\

formed from
"

thiWc^O^T^

tiftorit;

than the king,"

is

"

^^j

tho present clay

arid
TIio particle
^e? howtvor,

is better

some

others

often follow tho comparative in placo of '^5 BO as to express

** ; 4>*r*tf&' C
^
or superlative degree according to circum*
oithor a
.

stances;

f^f

c-jycM

^J ^Al "more or mont intrepid

In the feminiae of the eomparativo

is

added in place of

(masCt),

quioBocmt after

prefixed, as '^J> "groat," JJ?^

<$

"
greater

(fern.).

The

in

particle

"

!>

greater

does not

always immediately follow tho comparative ; as ia tho follow"

to mo than the
ing example
Jcf Dearer
^pA $$
:

apple of mine oyc,"

^ ^^

OE THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Without

82.

^ the form

when

by a genitive
as (jwQl ^/^^ "the best of
also where the substantive

'jj\

followed
?

w^"

expresses the superlative degree,

men."

It

65

becomes superlative

as S&\ ^<\*^>
precedes the adjective,
It has likewise a superlative sense

--

Sa'di

when

most wise. 35

is

placed absolutely

with a substantive or pronoun in construction, as

^

-&~

"they two are the most upright;" ^wuM

^^\

&J

s<?*

*?

'?

^j&$\ &>
"
Of the
they are the most excellent among human beings."
comparative and superlative we shall treat more fully in our
Section on Syntax.
^.o^

Of

the

Pronomj~^\.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
83. These consist of
Affixed.

The

two

classes, viz., the Isolated

Isolated are the following, viz.

1st Pers. Sing, b'f

"I."

(No Dual).

"you

two."

Plur. Masc.

"they both,"
a.

We may here

its first

by

Fern.
*ff\,

3rd Pers. Sing. Masc. j

"he," Fern.

Plur. Masc.
jii,

^&

"we."

Dual comm. UxH

^j\ "you."
"she."

Fem,*^

vowel damma, and the third feminine

Dual comm.

"they."

its

tera, when preceded

and uJ, which both denote "and;"

thus, instead of y>J, they say jjij; so for

also

Jr

observe that the third person masculine y& loses

either of the conjunctions^

may

1st Pers. Plur.

2nd Pers. Sing. Masc. cUl, Fern. L^Jl "thoxu"

and the

^j^ they say ^j.

"We

observe that the Personal, Demonstrative, and Eelative

Pronouns have the same variation of gender and number as nouns,

OF TEE I'KRSOXAl I'HONCK NS.

00

but they have no difference of case, with the exception of Hie duals
the Demonstratives and Relatives, which follow the

we

duals, as

the

common

84,

Wo

shall

The

sec.

immediately

first

mode
is

person

of

of

oilier

naturally of

gender, and wants the dual number.

now como

to the Affixed Pronouns,

which

occur

and arc always annexed to a verb,. a

When added to verbs they arc
noun, or a proposition.
almost in every lino,

generally in tho accusative CUKO, though often in the

especially

when another

When joined
affixed to

relative^

immediately

mme*

The* Affixed Pronouns are the following:

or

U "of

"

of

mo"

l4

or

JM>."

(No Dual),

or "ufl."

Muse,

"

CX

"

of lain

"of them

liore

Fern.

or

"of Huso" or "thce."

is

added;

affixes also

thiw,

JI5

"

P3im Mane,

Item.

'j;

all

lliufi,

of Imr

'f

Dual

*J "of

"

or

Dual

her."

Kcm.

to illnatntto tho

iiscj

A "of them

of the

affixed

nouns the mlnution disappears when

ff

n
;

luin ;"

add a fbw examples

tho affixed j^T

remains

"

both/' etc.

pronouns, premising* that in

Tho other

Pern

d,c.

you
3rd Pow. Bing.

"Wo

1st

(cowm.) t2 "of yon both/* etc/ Plur.

ez.

after.

nouns they are possessive, or relative. "When

a preposition ihey have a personsil and sometimes

find Pors. Sing.

UJ&

dative,

to

1st Pors. fling.

rinr.

uceuHailve

ftoinow

4->l^*

a book;

<c^ "my

book,"

displace tho nnmtion$ but tho simple vowol

n house

"
sj\3

his hoiwo,"

Wo

must

also

notice a few changes of modifications which take place both in tho

tenoaination of the

words

to

which tho pronoun

the Initial syllable of the affixes themselves.

Is affixed;

aad

also to

OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS,

The

b.

affixes #,

torn when

when following
The pronoun

or "it."

kasra preceding

ending with
"

it,

my sins ;" ^Sli

"my staff;" *]J "an
or

when another

my

vocative

my

^bl

fathers/'

from

"in

as, <tj

of

any word

to

iJli^L "sins,"

as,

"

l^

staff/

After kasra ^s

archer."

"

case

hamza

"

as, <TJ

when annexed

it,

"my

archer," ^*\j

the

person- ^j in the case

first

faithful (people) ;"

^5 (officiating for

<f

friends;"

of

omitted in

frequently

of the

without vowels;

^,
"

precedes

of the * into

^~ of prolongation;

the

takes fatha above

j, or

1,

damma

and J^, turn the

torn immediately

another

his master/' or

him"

U&, +&

67

as,

CJj

my

lord

is

"
!

^
*)

precedes

For the verbal

affix

as,

my
^ is

^U*-!

,J, only

(<

sometimes used

as,

assist

^^j^\

me,"

for

Not only the nunation vowels, as we have already stated, but also
the <j in the duals and in the perfect masculine plurals, are dropped
"
two books/' ^c^
when followed by the affixed pronouns as,
c.

^^

"his two books,"etc.

CJ

latter into

When affixed to words ending in ^ they change the

"an

as, <Ujs

aunt,"

uLSc^ "thy aunt"

In the 3rd

2nd

person plural masculine of the preterites of verbs, also in the

person plural masculine of the imperatives, the quiescent alif after ^ is

"
"
they assisted us ;" and
rejected ; as, \j^aS
they assisted," l^j/^
after the verbal

termination 15 they add

"

$y&J&
in

you

^ quiescent

him/'

assisted

after fai^a,

"he threw," t^j or

and

"
ausj

s-

as,

vowel points are used

singular to distinguish

<(

#l^$

you

assisted/'

following verbs or nouns ending

final
S

is

Mm."

he threw

^**

is

it

15J*J

changed to

^&

"a

as,

bt>y,"

x&

forms a diphilxong with the

"to," aJt "to him/'

Jt

Sr x

"
as,

^ either remains, or

In particles

his boy/'

preceding fatfaa

When

sometimes added

from the ma$culi$i

to the
;

In bpoks where no

2nd person feminine

thus,

,/

for

d/,

68

OF THE DEMONSTBAI1YE PRONOUNS,

d*

The

affix

in place of u?r~,

^J

also to particles ending in

j^xH

"that

^^

I ;"

for

^^

however^ always coalesce, as

particle

&(/Q

such as

^1,

J,l,

^,

"from me;" the two w##s of

^^

The

etc,;

the

affixed pronouns,

cst,

till est, ilfl c$t, etc.,

as

^J

in

as,

latter,

when

the
to

this phrase

^ ^ J dj^

48, where the pig says,

fable,

miser,

used when joined to verbs, and

have often a possessive signification similar

is prefixed,

the Latin idiom, mihi

from our
"

is

^^sllf Ui

fi

non

cst lanti wihl, ncque,

Utof

wretched have

neither

wool nor milk."

ti*

Two

person

is

affixes

always placed before

'

third

bo annexed 1o one word, wlioit that of the

may

as,

*U\kc1

or can suffice

"

the*

second, and tho second before

"
" ^

first

the

"*

he gave

it to

thee against

mo

them/"

lie

^Li5u

"will

',&,

or

it will,

or may,

protect thee from

thorn."

j\ These pronouns

may

alno be put
scparatcily after verbs to denote

the accusative COHC, but with the particle

"he
C/U^ cly?

be placed before the verb

in tho

beat

same

you;" or they
in

may

prefixed to them

as

the following
pasBitgo from the JjCur&n:

uj-^uJ cJbjj 4\-oJ cJt] "Thoo wo adore, ami thco wo call to our
In like manner the other affixes, as,
aid/'
"me;" Ubl "us;"

^W

"theo"

(fern,);

Ulb] "you

"

you"(finOj
"

*Cl

lf

"Lim;

i/
tlusm" (inaso.)

^blw
U^

two;"

Ub! "horj"
x

"thorn"

^bj "you"

(mase.);

UWv "thorn"
*

^bj

(two); IjKl

(fern.).

THE DIWONSTIUTIVB HiONOUHS.

85 Tlio Domoiistrativo
pronoiui, implying an object near

OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

09

is

at hand,

follows

expressed

"this"

(hie),

and

is

declined as

PLURAL.

or

J/\

Masc.

1J

tf

15

"

The remote demonstrative, "that"

Pern.

formed from the

is

above by adding c/.

PLtlEAL.

SINGXILAR.

Masc.
/

often inserted before

is

(for tiSJb', etc.)

1

is

d/

as d53lJ or C$3 J

Pern.

clJ3b*

or cU3j ?

frequently prefixed to 1J and L!/!O

the

being generally dropped, and represented in pointed books

*~

by

or a perpendicular fatfya
PLURAL.

thus

DUAL,

SINGULAR.

jj&

Masc,
Pern.

tii

<<:

this ?

thou ?? or

??

sometimes used for the personal pronoun

is

"

you

?>

though

contempt or detestation^ as

then in general expressive of

^
tf

it is

Ui

tibtou."

OF THE JRELXT1VK PJiOXOUNS*

TUB RELATIVE PHONOUXS.

80,

Tho Eclatlvc "who," "which," "that,"

of the article J! and ^SJ, the

article (

initial

of the

ttwfufid) as formerly ol served under the

It is declined us follows

4C) a).

compounded

of tho article
being omitted

in the singular ami masculines plural, and the

pronoun marked hy

Is

0,-

..rtJJt

Masc,

'till

Fern.

ThiB relative does not admit of any of tho Horvile

Mug

obflorvod,

we

oas<w

often coiiHtruod with tho

for

i(

^T ^

W)m<tim(

or,

"(the land,

Tho rrotiotmB

ever/' and

and

w^Idom

j, which, OH

^i,

tm<jd,

^!

^3Jb

"whom

it

^jj!

wiw,"

word intervening,
whioh he wtinborn."

with

is

to the

we

particles

and

pronomiH ann(xod

in whioli," for

otc^) in

ar<%

aflixcni

fltibsoquont worc1 ? an u ^iSI

"from which,"

consider to bo inseparable

Tho oblique

not sorviloa.

87.

prefixed, excepting uJ, c/,

have already

letters

for

as

"lie who," "thono

who," "who-

"that which," or "

whatever," "whatever,"

are also roktlveB Including tho

antecedent, tho former referring
to rational boingn and tho hitter to brutes or lifislcns
objects,

as In tho prcvorb

^^

^T cl^^T

^/LiTT

"

Ho who

commits (has committed) to tho care of tho wolf

(the pasturing of) tho sheep, certainly does (luiH dono) an iigusticc."

OP THE INTEKEOGATIVE PBONOUNS.

71

"

Whereupon Al Damiri in his History of Animals," shrewdly

observed that there was a greater injustice done to the wolf
"
than to the sheep because, says he,
they employed him to
;

do that
a.

which was not in

^ employed

his nature."

the genders, numbers,

interrogatively, also receives

For
but nothing must then be added after this word.
"
Some one is come," or I
example, should a person say to another,
if the other should simply ask "Who?" or
have seen
and cases

'

somebody;"

"

Whom ?"

the proper

word

in Arabic is

etc.

INTEEEOGATIVE PROKOUNS.

88.

Ji feminine Tl

what kind ?"

etc.,

is

who?

JJ

which? 3J

what? ?? "of

generally use4 interrogatively, govern"4 1*

as
ing the substantive in the genitive,

<^&

L/\

"what book?"

all
When it is employed
alone, without a substantive, it receives
* J
*
*s
s&s
&<-

the numbers and cases; thus dual, ^UJ? fem

fern.

<l>y

as triptotes.

"whoever;"

The
It

uW>

plural

^1,

the plural, are declined

singular, as well as
is often

joined with

"whosoever;"

CiJ

and U, as

"whatever;"

^$

"whatso-

OF THE UEUIJ'HOCAL

over " und sometimes plurally,

of tiiom?" dualU^f,

muse.

^\

^\

fern.

etc.

RECIPKOOAL I'KOXOITXS.
89.

Reciprocal actions are

"wonl," "nclf," wllh the

expressed by the

^Ju JL-^4 "I

aifixen, UB

despotic influence

which Baitina, the famous chief

a^suHBins, so celebrated in the lunfory of t1u

of

follower**.

of

tlio

Orusjides by tlio
Old man of Iho Mouniain," had over Ms
When this cbic^ftain had become po\v(Tiul and-

ihn

tho

to

terrible

pleased

or in the following* remarkable anecdote of the

myself;"

namo

2101111

surroumlinf? princes,

lu

drew

at

last

the

who sending an amhe ilnin ax^c^ived Mm;

attention of the Sultan Jalhi-d-duula,

baHHador to require Inn wibminftion,

\Vlutn iho umbuKMidor ai>p<ared in liw pr<^(u?(5, ho

Ixiforc

him some

of

hi

called

and giving the nignal to

aid to him, ^S(ab youwelf/ and

pcopl(4

a young man among them,

ho did HO
he* ordered tlwm anotlur to
precipitate himself
from the eatlo, which ho did, and WUB danlicd to
pieces,
;

Thonliowaid to tUp Sultan'n ambaasador, *<)f Hubj(^cts such

as llicfio, flovonty thousand are thun obnervaiit of me let this
:

bo the auHwor. n>

The wordB

in the original arc as follows:

s ss
jli

a*

In

tlio

Lowland Scotch

ffcqticntly heari the expression

dialect

of the Ariglo*Saxon 1

"

tlie

sel

o't/* f*^,

the self of

instead of "Itself/* which last is probably a eon traction of "its

The expressions "tdmsolf" and "thomBolvos"

liave
it/'

self,"

are npparently icor-

OF THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS.

rect, for

the

amendment of which

successfully to substitute

73

the late Dr. Gilchrist laboured un-

"his self* and

"

their selves/' so as to con-

"orm with the Arabic idiom.

(5,

Pronouns are seldom used in the plural

to

express anything

but the feminine singular is substituted in the place of it ;

;
'
ff^a
is the proper expression for "these books/' and not
L~*sJl
ius,
jf*>Jb

rrational
/

? f

<~>~a

_xxLll

'

f>

tyj\*

This obseryation applies also to nouns, as will be more

in the Syntax,
ully detailed

tie

Of
The theme

SKX
root,'*

ju

f'trA

in

named

all

fin*

it,

tlio

ollior

infloxioitn

lottos whirh compose* flo

tlio ^(n"(n

li is

li^ttcTO

on

tin?

from them

?'#

tlio
/r;/^,

hold

root; then
tlio

tlio

of

UK

9L Tho

clcirivativo

vctlw

arc^

Ju^

Antliif.

vf*rh t

The

"
radicals

n
;

to

(Irammftr, when

perplex

formation am! nwanin# of

It

to bo

l.hoiii

by

tlio

learner

tlio rarious

ctmjMjtttwn*) which may

In tlu

root.

wapect

differ

far the bottar plan, in

a ninglo paradigm of a perfect

Biwloul will bo enabled, with

purport of the

<l

the word \yJILlS ("they

"w rvihH n or "letters of

writ'w on

priiniiivo v<rl>al

first plnc<v to <^xplahi fully

48.

fc

\*

fc

clerivativoH, or as lluy foolislily call

onianato from

in

jj^j

conitnoncung their dcHcrijtlion

(liHCiiBBion

an^ (idled

(*oin|)ris(*d

wlili inoftt

ciwfomary

with along

1omg* formed

alroady inonf ion<

roof,

are dmioininadHl

fattoii"),

the

prefixing, inj4orfin#, or witling rmn or more

l>y tlio

**

"the

ilir siinp1os( ?
consisting

IMTSOHH

tlio BOtvilo l(4f(TH \\n\ hav**

and

wliidi in tho thin! person singular inasculhw of

only of radical lotion*;

of

TIT,

of the Arabic vorl>

Pivtcrito touso, as of

from

tlio

primitiye

to tsomprdhend

formations.

oith<r Trllifontl

or Quftdrilitflcul ;

the

OF THE VE&B.

first

75

3^ "he

consisting of three radical letters, as

the other of four, as

divided into
consonants,

as

quiet.

he turned

3 '

"

jjJ

he spoke the truth;

peculiarity of ^* (for

called a

Surd verb, consists merely in the

radical

is

three

of

are also

They

the root consisting

Perfect,

The only

77

^y=^

made;'

strong

"he was

7 '

Js

j^) which

is

also

fact that the third

the same letter as the second, (both coalescing

-=-).

The Perfect and Surd

verbs are also called firm or robust.

All other verbs which

on certain occasions, by tashdld

have one or more of the infirm letters

and

for their

radicals, are called irregular, infirm, or imperfect,

as

JU

3^ "h

went,"

said?" etc.,

j,

"

he

which will be detailed in our next

Section.

IE

a.

triliterals

the

the second
.*

^*

the

^.

letter is called

first

'ain,

and the

Jii ("he made")? as we

verb

third

have

the
the

li

fa

of the root,

*$ lam,

already

because the

stated,

taken as the paradigm of the regular triliteral verb.

*

literal roots,
9

second ain

the model being

the
the

JUs

the

first letter is

ts

quadri-

named fa,

the

the third lam the fast, and the fourth lam the second*

The Arabic Verb has only one Conjugation and like

noun it has throe numbers, the Singular, the Dual, and
Plural
They have also two genders, the Masculine and
;

Feminine.

three
the

usually

In

.-ux

92,

the

is

Their Persons, as in other languages, are

but the third, being the root, precedes the second, and

second the

first.

The

First Person has

singular and plural are of

titc

common

no Dual and both

gender.

All this

OF THE ACTIVE VOICE,

will appear sufficiently obvious from the

under
03*

04
3

into five parts;

arrange, their

moods

and

from tho

tciiBCS differently

below

etc*

The Arabian grammarian**

Iinporativo

paradigm given

TStiropcuiiH, dividing their paradigm

1st, tho Frotorito; 2nd, tho Aorwt; 3rd, the

4th,

the

Partifnplo

and

tho

r>tli
?

Infinitive,

Those, luwovcr, do not exactly wnvspond to cmr moods and

t

oiiacB of

heinp;

thoflu

deiiominutiouH

frequently

parlioular

<%xpr<ss tho Present, while

io

lined

tlm Vn^cTitn in

the

Imih the Pn'S(nt and tho Future^ as well

Aorist
.prf^*iil
UH tho Conditional and other foiwos, as will lus explained
r(

more

04*

at 1ar#o afl.er fho conjugiition of tho 'Pi'rfoct or Hegilar

Wo

now proceed

Regular Arabic VerB,

tho root Jxi

to exhibit

Initli

punuligm of u Perfect
uctivoand paKIve adopting as
u
dld n or "uotixl."
it

"h made/

AOTIVK V
iBt rait

Tho PEETKEITE

Ul

**

he did" or "made,"

I'l'K.

MAM

*"

Jii

3rd

2nd

1st

2nd Part

Tho AOKIHT

l
tf

^\

tf

ho

make,"

mak("

or

or

"

will or

OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.

DTTAL.
MASC.

FEM.

FEM.

SINGULAE.
MASC.

3rd

2nd

1st

"
The IMPERATIVE
make"
^$\

3rd Part

"

or

do thou/ 3

etc.

2nd
TIio PARTICIPLE ^uUlf " tlie

4th Part

maker

J?

or

he who

makes."
PLUllAL.
FEM.
i

or

cj%U

5th Part

V
J*j

KM.

8ING1ILAJR.
MASC,

PEM.

MASC.

The LSTIHITIVE

DUAL.

MASC.

J*i, or

fa

U;

VEEBAL

or

the act of

making"

or

"doing."

PASSIVE VOICE
95.

The Passive Voice has only three

Preterite,

the Aorist,

and the

Participle.

parts,

It

viz.,

the

wants the

imperative and infinitive; but the want of the imperative

may be supplied by a modification of the aorist -with fhe
particle

prefixed, as

^3

him be

"let

assisted."

The

passive preterite differs from the active only in the vowels of

the first and second radical letters
the first
;

damma, and the second torn.

having always

In the Aorist the incre-

mental or servile letters included in the technical word

at the
beginning

always hat

Samna

for their
vowel,

^\
and

or

that of

tlic

Til

PASSIVE VOIfK.

10

second radical

In the following paradigm

always fatha^ as

is

may be

scon

-The PEKTEHITE,

1st Part
ir -\L.
1

MAM

M,

3rd

2nd

1st

2nd rail

TIu* AOUIHT,

Ord
***

<f

2nd
1st

Srd

Tlu

'V

00*

Such

IB

student

is

memory

Ixjforo

the Arabic vorb

^pur

particularly requested

ho procccdn a

thin the more effectually ho

the two followftig" verbs,

separated^

The

The second

diffora.in

iirnt

ntc

may

to

fc

Hirnplc^" "which

commit

lkrflu

write out

in

lu\ b'rolco

g&

procwly

life<v

D^

tin

i(

V'M.,

carefully

In order

r,

tlio

au

to

to do

exercise

andjy

"lie

hi ovory respect*

one Binglo imtatkco, vi^, the towel

of the middle radical of the oorittt active and eoiiseciuoitly
of the imperative throughout

kmm^

not

yi*%

thus jjfat

not jjyJ

etc.,

as will

OF THE PRETERITE.

79

bo more fully explained hereafter.

In

the Passive Voice all verbs have precisely the same

measure,
as in J*5, thus
etc.

g*

jj>,

Observations on the

of the Regular Triliteml Verb.

Tenses,

THE PBETEBITE

The reader may have observed that the

persons of the
Preterite Tense are formed by
adding some sort of termina97.

tion after the radicals.

According to the Arabian gram-

marians these terminations are the

personal pronouns in a

more or

less perfect

and that

cither expressed or
understood;

state,

a good reason

is

mastered the pronouns

why

before

the learner should have

coming

to

The

the verb.

middle radical of tho preterite of several verbs takes

Aasra,
and sometimes $amma, in place of fatha*
Those that take

may be * either
transitive, as 1U "he knew.'
^
transitive, as ty "he was glad," ^j^ "he was sad."
Jcasra

or in-

'

verbs as take
are always of

"
ugly," ^Li.
a.

There

for the

is

damma

Such

for the middle radical of the preterite

an intransitive or

nexxter sense, as -*J

"

he was

he was handsome."

this difference in

meaning between neuters with kasra

middle radical, and those that have

damma^

viz.,

the former

denotes an accidental state or condition, and the latter a state that

is

constant or hatural
X,)V

cause
of the

^3
first

"

thus ^jZ~
*>

he was deformed

"

he was sad" from some accidental

"

naturally*

In

all

verbs the vowels

and third radicals of the Preterite are always fatha*

80

OF THE

There are some verbs that have two, or even

b.

middle radical of the Preterite

for the

of difference In the signification; thus,

juu

"ho

"lie was contented ;"

jus,

^jJ

"
it

was cultivated

When

"

"

or

built;"

"ho hogged humbly"

J^i "ho lived long'"

inhabited."

ihird radical of the rroteritc

flic

the three

all

but each with a shade

to he

happens

cj

and the appended termination begins with c^% the two wimilar
naturally coalesce by
x

JB
IB

cu

It

docs not

c^w

and

own form

it

*3

3,

The

Baino

t, or

^j

which havo an

fe,

Unia, c^Ju-i for c^d-o:.

tashdld with
!Jrd

tlio

of

If thn

ilia

when

In I)e Hacy'rf

Jinl

fh<

Urn

third

tt

Int.

^\

**

(jnuniauiro Aralw/'

in

either

to tlw* letter

third radical bo

(<Tininulion of

person sinmilar
^
radical

Round

affinity in

person plural fomiuino, an T^l for

d.

In

applies

the third radical

c-? of the termination, but the Cj

ulJ mnkra

rule

waimw* when

In like

<*fc.

^ O X

c^iJ

(him uu*J in the lind person

singular

by tmhdld with tho

unites
allot

letters

<*

uLj

written

ttt&Jidld,

inert

il

coalesces by

plural and the

pwoti

<\IH.

wu

are, at

thk stage

of the

work, treated with fifty or sixty pagcm Hvo, on the various idiomatic
uses of

the

altojffithcr

and Aoriat ToimoH.

Praterite

prcpoftloroiw

as

thd

subjoct

Syntax, to which wo accordingly potpown

THK

Such a

ovidonily

discussion

belongs

to

10

the

It*

ACJEffiT.

08. Tlui AoiiHf gonoraHy corropoiute to our

prosont

and frequently

to

our future.

olMiorvcd in thn paradigm,

It

fonnod,

as

may

from the preterite by prefixing

the different porflotw, one or other of the latter*

and by adding one or moro of

tlus

name

cy

or

bo
to

^,

a* terminations

OF THE AORIST.

The
in

the

of

the

have

serviles

prefixed

2nd and

1st,

3rd

quadriliterals,

Aorist

fatha,

excepting

derivative

formations

verb,

hut

"

excepting I*J

"he

the

and the primitive form of the

where they take damma.
If the second

trilateral

the

constantly
of

radical of the preterite has

in

81

it

kasra

if

it

damma,

is

it

remains also damma

to

changed

fatha,

was pleasant," L!^>- "ke thought/' JJj

"

despaired/' Jl*J

^Uj "he excelled/

it

dried/

kJ

3'

and (j
"he appeared;
which may he
with fatfra or Jcasra and even sometimes
pronounced either
ox
f ^^^
ox
fst"'
y fus
?
p /ox

"he

despaired/

"

/>

with damma^

But

if

as *x>

**^>

or

**ej

so J*ojb

J^ij

or

second radical takes fatha in the preterite it is

the

changed in the Aorist to damma, as

d^

"he

wrote/' L^^iu

cly? "he struck/' cl>/^i J unless the second or

third radical is a guttural letter, in which case, though it is
or to kasra, as

barked,"
^

jiL"

XX*

by the

XOX

"he presented/' **& and in the same manner with;

out a guttural
fused,"

"

sometimes remains fatka, as ^j

he
;
Ji,S 'ho entered, ^oi; J^i "he occupied/
it

frequently changed,

^U

'^J>j

The

serviles

1,

"he

leant upon,"

last radical

U3

sometimes dropped.

^,

or

The

^7, and

has damma, but

it is

^"1

when

"he

re-

followed

sometimes changed, and

Aorist, however,

when preceded by

certain particles, admits of several variations in the termina-

which are classed under the grammatical

Apocope, Antithesis, and Paragoge,

tion,

a.

The rules applicable

to

heads of

the middle vowel of the Aorist, and

DJ consequence of the imperative, are neatly expressed in the following

nemorial couplet

11

OF THE AOK1ST.
"

(on the

medial of the
may be freely rendered 1 Fatlm
lw*m (as ihe medial of tlio aorW); 2, /< a^
preterite) may give
4, /itfsrn
1)0 botli /<//////*
may
may give (kim^a; 3. Tlioy may

which

give*

fatha

8.

&*M

struck."

ull(1

oxampW;

I'UIT.

IM'tV.

"

&

in the six following

damma,;" us

"He

w*y

!'**'>

'Ml'.

'

AOIHST.

I'Hia.

lie assisted."
I

"
IJc^

Uii

oponccL"

t*

$\\

r/^i

"lloknow."
s

"

IIo coimtod."
j

"Ho

was generous."

^i

90. Apocope^ wlii^lt)

a pant

sigjiilloutiou,

mdiciul

Bpcuikiii^ givcnn tlie Aorist

gonmlly

not only ecmvorlH iho ///iw/^ of

infoyww,

Init

(juiw

off tho iinul

Tho

>tms in lh<^ IVminiiu* plural

Hiou

tliiB

apocope are

r-?i

no1/ ui

(WTywhcre^

i>rlu*UH which

occa5

iu>t y<t, 1

the

"no, not/

and

'^1

J wlion pr^fixcnl i,o iho Aorint in an imiwrutive

"ho did not uHHiBf/* may answer u a jpnural oxumplo.
HUIIHO:

RtNOULA.tt*

r^.

J
/o*'

fe*

J*^ J
/""

4
'

ep f

jeti f

OF THE AOKIST.

To the above

a.

and

UK

"whoever;"

t^rl

may

particles

UK

"all that,"

83

be added the following

"whatever;" along with

"every time that;"

"wherever;" ^J\ "howsoever;" Uj

UuL,

JZ

and

its

"
:

^\

"
if;

compounds

^,

and

"however;"

'

"as

' s

x-

^^ and

often as;" Utal,

<f

poetry

when

131

"

"
;

x-^

^\A "when," "whenever;" and

in

provided, however, another verb in the retributive

sense (as

whatever you will do,

sentence.

If both verbs are of a future signification,

they conform

to this rule

alone

only the

if

j-^a3

"

subjoined in the same

is

either this, or the

general rule;

thus,

whatever you will do, I will do ;" t^Jc^ *J^u I*

'
^
' t"* '
? '<"?
^Ox-X.X
-TIT
T 1.
1

whatever you will do,

"whatever you

do")

that does the same, but if the last

first

future, it follows

'is

<^*a\
((

I will

did,

did

'*

%^\ ui^^^

or %-**\ L^^CX?

This rule holds good also

will do."

an imperative precedes, to which the future

is

responsive;

when
thus,

"
assist

S^ul C 5i/^

100. Antithesis,
cuts off the final

damma

me,

by
M3
^

the influence of another set of particles,

same m^nngr, and changes the

*

in the

ft*

of the third radical to fatha.

means, not at all;" J,

order

I will assist thee."

"
to,

because;"

until."

Also

t^J

31,

^^^

$,

iJ,

lest not, so as

when

^JllT cJ^LJ ^

14,

not

SLfl

assist

byno

that, in

u
;" ^\

or;"^

me, and I will

assist

a preyou;"
3'

it

JLSUJT

as
implies "and at the same time,
"
do not eat fish, and at the same
S

J$
X

time drink milk ;" and also

/

are ^1

prefixed to a future, referring to

ceding word, tL5^?3U ij*v\

likewise ^

Q^^t^U^ u

^ These

ox

^\
Wr

.,

or Ut
j,

well! do so! come

OF THE AORIST.
X f

on! ?J

etc,:

**/

^j ^

he

-will

by no means

assist/' is here put

for a general example*

tf

10L Paragoge

adds to tho Aorist Jy

or ^~ (but this last
is added only in the singular, and in the
plural masculine and
"
u
it
when
donotos
common}*
communding/' wiHlung," in1

treating/' or "awking aliout futurity/ in the

manner

following,

For example, when preceded by the particle jl, which has

BO equivalent in English, Intt corn^poudw to tlus Latin an? or
num? it will be as follows ^J^ JA u will ho assist?"
:

>JX AMPLE,

IW4L*

BlMGtlJUft,

jJ^W
Jto

The

^^^J

to

tlio

where the

X/W

would to God/ of c., requires

to be
ingular of the AoriHt and to tlia plural masculine
</

common;

i*Jt*0*J iJ^

Jfe

particle w-^S

added
ancl

>

as

single

X ?***

<*

^/w ^W
^ merely

mdioal ehangod int

is

would

to Clod lie

added, and tho

would

assist/

of the

last

OP THE IMPEKATIVE.

EXAMPLE.
SINGULAR
MA8C

3
2
1

mode may be

After this
tf

x/Ox x
8

assist;" uj^^'

inflected

Ox /Ox

cc

and ^^atf
$ x

JC

^s

and

liJ "

''

x
St

t>x

let

'

Mm

do not assist;" orwlien pre-

'C5-O--'

ceded by an oath as
^/^j <d!l^ "by G-od he will assist;"
"
or
&}
then by God we will kill."
?

y&

102.

The Aorist

preceded

by the negative

^
him who

withal, as \L

jj%\&

ox-

$ x

"When these

at all," together

which

^ '^ji

however, takes

is

when

with the

also often the case

"for

we

will not

moyed for'him who weeps."

place only when neither of the

negative particles J, UJ ? or
before.

(JL;

laments, nor be

This effect of

a future signification

"not

ili^l, and

particles tli^,

pity

is restricted to

have occurred in the phrase

rules do not

operate, or

when

the

indefinite is preceded by
it beaomes a
,
present tense :
Ox X O XX O^X^X-O,? X
X t/xCX Ox
"
btj^ t^33
he who ^hall do that
l;b <uLaj uJuJ Uife

& X

<**

Jw

maliciously and turjustly,

we

will punish him,

by

fire/'

OF THE IMPEBATlVE,
103*

The Imperative, which

is

used only in the second

person, corresponds with our Imperative in affirmative com-

80

OP THE PAKTWII'LK A<TIVM.

rnands and exhortations.

Like the Aorist It sometimes adds

"
do thou assist 7? etc
Faragogical nun annexed, as ^aj

tlie

This mood

is

tlie

*o

and written
a sentence

formed by prefixing
called
when another word precedes.
!

WJicu beginning

"know thou;"

has always /wra, as ^Ul

it

<d!f of union

cL.I|

"strike thou;" unless the vowel of the penult radical, which

"

/)**</$/*

is
1

always the same with that of

last

as

takes tjamma^

also

radicals

^\

being

or

uro

Juiuiv, be </am/n(i, when

"aaslnt

Tho

inert

dropped when cJ

the*

thou;" tho

initial

in

alff

of tho gondorw and nuinlxtrs, iho final smiles

wo have

used, as

ftfafed,

sometimes

In tho formation

jm .fixcd
fc

are employed as in tho Aorist.

and

first

1,

^j

^,

The Imperative

only in tho Nee.ond

and

"being

ptjrnou, tho other

ly the Aorist; J with a frnmt being

u
as
lot us assist;
J4x3 "let him asmttt;" J^4

porsons are Biipplied

prefixed,

which

35

HomctimoB the easo wtlh <ho wtoond, aB

Jj4!3
M but tho
"assist thou;
//ww anil becomes inert
J drop*
#^ <-^
^
^
when uJ or ^ is prefixes!, UH ^o^U u then lot him aHiHt;" J
IB also

itself

being oven then Homof imon omitted.

singular of tho Impc^nttivo of

thc^

The second

primitive verb

roproontod by an indcoli nuble word of tho form

"
thus
3^ or JJJ alightrtliou."
OF THE FAKTICIPLE AOTIVB
104,

Tho

(ill

in

person

sometimes

Jl*i or

jQ;

NOUN OF AOBNCY.

participle of tho primitive

tniitml v<rb

in the

active voice

IB

form Jytt*,

Tlu^n
^

partioitlctrly

of the form Jail

1

***

J^i and

and in

tlio

passive of the

however many other forms; and

are
4

^J/j

whirh ure

hotli active

and

OF THE INFINITIVE OR VERBAL NOUN.

It has

to these participles that

been objected

they are merely

verbal adjectives, conveying no idea of time.

however, that they are rather of

context,

"God

is

in

the following

would seem,

It

times, according to the

all

as

87

-ox

s
\AJ

^jjU^

instance,

^a*

f&^a ^
<di

what they do," where Jl^J evidently

seeing (sees)

time.
expresses present

OF THE INFINITIVE OK VERBAL NOUN,

The

105.

Infinitive, in Arabic, differs

somewhat from the

same part of the verb in most European languages

inasmuch

always a verbal noun, and generally declinable in the

It is used often adverbially in the
singular as a triptote.
as it is

accusative case, and,

by

a peculiar idiom,

with

its

own

in construction

to the expression,

striking/' ie.,

"he

Mr. Richardson,,
"

a.

thus

is

verb, to give a greater energy

2 literally,

struck

joined sometimes

"he

struck

him

Mm severely,"

in las Arabic

Grammar, and of course Ms mere

that the Infinitive (in Arabic) differs greatly from those

"
of all other languages
This is too sweeping an assertion, and
copyists, say

besides, it contains three bits of

or illogical; 2nd, it is untrue;

to speak in this style of

and

"

all

nonsense

and 3rd,

1st, it is

it is

ungrammatical

absurd in any one

other languages,"

man

In Greek, German,

employed as a verbal notra

Italian, the Infinitive is frequently

just as it is in Arabic*

5.

The

Infinitives

of the primitive transitive verbs are formed

regularly, as 3**> etc., in the

are irregular,
tions.

and reducible

Grammarians make

but those of the intransitivea

rule,

without innumerable excep-

paradigm
to

no

in all thirfy-aix different forms, as under;

OF

<j.

The

TifJ'J

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS.

Infinitive of the derivative intranwUvf'H are formed in a

similar manner,

the general

iimorthig fho charof winf Je Mrviloa, and observing

by

rules,

IIH

hi

the?

otlnsr InllecJicmH*

They

arc, however,

subject to various irreguluriiieH, fir attaining a kriowlinlge of which, a

dictionary

is

the simplest mode,

and indeed tlw only proper

guide.

OF TUB DBRJYATJVB FOEMAT10NH,

100. Thero

atro

from thn primitives

in fall

or

and tho

Imn

Iwolvo

cliBlinot

triliteral

formalioim of

The

lagfc

<lrivo<i forma, all of

vorl)

wo havo jut

which

)>oar

Homo

dorired'
detailed
affinity

close to the primitive, aro dividtul into three

according as they aro augmented by one, two, or three

of the Berrila letters.

The verb Jxf

ho mado,"

is still re-

OF THE DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS,

89,

It is well adapted to serve as

tained as a general paradigm.

a model, as its three radical letters are so clearly perceptible

to the eye.

The Derivative Formations are

107.

inflected precisely

the same principles as the primitive form

the same relation to the leading

It will

paradigms have

s ss

to J*3

tense, as those
x

x-Ox

J*i and

9 s<*?

J*i> etc.

be only requisite, therefore, in place of swelling the

grammar unnecessarily
paradigms, to give the
it

the persons having

word in each

in the foregoing

on

to the learner,

with, a great

first

number

word alone

of every tense, leaving

of exercise, to

by way

which he may find

of whole length

fill

up the other

be a considerable help to his

memory, as tending to make a more lasting impression than

persons,

several cursory readings.

to

Of the

Derivatives, the 3rd, 4th,

and 9th formations in general appear to occur most

frequently, and therefore ought to have the greatest attention
6th, 7th,

bestowed upon them.

formations
last,

are

ISText to these are the 1st, 2nd,

and 5th

whilst the other four, but more especially the two

more confined in their

lowing formations
;hat letter in

which take

use.

The

servile

3rd, 6th,

and the

fol-

in the beginning, drop

the aorist and participle, as

may be

observed in

he paradigms; and the 4th and 5th, where the initial is ;,

requently omit the latter in those persons of the aorist whose
Characteristic is

able of

^all

cj, as Js^j

formal

We

have subjoined a

the formations of the Derivative Verbs, in which

he student will see at one view the third person singular of

he preterite and aorist of ea$i
f

the second person singular

the imperative as well as the participles and infinitives,

12

OF THE DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS.

PRIMITIVE FORM.
tSttS.

IMP.

I'AHT.

MUUST.

PKBT,

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS,

II,

m.

lv

iv.

J*lj

ta.

i-

Jxbb,,

V. V!

JsU?

J,^\

ui

Jl

VT

vii.

y>

VIII.

**

D
JIM

ix. I

X.

II.

OF THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

General Significations

of

the

to

the Primitive.

108. It remains for us

Derivative

now to

91

Verb

with reference

describe briefly the nature and

peculiarities of the Derivative Formations of the

Verb which

may be deduced from the primitive triliteral root. These are

generally reckoned to be twelve in number, or, according to
some Grammarians, fourteen.

They have

all

the same termi-

nations or inflections as the primitive verb.

Grammarians

very improperly call them conjugations ; but this term is apt

to mislead the student, whose ideas of a conjugation are
already formed according to the general usage of the Latin

and French grammars, etc.

then, when he hears of the
language, for there
to

Let not the student be alarmed,

fifteen conjugations of the Arabic

is in
reality

our notions of the term.

but one conjugation, according

Instead of conjugations, then, I

have here throughout made use of the term Formations.

a.

Upon

the various significations of the different derived forma-

tions of the verb,

but,

some grammarians have entered

these inquiries need not long occupy the

especially at the present

here

made

will not be

into long details

curious investigator,

although well worth the notice of the

attention of the student,

The

stage

of his studies.

found

without use, but

it

brief remajta
is

only

'"by

reading and consulting the dictionary, that a knowlodg^ cm fte

gained of the true significations of the various formations. /However

minute might be the observations made upon the

of the derivatives,

we should

only be learned by use

ticular formations, in

still

find

many

exceptions,

and the same must be

wMeh

my $$m wb

different

is

meanings
which can

said as to the par-

to

be fowd.

Some

92

OF THE IRRITATIVE VEUB.

met with

roots are to be

none in

in only one formation,

most

all,

The

101),

teuso of

source, or third person singular, of the preterite

tltc

their vowel

fathufw

consists, as

primary verb,

of throe consonants, the

when

general rulo,

lust of

and the middle

tlie

and

first

verb

Is

we have

**

letter

IK).

The,

derivative

first

lrauttitiv<* 7

in

the preceding

(lie

wrote/* "becHmtes in the

lirsi

was

to

wri<e/

csr

tivo; thus, ^y*

voxcd.'

lew

vorbrt

of thin

object,

tlnift,

fromyi"
"

which

^Ignlfidi

comofi

4^Ai5

tlie

firnt

formation

in transi5

he maddened/ or "he
fommtion are derived from

prod wo whaiovcr

formed

pecmllurity of

-L

flic

"ho

noun

made

formation

thifl

infidolily,"

comcn the

infinitive
*

ndllii^ one 101 infidol;" BO from

"iieciisliig

is

of the primitive root to a given

/
j-^J,

Oj^" lying,"

one of iUI^Jiood," or "giving

Tartu in tho fink formation

aw

t.

*"

the lie"
a,

"lie

is

FJU!," u ji-

ciimo
#

d^

thtw,

Anchor

tho ascribing of the

primitive root

root

thn, from JJA "liread,"

broad, or baked."

three

Again, whon the

noiin, and signify to form or

significss;

fc

"lie

^tmiRlit wrlling."

ho was

"he

formation c-^K whic'h nuanfl

a neuter or infrauHitivi* verb,

thus, <Uc

doubles the middle

wntHtd

f*4iiiHecl

either

roat."

If tlu

is

and

asa

vowels are ahvayn

Itn

tallies

fornuition

fn\st

lie

formation

and

letter of the primitive roof,

fafhttx,

Ct

always

has/%

trunsitivo or active

was sad" Jju

lie

"before stated

which have

or dfiMMu vvhon neuter or intransitive

IB

are in several

frequently, however,

one

OP THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

synonyms of the primitive,

or only distinguished

as a species of intensives

as

"he separated"

its

"

or

J^

and*

"

by being understood

he broke,"

Jl^

jj

and

jy

dispersed/' etc.

The second formation inserts

111.

and

93

alif after the first radical,

vowels are always three fathas, as in the

table.

It is

generally transitive, and often denotes a reciprocal action

f
J><J

"

4^

Paul heat Peter/' implying, at the

same time, that "Peter beat Paul in retnrn;" and, in an

thus, {juja*

Jj!

intransitive sense, as JJ^j &&\5

(juj&

tl^

Paul;"

"he wrote to"

"

Peter sat down with

"

or

corresponded

with'

(another person).

The second formation has frequently the

a,

signification

of the

primitive, with this difference, however, that the indirect complement

which in the'original form demanded the

intervention of a preposition, becomes here a direct complement and
of the primitive triliteral root,

meets the verb immediately ; thus,

form the preposition

i^x

verb; as
if

HL,x

^\

^^O
tlsXil

s x

L^

before the indirect

9

x"

]\

Ox /

and 3^j have in the original

complement of the preceding

'

''

"

c^-^

Now

wrote a letter to the king."

we here employ the second formation, the person

to

whom we

write

becomes the direct complement, and dispenses with the preposition

J\
^1

thus,

c<Uff uJj&

sent to the Vazir/'

"he

sat

form

as

for its

* *o

^ILLJI

this

112.

"

yJ^T

So with

down," in the third form

x

one

and

-^

cLlll;

wrote

to the

king,"

intransitive verbs al$o; >a(

j^
signifies, to sit

down

x x

sat down
^U-xO*"he
x
^o xO

near the Sultan*'

llfcifhe first
'

x/"

would be

The

third formation prefixes

vowels three fatho

alif,

and

as in the table.

it

has always

Like the

first

04

OI

it

formation,
tivo

given a causal or adive signification to the

"ho taught writing," or " Jto dictated

cl^

thus,

THE DERIVATIVE VERB,

made another

\vrilo;" HO, from

"ho

*!&

wa.s

?J

or

gwit," comes

Mi<jdwm<<l(unolh<V)to bo groat," thai isjio honoured"

u
"
or
ho, ivsp<Hjto<l
It will ^o
(another!
observed, then as
a gonorai rulo, that tho first and thh\l fMnnutions are the
Jos!

eauwiLs of

Thi fourth fonwdiou, whleh profixostlio

1 111

fo tlio

&ftt//tt()

sul)iui,xsivo

taught
,!

priiuilivo frilittTal rooL

tli

n
;

formal iou

linst

soimo of
s

iUf

"lio

run

llto

was

gouorally of

IH

thus,

tjiughl," or

*b

a
lic

loiter ci? 3 wltli

flio

pussivo or

know;"

Icniniod"

lic^

Bo,' from

lli^lie

4C

n
n or u
c^o! ^nuuincTs,'
iiionil^
poliio ]iiora(itn^ comes the
H
infinitivo of t!io first iormafiun w^^jV
foaohhig nuumors"
u
1

<

formation w^JU

liionoo

unrl

clia{iHoiiiont;"

<o lu

HubmiHin#
format ion

TIu* fifth

<lio

of

infinitives

tho fourth

faii;iit tiiu

pn*fix<s cj, with a /r//w- to the

?

ft

cloiiofoH

gf*nc*nillj

*'

^Llf

thus,

layiitg <jah oilier

<u

Ur*

;itnig*

ourh

DjUu

otlu r;"
i

u
i!ghtiug

eta

togi*ili<T,'*

So

w^fUj

*ho <*<>m*Hpondtl Cby writing);

with" (HOIUO onoj*

(i

"" '

fc

aHHocuttiou

nc-i]>ro(5ity, t'o-jwrtiuTHhip, or

'/,**"'

Lastly,

il

may

of thn primitive; 1lius T Ji;UJ

1 '

u^Hy

lw

played

u
<l<*nol<

prc^tomimjj," the

u
lio

or?

fignc>cl
^

at

wi

<mitH

Tho

tfc

h5 Hlmum?(l Abram;" HO from

1 u

J^W

prittcitclirtg

igtiorunoo."

sixth formation prefixes the

nyllablo

motj which

is

o/

Jf>-

them pr<moim<v>rl with thiw

to the

OF THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

it

whatever

may have

95
This formation

Originally been.

is

it
always of a passive signification; hence, strictly speaking,
in the passive form; thus, J12 "he broke;"
is never used

'^i\

LJLu\

"it was broken ;" so the infinitives,

j&\

changed,"

"being

being broken," are altogether passive in

signification.

11G.

The seventh formation

(sometimes

j or k) between the

may be

as

triliteral,

prefixes

first

and

^,

and second radical

seen in the table.

cj

inserts

of the

Generally speaking,

or reflexive senso of the primitive

it denotes the passive
"it went to
"he divided;"
triliteral root; thus,

jpl

j>y

pieces;" cl^J

"ho beat;"
hence the

etc-);

agitation,

"he

JJa%\

beat himself" (in

infinitive iJ\)&*\

"perplexity."

Sometimes it denotes reciprocity, etc., like the fifth formation; thus,

lllsJU "mutual contention;"

Q*$*r\ "collecting

together."

a.

by
"

<3

whenever the

in the root

first letter

o, j, or j

is

"
he was repelled,"

written ^jl

is

where the radical J

comes J >

"*" ^
or ,^^31

(f

it

changed into

is

was dyed/'

for

Jo t , or
,

when the

first

]*

radical

and
is

]S> ,

3&\

^>

thus, for \j>&

j>\, where

is

supplied

the J be-,
A

first letter

of fto

changed into t
-"

it

was ptinted/'

for

it is

first

by tmhdld.

as

^x

j4^l

ia which instance the t

joined to the

cx>, Jt or

or

cu

the

is

<J,

is

was recorded"^,

"When the

,1^" a
L^l ^W

he was unjustly treated/' for

changed into

it

forJ&Jrt

where both remain.

root is one of these,

also

cy

In this seventh formation the place of the servile

is

Lastly,

changed into cu, and tto

OF THE DERIVATIVE VERB*

9t5

"

two CL/S mute by tasAdld, as cLwl

The

for uLCsyl,

s
sJ\
for
*

and tenth formal ions

'designate colours
"
the tonth with more intensity; tJiun
yQ it was yollov "
Those* fonnjttions are also
JlC\ "it was very yollow."
117.

eiglith

used

for

expressing deformity, us
<

,"

"

or

^\

ho was
^1^1
he had a distorted face ;" Xp\ "it was crooked."

118, Tlie ninth formation prrfixc^ ei^J to the

primitive
fin gc^iK^ral
roof, as }i(\ni iu the table,
IB
property
asking
winhingj CM* doman<Ung, the state or action expressed bytho
?

primitlvo;

thus,

pardon*"

This

formation

3)omd<
ri*))

"

ruti vo V(rl>H,
<

such as

vrah

I"

^wr//>,

bail

my

ho

"he

pardoned;" y&cD
agrees

nearly

with

the

begged
Latin

formed from the Hoooud Kiipine

by adding
a
f desire to
eat,," from em; HO
cmaturio,

nupper," from wrrwtu.

For u

full account

of the YurloiiH HiwdoH of inouning peculiar to the dorivatire

formutionH of the Verb, the reader

Oj

may commit

Dr. Lnmsden's

and Ambic (Jmmmar^uK well as Do Saoy' Grammaire

whore the Hubjoet in nbHohitc^ly

1 10. "The*,

but Heldom,

eleventh and twelfth formations, which occur

only employed to heighten the cmorgy of the

"
primitive, an we do by adding
exceedingly,** "very," or
0me Hucli Hynonyinou word thus, from ^ct " it was harsh/
"
Is formwl
^jL^\ It WHB vory harrfi from iaL "ho adhered/
are,

**

***/***

^Ut

ho adhorcui firmly"

hcmon^ figurntivoly,

n
taking.

(to the

"ho rtwmotwly

nock of his eamel):

prosecuted

Ms

under-

OP THE DERIVATIVE VERB.

120.

"We now come to the Passive Voice of the Derivative

Yerbs, and for the sake of variety

"
the verb^aJ
after

he assisted."

we

will adopt as our

now lead

It cannot

we have fully detailed the model Jil

in
only to bear

mind that the three

taken the place of uJ

g,

letters

to

model

any mistake,

The student has

^ ^ and j, have

and J respectively.

PASSIVE VOICE.
PEBTEBITE,

PAETICIPLE,
Six'?

FORMATION*
I.

I
ft

II.

III.

LfJ^t*^

IV.

V.

Mtd

'VI.

VII.

0^0-

IX.

XL
XII.

student
/he

VIII, and

sive

Voice*

may

observe that

we have in

X* formations, which, from

the above table omitted

their nature, have

no Pas-

OF THE ur.UMILlTKIUL VKRiL

98

On

Qna/lrllltenil

Verls.

121. Of these there are only three different formations

from the primitive which

of the trilitorals

the

first

itself

corresponds with the

primitive

(iuadrilitowl formation agrees

-with

the fourth trilitoral;

tho Bocoud with tho sixth;/ and

third with tho eighth.

They

formation jSalJ;

derivative ^klu

Tho primitive

tMrdJkls'L
cals, us

first

^j^A

fonnution

in

formed as follows

tire

primitive

second jLtlil; and

consists simply of tho four

ho turned, or ivvolvwi;"

augineirfml l>y ou<

fc

<TviI<*,

the

tlio

an

radi-

font doriyod

Tj>^jj

"it vas

"
;
turned;" and the H0<'ond and third by (wo, us lx p.1 it was
U
n "Inn
!M> was horror-stnusk
tmnultuotiH ;" iJSol
hair stood
,

-*

y,

on end"

a. Tliin npocicH of vcrhn, howovifr, bonra

tho trflitral, occurring but wlflow.

fore to detain

Mm

ilia

Th<To

Jennet lunger upon Iho

v^try Btuall proportion

will bo

Hiilyaii

no occasion

than junt

with the leading word** of ouch totMc, UH In

triliterals; tho other jiersonH

priuciploH,

by

tho,

addition

being ioileclnd from

tho

JPOKM.

tliere-

to present
dcriyative

oa

of tho servile characteristics,

described*

to

the same
already

ME

OF

QUADRIIOTERAL VEEB*

99

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS.
PARTICIPLE

INFINITIVE

IMPERATIVE,
t-x

AOKIST.

PEET,

FORMATION,

XXOxx

/-x

I.

II.

>*St
Passive

III.

Voice.

PRIMITIVE FORM.
PAETICIPLE,

AOKIHT,

/x

w?

PRETEEITE,

DERIVATIVE FORMATIONS,
I.

II.

III.

t>.

sties

5nd,

The observation made,

!

and

108, frith regard to the initial character-

e->, in the deriyatire yerbs, answers likewise to the 1st,

and 3rd of the above formations*

122. In concluding
Terfy

must

offer

my

descriptions! the Perfect Arabia

a few observations on

those poi&fe in

have differed from preceding -vmtera. In the first

>lace I have deviated from them
entirely in the arrangement
nd jnode of treatment of the subject ; secondly, I have disrhich. I
?

arded the term Future Tense from the paradigm, and instead
bereof?

hav

tiled the

word Aorist

as the

more appropriate

00

OF THK QrADHiLITKIlAL YLIM5.

and

haw

lastly,

dLHmisscd from

the term Con-

the HOHSO hitlurlo employed in Arabic

hi

jugation, which,

my work

grammar** mid lexicons,

downright absurdity aud to be

tolerated only hwinso writers on the su1>j<o1 have not had the
moral courago lo substitute a inorr appropriates denomination,
T

Hlittll

a,

most probably be lold by

that these,

innovations of inin<

poriiHiiig tho

of

in

is

adopt an innovation of any

in

if

ato in

IIH

GoluiH,

rt *

HH(\

nnd partly from

"ho WHS

iJ

IV,

miluto<l/*

"

II

"
lie*

'*

lit*

roiy,

aeffjitini

**ln

**

conj,

or plurJ

(diiii!

"liti {oiicbfd

of

Mwa/*

Owy

H{>/'

Now

wifii!

imifli* jiciicw

if

to

eiiiitpilft

froylng^H edition

II* <*tnj,

**

h*

WUH
on

of

luatte secure

frl^iidHltip

with

lu^mutH* u

Hiwlim,"

unotlier,"

a MuHlim-"

nuult*

X
w

"h

T.
VI,

with uuothor." VIlLconj,

or

itdii

an Arable
^

4J

lcxicoE

would Htuwl nn iolkiwn: vw. A%a (Aor. i.)

"
hn wiw af**, HOtmdp" cite. I.
a Ini^ki'i/* {r*,

nrtwJ<!
eoriiiracti?!

(sn-oallod) conjugations

with hbf imnti or lips th<* **awt bliiek staiiu in the temple
"
X* **mj. lift wiinnitie4 luinw,*!!* to tlt jow<*r of another;"

"hu gavo UiwwlF

^*

its

inmh* |H'JUP or

or r<*(M'ivod;"

to

that

IwHiH, for drawing water;"

ho ^ulmufttnl or tl*vMl;*'

<jcmj.

CQj

foii^fruflfil a

Hnf<% f'oua*!, or unbifini,*'hr<L"

"
lit*

lit*

edition

ecmvmeml

fool

SttlwlrihV V<i<ubulary

**

(Fuk

JU*M

coniiiBion in

H Frcyta^H

from

sHjjhfly uliriflgocl

tape

us for trample* take the

I^ot

following vorlml root with wtich of

lo

mtt llio v<*ry last person

sorl tut!< M %s

u niiioiuil iinprovf^nout.

u of the red

hi a iHonuait that their

flii'in

trrntniflli'S,^

uflorly

loud

will

lexicons, stidi

ran jr<>v' to

cti<%

(jcilin,^

objcdlon

lu*st AraJiln

pnthim

the

"kfi

OF THE SUED VERB.

"

made

he

J~j

tion,

made

saluted."

II.

x^i

IV.

JuuJ

f.

III,

etc.
x x

"he

submitted
V.

etc.

accepted,"

f.

'

obeyed/'

JUj

(dual or plur.)
XXX" O

'

peace
"they mutually made XX
X
C.

IX.

etc.

touched,"

or

xx x x

"he

power of another/'

or

friendship."

^J[X "he

f.

>

"he

surrendered himself into

Here the reader

etc.

VII.

C,

Ja^xJ,

f.

he

>

*U

f.

"

JL

f.

xxt.,-

peace/*

etc.

"he

secure/'

101

the

what

will observe that

Freytag and others call the Second Conjugation, I call the First

and so on with the

Formation

Roman Numerals

from Freytag's
hare

my numeral which

versd, if

if

denotes the Derivative Formation ; and, wee

numerals, you will have the good old

to

my

you think

it

of any advantage to you.

if

you drop a unit

denoting the Conjugation, you will

you add a unit

conjugation,

c.

In short,

rest.

cannot help drawing the reader's "attention to a very serious

omission on the part of Freytag in his otherwise invaluable Lexicon.

The work abounds in certain Latin abbreviations, such as

struitur
etc, etc.

cum

accusativo;" ccga, "construitur

together with some

complain of

is,

quarto volumes-

my

con-

cum gemino accusative,"

thirty or forty others.

at least in

that

"

cca.

Now

what

copy of Freytag's Lexicon, in four

the learned Professor has nowhere condescended to

the abbreviations aforesaid.

give one scrap of information respecting

Whether he has been more

his abridged edition I

am

attentive to the learner's convenience in

not able to say, as I have not got the work

%

at hand.

Of
n

the

123.

Surd Verb

<(

The term Surd is applied to

and

for

S*

doubled."

such, triliteral verbs as

the second and third radicals the sama; thus, JS for^/

"

f>

**SH, also catted cJ^U*lt, ie,

he extended/' axe

called Surds.

"

he

In

hare

fled,"

all

the

IOH

OF THIS SUltB

VJBiti;.

Arabic grammars that 1 have yet BOOH (and 1 have seen

several)

is, T think, very Improperly placed

among
Now tho seeming irregularity is

thin class of verbs

the irregulars.
nic

and

IB

really eupho-

reducible to a few tdmplo rulos, as follows.

the lulled IOBB where, according to

tlic

porfoct irililiTal verb, thn last radical

radical coalesces with

the penult

has /#;#,
the

for

latter,

fleet

is tlioii

tlio

last

In

conjugation of the

movable the penult

by tanhtfid) and the vowel of
in

Huppimswl, unless the

letter

preceding

then tho vowel of tho penult radical

whioli would otherwise havey/cw.

in

In

^^^

son singular and nwse.ulino of the preterite,

tense

in

the

all

in-

jam

ho

lovod/'

but the neeond person singular of tho same

regular; UH u^v-^ OF cu**>.

fn

to

conjugated regularly; thus in tho third per-

are,

become** L^>>

it

given

ions where, on the contrary, the last radical lias

thoHo verhn

all

tho third

pwHou of

*"

r<

tho niiigulur

thou

liant

nMMuHn

loved."

of the

aorist

contracted into

to tho

firnf.;

tho <}ttmiu(t of tho B**ond radical

u^x!*

in phtoo of Its jttttn*

If tim

sorM

follows a
J?

particlo precluding

tho

jfer//f,

rmlicttl

litttt

or an uporope,

having

jfi,:w,

In vorlw of

Ing^Wj Jw for^yb.
4fefii4ki

toHo

bc'nrn

j,

&*

<*ont

tfiiifi,

<hi,MMn
*

iijt(*iid of

or oven %uJ

the*

motion lakes
Xv//*m.

may

^^xr*
place,

be given

in thin oH<t tho contraction return*

to the last radical in lion of

jVu/M;

last;

no

lnffiin<H rc*gii]arly

tho mfluoiuso of tlicwe purlicltj^y^ /////. or

if

which

(lie

Htuno vowol

f**s

Jjuj wu tnuy write

necoud radical Jnthoia-

may nko

*t
with tlj

given

to

tlie

^/

contraction

J^;

Tht Impdmtivo pr(*wrvc

Ste

regular form.

Aeeording

to the

OF THE .SURD VERB.

Surd Verb we should write ^s\

rule of the

the rule

why

reason

by a

always followed

not here followed,

is

letter bearing

\/\,

and

\^i\

but the

that the alifof union is

is,

jazm.

103

Beside the regular form,

which the insertion of the second radical

the imperative has another, in

in the third does take place, except in the plural feminine.

the imperative is omitted here, according to the rule,

Alif of

by which

it is

never prefixed to a letter bearing a vowel.

I'LXTHAL.
MAfiC.

F1.M.

8INOULAJI

DUAL,
*KK

COlttM.

MASC.

j or

c.

Surd Verbs follow in the passive voice the same rules as in the

active;

is

thus,y

forj^l,

kasra being dropped, because the preceding

Ps<^?

tJi.-'.P

already bears a vowel

letter

in the third

in the aorist

it

is

^h

for

the preceding letter which before had

to

being given

person plural feminine without contraction

derivative formations of

jazm;

^fi

it.

but

The

All the peculiarities above

mentioned are fully illustrated in the following paradigm of

extended," and

fatfia

Surd Verbs follow a similar rule of contrac-

forms which admit

tions in those

^b

"
jJ

he

y "lie fled."
Active

Voice.

PEETEEITE.

PEM.
S

\f

MAHC,

S S

FBESOfr.

"$n*

3rd
& &

s *

k-i

2nd
f*

1st

104

Till:

int

VKiili,

AoltJS'I.

MNM L.UU
l*i\f,

3rd

2nd
1st

IMPKUATIVK.
2nd

INnNITlVK,

(L

Tliij

foIlnwH

"

tint *aiiu*

niflieiil

ihtmttM

Uiou hu^l

liiivi*

of

jii'^tiiiti

nili*

ihir*

<,laK,

willi

with

thontj

of

/w,w

cir

Iftiiplif^t/*

j\tthn or IwMtt tm

h<

J^^

And

i*fi*.

fh

Jjj

li^

will

fli't*/*

|il!f lilii" hi;i( raliciil

4<

Ilif

H.S

{fiiill,

iritsiilmflttitofl

(jturflnM*
11

ifoiw

not

f>rjr?j^

or

if

points,

p^rii^l varhg whose middle

<(iiii*Jn*il/*

J^M^; uuLu^

for

"
If

iikf^Vi^//^
n

itfkmH not fMimti

fho vowel

uorist fom*ponili! wiik such

M
tun!

flus

lo

"

us

nganl

pn

ftncl

Jwi^

rf 4 i|i*<|

thimtiWi wlieii th

J*

will

liif*o f

for

or

(afcc placo,

c!

J*

yai^

he
J*J

will not bite;"

as OAJ J

|*onult fttkifn

/Vwtif
i'UKTKIUTK.
*

l!

or

'*

xieiid/*

as

,^0

Innmmm regular, as 5ouJ

lli n'mSniffioii

fur/i^ ///n

"

iiy fli<iijioeope-iiartlcles(see

he whoht

*
li f

3rd

Ijw*

f*

1st

105

OF THE SUED VERB.

AOE1ST.
DUAL,

PLUEA.L.
FEM.

MAHC,

PEK*

SINGKTLAR.
MASC.

MASC*

r.

3rd

2nd
1st

PARTICIPLE.

Tho Imperative^

124*
,

regularly ? thougli it
the initial

is

vowel (see

125,

may

"be

o"bserYcd ?

take another
fore like

have to theirs

and other derived forma*

having already one characteristic tmhdid^ cannot

upon the same

letter,

and are conjugated there-

the corresponding verbs of the regular system; thus,

for Siifi^
f

derivative formations have the same affinity to

in the preterite active

C"X

lias

excepting, however^ the 1st, 4th,

wMch

inflected

sometimes coutraotod, in wMch. case

the primitives as those of the perfect forms

tions,

is

dropped, "because the following letter

36, a*)

The

it

In

xOx

lor 43X4AJ

1^! for iaXl;

*u^

for

like manner in the aorist active

*
* ^^^ n
fcXuwj lor J

1^

for *

THE

0*'

FEET, OF 4tH FOUMATIOX.

VKKB.

HfJKf)

PKKT, OF UT FORM.'

3rd

2nd

1st

And

Ilnl

on

in

Tiif Mii

iiil

HO

of

lath format i<mj< of th

may

if

lnpi* r^murkf^i,

In?

for einiiifile;

from

flj^ v**rb

AOH1ST.
'"^

for

th

nr
n

'ojti(cuU;d

j^

w*

Terl^wi

radical flonbled

fast,

tliis class

liiin^

11IKTKIUTE.
.

<*

JI^LJ*

Ii'llcr

Tho

tbHi*

i*|)araf oly^

pirfi*ff tnliferal

an

X*

ji^

12U*

willi ronjK^ct to the ott

quatlrilitiTiih, wliirh lmy<

llif

t<M/uff*/<

Twmwr

wwio

tin*

*f

tti^ ttt*h<ltd

iw c->

juziiiatisil

and Imp4$nitivo may

<^utractiou

(th

AfMUHT,
*^

or

cither

j^! c

uorint

oniriietf!cl

they

AA

ot*

taking

<

OF THE SURD YBEB,

107

IMPERATIVE.
or

a.

or

122

In further illustration of

formations

the derived

observe that in
primitive,

the

to

of the verb

derivative

the contraction

may

124 we subjoin two tables of

"he

Jj

"We

fled,"

formations in Table

be preserved in the

may

also

I,,

as in the

aorist,

and in the

whenever the third radical ought by the influence of a

imperative,

particle preceding,

to

bear the symbol

jazm;

thus,

Derivative Formations bearing contraction.

IMPERATIVE.

FQBMATION.

ili

for

II.

'j\

for

III.

for

V.

for

VI.

,jy

.xsl

VII.

for

O,

:,;

XL
b^ The derivative formations to which
in which the

2nd and 3rd

tas&cfoct natixrdlly

radicals are s^plmiei

by

belongs, or

servile letters, are

not susceptible of contention, as to those which follow.

OF THE Will) VERB.

108

Derivatives that do not contract.

IMPERATIVE,

A.OKIHT.

FORMATION*
I.

IV.

VIII.

X.
XII.

TorbB

tashflid in tlioso

c(

tliou

Ll*

Is

wort Hilont,"

Jj

jji,

with

c->

oluiractoriHticfl

tion^

arc

of

tlio

through/
etc.,

0*
also

<loul>Io

urJb)

uL,LC

these,
th<*y

Oth,

u<lonic(i," lor 11:0; and

\Vlu*u iho 3rd

Tho penult of

lmsm which
f

a vowel.

nor

eoalesoe

radical

'words

with

it

tashifid,

beginning

the

initial

and other derivative

forma-

IrngiilurH;
/*

i^-Jot,
*

it

was dug

'at

und^^,

it

pc^rftuct

wan

XXxO

n<*gociuted,"

vorlw,

the aorist of tho 8th

drops in

ihn

<hcri takes

a
#

those letters
ly

although retained in writing,

being in ovciy ronpoofc

letter lias

for

4th,

considered
for

*Svo

^5 wh<i

{f

lifj

i^j

neither

Init

or

name CUHO with cy, which

coalesces in tlie

as c^fc)li

an

t, or

or

%vlu)so final (tluirncloristio fiorviles are

ponwmH

cj or cu

tCBpoctivoly

CD

eiicling in

and 10th formations

takes

tho contraction, because the antecedent

109

SECTION
Of

the

IV.

Infirm or Imperfect Verbs,

etc.

128. "With regard to these, their irregularities arise entirely

from the mutable nature of the infirm letters

remain

and

which are either changed from one to

dropped altogether, or deemed quiescent, when they
having, in general, no sound, according to Arabian

when used
another,

I,

as radicate,

grammarians, but what they derive from the vowel of the pre-

These deviations, however, are subject to certain

and principles with which it is necessary for the learner

ceding letter.
rules

make himself acquainted

to

of those

who may wish

for

For the

satisfaction, therefore,

a minute investigation of the

causes of these interchangeable powers, the following observations are

De

from Erpenius, with corrections from

translated

Sacy, etc.

This section the former of these grammarians

not inaptly styles vere aurea ;

and

it is

every

way

deserving

of the student's strictest attention,

a.

The use of the term "quiescent," or "silent," ia the above

paragraph

is

the

trm

"
one,

meaning

same time the aptness of what

the

not sounded

I stated

"
;

and

it

on the subject in

shews at the
26, a.

Q-rammars by Eichardson and Stew&rt the term quiescent

plied to

an inert

letter as well

m to one wt

is

In
ap-

I'KllMlTATiON

llulw

MI

The

letters

stituted for one another,

dentil ute of

(|

rctl

IH),

freiieli

(o

ly

iiro;

^U for^y
n
J*

wo

aw MJ*-

Tho

#.

to

a day/*

tor

an

'-

lt

hiticw

j for

for

an a long

//

The lettom

fsr

him

BtitJici/

If

wifli

liowwer (nee |

j*^i
*Sfi)

IB

j*J
not

^j
to

for
as

said time or

JU^t

f*

nftwfotfw.

Ihu pr <Mling
i

they bu

Hiibj(ict<*d

to

this case,

/fr^; asin^
tire

pronounced

**
;

i'^ji

an

UHsault."

and followed by ujozmated

li him dmid,"

1H him ^o,"

ill

**
i

al.M

if," like

inert liny

itoi

^ whon <|iii<^<n!
"

for

u well;
u

c'enaiii.

Fiiineljiijf'rt reiiiiiin

are omittii } iw wjii:;

5

EB

-,

he threw

and

tlioyare

u h<st(%rogeneous

roaring of u lion ;"

an *Wtj

$/

When

for

**

j?k?m, in

^u

3U r t
(lie

^j

u ni^lii;" but

JJ

preceded by

flunked io
u

is

of a

r*nd<Tcd homogeneous

c*as<^

form a (liphtiioag
4|

if

HIM!

JIK

reiidcmig

^'*

an
^-,

J,

reciprocally sub-

ncbungc<l.

in thtit

thus,

^* 7

//

**

L!

if iu<rt; tlK*y
4<

are often

Ike

vowls, pn^eedcMl by

to

LKITKKS.

but never at the

beginning

ihey are

rt?,),

to ilie precunling vowel

plaee

g?

OHO they aiwuyH remain

ieh

i^U

##r/ ^5

nor in the middle or end,

word;

and

I,

INFIittI

Nature and J*m)mtaliun

of

Mr?

Letters

120.

TOE

01*

lor ulili.;;

Tho

for^n
Ihw

*2/ "let

/r/// of union,

rule, tw lajli "therefore

i**
f

thou ;"

*M*J

for

*^U

4#

in tho naitiu of/'

to

IM JMfar

AKf*
m

180* Tlio loiter ^///? in iho middle of u word,

by

into^

wh<?u

by ^;^

into

whon movable

HI

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS.

"
ceded by a vowel or jazmated letter; thus, d?^ for cl?U
pastures

??

O*^ f

3^

a similar rule holds,

"his or

changed into j

is

"

<D

studies;"

letter alif, if

preceded

thus,yo

if

by kasra,
of

by damma,

f ?x>

for

"a body

for i'U

*/'

4^;

Jj"U for J*"G

the middle of a word, movable

a. Alif, in

damma,

ho was asked."
u
as

So after a long a?z/

aU

75

saying;

for J*"l*

??

waters.

its

"

men/'
is

if

preceded by

into <_, as cl>t<S for cl^<$

At the end of a word the

changed into

was vile;" ^J?^

if

*
it

by fatJia,

by

kasra, into

lt^ "he

for

sinned or

erred."

131.
is

Ham&a

or

when

alif^

changeable into

\,

or

middle of a word,

inert, in the

agreeably to the vowel

inert,

the symbol of the Jvw&a being wholly suppressed ;

"
77
the head " so
for
thus, JwlJ for (JJjTj
"misfortune;
preceding

J^

^f

and L!*J 3 for t^LSJ ^a wolf. 77

^*

The symbol hamza, preceded by j or ^5

inert, acting

changeable after j into j, and after

servile letters, is

into

as

^,

uniting with the preceding letter by tashdld, and suppressing the

x

Jiamza altogether

4.

thus, i".yu for

In the middle of a word,

inert letter, other than

if

^^iU

-Lk^

hamza should

or ,e, the

hamxa

itiay

for

^-.k^

and

be preceded

by an

be suppressed, and
*'

the vowel belonging to it transferred to the preceding ktter, as

A *o x
n^i x ^j?
^t^^ri
^S ox
and Jo*a lor
tor 3juAw* ;
^vt tor
}

<

132,

The

letfcte

at the

end of > word preceded by fatfa,

112

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS,

when movable

into

as

damma, is changed into ^ -when "by

u
"
??
*1Z> for III
of
J35 for \i5 thou shalt desist
S
^
"by

the leaves of senna.

??

It is not incorrect, however, to write

AUf-hamza^ at the end of a word, if preceded "by

hut the vowel may be transwritten as hamsa only

or *\SM.

1:25

is

jasm,

ferred to the jazmated letter,

and ham&a then "becomes

oxG-o

according to the vowel preceding

for

yJt

thus,

xxO-O

0x0 ,O

and

^\

\,

j,

or

^j,
xt,-o

(js<-t~a

for

for

\jJ\

Should two alif-liamzas meet together in the same word, and

the first be moved by a vowel, and the second be inert, the latter loses
a.

hamza, and becomes merely an alif of prolongation changed,

its

:&

need

The
is

be, into j or

^^1

thus,

alif of prolongation, preceded

sometimes dropped

which

is

"

^ ^

or

^o-

for

J^T

by another

this is pointed out

merciful

"

iLs

for i^llS

"

^U

he believed.'

position of fh^fatJia^

madda

thus,

XXc->,

uJ

are used at the beginning of words,

9

letter of the word,

cJ5
& s

"

is

still

to the father ;" llf

r

for

^>~j
X

J, J and j which
?

nothing in the
considered to be tho initial
alter

may be

though those particles

a

the resurrection."

133. The inseparable particles

nature of the alif which

if

alif movable "bjfailia,

by the

then written perpendicularly, or by

like the

mother

]&

??
:
7

prefixed, as

and not

_2 or
#*

"^

w"J

!;.

Some

particles,

however, must be excepted, in which

4*

-Six

custom has established the change, as

U
"
??
for
fl
whether if.
and

1XS

for

"lost that;'

134, "When the interrogative particle

followed

by

atif-hamsta, if

the second bo

(Lat. aw? or

^ww

?) is

moved by fatha, one of

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS.

them with

its

dropped, or a kamza

is

vowel,

and then an alif with madda

^jjlil or

jM

for

*vj^*

f r

^-{;^

^/becomes

^,

only retained

as

.jjl

for

U^

suppressed and

waw

of

4j^word and the

pi.

into

a.

hamza
The

preceded

Waw*

the letter $

to

thus,

letter

"clothes,"

'

^^

for

f>

os

pL of

ww^

J^$

thus,
1

at the
it

fol-

for
x^

x*

*JB*\)

be movable by damma,

for

^^1

^\^

beginning of a
may be changed

J^ for

^ in the middle of a word, movable

by kasra,
"

when

changed into

is

meeting of two waws

'

there be two

first

Finally, if

in the beginning of a word,

^y

hamza

its

alif-fiamm^ to avoid the

'
5X
^
/
xx
f

Lj^

^*

changed into

is

lowed by another waw, movable by a vowel,

J^\^ pL of

or

for 1J\U

>

letter

first,

for its vowel, the

have Jmsm, the (&/

Rules peculiar

The

is

damma

>

thus, Jijjl or ^XLi^l, for ^Jo-JlU

^U
X

^^

135.

cJ^ or u^* ^or o^'

or the second

the second hamzta should

^;

placed

thus, u^Jl or ui^3\* for i^Jll

If the second himza have

is

113

sometimes changed

is

garments/'

When

to

as

in the middle of a

by

and

fatlia,

u^^i ^or ^!^i

word is followed
^

**

"*

is often thrown out, as

by another j quiescent, the latter
"
"
"
"
a peacock ;
for
chiefs."
heads,"
,VjjJ
_j

^j

136.

The

letter j

jecting its vowel,

to
it

when

final,

and preceded by fatka^

and throwing the ntmation,

if

re-

there happens

inert if
be any, on the preceding fat^ is changed to
be the third letter of the word, or t6 g? if it be the fourth,
1

15

VEHMUTAT10X

114
eta

\j

for

^gjSJ

^ "he

The

INP11O1 LKTTEHtiL

for^l "ho assaulted

as

THE

will be assaulted

damnw,

letter ^ final, after

but throwing them away Incomes

1

"perishing;' bat
ceding

letter,

When ^

in

aud^

final Is

tliw*

if

Is

The

letter

sons of the vor)>

a When in

firsfc
*

fi*i.

***** o

for

5^^

<2y^

the

for

first

^WM
i

i*

, *

is

tMs rale

But

.*.

^Jl and

tew

it is

changed

pre-

"buckets,"

^Sjl

to

.ij

as,

^J from

d),

in

'

fi*nowod

lir4

/tttiuztt,,

by

certain persilent

1;

as

not

iiinrf, if tint

ih

end of

at tlm

H'viI<*

in

//ve/^5,

the

first

movable

letter preceding the

first is

doubled by toMl^the

not.

pm-tiTving tho

figure)

of

jj

thus,

<*'*'

It

may

bo observed

that

thin occurs particularly

*/
&
4 I x
*,!,.'

prcolo(i by n king ^l!f: thu,

^b

for

^b

^lt

If

thoy meet only in conoMqacmco of a

contoactioa,

not obsemci

is

The

totter

in

111^

and proowied by
a

^j

Do

Y5*

in

Sacy, this

4/ in the

middle of a word, movable by

a tltrow/

^UJ

for

to

The

thrown upon the

for

to

as

for

y**^ff

338-

>

In iliw fam*
J^y
sometime dropped

S;*y for

oae of the two

when

and

cluuigwl into

Is often

^ Sj or

nf a word Ihore are two

tho second

neither inert nor niUtnt,

^j

Jj\

ilic itnal

ilia miclille

by damma*} and

nor

quioftceut, as

an,

37

gven*"

damma

wlu^i

(s<so

whcnj

aj

staff;"

"

takes neither

he was pleased OP content/

137*

"a

^W

for

^aL*

it is

lli for

a nflnation,

dropped;

preceded by

??
;

"a

tojj

"
shot,"
ii

darting ;

of rare oocttrwawe.

of a word, followed

another

PERMUTATION OF THE INFIRM LETTERS.

inert, often

expels the latter

115

"
as JLjJ for
a governor,"
JL-SJ

"

"chief;" but this takes place only when the

of the two ur yas has taken the place of a hamzated alif.
prefect,"

two

other cases the

all

The

139.

yas unite

by

first

In

tashdld.

letter

final, preceded by fatka, cannot be

movable
made
by any short vowel, but rejecting its own
on
vowel, and throwing back the nunation, if there is
*"

fatha, it

Jj\

Jl
it is

becomes quiescent like

first;"

jj

"the

"of a youth;"

"a

"of the

changed

to

as

first

^\

*'

for

"^

**

^1

"the

for "&$

If another

youth,"

as $oj& for
J^llfc

any,

"

"
gifts

"a

first;"

youth;"

^ precedes,

(excepting a few

proper names),

140.

The

letter

final,

preceded by tera, takes neither

damma nor tora, but throwing them away is silent ; as

^iUL
and
for
in this instance, if iiiere
"barefoot;"
and,
^jUL
^Ul
be a nunation denoting the nominative or genitive
case,
thrown back on the preceding letter, and the
is
as

*\j

for

l^j

and

*'

14L The
Tcasra,

.jj\

letter

remaining

for ^IAJ\
s

venes; as

itself

for

The

^ final,

preceded by damma, changes it to

as
unaltered
JZ& for ^t^*" a wish;"
;

"hands;" and

&

dropped

a shooter," "a darter."

^VJ

J^i

peculiar to

142.

"

it is

letters j

and

this rule holds also

whan

inter*

"thrown,^ "shot/* or "hurled."

Waw

^r

and Ya

p#ecd0d

movabte^ follcSwed l^y

t>y
^

E short vowel, and

r

raerfc^

are

11G

THE INFIRM LETTJBR&

l'EttMrT\TIOX OF

tircly

dropped, rejecting tho vowel,

which

it

forms a diphthong),

for

fh<

Ul^

fc

y threw;" ^jii for

a

thoy will throw."

IHI

If,

l<jf<(rs

to ih(

is

it
.

wlii^h

The

^U

inovulih*, [r'(rd(Ml

h<*

fiii^J

two

fiuino

been dropped'

IIUH

ibr^U

^Jli

Htoocl ;"

this case, the

vowel
t

by a tnovubb I!!*i% urf ol'tcn rhunp^l hilo

"
M
"
ho

for

siipj)ns st}il 5 and replaced

or

assail (lion ;"

and

In

however,

^ ^

<v

as ^jil for ^.j^

Tim

^^"thou^wfltbe

assailants

or /v^vv/,

ifiwunti

by tho vowol belonging

a.

<>r,

;JU fw^JjU

assaulted;"
u

promling

Jhtlm precedes

if '/x/w/w or

tern, throwing
in place of tho vovrel of the
foregoing letter* as

them back,

^j

if

wl

\v<nt:

!n\////^/, and followed

in<*rt

Unm,

A\! for

first lias

4 VJ

no vowol, clmnpfo

'Mays:"

tor

143. Tin*
t,

to

^^

^,

Wlum,

*'

ldtr

are cdiangccl to

til: for JCLi

^%

both coaltwiinpf hy

and

//(////;;//,;

liity

vowol^

tliuu,

X* b

letter
tlict

in

hun,

marked by

by a

]>n*(ic*d< (l

^b^ "a

ruI(H, flw l^ttcrM

tui

in

^,

nuppowd

and

5 x,J

for

^U

servile

cloak;"

j<>

^ arc said

{IB

iwrt \M^\\ or

taMul

to

immediate,

of prolongation nor whon jnxm

inter-

cou<H'a'!<jd 'under teA-

always coutaitw a

latent jazm-}

nnnio as

oouHtdoml na iudml when followed by tho

not 00

^U

sky/

Hiich vowc*l

ii

1<*ff,i?r

jiOHCM, oilhor (*xpn HHi*d ov<*r

fur

final, \vh<'i

as *J^ or *b; for

!!

fbn^oiu^

not in conibhuitioij with u

&/;

u
hcitvcm,"

be ptxwlfd by

t<islultd\

u caufcry/'

in tlio

'2

forth/'

rh u nutniuT that tho

inocfin^ in

Iclf^rrf

"assailants^

or

fin

vCi, *jl*

riot

^I'U "its water ;

affixed pro-

*ti, ^5^

PEEMUTATIOK OP THE INFIRM LETTERS,

not
shot

c.

that

"

/I*

of

him;" Uc,

Where
it

water

its

*]}&

a letter

"

not

is

^j

tl

"

<sj^ not *\*j nor

he threw or

^T,

he assaulted him."

b^yL

called movable in the foregoing rules,

when

carries a short vowel, in opposition to inert,

language of grammar,

where, in the

117

cannot be rendered movable,

it is

said

denotes

it

has none

final after

implies simply that

it

it

fa$&

in that case

cannot have a short vowel.

When

144.

the ^ and

in the middle of a

by/#0w and followed by a letter bearing

to the letter
they often transfer their own vowel
f ?s
??<*'

vowel, are preceded

a vowel also,

having jwsm, and become inert;

oj^

will lengthen,"

thus,

Jjk>

for

^ changes into

it

J^k>

In

set forth."
forJ*IJ "lie will

the vowel isftitha, the^ or

case, if

word bear a

if

this

ter#

thej changes into ^5, according to the second general rule;

cJUr

thus,

"

cJ^k; "he will be afraid;"

for

<~1>1&

for

cl4&

he will dread."
a. If after alif ipert,

damma

dropped, and

Damma, when

c^!^, and

<*

for

uLJo

*>

<j

damma,

as

is

caJlk

for

is

taken by

alif,

would bear damma

of -which the regular form would be

jUilS, regularly cLJV^,

inert is in the place of ^5 or of

instead of

bearing jazrn, .follow, the alif

or kasra substituted for the fatfya preceding,

^?

u^U?

so

letter

the ^ whose place

*

or fatfya, as

moved

Wlxeii

by ha$r^ the

c^j for jLsl^, reg.ul^p

the.o^
tef& is ued

uL^ for

*>

reg,

#,

^ in the middle of a word are tnoved by kasra, and

by alif inert, they are replaced by ^ with a hamxa; thus,

When and

preceded

HAMMTED

OF THE

118

XX

"a

for

jj\j

YBBB*

"one who says;"

speaker/*

for

clined," etc,

llammled Verb~~jj*.

the

Of

145* This .species of verb lias allf or

hamza

as a radical
>

xxTL

ho chose or selected;" in the

beginning,
asyl
*
/ xx
t*
ho uskod ;" or at the OIK!, a Uj^ u he cooked"
miAdlc, as JL
"
or ho ,soaono(l (<hr food)."
Tlio irregularity nssts
in
cither ai

tlio
* *

simply

dropping

in sonie INTHOIIS^
f

oili(*rs,

agn*(ul)l} fo

ruliu

and nuKsf ifuiing

UK* prineiplos laid

paradigm of (ho

hwlmg

[i^rscuis

roquiBite in 1ho cowjuppition of the

when the

first radical

fimm^

<"*

The

Proterito,

to

Jtawtra
for

ractoristical

the characteristic of the ImpiTiitiva

lias

/// is

clHtiigti!

to

ill "ho reccwcrl;^

will find
<*

fixed;

"

J^tj

Jjfl

as

"he

the

^\

regular*

damm>

the

"
hope ihou,"

did cat;"

kamsa> hut

jyU

*'

as

*"',

the pr<*coding ntlc^; ,Par<iVipli,

or

regularly; Aorist

l>y

hut

In like inaioier in

the* 'Fri'i^rHo, J1 in
(tonjugatf*d

or radical

regular;

131); Participle,

&\\;

J\

"

not only
commanded/* throw away
*
f

you

Aorit,

*.

When

0*

thus,

J5T for^U; Infinifivo, yi regular.

l*

preceding

that will be

all

in

IWwnms as follows;

foiijtigatcnl regularly;

'

I'^/rt*.-

in Iho

it

/ 1,^

in

,M

^ for

/fauwtfwl Vorbs;

the /tr^W

IrnpcraiivOjj&jl% fbryil
^ * (nc^ording
*

d)wn

and

also

^1

"he

the

oh**

*'

'

(X^, JS",
s

j*

mitnolimoB, however, though rarely,

<*P';*

and^jl;

or with tlm oopnlativoH

j and

u3

ancl^U;

pre**

tho linjieratlvt

being dropped^ aid

tie

OF THE HAMZATED VEEB.

In the 1st derivative formation, both active and passive, Aorist

b.

5*>

or y*j (for

Jb and ju);

Part.

In the 2nd formation, Aorist ^J^)

or

Jly
the

119

y V*

or^jj

(for^JIU and^SlU);

3rd formation Preterite

J^* or

(for^jlb

Infin.

J\ or^l

Jt<).

andylb);

Part.

(for

*/lj**

(for

and

Jt-*

(for

fjy*

11

Aorist

andyli);

& St

S<J

-A^d thus in the other formations, kamza, on

Infin, Ijlijl (for Ij^lD-

account of

damma, kasra,

or another hamza, being either changed or

to the rules mentioned above.

dropped entirely, agreeably
.er

In

iylU).

tenses are all regular

The

as are also the rest of the derivative

,tions.

only necessary to apply the same rules to

It is

Dative formations in order

into j or <J%
fifth
x,

formation

followed

Thus,

litive verb,

alif inert,

jl may

Tlxose verbs

J^J
may

is the passive

be written in the

whose middle or

interrogating/' for

Second

^U

J*AJ

hamza, preceded
;

thus,

from

formation

fifth

final radical is

as

is

J^

c<

he was

and ^JI "itbeaet)^;

^
*
f

'

**

j?

*.

;"

that the

voice of

be changed into j

on the same principles

"

when hamza

their root,

find

must be observed

it

by

to

the other

all

"benefiting/' for.ljU.

When &m@a

or

changed into

radical,

it

is

preferred

to
according to the vowel "belonging

it,

or im-

OF THi: 1IAMX.VTKJU VERB,

120

mediately preceding
l
!

for

Jwjj

/wwm

though woMom, conjugated

which

mom

"

ore both tho

lug

17\

written 'fC

uiW

JQ

aorist

the,

munnT

radical

are

miwl the

in

sometimes,

uf the concave verbs,

u

ihon qukwonf. as
u
;

3^4 J^
;

^k

JL

ho

of

asked,"

tliou," for

drop; tho nuiieal fiatiua, acconling

ti/ifs

Jlj.

for their inodhil

I!JO, <^tc*), th<^

Is

it

the

in

he will ask," for

Bearing

fdif

is

fawun bmwg

anon,

3C <3m

for

the preterite

passive voices

Verb* having

r/,.

in

tints,

L-^JU for c^U*

Jw*J;

cl>Cai in the,

it;

^)b;

to the pre-

rulos alroudy laid clown roBpoct-

learner will mee,l with no serious

formations
diffieuliy in <ho d<rivutivcs

of a jmrnitivo whose
XS/

rninllal

lotitu*

hu\n&i: ftr <sxumple,

in

"lio consoliduteil/

l,t.

us take the verb

whos<5 Heooml, tliird, atjventh,

derivative fonuaLiotiH

ar<*

and

ninth

an

II.

III.

<>

f,i-

4^Al;i,^...

JttL

VII.

AJW*AMJ

IX.

*
-a

148*
0?

When
into

in

or

then

last radical^ it in

acoorcling

to tho

retained

preceding

OF THE HAMZA.TEB VERB.

130, etc.)

person

thus,

he recovered from

121

has the 3rd

illness,"

feminine of the preterite regularly JbVj

also the

singular

person

Again, from L&

is

preterite

masculine and
"

and

are u^JL&

fern.,

e^V.

pers. sing. fern, of the

<JLJu; and the 2nd persons sing, of the same, masc.

"

and

feminine t>V^ and

he digested/' the 3rd

2nd
o

t,

L^-JcJb

similar rule obtains in

%s

the passive voice and derivative formations ; thus, from Uu>"

the mind was excited/' in the 1st formation the preterite is
.

"I

and the

?-,

aorist

S P

^s?
" '

The

difficulty

qnadriliteral verbs, such

;

tf

the 3rd formation the preterite

O OX O

as

U-ls>-

^UW

or

1^,

present EO

xo ^
^Ut
-'O

thus from

{-

^UW

in the aorist
-

X<>

stated,

new

comes in
x-

jtyutu
X

and in

by contraction ^^

Verbs that have hamxa for their second radical

we have already

and

and

\'^ss^^\

the rules are always the same

the imperative

'

^OxOX

SxOxO

and in the llth formation

a.

%*& '

so in the 4th formation Uucsr

sometimes conjugated

like

letter, are, as

concave verbs,

radical.
This is paras coming from ^ or
*
"
he asked," which is often written
ticularly observable in the verb
in

which alif

is inert,

JU

J Ul, aorist

^JC$ or

<[}lj

the alifs are dropped, the radical

020

"*

The imperative is

JJS for

hamza by

th,e last

radical is

<

or L*,

is,

wliera both

vowel

hamza> are often confounded

properly called defective, that

the general rule, and

the servile alif because the following letter bears a

which

JL1

also

Verbs, of

with verbs

such as have for their last radical

122

OF THE SIMILE VERB.

Of

the Simile

Verb.

149. The imperfect or Infirm verbs are divided into three

which are commonly

classes^

and the Defective.

and

radical,

The Simile Verb has

named

is

called the Simile 3 the Concave^

"by

the Arabians

semblance, because in the preterite

fect verb

and

it differs

it

j or

^ for the first

3^j

implying re-

quite resembles a per-

from the latter only by throwing away?

and in the

in general,, the quiescent radical in the aorist active,

j

imperative of the primitive triliteral verb, and also in the

when

infinitive,

ju

Lhiil

When ^
jazmakd
was rich,

of the form Jpu

"love them," for JL*^

*iU

quiescent is the radical,

after

59

damma^ agreeable

"he

as /juJ

it is

to

will love," for

"to love,"

for ajty.

changed to ^ (when

which has in the aorist^*^ for^^w,

"lie

as JIJl

138);

liko j*av

and

In every other

in tho participle 'jJ^l fort*ul*, lite J.^1*.

respect (with sonic very rare exceptions) both species of Simile

Yorbs, whether active or passive, together with thoir derivative

formations, arc regular, tlic 7th formation only substituting

tasMld in place of the

istic

3
;

??

richccl,

as <lxh
for

"he

JIcj

initial infirm radicals,

??

promised,

for &3j\

over

its

f*f\

"he was

character-

on-

Those however sometimes remain, be-

come homogeneous, or take tho sound of tho preceding

?
'**
9
s*S n
x f
y*Xx-V,
xOxXXxO,
n
\ui lor
vowel j as yux)i jyjy lor ^^^i j^->y^ lor ^M-JU^
*,

-f>

J>

J?

for

&.

^*

"When tho second radical In the

aorist does not bear kosra, that tense

Otf

THE SIMILE YEEB.

regularly formed; as J^-jji from

is

123

and S J from
J^I,
X
*.'*

When

the aorist

Jisrl

jjjj

regular, the imperative

is

radical, according to the rules of permutation

of Jj,
^

which

for

is

These verbs are

make

IkJ"

jLy "it was large;"

took leave;" tlJ&J

gjy"lie

in the aorist lk>

"

"

J ou imperative
1

he sowed or planted,"

he gave;"
jL2J

coo, ul^^,
j-^J, *-AJ, v,
x
is

he trod under foot,"

"it

fell

or occurred;"

"he placed;" which

The verb JJT
x v

t^iv>.

x-

only used in the aorist and imperative

as

andjJ.

j.5j

The

<?.

irregularity of all these verbs exists only in the active voice

of the primitive form.

In the passive voice of that form, and in

the derivative formations, they present

for

,,

it

fiigt

was dry,
-j

that the radical

\/J^l
1>

"^^

^/M^>

makes

Verbs having

are not, properly speaking,

irregular; as (J^J,

radical,
?,

Ss

9 '"bs

9j***i tj^zf*

is

s<$>

till

s?

must only be observed

**

^j^^j^^,

changed into ^ when

it is

quiescent after

damma

in the aorist of the third formation

the rule of permutation

150. Verbs whose

is

merely

J~?jtf,

to be observed.

fixst radical is
^

or

^ tare

instead of

tMs in com-

mon, that in the seventh, fonnation they change the

radical into

all

no irregularity except indeed in

the seventh formation, as will be observed

immediately.

&s>~*\

"^

that tense bears fatha.

as

substituted for

thus,

Several verbs lose j in the aorist though their second radical in

5.

"

is

he loved."

JJ.U

for

is

so likewise

is

In the last two examples, the

"
5,
-^

d? "which then
y

CD* peculiar to that

unites

formation

by taskdidynth the

hnc@

from

"

first

servile

he promised,"

OF CONCAVE

124
conien

Pret, i*5l for j*yl

tlxe

Ixfl for XJjl

like

Imper. ^Jl for

a.

^^j

Sometimes tho

'

'"

pluy< xl

^^

Part.

Jlil

j-ali

cu

into

In

in the

^Or

Tnfin,

Imper,
f

oU$.

Aoiistj^IT

for

J*ii

for

;
'

wo have

dic(,"

mwiiu unchanged

and

for

3Q

Infin,

lic^

Vrrt*

S^i

manner from ^LJ

seventh formation

for a*5
J
'

*xcj

Aorist,

,*

Part, Ixu* for

VBBBft.

j^i5
for

jdol

and adapt

theniHolvcH to the procodinff vowel according fo the rules already

down

fliUH

viz*:

A^jjl
iS\

PrH,

two

h(t

'

**

JucjJ

lor *xtly

Aorif>

lufiru

Aowwi,

J^\

^U for^xrf

*^xilj

for

For jUw'J

follows,
*"*

iix)*^j

Juiper, ixcjj

for

o in like manner, Pret,

M*iy\

Intjx'r.

''*

**

*it

Im conjugated as

may

just Hp<*rifiod
^

Part, jwu^*

v**rbtt

laid

Part

Infin. j

Verbs,

Concave,

151* Budi

v<

rbs an Imvo j or

by Arabian ^mmmurtuiiB

(fulled

tor tlwdr

^J^\

iu this,
irregularity ccMiHintH <ihwjfly

as also in tho
tliOHo

iiiidcilci

JJrd,

Lc n ^Cououve."

Iliul

Ilie

l)tt(*oiuo

I<tt(*r.

h<*y arcs also called

ing thrco (lottorn);" Ixicauws

ones

the

an

iSJil

'*

seen

to?"
is,

to

iiignlar of tho preterite,

and defective verbs have four

may be

^ %&

of thoir <jlmniclorifttics

have only throe 'hiUm in tlio first praoii

tlw regular

inert ? orre-

HOUIK! of that which belongs

>'***

r
i

Their

in <ho primitive form,

aro author ilroppcnl^

main without a vowol nHHuniing

to tho pr< co(liiig

radical are

7th, au<l 4>th ck*rivallvc formations,

fith,

nwli<ial

middle

letters in

by comparing JLXf "I

said

3*

OF CONCAVE VEBBS.
"

with cLI*j
(concave verb),
of the

next

class,

number

their

is

I did."

125

These verbs, and those

depart most widely from the regular forms ;

very considerable, and

therefore essential

it is

be well acquainted with their conjugation.

to

In the third persons of the preterite (except the plural feminine),

a.

the letters^

and

^ are changed to T inert after /#$#

PLURAL,

BUAL.

MA8C.

FEM.

thus, instead of

SINGULAR,
MASC.
SS S

"iSS

FBM.
V SSS

MASC.
S
1-

they write

JU

andJJC,

etc., as

may

be seen in the two following para-

digms (& 158).

In the other persons those radicals are dropped altogether, throw-

5.

ing hack the vowel on the preceding letter (see paradigm next page)

but

that vowel is /atfya, as in

if

the concave j to

radical,

said/

and those in

The

152.

and

and ^H above,

in the concave

Concave Verbs in ^ have either

those persons
first

damma, and

jy

^ to kasra
damma

student

will

carefully*

so that in

or kasra on the

primitive forms of the yerbs Jlf for

JU

are

changed in

^ always kasm*

for

jX^

"he went,"

are conjugate*! at

length ia the two following paradigms.

species

it is

of

frequent

do

well

As

occurrence in the
to

study

their

Ml

verbs of this
language, the

peculiarities

very

12G

OF CONCAVE VERBS.

CONJUGATION OF THE CGNCAYE

Ac five Voice.

WAW.

8INQULA.E,
MASC,
x

1.

MA8C.

JK
UJJ

3
2

tM>.

.,U\i

JUi

OF CONCAVE VERBS.

127

CONJUGATION OF THE CONCAVE

Active

t/

YA.

Voice.

Preterite.

DUAL,

PLtJEAL,
MASC.
f

SIHOULA.B.
MA1C

*'EM.

FEW.
c x x

Ij^U

MASC.
x x
1

\j^>

^>
Aori&t*
wwuU

-x
Imperative*
X
I

J-M-0

Participle.

Infiniiiw

^-**s

Passive Votc&
Preterite,

t^ y

^^ uj

OF CONCAVE VERBS.

General Remarks on
153.

In the active voice,

is

preterite

fatha, it

fore quiescent
J?
is

penult

in place of jasm

^ are changed to
and ^ are dropped

and,

when

the servile

fat/ia;

the last

and

be-

If the

if

damma,

to the first radical

vowel happens to be fatfyt, the

^
In the feminine plural the letters

\ .

on account of the subsequent

jamn
radical is ^ it coalesces,,
by tasMld^ with
;

3rd person feminine

plural of the prethe 3rd and 2nd plural feminine of tlie
aorist, and

terite,
tlio

tlie aorist

damma

aorist into

if that

and
j

the penult vowel of the

throwing back the vowel

Verls.

to Jkasra before
quiescent

becomes in

Icasra, it

remains so

it

if

changed in the

is

and

Concave

the

in

tlio

feminine plural of the

imperative.

The j and
are
likewise thrown out
if
an
every where,
apocope takes place ;
"

as

ho says not"

wo

(for

fear not/'

J^j

etc.;

"
jj)

tlio

J^j

last

jj

she walks not

radical,

as

may

??
;

be

The imperative lias

observed, being then always jazmated.
no alif of union, because tlio first radical bears a
vowel, as
in J> and

y^

and all/of union can only come before a

letter

bearing jazm*
a.

The concave

radical letters are also

dropped in the singular

masculine* and plural feminine of the

imperative

the servile initial alif

being also omitted in every person (see paradigms,, pp. 126 and 187).
"
But they return when the paragogical
^ takes place ; as ^ly say
"fear thou."
*hou;"
"go tliou;"

i.

Tho

inert aKf,

^l^

radical alif in the participle,

following the characteristical

ought

to

have a vowel, as two Inert

letters

cannot meet, but

or roxoAVE VKRB&
movable all/

Actmza or

changed to J;

is

Is

substituted for

which (by

It,

and that

jSU for <)Us,

thus,

129

for

130, etc*)

^ll; so^SUfor

!lll and that again for ylS*

j

o.

for

Verbs having j

XX

when the

aorist,

preterite is either of the form

X
x

which

is

the

in

-*

of JlS, which

the aorist

for

J^l

but

aorist

of tliUL

second

radical,

if

the

for

as

is

torn

"

***

in

"
J^w

the aorist,

/a^a

for

JL&

vowol

t^pk?:,
for their

because they

*^
^

as

aorist of
'

There are some, however, of the form

these take

which

(Jj^,

take

for its

Verbs ha^dng

is
J&, which
^ XC/X

aorist J*i>

wUi,

in the aorist, as c-^l^ for *-***&, aorist of

cl^lte

for

In the preterite ^siTe, the rowel

middle radical, is thrown b&ok to the first, whose oim
154.

is

then lost

thus,

for

^j-J is

3y

aad^? for^^. The

and 2nd persons of the ooEeaTe

sire as

^ are the same

1st

in the pas-

the aetiYe, and ire only to he distingttished by the

sense of the passage*

a,

3^

and

andJUuJ being for

preterite

and

radical is

i.

of the middle radical

In the aorist passive, thejfe$

upon- the fort, j

In the

$$l

ehang^
aaadjl^*

to

mart

Th^ra

(moi

is

aoriit of tha*pa^iiire toiee, betveto

or

no .'AtS^ace in tie

^rfewose

second

$&m hayfaf ^ tor ftf &&

pauaiiNw

p^ipte,

t
i

JV

* +*
of JlL,

aorist

u!?lr

as

as

takes fatfya,

are of the form J*i, aorist

for

and Jjk?

in the

J>y

J*i or Jju

kmra

generally
*

the second radical have

aorist

which

-x

J^S;

^*-

preterite,

xx^-***.

for

is

damma

second radical, take

thoir

gW^'^f

lie second radical being

17

130

OF CONCAVE YEEBS,

remoyed

to the

ftrsfc,

the original
j

but in concave

^ damma

is

thrown out

is

also

tlnw, ^jj^u for

changed to

torn

as

J,*^

In approved authors, however, particularly among the

of these participles are regularly formed,

many

poets,

of concave

155. Concave verbs whose last radical

is

"guarded;" but

especially those

tlie

measured/*

J<^&*

same by

taslwttd,

"sewn

lb^li*

tense; thus, from

comes in the

c^

incorporate

cbU

first

he

is

person singular of fhe stums

dead," or

"maiod"

(in choas),

person singular cU4, and in the Bc^oond por-

j6trt

L^^

etc*

with the cj forming the second pernons

of the preterite^ and the

sons c^v^j

as

"

"

together

!,1L^

a.s

lIL*.

In concave

verl)B whosc^ last radical

/*

Is
is

^,5

a similar rule obtains, whenever this

followed

^)

"

by ^

he carefully preserved,"

made

is

plural feminine of the pretorito?

^ being jaBmalod,

Tims from

forming the person,

^U

and in tho second

f

plural feminine of tho imperative

^;

(for

in tho third pc*rwn

in the

first

pomm
person

plural of the preterite txJ; and in the third person plural

feminine of the aorist ^j&. These observations

equally apply
to the derivative verbs ? and are of
in
importance
finding (he
root

by

those

who

arc reading Arabic works written without

vowel-points or orthographical signs*

Derivative Formations

156.

Wo

from Concave

ttootx*

have already observed that amongst derivative

from concave
are irregular.

the third, sixth, seventh, and ninth

only
In those derivatives no difference
be-

roots,

tween those whose second radical

is

and those where

it

OF CONCAVE VEBBS.

^.

131

It will therefore
quite suffice to give as a
paradigm of

these forms, the

paradigms

first

word of each

tense, as in the following

Active
INFINITIVE,

IMPERA.TIVE.

Voice,

PBErmim

AOBIST.

POEMATION.

III.

VI.

3L^

Jfil

Jlxiu

VII.

HGeul

i)

J
Tho learner

a,

caves

ittj

and

will perceive that in the above formations the con-

^ are conjugated

alike;

and that the active

participles

of the 0th and 7th formations are exactly the same with the passives,
the difference in sense being only discoverable from the tenor of the
subject,

In the

infinitives of the

3rd and^9th formations, j and

throwing 1fafajfa$a back upon the preceding

would be jagmafyd, are changed

letter,

to att~ inert;

which ofeerwise

and the

sertile final

alif (employed in forming the infinitives of the regular v&rbs \j\^\

and

j^Ucu&-j1)

is

being for

dropped,
$\js\

being substituted in

and St^&^U

Tie middle

of the 6th and 7th formations, as

may

its

room,

il$ and

radicals of the in-

be observed in the

132

OE CONCAVE VERBS.

paradigms, are regularly movable

however being changed

to

(i.e.

have vowels)

the concave
j

Passive Voice.

xx xx

-tf

xo

Also
157"*

Some verbs

^AJ^

of this species however

form are conjugated regularly

Aor,J^y

Imp,

etc., etc.

tlius ?

u
5^&

he was one-eyed ; J?

Parijjlc; so also dl^

*jf\\
^*

m tho primitive
a

lie

***

htuatod;"

*i

Aor. JutfJ; Imp* ILl; Part jjU.

tions the 3rd, Gth ? Tfli,

and

Juil,

ou^Jl,

la

llie

derivative forma-

and 8th aroj^l, j^t, jpl,

Jukll ? jip^l respectively-

J^t,

few verbs

ttougL. imperfect in the primitive form are sometimes regular,

sometimes irregular in tho third formation;

as

J> "ho

THE STOSTANTIYE

OJ?

rested/' which

lias

xx03

and

^J\

formation

"ho

is

'

.X

"he answered/

on account of the

it is

"he

damma

and not *j3.

must bo kept

thus from

If the second radical

distinct;

thus from

have in tho second formation active

changed

jvjs)

is

^$ which

^,

J2)

(for

into

by tasMld with

"he

(for
jl

JxU and

radical is j, that
is

preceding, does not unite

it,

how-

to be observed,

second formation

whose second

of concave verbs,

the radical j that follows

makes *j^

<

the alif characteristic of these forms, and which

In the 9th

and <L>fo>\

<^J(L\

derivatives are regular;

3^

fifth,

J*J>

was

as 4-^ladJ and

ever, that in the passive voices of the

have

(the sky)

etc.

The other

of the

It

|%U

The concave

>u\ and *+&.

likewise often perfect

heard/'

approved/'
a.

lias

"

so

SS<?

S <*

cloudy," "which

I S3

"VERB.

stood/

we

the ^ and the

"he

sold,"

we

in the passive voice

The Sulstantive Verb^&.

We

158,

"ho was;"

here Buhjoin the Substantive Yerb

it

is

conjugated

as

3^

(for

3/) "^e

(f r

^/)
3

said/

with this difference only, that the last

already described,
tasMId with
servile, in those persons
coalesces

by

radical

where that letter forms the final characteristic agreeably

to

97,

c.

a, This verb, unless to avoid

an ambiguity,

is

seldom used in the

for the most part underthen, as in

present tense, being
the^Latin,

stood;

"

as

1^ Jptj J^ ^

(mm)

*, veritas et vita,

and the life." The use and applicaway, and the truth,
in the Syntax,
verb will bo further explained

1 (am) the

tion of this

ego

134

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE VEBB.

Active

Voice,

Preterite.

PLURAL.
FEM.

DUAL.
MASC.

SINGULA1L,

MASC

PEM.

PEM.

MASC

PEttSON.

3
2

V/

.
'.SIS'

Passive

Voice,

Preterite.

Aorist.

PS?
*3

'

s 9

i"

Participle*

*f

'!'

Of

THi: IlCTECTIVE VEIIB.

135

Verb-

f/ia

This class of imperfect verbs has

"
radical letter; us
he assaulted;"
Jj

K>0.
last

They

are also called

iujST

or

for the

"lie threw."

or "possessed of four letters/'

because they have four letters in tho 1st person singular of

tho preterite as cb^A wherein they differ from the concave
;

verhs which havu only three in the same person,

radical undergoes chungoH rcsomhling
second, rttdtcul

and Homeihnos

Itn

lottor, fiOjRotimes it

vowel

to the

last

those to which the

Huhjcot in concave verbs

changed into another

The

sometimes

it is

disappears altogether^
letter.

preceding

The

chief unomulicti of those verbs arc founded on tho rules of

!

m will be soon in tho following paradigms:i#

*Actiw

Voice.

BIKOULAE,

r.

MAW,

2
1

2
1

OF THK

nBFKmVE

The Defective

VEHB.

^Active

Voice.

JPrderitt.

DUAL.

BINGTJLAJU
MASC.

Aw

int.

Til

1(50,

and

J*j

Uoth

tlw inf<rif(^ tho radical

Is

changed

to inert

put fur f<*jy tli^ final ^ remaining quiescontj

with fhoir vowolfl arc dropped entirely in the
and
IH

Urd person ftminino Aingiilar and dual, and in the masculine

for
ul)fttituttwl for
flnw, c^ji IB
plural
o^j* and JL^J
last
In iltci 3rd
plural masculine, the
k^4^ ? 4!lf,
:

with
for

tion.
l>ul

vowol diwappoar, and Ijje and ^j are conand ^J|, according to the rule of pernmat^ji
iti

When
when

il

the middle radical has fammfy }

hna firnm^ }

4/J

as

is

not changed,

^J "he

consented,"

OP THE DEFECTIVE

for 'y?j

u^^

or as

(^^^aj for

the 3rd person feminine singular

VEE.B.

c->^^j

^x^j

and dual the

Again

radical letter

d^

from^S "he was generous," we have

c^*j and l^j- The plurals masculine

remains; thus,

and
tiJi

so

l^;
and

iii

are

"

t*

161. In the aorist the last radical throwing

remains

away d

If the penult of the preterite has

silent.

fatty*, it

here (as in the concaves) becomes damma^ with quiescent j

and Jcasra with quiescent

unless the middle radical

is

a guttural letter, when fatha inHhat ease remains, as in the

a
he pastured " or "fed/
perfect verbs; thus, ^JjJ
^J^; if
?

damma
as

j^u

fatfa,
j

is

the penult vowel of the preterite,

"

is

it

remains regular,

??

he travels by night ;
but if tern, it is changed to
u
as
J^ he will approve;" where ^ substituted for
V

quiescent,

and

is inflected as follows

MARC,

X Ox Ox

S
2
1

a. In the plural

masc,

is made of the
j and
which remotes sll

plural; as

ad ia

^ whto

the Snd peiB*

fern.

/&. a

the

of
Jp|n*fft

^JSf

singular aad

to be the

pltiml, wlutt

permit rowels, at

^
,

162,
,

,.,,.

last

OF THE BEFKCJTIVE VKUU.

is

dropped, and

regularly thrown away, except in the

Is

fimihuuc plural, as
PLUUAt.

MAM

i'iH,

WW.

MAHC.

we?"
US;*''

Anil so witli roqwcfc to

100) go lxforo,

/////; us

0i

(whon the

^J;

^^

forWdn

il),

j^l,

etc,,

an

^-^

radicals take

milosB the penult

^J

etc,

108.

Tho

iwpttmtive, an in (ho wgularn,

when

the parugogicui

dropped

tffii crwyS
^*

is

nun

hikcm place

llw* lant
nulical,

KM.

^ ie

^ II

!*!"$i

In the

/CMM

final

throwing
u8

jU

for

after

tli

Hingular foniinino and pltwal

^jU

^j\\l

kwra cannot

but

then rotunu*;

in

tlio

<Meat!0

put

if tlio

grjWI
an

tlie

oorisl

lj

for

letter, is

mutiatiou ii
ft>r

for lil*

final
;

it rejects ify

nfimition on tho
;

which

nmwouline of the participle, ^

Kingitlfir

cluuigoil to

Is

but

the mngulur muKCtilim* aoriwt, returns, as

in

inusoulinu a contraction oocurw minilar <o that in

us

also

formed from

prefixing tho characteristic #?$*;

aoriHl juigmutcd,

after

is

after tfawMtt) but seldom.

Klk itt

ww

Jjj ^ BonK'timos, howromam.

Wliea the

th(*Ho final loiters

over, tlioiigli raroly,

partiolort

aiicl

grjWI*
Ij;

by

The
for

and
and

dropped;

the

article,

role holds

yt;

and

as

OF THE DEFECTIVE VEBB.

after Jcasra refuses another

kasra, j\l

final

used also in the genitive for

^jl

however, regular

is,

139

the rejected

as

CjU and

The

The

The

^Vj.

&.

returns, as not being final

contraction, as in the aorist

165.

and

and

f\j

accusative

In LjU and IL.U

;

and J^Jlc mates a

infinitive is

always regular.

passive voice follows the active on the

principle as in those verbs

are

same

which we have already exemplified,

regard being always had to the rales of permutation,

Defective g?.

Defective j.
SlNGtTLAE,

3
^

c:

etc.

^^fj

etc.

1
Aorist.

3
xOxO*
etc.

etc.

,.j]*j

1
PwrUcigle.
etc*

^.
to
is

is

^JJB

wad

instead of

^ qtuesoeat^ like
put for

t^Ji by
160,

g^; and ,J*^

the

^ame

W^ ,iuw

Iia

the

jJJ J^#
;

ObjfK

stands 'By oontraotioii for

^J^i

amd

/W/^

for

fi^resMd rtjle^^
tijfejoi*

whose middle tadioal

a .iw^^a, of ^

yerb

jfefectiv^

fa$$rfy sncli

as

^J

(for

340

OF THE DEEECTTVE
Active

"VERB.

Voice.

Preterite.

PEM.

SINGULAK,

DUAL.

PLUBA.L,

MASC.

FEM.

MASC.

WMk*0

."OxOx

Aorist.
XX OX

XX OX

X OX

OX

O x Ox

Ox ox

O X OX

X OX

O x Ox

Ox Ox

Aorist Antithetic.
xx Ox

wtf

x"

OX

Apocopate.
x ox

x ox

X X LX

OX
Jf

OX OX

OX

T*^.
XV Ox

OX OX

\M*wCP

if*:/'

*Aori$t Pedagogic.
IM

XO X OX

X OX

**

XX OX

xOxOx

Imperative.
OXO

OX

Participle*

Infinitive

^^j

iJJ

X X OX

t8

X X OX

t35

x Ox

-55

xx ox

OF THE DEfECTlVE VEKU.

107.

The

derivative formations have likewise the

affinity to their primitives,

in tht?

observing only, that the

protcrito of tho defective s

muina in the

ftrnt

is

substituted for

same

which,

re-

and second persons, forming a diphthong

i.-b*

with /tf$; a

141

^s^ijf^t

t,*,.*

*A-iJf*S

,1*

s/*U

quite othero&ys, as

tho primitive, where } returns.

Defective Derivative Ibrnwtwns.
ACTIVE.

I'ASSIVK.

I.

*>*

II.

III.

I?,

11.

IX.
I.

II.

Ill,

IT.

VII.

IX,

in.

OP THE DOUBLY IMPERFEC1 VCiHL

112

Of

HIM
'*

)i

43"

tlic*

claH,sc H

1*

T!u

w^p)

JU;

rudical

Itrwt

twM**}

1>y

of thn

!iain^ut(*<l t

lib*

yi

Mtm

infirm

doubly

int{M*rf<<ct.

ijapi*rfr

Hiinpli

riicliiiil^

ho rdunti'dj

tin*

and an*

lh(rn aro four riubdivisinut4

u
(for

mode

sai<l fo In*

Imi dn,m f*(nnpnhonls th*

The*

wMck

any two of

lmv<*

position of fiioHc

of

&r

thoir radicals, uiv

follow tho

They
it*

VT]W

Btieli

Verbs DoiAljj IwiwrfccL

anor<lint?

info

diviiiil

ami

iiatu^iird

two

inert,

wwnd

flu*,

in*r(

us ^

**

wliii!i

and with

IN

with n

<MiiijuKuttM!

!*>

r^jM*r-f

flit*

Ilkt*

st^ond)

iw

**

iJ.

Tim

IjiHt

mdieiil hauixatf-d, fft^ H^roiMl in<Tt, JH

j|U) "lip mouniiHl;** and

lf

i>-

(for

L>)

*L

(fbr

Ine iimiif*^ i*f

i

tho

of th
of JC

Ur* and
3.

aiicl ixfe

ififl*'i?tiiijw

J\*

uiid

m ^J\

"

c*f

lu

thitH,

*u>*

The

tlm Imi
1

*l

'*

J\

^tj

tAI4TlCIII3LII*

In*

the*

or THI; i>oni.Y

143

VF.KB.
/*

Tlu

I.

Immzatwl, the

niiilillw

liiat

inert; as

tiro*!,"
I*

which follows

A Hit U*H

JL

and

JtJ

^U

he re*

thua,

AOHtftY,

<

'I

109.

^j "ho

on awount of
dn^pptnly

and

itn

it

often an the j is

tho Aorist

saw* 1 should bo regularly conjugated

occuwneo,

frequent

the*

hmnmt^d

&lif is

vowel thrown upon tli^ prucoding ktter as

In tho primitive form, therefore*
?

and ImporatiYa aro

as follow

Aoriitt:
UXJAL,

Utt/

/jJi

when

the vorso roqniroft,

fotrnd In tho

or with tho

It in

^tgogienl

also formed

as

ete*

OF THR IMWBLY niPEHFECT

In the

a.

out

:ircl

formation of this verb hamza

is

everywhere thrown

an

INFIX mvi;

IMPEIl.

mET

A.OEIST.

J,

lt

or

SMi'

or

*u

T!j other verbs of

ft.

tho '1th iui-HuUiou, in Ihe

^

^^

r*

^
/?.

Wh?u

Intmz*

IB

iw in

may

also

3-

throw away

manner of ^1,
making

kamzaw

cither 1x4

&'

not jftsmatwl
pntlorlto

in

Ijt

*^

r#*

fhf*

llj; ami uUo

this species

miprativo with

jf

tl

lint

It

tlie

paragogical

is

^f

conjugated regularly, retaining

in iho

participle ^\Jf in the infinitive

participlf* pussivc it is

^yi, although j

takes

Ja^r/i

170.

The

oIuKH of flui

BouHe

Imperfects, which are

uch
IIB
have
two of tho
compri^
lottery and ^

culled Tnvolutw,

and uro of two kiilH, tho Separate and the

Conjunct
Tim H<*pamt arc
whidi havc^ or ^ for tho first and last
a
"h guardod" or "took care; ??
an
radi<jal
he
for radirulH,

Iwtd

u worn

llttctcd liki!

ltfiof

jc|

M>

and

i*A|1f

Tlwt ImjMjrnliw

In tk0

/^

(ajMtftking of

^j,

tlio

XMI'iiUAttVfi,

a liorso): the

"being in-

first

othor as Jj>^ and

/UJ.
AVIUHT*

in t!u> otlior poraons ronumos

^;

as

with the paragogical nfm

it

OF THE DOUBLY IMPERFECT VERB.

171.
cals ^

145

The Involute Conjunct has the middle and final radior 4^; as ^jj* "he roasted;"
"he was strong

or powerful;"

J^

"he

which, with regard to the

lived;"

middle radical, are conjugated perfectly; and in the

imperfectly

^L

two that of

The

IMPERATIVE.

PAKTICIPLE,

Infiaitiye

bere for jja

mode of

^j and

the other

as

INFINITIVE.

a.

following the

final

li

put for 15^

is

AORIST.

and

the last ^ being changed to

PBETEEITE.

for

55

tS^ stands

avoiding thereby haying

the penult and last radicals the same, and becoming a surd or doubled

verb; whilst, on the contrary,/^ converting^ final to

radicals similar,
;

and

is

frequently contracted by ta$h$ld

and, in the Aorist,

the adj^ctiTe
infinitiye,

.^ is

throwing away

tjas?

[^
its

or

its

rejects

>-

or

The

^ in the

is changed to quiescent
and ^5.

alif, ac-

vowel,

first

vowel back upon the preceding

INFINITIVE.

as

radical

In the same manner are conjugated

sometimes the

both

Instead of the participle

^jxl*

most generally used.

cording to the rules respecting^

b.

^, makes

*the

Derivative verbs

only

in the 9th formation,

throwing

letter

IMPBBATIVK.

as,
AOUIST,
o xt* s

19

146

OP THE OTGf-ATIVE VERB.

Of

172,

Verts Triply Imperfect.

very few verbs are Triply Imperfect,, and are

two

divided into

classes*

Class

of such as have

first consists

and the other twoj and ^$; as ^\

"he Ibetook himself to some place/ etc., or the middle
"
ham&ated and the first and last j and
as
he promised ; "

faxmea for the

first radical,

^
j

the

first

and

of
;

which

is inflected

likey^ and

g^A the
,

other as

as 3

INPIN1TIVE.

PARTICIPLE.

IMPERATIVE.

PEETEEITB,

or

There
first,

no verb having all the

consisting of ^ and t/.
is

O/

radicals^

the Negative

or even the two

Verb,

173. The Negative Defective Verb

J? though conjugated

only in the preterite, is quite unlimited in point of time,

u
"
a
3
5
it is not/'
it was not/ or
it will not be/ etc.
signifying
,x

formed of the particle

and is inflected as follows

It is apparently

or

"

exists

?7
;

1J

not/' and JJl

"

is

?>

P1UBAL,
F1.M.

x
.

PEM.

MAflC.

9 ox

</

,jAUJ

fl-UJ*]

c-

MASC.
x ox

x ox

LJ

UJ
a.

SometimeB

cL)S is

employed instead of

u^

but without any

OF VERBS OP PRAISE AXD

Inflection.

Most Arabian grammarians

negative particle

augmented by the

147

CE1STSUEE.

consider cibS as merely

tlie

letter c->.

Verbs of Praise and Censure.

These verbs, which the Arabian grammarians de^

*
'^"Z

174.

"$

nominate

^x

-"^-o

p&\j ^&A\ JUM,

admit only of very limited inflection.

u
times pronounced i*5, 1*5, and **3
it
is

They may be regarded

bad."

with something of a verbal

feminine termination

feminine nouns.

as

of L^C*-

They
is

good/' and

of love."

\fc>,

and

They receive also a

<JL-glJu
when applied to

inflection.

cL^o

\*>

in the plural,

signifies

for

^li

The word \Z.

it is

compounded
u
worthy

that is excellent," or

To these three verbs may

bad;" and J^sl

JJu "it

as a species of interjections

looked upon as a verb of this kind

u

and

are 1*3, some-

are sometimes, but very rarely, writ-

They

ten U*J in the dual; and

may be

and censure,"

or "verbs of praise

it is

also

be added

*H

"itis

beautiful;" but these

last,

under other acceptations, are regularly conjugated.

Of

Verfa of Admiration^ or Surprise.

175. These are called

u^s?^

"
\

^Jl*5\

verbs of admiration,"

Like the preceding, they are ratheV a kind of interjadional

formulse than a particular species of verb.
They W6
Diployed

in

two ways ; the

first

^\ U

the form of the third person

singular masculine of the preterite of the third derivative formation,

case.

preceded by the particle

The second mode

is

U, and
to

followed by

anWusative

employ the second person

singular masculine of the imperative of the third formation,

148
O

YEKBS OF ADMIRATION, OR SURPRISE*

03?

CjP

J*ii, followed

by^
as

c^ prefixed;

As an

the Verb,

we

recommend
lie

is

J*djl

or

t?

J-d-M

jjjj

"how

excellent is

This subject will be

very excellent."

examined in the Syntax,

fully

176.

(?

la/j

Zaid!" or "Zaid

more

the object admired haying the preposition

appropriate

Appendix

to our

two Sections on

here subjoin a series of useful tables which

we

and frequent perusal

till

to the student's careful

has committed them

all to

memory.

Table

I.,

page 149,

exhibits at one view the Preterite Active of the eleven species of

Verbs, which

we have

already explained

90 to

107.

The

upper line (No, l) shews the Eegular Verb 3%. No. 2 shows
the inflection of a Surd Verb. Nos. 3, 4 and 5 exhibit the
three species of Hamzated Verbs.

the Simile Verbs.

Nos. 6 and 7 exhibit

Fos. 8 and 9 3 the Concave Verbs.

Lastly,

Nos. 10 and 11 are examples of the Defective or Irregular

Verbs* In like manner Table II. exhibits the Aorist Active
of each of the foregoing species of Verbs in the same order.

Table

III.,

the Imperative, the Participle Active, the Infini-

and the Participle Passive, which is inserted here bocause there is more room than we could have in either of the

tive,

next two tables which exhibit the Preterite and Aorist Pas-

on the same plan as Tables I. and II. respectively. It has

not been deemed necessary to insert in the Tables those verbs
sive

which are called the Doubly and Triply Imperfect, described

from
168 to
as they arc not very
172, inclusive
numerous, and their inflection is more irregular than that
;

of tho others.

OE THE ,*PREIERIIE A.CT1YE,

T

4)

GO*' j

CO

5.

m
j>
H-l

EH

O
}

{^

U
H

-'

,\3

"3

t
^ li

5-^

CD

150

01'

THE AORIST ACTIVE

CO

gi.a

as: 4-

11

*j\

"

"^;

l>
^

^
B
O

'

!*^

'

*J

~1

:j

:
;

:-i;

EH
CQ
IH

o
v

<j

^5-1;^
1

^
v

-i

sVi
x

-S

^-s

>

V
'

"J
;

,^

.!

7L

OF tJFK IMl'KIUTIVE AND PABTICIPLE ACTIVE, ETC.

Ct

SJ

jrf'V

-U

THE PRETERITE PASSIVE,

m
B
IH
rt

w
B
H
^

3Q

jjff2;S5]|5"?;F;J

^jm>f]t^;$l^T|
"'ftSSSHtti^^'i"
111111 1- i-nii'T ir

ninm>iiniiiip.imii...n.i

*"*

\*

jj

OF THE AOBIST PASSIVE.

**
'

"}*

5"

>

n-

151

SECTION

V.
f>

j?

Of

the Indeclinable Particles

<*'

U^\

(plural of

Arabian grammarians designate those parts of spoorvU

which wo cll Proposition*, Adverbs, Conjxmotioiis, wul
.

under the general appellation of Parlies!* **, an

In treating of those wo whuli commoner
44.
1

Intorjootioiw,

we

stated,

with, the Imposition, tlran far differing

from tho arrangement

The PrqwHitioiiH,
usually observed in European grammars,
Adverbs, and Con] unctions are eaeli divided into two dhiHHefy
the Ins(%paruble and
directly

prefixed,

tlie

and

Separable

tlio

other,

tho

f!i't

being always
though not joinod, in-

word which they govern. Oiu* or

other of them may ocenr in ovory line, and are of nuidi

variably precocling

tlu*

consoquoneo to a proper tuiderHtaiidiug of

tin*

language^; Ihc

Inseparable PrepoBition, Advei*b% and Oonjunotionw together

with tho Borvllo letters? are very apt <x> perjilox tho beginner
In

vaiiotiB

wayn;

but

nioro

no purpose, tho lonvcn of a

vocable** which he can never find, till ho lifii

patience" in turning over,

dictionary, for

loamod

to

epocia11y by fatiguing his

analyse and

to

separate those lotion* or pi4f|Mes

from the words to which thoy aro prefixed*

requisite for Mtn, therefore, to

It will

pay very grout attention

too

to

OF pREPOsmoxs,

the observations

upon

in order that they

155

which wo are about

thorn,

may make

to offer,

a necessary impression on the

memory.
a.

Most of

ilic

Particles, as

we

shall

see, are either

immediately

hence

substantives, adjectives, or verbs slightly modified;

happens thai the same word

divisions of particles

preposition or an

may

it

often

belong to more than one of the sub-

just as in Latin

word ante

tlio

is either

adverb, according to its application.

#

,*<*.

Of

178*

and^

tkcHO, live arc inseparable*, viz.,

all of

which govern the genitive

eiine

Tho Preposition

which, they are prefixed*

cbj

of the

c-j

in Badr."

It also denotes

gether with*/'

mj*&> jpL

"withy"
"

verbs of

"

or of "taking*

as

away;"

witti tfe0
1

t*&

l^K^"

it

OxCu-O

OxO*o x

^j*S

O^S MiO

t-

i^y3b

y^J U y*M\

Art

"
bringing,"

"ho came

*j4b

u^J
tite

witit fee

h@ W6nt

light"

It

"
retributioBj" equiva-

"OB tewumt of;"

Mf0 for

??
;

denotes "along with,"

"h0 took awsy

"

"in the

subjoined to

signification of

sometimes denofcei ^oompensatioE" or

lent to our words "fesr,"

(when you were)

When

book," fa, "fee tonight the book;"

awiy

to

along with/' or "to-

pen,'

coming" and "going,"

and then the phrase conveys the

J,

noun

I ate bread with dates

uLiift

w^4^ "I wrote with a

Jju

c/

has ka$ra for

m a<^V

vowel, and signifies generally "in,"

"
mosque ;" so ,jyj <dff *gj& God aided you
its

S0j

c^

life,

as follows:

and an eye

for

wi

OF PJREP08ITIONS.
M
f

*-:i

<yo;

^ cl%>-^ <^1^

"may God

Ai

on account of thy
rclqwc from
u

of

particle,

nflcii

!K

ft

wearing

an

i!^

It is sometimes

&}&*? "they swear by God."

put, Ix'foro thf! predicate of

a siMM-i.-s of
cxph'tivts; as

Mam!"

destroy tneo

a nugativo, and be-

St U "God

JjU.
^ X

does not

KS

m-I<!ft;" IttiTuIly, "(Sod

"
I
do not know.'
After
lis'd

mane

ihn

to

J-"V

lo !'

indicating iho

man!"

"iM-lie.hl u
ijj

s>

uluittf

f)

tiling

17!^

utuny

v*rlM; us

Tim

IVqwisittotw
to

14

liy

IH

<{(! ! n
:tn

cb ami

used

n<mr a

<'ip1oytl, (wlu^n

We nmy

pre

as

idiomatically

percei?cd the

man

(wlio was)

j are finploycd ohioflyin

^U "by

an

Lord of tJw Ki^btt!"

it

IE

like

0od! ??
manner

u |>roposition) as

<diTj

obwrvtn, liciwu?i% that J is generally

It wometimos signifies

c<

jiluiig

wttli,'*
M

wfioji,

in

fe

atotion;

v^Sb ^^^ "ho

u toujuiidin
l<*noHiig **aud*"

*Srtl!i," or
r

it,

cJ

^4

C^JHVHH Hwiwing;

Ilii!

iw-y **by

flif iarti<*li

*o

I puHs<*d

J^.^ c^^i

*?

of

ol>jc<;i

**

a fVw |i}rars
tloil

"Bcliold !"

Lastly,

\vith

JU JJj

wit in m-glceting;"

in

in

iificl

UJi
***

flii!

io

that

^yJ

inclieittliig

a Himultanoaus cvont

it

"tlia

flic

accusative; as

with tho

is

<^

tin?

Amir

Pwpomtion
iiiir

Ji/

"like*," or

(ho army.*'

"
***," and

cor-

the

157

OF PBBPOSITI0NS*
as

genitive;

'

"

affixed,

though

me/

like

"

thns? Ul

tim ;" but

like

<^l

me;'

like

Tory rarely used with, the

"
like
Saey quotes a few instances ; as
it is

De

The word

etc.

It is prefixed also to

'*"'

the isolated pronouns;

"
thee

man."

like a

J>^
*

composed of

\&

C/ and

of the demonstra-

**

tive UJ, is considered as a

noun, and

if

governed by a pre-

ceding word, the antecedent loses the nunatkm, as in the

following example

of such a year."

s**
ss
\*$ &**

Of

Ss

^^ \&

C/,

O s

in such a

and the

this particle,

noua U, is formed the word Ul

manner as."
a. I consider

^^

relative pro-

a
?

month

signifying

ia the same

which, is generally called an adverb, to be as

geimine a preposition, as either

<>

or J.

My

reasons are

1st,

that it -uiiiformly governs the genitive case like the two last particles

Snd, that

it is

nrtually a preposition in English, as ia the phrases

where "like" governs the objective

the same as any other preposition; 3rd, it is viewed as a

"like me/' "like him,"

case,

preposition

invariably

etc,,

by De Sacy (Gtrammaire Arabe,

p* 468),

Gaelic

Lastly,

it is

^^positox governing the dative or ablative case ia

it

the Gaelic language, whether Highland ox Irish.

Stewart in his

Grammar, Edinburgh, 1812, p. 126, gives mar, "like,"

So does O'Bonovan in his Irish

a preposition.

181.

Tha Preposition J, with

tlie

of the dative case aa

"to," tke sign
"^
. ,/OxO^
u
'

^U

j^t

it foeara

praise be to

the vowel

Go4"

/^^;

M <#f "to iiee;"

(<

to

as

158

OF PBEPOSmONS.

etc. 3

with the exception of the affixed pronoun of the

person singular; as

"to me."

It also
s

<^s

'

"for,"

signifies
<"

first

s"&

on account of;" *ij&\u b\**A ^j/ f=rU

grief was increased on account of what had happened to

my

because/

It sometimes expresses swearing

two eyes."

Ms

with a mixture

C3

of

as

surprise;

"by God!"

<di

prefixed to a verb,

it

*<* '

"

in order that," or

" ssi*

"to the end that;" as <du Uufc

u^^\& "he

<**

When

fixed with faffa)

him be

by way

sought something

prefixed to the aorist

an imperative in the 1st and 3rd persons

assist;" JJ^J, "let

when

a conjunction,

sometimes means
P'?^'

that he might eat it."

As

as

it

"

%w3x

forms
us

let

It is elegantly pre-

assisted."

of pleonasm, before that part of

the sentence which grammarians call the Predicate (or that

which

is

affirmed of

any person

or thing), especially

when

the person or thing of

^1* is placed before the subject (or

somewhat

Alexander

(is)

fixed with

fatM

is

affirmed)

powerful/' or
it

"

as

.xxo^o

xv

,6

which

t3

^*&*]*

/jJO
-"v

the powerful."

^J
(

"for

When

pre-

gives to the Preterite the sonse of the

Optative, as more fully explained in the Syntax.

Sometimes

used idiomatically as a species of interjection expressive

"
Zaid !" When
of "a cry for assistance;" as oplj
help

It is

the particle

with a fafha, conies before the

<*,-

s>

latter loses its

Mf\

as d50j
'

^
'

-^

^s&

the truth coming from thy Lord."

In conditional prepositions
"if;" or 5J "if not;" as

it

X<Y,

?$

article,

the

&\ %
^

Here

"verily that

is
* 'V-

^ ^,<

j^

is for

j^eSL
*

answers to the antecedent

ck^T ^Lr J

o^
jl

"if thou comest

159

OF PREPOSITIONS.

me, I will certainly honour thee," or more correctly, "hadst

thou come to me, I would certainly have honoured th.ee."

to

182. It

I think, inaccurately asserted in most Arabic

is,

Grammars

that

and

are also inseparable prepositions;

whereas they are so only in appearance.

the

initial

"from/' "out

the particles

of

letters

They

and

but then the second

of," etc.;

are merely

denoting

letter of the

changed by the rules of euphony

"
CU from that which/ for U ^; so

particle generally follows,

^lc

^ ^B. In manner tt
U ^ and think would
like

for

is for

it

volve us in a serious absurdity.

is really

by the

puzzle the grammarians

it

the word to which

however, *

"out of that which,"

that in this last instance,

to persuade us,

and

19); as

into 1 (see

as

is

the prefix,

which would

prefixed,

in-

In some very rare instances,

employed instead of
Gtfxk

t>^

article J\

is

^^ "from
>

when

the two tribes/

followed
3

instead

of

183.

The Separable Prepositions

Like the Inseparable they

are not very numerous.

the genitive case.

We

of the Arabic language

all

govern

here give them in their alphabetical

order.

preposition ^J\ indicates the,, tej^dgbSti$ of an

U
"
.J!
came to the
until;" as 'ij^uH
action, "to/
"'
"*
s
*.,:''
^e^
^
"until the present time*"
Jt also denotes
city;"
jjil
^J\
'
r

184.

The

*V

31

"accession" or

t-x^***

S>

"

addition:" a$ *$tff&* ^JV

added wisdom to (their)

'

^'"

^V

44^
*

Ualj

thej

OP PREPOSITIONS.

ICO

185. The prepositions

ception ;"

thus,

except Zaid."

beyond," or

"

Se>-

and

ex-

all slain

were originally verbs signifying

Tliese

"

denote

ti&,

"^tey were

j44^ bM

tSc

aj

"
being

being separated from."

uli. denotes "the termination"

186, The preposition

"

UUl,

or

like the Latin

extremity" of a portion of time or space,
S<s s
O
>s

mgue

as ;" thus,
ad, or our phrase "as far

time

"
it

as JIJL&JI

until;"

signifies

^^

jJlx^

When

dawn."

far as the place of rising of the

to

<^o

j^

it is

as

applied

i^Jik ^>. iJU

"they trayelled until the sun arose."

xxOx"
"
as \^\j
"even
and
to our words
;"
yea"

^$UJ

"I

Had

the particle

haye eaten the

eyen

fish,

of

Jl been used here instead

haye eaten the

fish

up

its

J^

head."
it

and answers

subjunctive mood.

-3S

is

equiyalent

xx x

IB

^o

/ xoS

\*

c^l

would haye meant

"

to,

or as far as ?

its

preceding the aorist used as a future^

antithesis,

It

it

head*"

affects it

to the Latin donee followed

W>^ J^

"

tA^

march

When
with

by the

until thou over-

takest them,"

187.

The

preposition

Ju

"
"on,"

or time;
periority as regards space

*& J^

*"

<<iB

" or Ui:a

tlie

colorBe of

^**

w denotes su-

oxx

as *A&

Ms

upon him;"
"
time or

OXt*X

It sometimes denotes "against;" thus,

"

above,

XX X X

^j^

a Eon OE0e upon a time went forth against two bulls."

X

sometimes signifies
to custom*"

"

according to;" as Sjl*

It is idiomaticaEy

employed

It

"according

to express

"debt"

161

OF PREPOSITIONS.
"

or

duty ;" as

"I owe

i.e.

dinars,"
"

you ought
to

to

signify j*.

ellipsis for

jjj

"

.!&
^

uj5h
jL>j>
**
"'

upon me a thousand

literally,

In

do this."

Oxx

^ ^-^

clCU

this latter sense

is

used

"take;" as \^j CiU^ "take Zaid," an

^1;
cCU " it is your duty to take Zaid."

It is a curious coincidence that the idiomatic

a.

/xOx

x-x

a thousand dinars;" \&& J*AJ

Le expressive of deht is
L5

also

common

very

use of the Arabic

in the

Gaelic lan-

"

guage

Tha la faphairidk ay ad orm,

I owe you a day
"
literally,
you have a day in harvest upon me."

harvest,"

The

188.

preposition

"

shot the arrow from the bow."

"

sense of

without ;" as

rich enough without

"

or

^^W
as

^j&T

from,"

*lpT ^L^^j "I

It is sometimes used in the

1

men."

leaving behind ;"

separation

signifies

"distance" or "transition;" as

is

in

thus,

"

J^

ail

It also denotes

oJj

"

cbU

God

yerily

^\

"
passing

by

"

he died leaving

(behind him) a son."

189t

The

preposition

^ denotes "in;" with reference

X^o

u^\ ,A

time or place; as

^ Ox

JUli

the

money

(is) in

to

the

X"

It is used idiomatically to express multiplication in

purse."

x Ox

,5V xv

arithmetic; as <L**-

sometime^ answers

~tft

<#^^

"

Uli

^u^i

^j

xt

^y

15^5

three multiplied

the preposition

"

by

five,"

It

with ;" as follows

'

he departed with

fifty

tbo$&aa4 (men)."

d, jA,M, JA,^, and ^oJ generally

"
denote "to," "up to," "as far m, n
nigh," etc. According
190.

The

prepositions

21

162
to

OF PREPOSITIONS.

De Sacy

these are all modifications of a substantive rather

than prepositions*

The

191.

commencement of an
or

3^

or

still

"

?^9

? ?&%'"

k^

3j^

to

"

since;" as follows:

I have not seen

him

o ?

genitive;

since Friday.

3'

ft,?

is

not yet finished, &* or 3o^ governs the

Ox

xx

as

<"

<tej^

"When the period

denote the

action with reference to time elapsed

passing^ and are equivalent

xoyo-o

d^J

d^

prepositions

U^A

tjub

^Otfx

O ^

U "I

3^ <j^uK

have not spoken

to

him

during this month."

192. The preposition

-o x

as

jW
x

j^x

^^,^1
x

xxx

as

dxuj>-

&

OxO

(^AJ
$,

from/' "of," "than;"

the

Amir

departed from

Sometimes

tho palace.*'

when

IMC

T
^L j/-

"

xo

^ ^

S^-,

denotes

it is

used to express composition;

S-SJXJ^PXC-S.

gp L^-S*
*

xt/S-x

man

jjluJSl

xo

is

made up

of a soul and

j*

6li3x

a "body;" c-^UcI j J^ar

palm-trees and vines."

It is used in the sense of our

"than"

to express the

"a garden

te>-

(consisting) of

comparative degree (see

word
In

81).

negative propositions, or interrogative propositions implying

it

negation,

often happens that the subject, or object of the

verb, instead of appearing in

expressed
?

by tho

XX

J^j ^
rr*
L^^T
x Srx

its

^ governing

preposition

^*

"

no

man

proper case,

cai

'

^e

to

me;"

is idiomatically

the genitive
fP<*<*

^c
"^'*

d\
*#

as

0>x

^'^

<*

"you have no God but him."

193,

Tho

rest

of

the

prepositions -are

expressed

nouns substantive^ employed in the accusative

case,

by
the

163

OP ADVERBS.

nunation being rejected.

The

"in front of;"

fa\ "before,"

sort are the following, viz.,

j

"

"after;"
"

principal prepositions of this

"

around
round,"
"
below ;"lj-,
"beneath," "under,"
under

3jP-

"

u^oLt

^, or

after

"towards;" J*I "beyond;"

^k

"beneath,"
"

^J

3*

"besides,

SL "in

pos-

"near," "with" (Latin penes, apud; French

"
above;"
Jy*, "instead of ;" Jlc "except;" jy

session

of,"

chez}]

J!o "before" (in regard to time);

^ ^

to place);

or

^jj

"with;"

"before" (in regard

"beyond," "behind;

7'

All these are themselves liable

klj "amidst," "among."

to

"

"except;''

c^r

"between," "among;"
"

be used in the genitive case when they are preceded by

a simple preposition, inseparable or separable;

as

^o ^*

"after," "in the sequel."

Adverbs.

The Adverbs

194.
that
in

it

would be a

any Grammar.

ticiple,

and

thus, 5leU*>

"little;"
;''

useless labour to attempt detailing

Every

infinitive in the

"within;"
.

\s>-j^

language

right hand";"

"without;"

\Slft
"*

**"

2U

L^j "eagerly;"

"on

the

may be employed

accusative

"together with;"

\^S "by day;"

them

substantive, adjective, active par-

by being put in the

verbially

night

of the Arabic language are so numerous,

case absolutely;

\^

"miich;" LlS

"one day;"

iLJ "on
"by chance;"
*

left

haad;"

G^L "willingly;"

ad-

l*j/>

U^ "with

"by
the

"quickly;"
aversion^"

164

OF ADYEEBS.

"eternally,"

nomis of

or

These are

etc.

action, "which,

all

substantives, adjectives,

being put in the accusative case

become adverbs.
a.

According

to

De Sacy

noiins thus put in the accusative case,

are often found in elliptical expressions, where they depend upon

a verb understood; as i^lL

\JXi
^

"

am

ing

ready to obey you

God water
7

Ci^

land;" &lsa^ "by

These are

praised/

"I

this

;"

"by

hearing and obeying," mean-

"

"

by watering," meaning
his praise,"

expressions for

elliptical

"may

i,e.

c\W usJil j
*

Ix

<SGx

f-Q^

hoard by hearing and obeyed with obedience;" LJL

?s x

"may God

<L>

Pf

water thce by watering!" <&Wi^

<*IH

*,s1t

"I

fas&s\

praise

s s

Cjo

"may you

perish!"

1^ J Ca^

"you

^X

welcome,"
"all

at

is

him

These modes of speaking are very common

with his due praise."

in Arabic; as di3

may
he be

XX

are
<?

"at your ease and convenience;" <L]/ J U^

service," literally, "with love and with respect;" or,
your
X XX X
X
S XX XXX
literally,

,x

<#

*<$>

*#

which Is a double ellipsis for i\

negatively, <uj/ S j
"
love and no respect/' i#,
expect nothing from me."

^ U>- 3 "no
See De Sacy's

Grammaire Arabo, Tome

rendered "une

51

1, p.

50S, where the phrase

is

cruche et tin eouvorcle."

195.

The

following

common

comprises the most

list

adverbs

of the Arabic language, independent of those already referred

to (

104).

It is

a translation partly from

whoso Grammar

partly from Eosonmullcr ?

abridgment of
1
5

this is

Do

Saey's

an inseparable

the Latin an ?

num ?

or

is

Be

Sacy, and

a very

tisefal

more extensive work,

like
particle denoting interrogation,

numquid? thus, cL?Q

u
a

"yes," "even so/'

assuredly/'

"

is

he

verily."

deacl

?"

Rosen-

165

OP ADVEBBS.
*

from
"

miiller says that it differs

stronger affirmation than

p"

2 in this respect, fe\

we

had said

stronger than if he

adverbs

junctive
jl

"seeing that,"

time."
V\

UUl

are

con-

it

expresses the
also

signifies

and \& signify

J1

or <lfi* *\

trt*l

it

also,

"then," "at that

pf$4 "verily," "rest assured;" thus, from the voyage

of Sindbad, ^(L*!

had

say, "will

"well done!"

or fa

*J*\

events

provided that."

"behold."

we

assent.

\A\,

or rather

the present,

"

if

is

employed with a future sense,

occurrence of two

simultaneous

"then,"

more emphatic

usually

limited to

is

Again,

j*3.

U^, and UU\ "when."

UJ1,

dl,

expresses the

ISo

you go?"

say to a person

he say j-\ "yes," the affirmation

if

yes," if the sentence which

if
precedes be not interrogative; thus,

"go away," and

is

it

\&&

u^U

UJt

C^-j

snd

not been (for) thy arrival amongst us, test assured

that thou wouldst have perished in this place."

l\

<dJU

(from^ andS) "if

HI

SjS

Jj-

not,"

"there

is

nisi,

"si non,"

"except."

no power and no strength

except in God."

"whether?" (Latin num? m?} TMs fe properly a

"
e^ else. *
of d0ubt, and ihe& ^ignift^
coBJioictioja ^xpre^sive
7

*
*

05 (from

and

"

not ")

"

is it not ?

'*

160

OF ADVERBS.

When

\.

as

"not;"
God.

?J

<dl

this

JLJ

!H

followed

particle is

"there

Sometimes when the word

expresses negation

as J3 isi

may be

not whether this

by

"assuredly,"

no judgment but with

511

does not follow,

<d*S

^^ ^

"
j

verily,"

thus,

my

reward

is

only with God,"

from God, and from no one

a

J1
Zf\

J^U cLoU

It
or

"

<diT

as

<5j!

^Ic ^p-l Cwl

"only;"

"since,"

so."

j^l

"

and I know

"even

"indeed,"

Hundred Governing Words;"

God is forgiving,"
"unless/

it still

a trial to you."

governs the accusative case, being one of the

"

Ci3l

signifies

is

u
l

it

Jl

"
i.e.

I expect

assuredly

my

reward

else,"

how?" "wherefore?" "whence?"

"yes," "verily," "even so,"

It is nearly equivalent

used only when a form of oath follows; thus,

pu but
a
d^ ti\ \Jj j Z/\ verily, by the Lord it is the truth." It

to

fa

eqtuvalent to the interjection 0, used in calling.

s

<&%

^bl and

j.

^y

"

"

when,"

"where?"

t,*

3^

whensoever."

"

whence

??

"whither?"
^J J1
^*^ ^

"wheresoever?"

^,

^1

an adverb of admiration, " bravo!"

"well

done!" JB^" enough," "stop."

>us* ^

l^J or \t>tb

an adverb expressive of calling equivalent

to

167

ADVERBS.
It is used before a

our interjection 0.

by the

article

JJ&TlJJ or

as,

noun that

used as a preposition

and appears

clinable,

ye people

phrase

preposition

hereafter."

ceases to be inde-

it

I"

as

xw

or in the

The

commonly employed after the prefaces of books,

in order to announce the commencement of the

1^1 is

or in letters,

main

^"

either in the accusative A*J

by the

genitive, if preceded

defined

"

^uT Q\ U

"
*J " after," afterwards," "behind;" **

When this word is

is

author or writer
subject, after the

has expressed the

and the eulogy of the Prophet, or the usual

praises of God,

formula of politeness, in epistolary correspondence.

^"
?

is

afterwards," ''thereafter,"

employed with a negative, and

"y et ;"

in this last sense

"
signifies

it

not yet," nondum.

the diminutive of the preceding, signifies "a little after."

JJ

"yes,"

"

3'

"

certainly,

it is

"
so,"

in reality."

This par-

used after an interrogative or negative proposition,

ticle is

and then

it

affirms the contrary of

what may be

asserted in

such proposition.
"JZ

"between;"

"
separation,"

lj

this is

merely the noun

* "difference/'

in the accusative case.

"whilst," "meanwhile;"

it

sometimes denotes "be-

tween," like the preceding.

-C

"

uL^

"in the mean time,"

whilst,"

"

below,'

"

"

u
under,"

during

"

dxiring this."

(when applied to time)

1G8
as
f

OF ADVERBS.

(*

<*U
o X

^^sc

"by

night"

^ " from below

"

C"* ^

u^-^sr

;"
>

U/x-

"under the night");

(literally
9

"

little

lower."

in this

place."
Jf" here/
"
"
t$ and LLJj
then," afterwards

generally viewed as a

;"

conjunction.
-

^ and^

u
yes,"

"of a verily."

J^li liUl and Cl^pears with the niination

"

may it

it

not

Tbe.

??

"When this word

"becomes an adverb

its

ap-

we have already

<xll
use as a preposition.
Jil^ or
"
??
far be it from thee !
forbid
<i3 lili

described

^1J.

it is so-"

assuredly

God

"
certainly ?

<di

"

lil>-

may

or ii

l/~

"

C^p- "where/
a

hallo
3

?>

"

come

wheresoever
"

whither;"

UiX

a
!

??
;

como hither P

O^i-

"

wheresoever;"

whence;"
it

is

also

written C-4^*

J^o as a preposition "except," "under," "besides." As

an advorb it is used idiomatically in the sense of "seke"
"
"seize upon Zaid!" jjy CJ
or
stop;" as \^j
?

d^^

do what thou wishest"

The

particle cl/^ (also written cS) 3

uLJJ,

cslvj,

"perhaps,"

^g^ifies

c!43)

"many," "much,"

It takes idiomatically

"often,"

an affixed pronoun;

as

J*

men;
CJ5^

and

"often," "sometimes," This is compounded of <-Jj

"
"
"
often,"
aad sigudfieB sometimes,"
occasionally^"

169

OF ADVEItBS.

C-uj and Uijj "until," usque dum.

^,

ili^, jp,

J-j,

These when preceding the

fclii.

aorist give it a positive future signification.

Ul?, ULs, Ulrf

and

SI,

SL&

is also

"

the affixed pronouns

perhaps thou ;" JLd

J^

and

J^;

or poetice

by chance."

perhaps,"

J*S

"
all,"

as

L5

^J^,

^z
ail(^

is

This

or

"change"
thus, Jl

$tf?Ox-

L& "only,"

and

"difference;"

^LJ^

jf^j

is

it

is

used

also

and

"not otherwise;"
etc.

^ Lij "far from/' " much

"above.'

This word

less," etc.

is liable

we made respecting &u

and 3?* "before," "prior

preceding,

the accusative case of

"solely;" compounded of uJ andkii (^.).

remarks as those
>

d*j

It is equivalent to

?S*Ox

Lai, ^\ Li?,

jy and

is

signifying

then indeclinable, like

^OS

This adverb receives

u
"
C&*J
perhaps I ;

u=^" This adverb

and is only employed

also Jisjc, cAj^?

"except," "besides."

adverbially;

"from

perhaps you."

always accompanied by a negation ;

with a verb having a future signification.
"
our word
never."

the noun
JI1

^ ^

"

is

Jl

principally."

used,

"
Jc.

above

"over," "above;"

above ;"

"

"

1*1*) X

to."

subject to similar rules.

in front of one's

eyes,"

0^

to the

same

(q*v.}>

This word, like the

L3 "before," "right

diminutive of

^o

"

little

before."
22

OF ADVERBS,

170

"

jj,

jo3

jjS,

"certainly/

sometimes."

This word

IB

Before the aorist it indicates a

usually prefixed to verbs.
or event ; sometimes It Is equivapresent or future action
lent to U|J (q&*\

OX^lXwXO^^^

any time." This particle is used

a negation, and with a verb In the
only In company with
U literally "I saw Mm not at any
preterite; as LS S^VJ

y, y,

kS, kS,

"
time/*

i.e.

J^

of,

or

at

laS,

If a future time

1 never saw him."

TOJ!

is

spoken

must be used.

'

"as If" (comp. of cjT and

"thus," "so"
).
"as if," "according to"
l^ and
(from cKand Ul
<3i3ix

(comp. of

^
*^

tj>>*

"

UK
"

or

^ and

U).
^

"

how

much. ?" (comp. of

u/ and J1 .)

assuredly not" (In reply to a question).

"

every time that,"

n "

wherefore

"

as often as/

"

how often

soever."

how many ?"

how much ?
"

u/and

"

"

how V n

"

U12

any how."

This prefix, as an adverb, has "been already described

under the preposition J

3

"no/ "not/ "not

It is a negation

not"

at all," "is

"

applied to a future action or event.

3$

necessarily;"

y>8

"
undoubtedly."

J "no," "not;"
to

the

aorist ?

to

the preterite texwo.

It

applied absolutely.

wMoh
UJ,

It

and

then
2,

gives

"why?

the

Is

prefixed

souse

7*

(comp,

of

of

the

OF ADVBKBS.

J and U.)

prep.

denotes

it

conjunction

(from

JJ

"when,"

As a

and U) "not yet."

"after," or "after that,"

posteaquam.

"

"
no,"

ji

"
or

ij>

it shall

and

if,"

and the negative

&U ^1

This admits the affixed pronouns

present."

wish (or would to God) I had been a

"I

asj^ <J
man."

U,

know

as

It also denotes "whilst,"

not."

Ci. eLJio

explained

its

pronominal application.

as long as I

"when?"

U J^

^ " C "with," ""

p, 'fi

"as long as;"

as often as,"
t

fa

or

used, in confirming

statement

bravo!"

be

thus,

"We have already

alive."

"whenever."
"

together with,"

or

U^i

remain

U "I

^M

an adverb, denotes "no," "not;" as

"

"

particles

wish" (Latin utmam), "would to God that!"

"I wish (or would to God) that Mu-

hammad were

free

"

3 "I
$j\.

and ^1 ,

Both of these adverbs are com-

"unless."

Ujf

and

not be that."

pounded of the conjunction ^

i

It is a comp. of

a future signification.

restricts it to
literally

It is always prefixed to the aorist,

not."

along with."

as long as."

"

"

"

very well,"

yes,"

what another person has

aifirmative

"well done!"

even so

It is

whether the

said,

also

denotes

It is placed before the

nomina-

or

negative.

It

OF ADVEUBS.

172

noun has the

tlvo case if the

when

the accusative

?J

well done

It is properly

i^ "ho alone ;"

^ and L^OJ.
li

an

"

and approbation,

bravo !"

interjection (q.v.).

This word always requires an affixed pronoun;

&Lj.
thus,

and before

not so restricted.

it is

admiration
particle denoting

^a
"

article prefixed,

l&l^ "she

alone."

Adverbs of admiration

"behold!" "souse

!"

"

or reproach.

This, with the affixed

catch!"

^
o

the signification of
pronoun of the second person, has

"

take."

The

affixed

JumsM*, as *\,

pronoun changes, however, then

p^ ^^5

Cy\i,

frli,

ullfe

(fern.);

into

according to the variation

of gender and number, for d/lai "take thou" (maso.);

"take thou"

?>

tako,

you two/'

<Iil

etc.

(See

Eosenmuller.)
iifli

maso.

HOC hero!

55

"bdholdl"

jiJli fern, nearly

"there he
equivalent to our expressions,

is 3

??

and

eccola.
is;" or the Italian eccofo and
"
whether ?" An interrogative adverb, an

k and L

"
x

whether
x

and _d

and

&

??

**

&/<<"

JJA

or

9'

**

is it

^ yx

^^

not ?

??

,,

there she

num ?

well done !"

,*

"come on!"

"hero," "in tMs place."

//

approaoli!"

From

this adverb

in the same manner

other demonstrative adverbs arc formed,
as demonstrative pronouns;

as

dAii, uJ3&>
"

there,

in

at a distance; ^l
speaking of things
hero,"^ in^speaking
"from this place;"
of things at hand,

& ^

173

OF CONJUNCTIONS.

Uy& and

"
\jyJ

\&>

see there

" " behold !"

uH^j ^-^^j <-i^ and

Iji,

cLolk

these adverbs are em-

ployed in invocation and speaking to ; they are more properly

interjections used when calling to a person; as "hallo!"
"
" " hark

come hither

you

This particle

l.

strictly speaking,

is,

an

interjection used

signify warning, encouraging or admiration.

to

\j

{fj\

same import.

are nearly of the

indifferently to

what

remote or near

is

They

(&]

are

\j

and

applied

and are followed by

the nominative case.

Conjunctions.

with conjunctions as with adverbs, they are to

be best learned by the Dictionary ; but a few of the most
196. It

is

common may be here enumerated.

H.

This

is

compounded of the conjunction

"

and the negative adverb

it is

"

written thus,

5U1

"if not;" (Latin)

that

nisi,

"that,"

not ;" with the prefixed particle

may

it

not."

(French) "si non."

s
*\

an interrogative

in the second

member
$

tion beginning
this, or

with

an

particle

num

? necne ?

It is

used

of an interrogative sentence or proposi-

\;

thus,

Jt

OS

X'

/ 0/2

*MAa> c^lsl

hast thou said

not?"

U1 a particle used at the commencement of a clause or

"
"
"
"
notwithsentence
nevertheless,"
however,"
but,"
;

standing.^

174

OP CONJUNCTIONS.

a
U).
"

followed

"

either Zaid or
5

that/

<^> u*
*

as

*st

u-^i

by

&j

Amru

"
?

%J

know

(I

& ^;*U

and

there came to

not which,).

used both with the aorist and the

preterite ;
Oxx
s * Oxx'
T
i
it
-r
i*'"
??
I wish that I may write
.

k^

that

(comp. of

are equivalent to our

expressions

^;i

"1 wonder

"but"

"if,"

or ;" thus,

either,"

me

&J

"or," "or else;"

thou hast written."

immediately followed by a noun.

the affixed pronoun I]

is

^^

used when

It is often written with

the purpose of which addition

is

remoye the influence of the conjunction^ which would

to

otherwise require the accusative case after

it

as it is one of

the hundred gorcming words.

"if indeed/'

"

if at

and by contraction

J\t

any time."
This conjunction comes before

^U

when

the subject of a preposition,

that subject

is

placed

before the yerb ? and adds energy to the expression.

It is

also written 2l, as is

done with

from the inseparable particle

are formed the words ^ll and

Li.

This

speaking

it

may also be
-etc*

is

and

for the

same reason

joined to this conjunction,

"
fti,

signifying

and indeed."

one of tho inseparable conjunctions-

corresponds to out conjunction

occasionally translated

Generally

??

and;

but

it

"now," "for," "so then,"

It is often redundant^ particularly at the beginning^ of

aenteneeSj as

Holy

jjj

SJl

is

Soripturop,

mry

often the

cae

in our rersion of the

It is also frequently prefixed to the im-

175

OF CONJUNCTIONS.

in tliat instance
perative and

it

generally marks the passage

with a peculiar emphasis.

^"or," "or
"

LyJ? ^{/^

else," "unless," "until;" thus,

beat thee, unless thou wilt repent."

verily, I will

*$ "as

if,"

"even

as," "just as."

J$.
// "in order that;" S'
with the negative adverb
as

used in the same sense and

S<"S
S<"S
"
becomes L and *L&^ lest, "so
is

S, it

not"

The form J&

^3 and ^f "but."

is

used only before

nouns and pronouns.

"

"

j
It

"if,"

occasionally

not?"
Cjlff

"if not," "unless,"

although;"

The

especially in the

signifies,

affixed pronouns

U uJ^

c^Jil^

"

were

may

W, "sinon."

"

Kur,an,

be joined to

also

why

it;

as

not for thee the world had

it

not been created."

*,

His

IB also

to our conaiective

closely akin to

an inseparable conjunction, corresponding

"a#d;" sometimes

to

means "but."

It is

<U and yet in no instance can the one be

The general

used instead of the other.

them seems

it

be as follows

to connect words; as

\^r

\j>

distinction

the conjunction J

"by

is

between

employed

land and by sea."

It is

used also in connecting the various clauses of a sentence

to the Same nominative
provided each elaiise ha& referenof
case.

If a

new nominative appears

seen in the following stat

fafele

tli

used, as

may be

OF

170

INTBttJECTIONfcJ.

9s,*

s ss

ox

,J

AJJ

"

A negro on

And

(fa)

L^^CJ'

a certain day took off

And

And

and (wa) he
self

tL5Cwxa3

he

(fa)

said,

came by a

(fa) there

^ -

ljj&

^1

JU

garments and (wa)

it

certain

such a one

said to him?

snow; but (wa)

the

XS
!

may become
man of sense>

peradventure I

for (fa) truly it is possible that

Ms

with snow
whito.

take up snow, and (wa) to rub his body with it.

it was said to him why do yon rub yonr
body

to

began

L
JUi ?
^1V
X^Ox
Ox
OO^
OO^x

torment not your-

yonr body

may

will not (thereby) lose

blacken

its

(own)

blackness*"

Interjections.

197.

our words
4^i\,

and

A an

interjection expressive of pain, etc., like

"ah!" "oh!" "alas!" "pish!" "tush!"

ujlj clit,

t-Jl

tliij

and

U1

all

these words are ex-

such as out
pressive of aversion or disgust

"foh!" "fie!"

"away!"
ft,

a*,

also *T ?

and

All these are expressive of

"
ah !"
like our
(neafly the same as ^),
*7 or

$.

paia and sorrow, etc,

"
"
alas I"
woe unto me I"
"
\l

ah I"

"

alas !"

This exclamation

may be

followed

by

177

OF INTERJECTIONS.

nominative case

tlie

instead the syllable

*1

When two

Sfljj'S

or,

omitting the nunation

or simply

SSj

\j,

it

or

may

\j

take
,

or

nouns in constrnction follow, the syllable

x
"*

^JL

added to the

is

last;

as

*ll>J

*lc.

"alas the boy or

Ij

slave of Zaid!"

"
^Jjj

as

aj

"

alas !"

x ox

This

is

sometimes used disjunctively ;

x
^^
-^

"

Jjj

"

woe

to

^, d^,

"

\7

him !"

to

woe

rj^

woe !"

me !"
quick!"

or conjoined, clSljj

or

cL^

woe

u
ooipe

to thee !"

on!" "this

way!"
corresponds to our interjection

lj

dressing.

It is

used before the nominative case of proper names

and nouns without the

"
Jdjj
(jSt

lj

is

used in calling or ad-

Wazir

!"

employed

article; thus, Juj U

Zaid !"

67.)

Before nouns having the article prefixed

"
U"
man "
as Js^J
1

"

S E

On
198.

more

In this Section

extensive*'

u
i\fl

employ the term Noun in

and

thai which

is

Participles.

is

S O f\

noun (jpx^j

derivative

^ "a

"floflh;"
f

primitive noun,

not derived from any other word

or verb, such as

a horses"

its

Snbstantives

comprehending

sigiiificailon

Adjectives, Tnfiuitives,

whether noun

I.

Derivation <uid flonmtion of Nouns*

llw

2ul4~ "solid/'

N V

lion;"

is

that which

is

derived from another word (verb or nonn) by means of one

?

or

more of the

^i "ho opened ;"

"

190.

We

^L

Horvilo letter^ wuoh as

Jix-sU

"a

have already stated

arc Be ven in number,

viz. ? \,

CJ

is

uwl

(or

The

u? J3 and

^5,

all

servile alifin tlio

beginning and likewise in

u
"ho
greater/' from

at the

Immm

a horse. 55

^w, ^

J),

the interior of a word; as in 'J&'\

a
was great;" ^j^
negligence/ from
It IB also usod at the

48) that the servile letters

included in the technical word \^lcj

formation of nouns

a key/' from

place abounding in lions/' from

horso/ from J^i

little

end of a word

"he

neglected."

and represented by

of prolongation; as in
preeodexl by an aMf
57
c<
"Ixo was great
{}r
flwuidour," from

^j

The

ON THE DERIVATION AND FORMATION OF NOUNS.

c^

servile

and

is

at the

employed

179

both, at the beginning, in the interior,

end of a word (in this

SO-- u

latter case it is represented

s

s 9s

prolongation," from JU? (for Jjt) "it

"
"
he knew or
confession," from ^J^
lengthened;" uJV^j,

byi);

J^k>

thus,

confessed," etc.

The
It

letter <j^

peculiar only to verbal nouns and participles of the

is

and always preceded by

*-

and followed by c^ as in the words It^acut

took pity."

never serves alone in the formation of a nonn.

ninth derived formation

^ ^

"he

cu^j "mercy," from l^J

"

The
"

u/JiJU

letter * is servile at the

"

extracting," and

sometimes, but rarely,

it

the same as

is

^j^ "he went

beginning of a word; as

Mameluke," from

is

both from root

extractor,"

a slave,"

J\ which

or *

s S S

^ykw* "an
forth."

LjCLi

"

he possessed;"

added at the end of a word as

"
a son."
The servile ^ is used
;

as the second letter of a derived noun, the first being in

that case either

or * as in the verbal

of verbs of the sixth formation;

"he

from ^x

word, as in
letter j is

^$

cut short;"

it

noun and

participle

thus, cAka^ "severance,"

serves also at the end of a

"pardon," from Jjb "he forgave."

employed only in the interior of a word

"acceptance," from jll "he accepted."

The

as

letter

The

^5
^

fet

used both in the interior and at the end of a word, as in

"
"a dog;"
a little dog,"; from
"solar,"

&

"the sun;"
employed
from j^J

at the

"
it

beginning of a word

gushed out."

^JU

sometimes, but very rarely,

J

as

"

c^y

it

is

a fountain,"

NOUN OF TIME AND WAGE,

180

NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBAL BOOTS

Of

200.

those,

grammarians reckon eight

The Abstract Verbal 'Noun or

of

Agency

Infinitive.

or Present Participle Active.

3,

viz.:

classes,

The Noun

2,

The Noun ex-

pressive of tho Patient, that is the Participle Passive.

The 'Noun

Noun

of

Time and

of Unity.

Intensity

any further
tho triliteral

Noun

7.

Of the

Place.

Noun

5.

of Specification.

we need

three classes

first

of Instrument,

Noun

8.

"Wo gave a table of the Infinitives

105 5 and the formation
verbal root in
;

Adivo and

is

Puwsivo,

6.

of

not here take

notice.

the Participles,

4.

of
of

abundantly obvious

from the various pumdigiiLS given in Sections III, and IV.

of Time and Place

The noun expressive

201.

by

verb,

*^*9 L>? un( l *'?

which

it

(Jumna

bour

place? of

cj/ ^*
1

is

final

i';

tore

triliteral

severally prefixed to the persons of

unchanged

changed
3

labour/
"

of the aorisl be fafha, or

in the

into failm

from

jl&d

noun

thus,

"he

of time

and

3xvt>

place,

the time

labours" or "will

la-

or ptoco of boating," from cly^i "he beats"

u
"
?
a school;"
4*-^ tlto P laco of ritin S/

^ mc)

or "will beat;"

we may

of the time and place of an

If tho penult vowel

kasrfy they remain

and

^UjH *^U

substituting * in place of the initial servile letters

that tense.

if

formed from tho aoriRt of the primitive

action,

^\LA\

iiirUwir observe that these nuunff of place take the

an

of burial,"
lj*& "place

"the piaeo of Him-rising; ??

fjlL*

"a

"a deep
B."

cemetery ;" &j&*

place/'

"a

cavern;"

"a tower;"

hence,

NOUN OF TIME AND PLACE,

a

181

In the quadriliteral or derivative formations

the noun of time and place is exactly the same as the
a minaret."

participle passive.

There are twelve nouns of place formed by converting the

a.

damma

of the aorist, not into fatfia, but into kasra,

place where camels are slaughtered

<?

elbow rests

;"

O /

"

&js^

viz.,

"the

j^sz*

a place on which the

"

mosque

(^

Li^*

"

"the place of residence/'

^,W^

"the place of

^A*

J^J-*
'

the place of adoration, a

place where a thing falls;"

habitation;"

"

"

rising," '''the east;"

"a

jik* "the

"the place of

place of rising (of a heavenly body) ;" Cj>jC*

the

setting,"

"the west;" ^jyU "the place on the head where the hair divides;"
s
"
"
"
the place of breathul^i^ the place where a plant grows ; jjku
'

""

"the

&

^^

ing,"

<;"

(_Lu^ and^l^ "the

'

nostril;'

place where a camel

<-

Of these

sacrificed."

and

C^*

twelve^ however^ Isr^^*,

indifferently take /#z$# or

may

and^rcu may,
*

b.

Nouns

^^^>
tor^

jlk*,

is

j^,

as the vowel of

s o/

the second syllable;

vowel of the

SOX

r~

initial

irregularly, take kasra as the

^

thus^u or^u

>,

"

the place of sacrifice."

of time and place derived from a simile verb, whose

first

kasra for the second radical, and the j is

^ have always
"
time
preserved, even when dropped in the aorist ; thus, j^i
"
he promised ;" of which the aorist
and place of promise/ from jij

radical

is

is

A^J; so from

^^

"he

deposited" (aorist j-^);

^fy* "place

and time of depositing."

f.

The noun of time and place derived from concave verbs

whose second radical in the aorisihas either fatfya or damma,

by substituting an alifinwi in place of the second

radical,

is

151),

formed

and by carry-

NOtN OF

182

iisg

to tlic first radical llizfatka

from *U "ho stood"

which had belonged

formed lljU

is

(aorist

ptfi),

second radical of the aorist has kasra for

thus,

change;

"ho

JC

its

thus,

**.

for

If the

undergoes a

it

vowel,

ravelled" (aorist jf ^J)

second

to the

"the place

j,^

where one travels/

(L

Nouns of

and place sometimes assume the termination

iiixw

u
as

i~;

J^*

"acoTDotury
1

*'.,

<.

Nouns of

"

1',

as tU)^t

toi'(itl*(r,

i'^A,*

,,

v'j

and place

Uin<j

they

differ in

nothing from the

from

place of revolution;'

isL

formed

returning;" BO from
of prayer/*

ilorlvcul

etc,

from

"an

name

luLt,

IB

"luj returned/'

uly^

^^

"place
"
tlio

JL^

IwknMwnlr-^tSl

w/'

"hornet,"

or time of

time and place

are

arc-

of the forms

Ll,

U\*^, or

Ibnncui like tho nouns of time and place

(lifFnrtviLOti,

^>-

00

+*\.

of tlu* iiiHtruin^rii employed in tho

i-hat

tho noun of Instrument has

^^
"

opened;'

"the

^^l*

oratory/

for ite initial servile^

1

by

of an action

Tluy

formed

aorist of
^Jcl< JMIMJVC

Nouns oxi>iwsiw

witli tluB

aorist passive,

of the patient, or the participle

porfomiaiico

f[uadrilitoral roots, or

formed Irom the

JLS "ho prayed/'

AV>?w/

202.

damma

ilo place of meeting/' "the confluence of two

from cX^Ji

rivers;"

the time and

'

"ft revolved,"

^r/^
1

IB

"

for llio initial lucromciital letups of that tense, so that

lima from

passive;

',<' o

L< lor tej&~+,

from derivative forimilioua, are

mil>Htiluthig ^

the cast;"
i'U^.

Occasionally the middle radical takes

place of pasturing.'
instead

;"

time,

"ahahuico," from

a kcy??? from

"ho woighod

t^
??
;

183

NOUN OP UNITY.

^ "he

"a broom," from

ment employed
the seeds,"

'

?(j

J^

in cleaning cotton," from

"he

extracted

etc.

There are a few nouns of this class of the forms <3xL> an d

a.
1

swept;" ,-ls^ "an iron instru-

' '

fi^f

<Lbuw

as

Jjku "a

sieve/' from.

J^kr

instrument with which flax or cotton

sifted;"

beaten/' from

is

S>

"he

j<x*

jj*5

"an

"he

has

beaten, thumped, or pounded."

b.

Some nouns

*Uaj

as

"

of instrument are formed

means

the instrument or

pearls;"

LU^.

**

"a

o^

needle;"

of

"a

on the measure
"

adorning/'
awl."

saddler's

several other forms of rare occurrence mentioned

a string of

There are

by Dr. Lumsden,

p. 311.
oJ^-O

Noun

of Unity

203. This species of nonn denotes one solitary action or

GS

'

event, and it dispenses with the use of the adjective J*x&^j

which might be otherwise reqnisite. It is formed from the
3

infinitive of the primitive triliteral verb,

the form <LUi

the

always of

f^J "one single victory;" <SjJJ "one

In the derivative formations and quadri-

the nonn of unity

infinitive;

is

as

single beating."
literals

and

is

formed by simply adding

"one

as 1>-\^J\

extraction/

to

and aisy-^j

"one revolution."

In the case of verbs of the second

derivative formation,

whose

the,

infinitive

itself

infinitives already

end in

numeral Sx^V5
by the
S s <s
s
l^>^ IA&.J "one solitary

accompanied

**

forms the noun of unity; thus

act of mercy."

The same

rule applies to all such infinitives

or INTENSITY,

jx'otrjsr

as

assume

for a termination;

i'

act of raising tip," from

as

l'& " one

i'l^lj

solitary

third formation of I is

^lil,

"he

stood up."

$/ Specification--*

*J\

204. This kind of noun servos to specify what

of a person with regard to a particular act, as

"ho

excels in writing

??

.u

^~y>;

excels -in defending or conquering."

'

form

so

It

xO

dlLti

UteralH

and in the

it

differs

in

ite

nature

adjective or Bubstnntivo.

person

who

may be

means "an

^Uu^ "very
it

out-

used either as an

adjective

a substantive

it

is

equivalent

beautiful j" cIjU^

serves

to indicate a

follows as a trade or profcssion ? whatever action

or condition is expressed

hut

thuB, cfjal^ denotes simply

it

As an

to the miporlativo degree; as

As

just

It is

^j&.

noun of agency

uttorn H fUlsohood," but <~j\&>

"very liberal"

quaclri-

&

of the measure

in

given intensity to the expression

From

"he

of the

is

and in

*-

closoly akin to the present participle^ or

liar."

say

no wise from the noun of unity

206. This flpocios of noun

and-out

invariably

"ono who

asserted

when we

J^u

derivatives formations

of

it

is

by the

primitive root; thus

jCc
s
?

"

*z*

a baker," from

^L

*'*

"ho baked;"

jy

oarpontor;" tC<L

a tailor/'

ole.

in like

manncr

j\esr

185

NOUN OF SINGULARITY.
NOUNS DERIVED FROM SUBSTANTIVES

are not nearly so

Nouns derived from substantives

206.

numerous in Arabic as those derived from verbs.

be comprised under four
2.

Noun

tive

classes, viz., 1.

of Singularity,

Noun

3.

Noun

They may

of Abundance.

of Capacity.

Diminu-

4.

Nouns.

Noun of Abundance i^3

207.

Nouns

+J\

which things abound,

nouns of time and place both in form and

indicating the place in

are nearly allied to

G ^^^

Sssiss

are of the measures i*jl and J*i*

They
.SVx-0 X
"
and ******
a place in which there are many

in signification.
ixx

such as
lions,"

i'juA*

both of which signify "a

"
a cucumber;"
of cucumbers," from i\ft5

derived from 3Jl and

lion;" *bJU

&U* "a
J^ax^

"a

field

^1

place where wolves abound," from <jLjj

"a

place

famed

for

many victories," fromjl^

o/ Singularity

^^ ^

*J\

"a wolf;"
"
victory."

This species of noun is formed from a primitive

substantive by suppressing the nunation, and then adding
208.

the termination *~.

It denotes a single portion or a single

individual out of a whole genus

such portions;

thus from
ff

-"

^J

single straw;" from u^JbJ

"

which

consists of several

"straw,"

is
,

gold," comes

formed
x
a

*u

"a

<? -*>

<La>j

a grain or

"the genus pigeon," comes

It is formed in an analogous

small bit of gold;" from j*U^

&

<uUi "one
manner

single pigeon."

to the

noun

necessarily on th<3

of unity, as to its termination, but not

same measure,
24

ADJECTIVES DELIIVET* FROM VERBAL ROOTS,

186

Noun of
209* 1 call

"
tills

**a.

species

Noun

of Capacity," from

want

It denotes tlie vessel, case, or sheath, etc.,

of u better term,

"a
in which things arc contained or collected; thus,
u
"a needle case," from
milk;"
milk-pail," from CJh**

JJ^

jU

Syt
J

"a

be observed that this noun

It will

noodle."

of the

is

&

measure a the

They both

202,

by having

lirst

diiih*

fatwu an

flu*

Noun of Instrument,
Noun of Time and Place

fonn of the

from the

vowel of tbe

initial servile

and

*,

fallui for UK*, iiwldlo radical.

PU^
T

7 /w DimiuutiM JNoun

From

210.

putting

fjfffiwm

diphthong
a

^-

noun bo

tho fonn

tluw,

a oort)iou,"

BO

If Iho pritnitiv<?

"

is

formed,

by

over the first radical and by inserting the

botwocMri tho nooond and third; thus irom

a man,"

D4l;

^ '*<S

^1.
x

uoxum the diminutive

J^j "a little maw

"
u
a hillock"
mountain," ^4"

^j
or

trilitonii

"<*,*

jLaJI
>

or

from
u

t&r "a Mll

small mountain."

<|uacMlitoKil tho diminutive

4^*

"
ll

If tho primitive

1^

??

Hoorpion," from

trilitcral is of
A'

"

is

of

4/^

tho feminine

Li thuB
diminutivo is of tho form
gcuidor,
a
a little sun" or "a mock sun;"
"Iho Rini," iilJ,
*'
u
a
a small tract of land,"
earth" or
land," l^jl
tluj

frmn V^rb^l

211
both of

Jiools*

In addition to tho Participles Active and Passive

tlia

of
primary verb, and

its

derivative formations,

ADJECTIVES DERIVED FROM VEKBAL ROOTS.

187

there are several other descriptions of verbal adjectives chiefly

derived from neuter verbs? the principal of which are the

lowing:!.

"

^1^-

as ulJl*

from ^1&-.

fair,"

"

from cLJt*.

difficult/
3.

J*jj

asj^i

fol-

,US; as

2.

"cold," fromJ^sL.

These are chiefly derived from neuter verbs of the measure

3*3 (aorist

$y).

i>^>y^

.flrofx-

J^;

4.

as jyic

as

)tJ;

</

^-

Ix^*

x>x

8.

fs^'

^Jill

,x

^*

as '^il

expressive of colour are

""

as

J^3;
U

from

crooked/

,ff

?^?

as

1)^5

jt

6.

fromyt.

forgiving/

"a martyr/' from

x 7 x

"sacred," from

^V^l

qa?

brave

^.

5?

from

Adjectives

generally of this form;

as

^L\

The form j^\

to denote

also

"red/ fromJI^l.
employed
the comparative and superlative degrees, as we have already
stated in
81 and
82.
9.
^Sil and ^fe; as ^U>jJ "re"

gretful," from. l(jj;

"

^b^c
a,

is

^llc

careless/'

from

^Jil.

10.

naked/ from

Many

measures

verbal adjectives, or as

^*j

and

^j-*

an active or a passive

some

call

them

participles, of the

derived from active verbs

may

signification.

Adjectives of the following measures,

212.

have either

viz.,

sometimes of an energetic or intensive sigmAeatioa

a
very boastful/' etc.

thus?

j^

a.*

We

stated,

intensive verbal
profession,

etc.

805, that the measure ^JU5 represents both an

adjective

As an

and a substantive indicating trade

adjective

it

sometimes

suppresses

or,

the

ADJECTIVES DERIVED PROM SUBSTANTIVES.

188

mlnation and adds the termination

even when applied to mas-

Ss"Gs

online nouns; as <LAc "profoundly learned."

increment adds

this

still

According to De Sacy

further to the intensity of the adjective,

Adjectives derived

Substantives,

from

we may

21 3, From nouns substantive are derived what

in

terms

general

Eelative

call

"nation," "locality," "sect/

nunation or

etc., "by

rejecting the

vowel of the substantive and adding

u^L* "Egyptian," fromj^ orJlL* "Egypt;"

thus,

"of

final

"race/

of

expressive

Adjectives,

or relating to

"man,"

"

{j^\

Shiraz;"

"earthly," from

a. If the substantive

ends in

"earth."

ji

or

human," from

the relative adjective

is

formed

Sf

and substituting J^r; thus from

^ *
"
of or relating to Mecca;"
formed ^C*

rejecting these terminations

by
SJ-QS

&*

"the city of Mecca/'

?<-'o

from ak^L? "nature," comes

so

triliteral

the
ff

is

>

'

"s

^^>

If the primitive

"natural."

as the vowel of its middle radical ,

changed into fatfya in the relative adjective ; thus from

5 x"* "
"
the liver/' is formed Jk^
hepatic."
pertaining to the liver/*

same
"

X-

noun should have kasra

<*>

is

**

If the

jSrst

vowels,

it is

and second radicals should each have kasra for their

optional in the second radical to retain the kasra, or

change the same into fatfya

thus from

jM

"a

'

camel/'

is

formed

"Jjl

or /Ujl "relating to the camel/'

have kasra> and the second

If the

first

fatlia, for their vowels,

radical should

ihofatfya

may
*' the

optionally remain, or be changed into Kasra; thus from cL-^

$
^ ^
or
"of or belonging to the
grape/' are formed either

J^e

grape,"

^^

189

FORMATION OP THE BROKEN ^LTJBALS,

i.

Relative adjectives formed from substantives of the measures

and <LL

the

change the kasra of the second radical into fatlia and reject
"
ai1 island," comes
thus from
that follows
J^Jsr
x'jj*?

"

if

insular;"

nouns of these measures however

surd verbs, no such modification takes place

^
<&LJi~l

was necessary," comes the substantive

"

thus from ^j^

formed from

"be

"

"

truth

it

and thence

S"

Belative adjectives formed from proper

"truthful,"
& <"?
s^s?
of the measures J+x* and <LL*s reject the ^5 of the primitive

,*&>*
" X

thus from JfcSJI

"

"

Sr

name

of

an Arab

tribe/'

^^

comes
& x

"

names
word ;

a Kuraishite

"

r"

of the Kuraish tribe;" so from Jj*kto "the name of the

& x^
"
In
a follower of Hudhail/
founder of a certain sect," comes J^A&
or

man

some words, however,

which makes

this modification is optional, as in the ease of

or

formed by adding the termination

a
so
J^ ; as Ji^^r corporeal," from ^Uc^ the body;"
^.Ijy
"
"illumined (divinely),"
light."
Adjectives of this kind
c.

Some

relative adjectives arc

fromjjjf

are said to be used only in a metaphorical, theological, or spiritual

i*

words

sense, for in the ordinary sense of the

employed.
irregular

some

Finally,

manner
c<

relative adjectives are

thus from Z/j

"

s*

t*

and

^^^r

^9

formed in a very

the capital of Persian Irak,"

is

a native of Khai ;" such was the celebrated physician

formed

JkjVj

known

in mediaeval

Europe as Bhosis.

From ^la^k

"

the

name of a

i ^"

province in Persia,"

"

are

LJ^

is

formed the relative adjective 4,^^

the city and province of Herat," comes

^W^

"

man

so

from

f
&

of Herat."

Formation of the Urofaen

214.

We wry

cursorily alluded to this important part of

FORMATION OE THE BROKEN PLURALS.

190

58 and

Arabic Grammar, IE

"We now proceed

59.

to fulfil

our promise there given of entering into a more minute detail of

the subject

when we should have

arrived at the proper

would have been utterly absurd to

have embarrassed the student at an early period of his proIt

place for so doing.

gross,

with matters which he was no ways then qualified

The

understand.

following portion of this Section

translated from Koflonmiillor,

1$

to

chiefly

always subjected to additions

and improvements from the more copious works

De Sacy

of

and Lumsrton.
*

*t

X-> ?

**

&xi and

i*i

measure

which are the

SxO

J*i\

thus,

',XO#

*,*{>

pi^;

groat,"

Ijy*

(for

present/*

4?)

210. 27#

.3ju

and
u

*!**

as

as

J^

xLji

be formed

(for

1.

^J).

from singular

and whoso

triliteral root

It also applies to such measures

defective

having

pillar,"

pi olc

book"

t)l.

or g? for thoit last radical

"

2.

^ throne," pi

^1

thus,

**

"*

U a leaf of a
$"
S
measures
the
of
From nouns
?

L^r**

4^ iP
L^ u a shlp

book/ pi
if

formed

is

also

J^i provided they do not come from

roots, that is roots

Lk " a

Plurals of

A ^x

nouns of the measures JUi and JUi

neither surd nor defective.

pi.

"very

a town or village,"

ajyi

tho board,"

MmwBt
J
x

j8if(jwc?

may

*^Ox

'*

Is

pi ^Jar;

a form or figure," pi Jr*.

*<S,

s*s?

tS?

5^Ox

from the measures

it

^c "a
a

feminities of adjectives of the

occurrence,
though of rare AX/

this Bpecias,

J)

formed from the singulars

IB

")</

pi.

The First Meamre^ J*5

21 5.

??

pi

<^^

FOBMATION OF THE BBOKEN PLUBALS.

a

and &*i; as^*j

"the

a leopard,"

pl.^

fruit of the date tree/' pl.^uj

]From verbal

"a monitor," pL

not a passive signification; as^JJ

^^^
pi. .-^

3.

lion," pi.

and Jj*5 provided they have

adjectives of the measures J*

"patient,"

"a

ju>\

191

^3J

217. The Third Measure, J^j

t

is

applicable to masculine
A-xOx

,*.

adjectives of the measure Jjul and to their feminines *iUi ? pro-

vided they be not of the comparative or superlative degree ;

.ffO ^
X
red "
and
A~-x-C,

<*>'

pi.

(mase.

218. The Fourth Measure, J*j, applies to singular nouns

S3

/*<-

of the measure

1*3

S
*

as SL*

^
,x-0

a coin,' pL uJX^ ;
Tx
tfxO
"
a
maxim," pL
<u^

temple or church," pL

"

'

219. 2%^ Fifth Measure, ^Ui, applies to

singulars of the
Q

<Js

5 o/

5-0

.svox

>>v

i^0^>

fft;

J, J, J, J ii, and IUi as js? "th.e

sea," pi. Jli:;
% an arrow," pi. ^lij ^j " a spear,"
S'^
&
-i?x
a man," pL Jl^yj ^oS a a dish or
pl. ^U,; J^
saucer,"
a
a note," pL I
pi.
U; ie/ "a short Sletter,"
2. It
^*
"
measures

**

'

'

'

It

Is,.
">

SV^x-

applies to the measures J*i

and IUs, provided they ba not

"
derived from a surd or defective root ; thus
a mounjl^
u
?

JUr;
x

tain," pl.

ls^

the neck," pi
**

to the adjectives of the

they

be
JTx-

fern.

not
x

^y

of

passive
5-

pl.

measures J**i and

"
noble,"

44;^

signification;

r^

It applies

L*i, provided
thus,

uJ^,

4*

It applies

t-jy*l,
"^

to

such

FORMATION OF THE BROKEN PLUKALS*

192

xox

adjectives,

measures

the

have

as

Sss^s

fern.

^4*3,

ijJUi

or

S,

pL

&1U

fern-

^lUi 5

IljJ;

JoCL>.

5.

^^^

and-

(J*a<+~

it

Finally,

and

^u^

thus,

"loan (from

starvation)," pi.

**"

it

measure 4>U;

tlic

"penitent,"

many nouns of f agency or

applies to

if

verbal adjectives of

<uu^

thus, y>-b*

"a mer-

to a camel), pi
chant," pi/sr; JfcU 'thirsty" (applied only

$&$

2%0

220,

*t

Measure,

^"

"i

O?

t*

]3^
xx

applies to substantives of

',

Ji, Jxi and

the measures jii, Jxi,

Jjsi

of tuo
rarely, to adjectives

5^j?SC

sea," pl*jy%

"

pL dp^; Ll "a

"a

lftl

"witnosBj"

^^

molar tooth/ pi

lion,"

pi

from
Irregulars; thus

pL

"the
IjS

as^^ "the

<^ a an army,"

r and

liver," pi. 1,2;

we may add

these

"weeping,"

"kneeling," pi

O x

^;

5^, To
Ljftj

iff

measure J^U
'*^^i>O^
7

tt

u^r4

and sometimes,
X

>S

though

jQ.

^j

pi,

and

a few

(for

tr for

221, 2%$ Seventh und Kiyhth Measures, J*3 and JUi apply
?

to verbal adjectives of tlio tneaBiiroH

(fern,)

from imporfiset roots

deprived
provided tlioy be not * *
,

J^U and

***

.*'

)>

iicU,
thus,

"

a writer," pi.
Mid
u--J^
judge," pi *&,&>-;
* **
* " x
'
^
^
"
for
L-JU
a
;
wmbatant,"
pi
ilji
(for
t/jU)
jU

^U- "a
r

tf *

cljb^

,^

**

**

^4^
pL ul^i;
"
'" "a fomalo camel that
*

4**
j"

pi

Jfi*

According

to

masculine
belongs exoluaively to
&<"

222, The Ninth

Do

is

<

'

turned
*

'

Sacy, tho measure JUi

mum,

iUi

in

applicable to such veibal

198

FORMATION OF THE BROKEN" PLURALS.

have the measure JgU when applied to rational

adjectives as

beings,

and not coming from a defective root;

"

fect," pi.

112;

"

A few

innocent," pi. J^/.

somewhat irregular;

are

"

J^

per-

standing erect/

^SU

as

pi.

lyS; jb (forjjb)

words derived from infirm roots

or

more

"
follow the rules of permutation
SS"
5V x
A*-J
for
<^b
pl.

thus, ^Jb

they

strictly speaking,

one

who

sells,"

223- The Tenth Measure, <LUi , belongs almost exclusively

when

to verbal adjectives

of the measure

"a

applicable to rational beings,

JxU formed from a

\\

warrior," pl.

"a Kadi

J&

|>);

(for

defective root

and

thus,

or judge,"

'*
/
*"'\
pl. *LaJ (for <U*o3j.
i

fi

224.

The Eleventh Measure^ Uje

is

formed from sub-

s 0?

measure J*3 and also from a few

*">'
& P
SO
"
a
<L>J>
as
and
bear," pl. Lj$ ;
Jx;
having the measures J*i
a
J?
jj"a husband or wife," conjux, pl.
j/ ajug, pL
stantives singular of the
t?

L,S

^;

an
225. 2%^ Twelfth Measure, lie
S O*

A Ox

5 xx

the measures J*s, J*i,

"

a bull," pL

aa
branch,"

|j^f Jl

IJ

a boy,"

j(Ji

aa

pl.

^1^

J^;

brother," pl.

thus,

Uc;

^y

S^M

a gazelle or antelope,

a slave," pi
?xo

youth, boy, or lad,"

J^, JUi? Jbu, and

J? (for ji*)

Kli;

applies to substantives of

a
pl.

xx

5'

pl.

a
(

KM

KOKMATION OF THE BROKEN PLURALS,

J2(l

The Thirteenth Measure^ J*^, applies to substantives

& xx

5 Ox

of Iho measure J*i

and sometimes to

measures J*i,

tlio

c*

J,

and

o x

or

is
_j

^5

thus,

Jji (for

pi.

i^f
**

"a

"the
J^y
^

(for Jill);

pi.

<HB>-^

jI=H

hill," pi.

,S

jb "a

"

U*

bucket,"

S "a

J^-J;

foot," pi.

ox

staff," pi.

bolt (of a

S R,*

"
door)

"the face,"

jlsj-

'jbi);

>

.&

""

whose medial letter

provided they come not from a root

t
"i

J,

It

pL JiSU

is

feminine sub-

also applicable to

and

atautives of four lottery not ending in S-^ s

of -which

6 ^

the penult

1,

or

"the arm/' pi

^jj

It IB further applicable^

nu^asures

several

to

proscription^

thxts,

^^U

pi

oath,"

^;
^^*-

"*

^AJ "an

sjtii;

by

an inert

is
^

01.

from those

different

above indieutod, and even to nliigulars corning from concave

xx
9<J
t,

roots;

PS

5.^.

"the cyo,"

"alum,"

"

'J\

pi.

<f

*"

&

j>

^J(- ^

pi.

Jb

"the day,"

a UOUHC,"

xi
llurlcmth Maestire, JUil,

pi.

pi.

J^.

is

applicable,

^\;

227. 27

and of

substantives of throo loiters

seldom totho moamiro j*i,

or

"
ruin," pi.

thus, )*.

tliS;
pi.

tinlcss its

J?1

"a

jlCi

^U*; JJ.J "a

date," pi.

pi.

tbuH,

Cl;

when

8,

JJ "an
pjj

"

its

2-

C>V-

"a

elephant," pi.

the shoulder,"

pi.

day,"

pi.

It is applied,

Ifc

J$

(for

though

J;

be

_,,

when

<JU

letter

^,

medial consonant

or diphthong (as already indicated), or

_,;

middle

cl^

To

moasuros, though

camol,"pl. JUT (for jCi'f);

the iu(wuro jll,

is

all

1.

<<t]l0

yc

"

is

aPPlicaWo to

is

a long vowel

its initial letter

JC

"

a sword,"

cL^' "time,"

rarely, to

tho

pi.

measure

EOEMATIOH OE THE BROKEN PLURALS.

x

S*
3

pure/

thus^lt

-*

jl^M; also to verbal adjectives

pi.

of the measure J*

provided they be not of a passive sig-

195

>

*.

"

nificatlon; as cJ^-i

"noble/

pi.
,

f%0 Fifteenth Measure, <LU^,

228*

nouns of four

"a

as jH3

letters,

and always

jx

pL

i o

or

j,

or defective root

XX

thus

,'*

(for rfU^U); S

"a

*\^\
*

_^

o.*

To

1.

inert ;

is an
5V

ah-

LSI
"
(for
x

pi.

uJ-^ "a cake," "acracknell,"

Jj^cl;

nouns

whose measures are JUi and JUi

Ss

It is especially applicable to singular

2.

iii,U

so pronounced,

6x OS

^);5> j^"apillar,"pL
c$

is

"God," which

"ail

S"x

^x^S

applicable,

the penult of which

necklace," pi. sllst;

breviation of *^

is

if

derived from a surd

a priest or

Tmam

"
?

5x0?

short tunic or vest/' pi. LJ\.

229. ;J%0 Sixteenth Jkfoasure,

S

of the measures

"

J^l^

5"

JcU and JxU

&' x

J$^ isx applicable to nouns

"
the sea shore/ pi
thus, J^U
x /
4ff

a signet-ring, ?? pL
*$y^*

jfU.

x x

It is also applicable

'

St

to substantives
x

**-x

and lcU

pL

x-

^rx

thus,

and adjectives feminine of the measures Xl&U

ia^U

^xxjjxx
^1^ <Lr>,U

"

lightning accompanied with thunder/

"a female companion/

^^x'xx

pi.

"the hole of the jerboa/' pi Ji

230* 2%^ Seventeenth Measure^ jSUi ?
X

is

upplicablo to sub-

Btantivos singular feminine, consisting of four consonants, of

which the third

1,

j ? or

vowel

is

one of the

letters

of prolongation, YUS.,

each preceded by its homogeneous short

a
the north wind/' pi
80, #,); thus, JUA

^,

inortj,

FORMATION OF THE BROKEN PLURALS,

190
y

f>

an old woman," pi jksP

same rule applies

Tlio

SSloJ.
x

SO x

**

S>

"

"

4^^

a species of poem," pi

to feminine substantives of tlie

ff

aamo measure,
x x

"but
5> /

S^

adding S~ at the end; as

-"

pL u-Jls-S

ajjjs*

"an

old

""

wonder or rarity," pi

woman,"

pi.

*"

j?

x"

&U- " a cloud,"

^xx^rx^L+& "a
jSLs^

x-

^SsP-.
x

231. The Eighteenth Measure^ ^^tj, belongs to substantiTes

J

x?

xx

5x/

JUi, JUS, and Jx5; likewise

singular of the measures

5 o

ff

& o

some nouns of the immures J*i, J*s

/ ^

rivod from concave roots; an

^lc

^UU J^ "a ga^ellcj

;

pi ^C>.

"

tU

a crown,"

1>1.

and JcU, wlien do-

a youth,"

"a

slave,"

or antelope,"

to

pi Jtyi; ciyThis plural

Jjl?qe*

pL

a fish,"
is also

admit of other measures;

applicable to a few Bitigulaw that
*

as

Jft

*X ''i

(for jd.1)

brother," pi, ^jp-^5

<(

pl^llrfj

L.1

wall," pi.

ylk^

(for

iy9

a handmaid,"

of the moasiiros J*J, J*l,

xo

5 xx

db "a

^liLoj
ciiko,"

a
region,,"

pi ^UlJ.

moaswe

^^

pi.

<<a

y unS

W W>

'b

!^

^^

aft

2S2. 2%<? Nineteenth Measure,

i*

"a

JUi

applies to substantives

and Jyjj; UB

uJJL.

a province/' pi

"a

^^

roof," pi.
A

*x*VF
;

<-irfj

It also applies to a few wordn of the

when used

a concave root; as J^jU

siil)stantivoly ?

and not derived from

a horseman," pi ^uji.

28S, fie Twentieth Measure,

is

applied to adjectives

mawuline, of the measuro ^*3, not having a passive senso;

FORMATION OP THE BROKEN PLURALS.

and

few of the measure

to a

or defective root,
&

and

j^ll

A-XX-P

"a

man/

poor

"a poet/
5

pi. *]/i

" X ^^

*-xx^

a prince/ 3 pi

which admit of

4?

*^
x

j^U

a suc-

There are a few other

*uL^..

them derived even from a

singular nouns, some of

root,

"

S-

*|^.

makes the plural

cessor/

^^

The masculine word &-U*

pi.

not derived from a concave

significant of a rational being; thus,

x
jti

197

defective

kind of plural.

this

234. The Twenty-first Measure^ *LJl, applies to singulars

measure

of the

whose root
thus,

pL

"

a friend/'

*-*>**+-

for ^ll^f);

*s

Pr*ne*P a-^y peculiar

"a

one "beloved/'

rich man/' pi.

derived from perfect roots

nouns of

&

Jcli,

Jji, and J^1

"

wounds/
x

x?j>C.^

^3,
5"xO$

S x

"

when they
X O X

wounded,"

pi.
xox

perishing/'

pi.

L5

this

measure
^x

,,^/r;
^

J[

also to

rarely,

are expressive of

pain,"

XO X

"slain," pi. .1*3;

Jrf^

The same

Jlfc.

**

?^

C3L

applies to adjectives

3,

general (of "body or mind);"

"injuries in

"

a friend/'

sincere," pi.

thus, j^ju>

and sometimes, though

(contracted

"

235. 5%^ Twenty-second Measure,

of the measure

pi. *U>.\

*u2; 5^

5"

*.&

It occasionally applies to

*Ujl.

to those

a surd verb, or a concave, or a defective

is

<?

^"^

)*?*>

plural applies

,&

as
X

uJ3U

also

to

^ X OX

C-X

verbal adjectives of the measure ^Li;

xox
9 x o x
x Ox

thus,

pL jj^;
236,

^V^

2%

angry/ pi

Twenty-third Measure^

**

to substantives

This

^US.

<*.xtx

applicable

of the measures )U3, .^Ui, and

S

singular^

is
xOx

198

FOEMATIOH OF THE

BBOKEJST PLUEALS.

also to adjectives feminine of the measures *kj

"-

X0

"

"a

thus, ^s-*

plain," or
xx

virgin," pi. 4^! ie

x
XG

"a

desert," pi.

"
grjai

"pregnant,"

to the

"the decision of a judge,"

Xx-

"a
^3^ xx
pi.

^.to

**"*"

pi.

T%0 Twenty-fourth Measure,

first place,

1*3

^xo "

cyUr*
X

y* c"''

J?

237*

and

x ^

same

^JUJ,

class of substantives
*-,- <*

as the preceding; thus,

in

applies,

and adjectives
s s^

a virgin," pi
^jos.
y^Ox
xOX
"
as

^is

the

2nd.

J?

ftl

To

adjectives of the measure

pi.

L^K^.

In

JL^;

^lyC

this case the first letter of the

plural
"^

take

damma

instead of faiha
/

The

right.
X

or

j3
t

adjective

x X

^JS"

thus,

^,iU

sin/

L^lLs are "both

^

x<_

JL

in the plural

pi

i^

x x

Uk^

few singulars of the measures

5

may

4^1C and

may have

Twenty-fifth Measure,

X X/

Lastly, it applies to feminines of the form

^^ x
x
a
from a defective root ; as
a gift," pL bl
/

"

^t

xoy

XX

^JU^-

coming

intoxicated/

a slave,"

warrior,"

pi

239,

37A?

5^

jH/JUj,

pi 51i; jl^ "an

is

applicable to

and JcU

j^

ass," pi.

thus,

jU "a

ft

J7>t/

*/

Twenty$wth Measure^ U^u, is of very rare

occurrence, and belongs to a few singulars of the measure
Ox
5

,#0x

thus,

Jju
i?xo/ /

5-xO^^

a husband/

47

pi.

ilyo
*

Ic

a paternal

'

unclo," pi.

240, 2%<? Twertfy-seventh Measure^ ilUi,

applicable to a

FOEMATION OF THE BROKEN PLTOALS.

S *s

few singulars of the measures

Sx x
5

stone/

&

thus,

*?

?x

pi J>1^
L^-^U "a companion./'
to "be met with.
;

Is

*>

and J^U

190

pi.

.x

^^

iU=^

also

The Twenty-eighth Measure^ J*j, applies to a few

.-xx
jyxcx
*rxc
s s
a
a
singulars of the measures 1*3, aLUi, and JxU ; thus, Ms*.
241,

x-

,5

pL jil

ring,"

pj "a

pL j

pulley,"

"

^Jjlt

one

who

seeks/ pL
242.

We

now

proceed to describe the "broken plurals of

words consisting of four or more consonants, which wo

58 c and d* They are diTided by
cursorily mentioned in
?

grammarians into three

classes

of measures, which,

when

added to the preceding twenty-eight? furnish in all thirtyone species of broken plurals as formerly stated,
58 ? a.
243.
XX

The Twenty -ninth Measure^ J3Ui (j*U\, J^Uj ? and

X

The
riliteral

first

plural of these measures applies to quad-

nouns, the consonants of which are

all

radical;

of

5"

course the servile final

thus,

i*

The other

"a

frog/

pi.

does not here count as a letter

colL; ^Ls "a bridge/'

pL^Us.

three measures apply respectively to quadriliterals

formed from
counting),

triliteral roots (the terminatioipi $

by

^xat^v*^
jjU; Ju^

prefixing

c^,' or ^

"experience,"

living/' "victuals,"

pi.

thus
^pl
/xx|j?x^

c^l^r;

pi
r

244. The Thirtieth

aa before not

xx

Memwe^ JJUi

JLi^

a finger," pL
^

moans of

FORMATION

200

THE BROKEN PLURALS.

01?

This measure applies to singular nouns

of which the penult is a letter of
consisting of five Ietters
a
a sultan or emperor/' pi. ^L>;
as J^L
prolongation;
J*fiGb,

and jlc$.

"a

\Lj (forjG<j) 3

"
pi.

"

JjjUS

Ip5

a buffalo/'

a source or fountain head/'

(s*#&r

pi.

245. 27^ Thirty-first

is

disciple," pi.

HJj

a preceptor,"

L$ and

pi.

more

especially

%U; ^J "an

"a

or" Circassian,"

"

is

suppress'^

s'

l^ii'

a pMlosopher,"

not a letter of prolongation

U~>\

"

a bishop,"

1^-;

pi-

1,^;

^^

recommended

My object

pi.

"Georgian
;

"aSclavonian,^pl.S

a native or inhabitant of Bagdad,"

the learner is

pi.

""^

ujSU

Emperor, Cesar, Kaisor^or Czar;"

Mauritanian,"
pi.

/ ot?

and

whether substan-

to foreign words,

For a more detailed account of

Sacy.

by

i-jU and i'^U

11^"; uJ^i-i

tiyes or relative adjectives; thus

De

etc. (as above).

'^

*>

a.

"

and by adding the termina*

"

which the penult

applies
**

S^U;

more
This measure belongs also to nouns of four or

letters of

and

^ll.>

P oor >" PL I

Measure^\^^^\^\^

of prolongation,

thus, "jU

tionJ^-;

it

s'Vc.i

<+

pi.

S^

pi.

a modification of the preceding measure^

ing the penult

"a

"

pl*^j^'

picture/'

This

pl^JUa; JM:O "a lamp,"

dinar/' denarius,

pi.

this portion of

Arabic

to peruse the -works of

Grammar

Lnmsdon and

has been to observe a middle course botveen

and the mcagrenoss of Bichardthe profoseness of these great masters,

son and Stewart.

201

THE PLUEAL OF THE PLUKAL*

The Plural of the Plural246.

An

additional plural is sometimes formed from the

broken plurals of

which

triliterals ?

$ bs

"a

<_*!

plural;" thus,

dog,"

90^

plural of the plural L-J^l; so

formed the
from

Sj

pi. j{&>\

(for

from j\^

pi.

a finger nail,"

comes the
a

of the

pi.

'$

pL j^U

It

IB
*-

the pl.^Jiy

(for i^xft),

<x>j

ffs *

a bracelet/'
s>

from that again the

and thence the

that, the pi, of

and from

the pi of the

^jJ) "the hand/

and thence ^obl

fromyte

'

'<;-$.

?<->".

c-J^i,

pi.

st

&

called

is

"

and
pL 5^1,
*

may be

observed

that the plurals of the plural agree in measure with those of

quadriliteral

243, 244 and 245.

and quinquiliteral nouns,

Broken plurals sometimes form an additional regular plural

S"x x
"
in cbl
an epistle/' is formed the broken plural
;
thus, from <LJL^
'
9 ~*"
$ s^s
"
J5Ui and thence the plural feminine of the plural c^SSL^, a cola.

jy

lection of letters;" so

the pi. of the plural

De

from

L^J
"

t>l5^

"

t^j

a house," pi.

a cluster of houses."

Sacy, these plurals can be employed only

when

and thence

According

to

number

is

the

undetermined, and above nine.

b.

"

Sometimes a dual

is

formed from a broken plural

a principle," or "foundation" (of a science),

pi.

thus,

?%

ff

J^>\
x

and thence

formed (what we may call "the dual of the plural'O^^ which

"

is

fit

signifies

the principles of the two sciences/' viz., Theology and Jurisprudence,

r

247. "We stated briefly,

58

5,

that

have more than one species of plural

many Arabic nouns

the student must

5ZC

THE PLURAL OE THE

202

PLXTRAIi.

howoyer, conclude that they are all used indiscriminately.

In this case he must be guided entirely by prescription or

For example, on examining carefully the preceding

thirty-one measures of broken plurals, he will find that no

custom*

fewer than nine of them?

5*

x-oS

xcj?

>

5*

J^

viz.,

& 9?

Sss

Jj*i,

iUj

Ss

*?

yo

J**'?

<Llx3?

?-?

and <0yts are applicable to singulars whose

JUit, M^e? J*5
3 **''
"We may here further state that the plurals
measure is J*i
?

of paucity/
58

to in

viz.,
2,

We

from three to

noticed in

The

irregularly.

number

are applied only to a

things, ranging
a.

measures 12th 13th, 14th, and 15th, alluded

of persons or

ten, both inclusive.

08* e 9 a few words that formed their plural

fact

that

is

several

of these

irregular plurals
.fji

If "a mother,"

are derived from singulars no longer in use; thus,

i

has for
pi.

its

43l

The word

JL*^\, apparently from 1^1

plural

?$t from fJ
"

^<

il!i\

ii

f"Ci

"water/'
9

woman/

pi,

has for

"the mouth,"

^\^\ and SU^, as

t't'
7^

its

plural J

UJ

if

S^i*3

<t

all

or

of which

"

come from a

different root,

The word ^UJl

^
i,

human

has the pi.

feeing in general/

<*

U*

from
i

^ xo

man"

and
"

^yj
jy

JwUl and contracted yud

203

SECTION

VII.

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND

PRONOUNS.
Analysis of Sentences,
248. In the preceding Sections
syllables,

letters,

wo have

treated of the

Wo

and words of the Arabic language.

most important part of our work the construction of sentences,, or in other words ? the rules for speak-

now come

to the

ing and writing the language correctly*

taken for granted that the student

ordinary terms of grammar, and
various parts of speech
another.

It is

(common

is

"Wo have

all

along

acquainted with the

able to distinguish the

to all languages)

probable, however, that lie

may

from

onto

not have

turned his attention to the analysis of sentences, which ought

to

form a preliminary step to the Syntax of ovcay foreign

On

tongue.

this account^

we

request his attention to the

following general, or rather universal principles of

an acquaintance with which will enable

more
a,~

fully

agent;

"Fire

Mm

to

comprehend
some of the rules which wo are about to state*

simple sentence consists of three parts, viz* , s nominative or

a verb; and an attribute, predicate, or complement;
**

is

hot;"

Fire consumes

wood"

In the

first

Urns,

sentence*

Jiw

204
is

ANALYSIS OP SENTENCES.

the nominative, or subject of affirmation

that which

affirmed of the subject, fire

is

wood/ fire
wood is the

is

is

the attribute, or

and the verb

Again, in the sentence

to express the affirmation.

1

hot

the nominative, or agent, consumes

"
is

is

serves

Fire consumes

the verb, and

Frequently a simple sentence

"
as
winds blow ;" "ships
consists in appearance of only two words
"
"
winds are blowing,"
which expressions arc equivalent to
sail ;
object or

complement.

"ships are

must

It

sailing."

appears, then, that the

shortest sentence

consist of three words, expressed or understood;

be found that the longest

is

Fur the sake of illustration

and HO more.

sentence from the Letters of Jraiius,

offered to a great or

and

will*

it

always reducible to three distinct parts

good man

let us take the

following

"
viz,,

An

naturally excites

unmerited outrage
1

some emotions of

resentment even in hearts that have the least esteem for virtue."
"
In this sentence the verb is
naturally excites ;" what precedes the
verb,

/;.

is

the nominative

and what follows

Although every simple sentence

is

a general
parts, yet it is riot easy to find

it, is

the complement,

reducible to three distinct

term that

will accurately

When

apply to each individual part with the exception of the verb.

the sentence
parts

may

attribute

by

is

expressed by means of

"

and complement

as

"
object
is

as

may

be called nominative, verb,

When

active or transitive, the parts are agent,

is

Zaid purchased a horse/*

Lastly,

when

means of a passive verb, the three parts

"
a liorse was purchased by Zaid."
and agent as

expressed by

nominative, verb,

<?,

to be," the three

Zaid went from Mecca to Isfahan."

the verb of the sentence

sentence

"

be called the nominative or subject, the verb, and the

"
Zaid is diligent," When the sentence is expressed
thus,

any other neuter verb, the parts

verb, and

the verb

compound

the
are

sentence, or period, consists of two or

more simple

sentences connected by a conjunction, expressed or understood

thus,

ARRANGEMENT OF "WORDS IN A SENTENCE.

"
Knowledge
to

the

mind with

entertaining views

a perpetual series of gratifications;

it

fills

fills

with complacency,

it

and administers

gives ease to solitude;

it

a public station with suitable abilities

205

and,

when

it is

adds lustre to such as are possessed of

mixed
It

it."

will be a useful exercise for the student to

analyze, by himself, the
above compound sentence which consists of five simple sentences, in
;

all

of which, knowledge, or its substitute

it, is

the nominative.

The

two clauses make but one simple sentence, for they amount
"
Knowledge, mixed with complacency, adds lustre
merely to this
to such as are possessed of it."
last

249.

The leading

principles of Arabic Syntax do not differ

upon the whole, from those that prevail

European languages.
with

As

in our

a general rule

own and

other

the verb agrees

nominative in number, gender, and person; the

adjective agrees with its substantive in number, gender, and
its

and the relative agrees in number and gender with

antecedent.
There are, however, in the Arabic
case

its

language,

some exceptions to the preceding general

principles, together
with many idiomatic peculiarities which may startle the
European student, whose notions of grammar are derived
from the languages of ancient Greece and Borne.
Arrangement of

250. "We have just shewn

sists of

Words

the

in a Sentence,

248, a) that a

WEten*

con-*

three distinct parts; and the attentive ^tedent will

find on examination that there are

abfc

^ays of arranging

In Arabic prose compositions, the general rule

thqse parts.
is to put the verb first, then the
nominative, and lastly
the complement; thus,

pi

S?J

JJ* "Zaid struck

Amru, ?>

ARRANGEMENTS OP WORDS IN A SENTENCE.

206

So in the followmg sentences,

-'

said to

Ms

35

son.

<1>^1

J).

^Ht

God

the beginning
oljJo

>"

""*

viz. 5
x x

t3

*jj8
.^j ^ ^Q

41

cu^UJi

the

created

JlJ
>"

jU.

^ x c*O

<t>1xJt

Lnkman

^ a ln

heayens and the earth."

to

one substantive governs another in the

genitive case the governing word comes

"

^Qi
^/ x

"Zaid came from Isfahan

*^r

*jj

When

Baghdad."

tiS rtO

<uJ*

love of the world;"

first;

as IjllT
JLJ1
"
*

o^o
<:

U^

listening unto wisdom."

In like manner a substantive precedes the adjective which

"
serves to qualify it as *J& cSS a great book ;"
j^ j^Jf j>^T
;

tho sincere friend,"

#,

in case tcriiiiriations^ such as the Sanskrit,

Languages abounding

the Latin, and the Greek, admit of

ment above alluded

to

any of the

thus the simple sentence,

Pompey," which we cannot arrange with

way,

may

in Latin be expressed,
JJ

Pompeium
Caesar;"

Csar.
is

l?

vicit ;

"

Osesar vanquished

perspicuity, except in one

Csesar vicit

Pompeium,"

or

Csesar vicit," or

Pompeium

Tho Arabic

"Anns an

first

is

more

restricted in its

arrangement ; and

infer,

toiseach chruthaich

least affinity with

Dia na neamhan agus an talamh,"

Tho reader is

consider the two languages to have the

one another,

certain striking resemblances

I hold to

m THE ARTICLE,
c-

The

merely point out occasionally

between the two, as to arrangement

be purely accidental.

SYNTAX
251,

it

for

word with the Arabic,

for

however, that

and idiom, which

it

verse of Genesis (above quoted) runs thus in Gaelic:

which corresponds word

not to

Osesar

Pompeium
"Pompcdum vicit

a curious coincidence that the Gaelic exactly agrees with

example, the

is

"vicit Csesar Poinpeium/' or "vicit

"

lastly,

"

modes of arrange-

six

definite article J! of the

Arabic generally cor-

207

SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE.

responds in

use and application with the

its

For example, when, a substantive

Greek.

the article, and at the

o,

"

c^Wi

same time qualified by an

any) takes the article

the faithful," Afipa&p 6

ham

prefixed to

S<^0

a
(J[wj&!

It is

The

TTIO-TO^

a proper

is

"

(*$}i\

article is

thus,

sects;

Abra-

always

*^'

o^Jl

the

(L^\ "the Arabians;"

"the Christians;"

the Persians."

^^\

thus,

names of peoples and

J}^\

Jews;"

A/3Xo9

f)

definite in its nature), its qualifying

y

adjective (if

adjective,

the great (or valuable) book,"

name (and consequently

by

the article;

In like manner when the substantive

% afya.

of the

restricted

is

the adjective as well as the substantive takes

thus, *Js*sT

TO

r/,

used also before singular nouns

a whole species ; as in the following

express collectively
& S 9
-"/O-P s
^<
example J^s)
^^p' The dromedary is preferable
to

^ j^

'

the cameL"

to

The

a.

article is

sometimes employed, as in German and French,

nstead of an affixed possessive pronoun,

mistaken
trouble

"
;

thus,

sb

we

employed

"the prophet,"

"t-Sjl

^o

me, and

f (^^^MO^

^y

XCX'O/'

in my
x-^O

j*H

<-**

other languages,

in

is

see JJUll

departed," J|j J|jJjJ^

9 tsSbs

^here

the possessor cannot be

thine absence thou hast troubled

By

my reason has

when

for

^lic

The

per antonomasiam,

o Trpfajry}?,

for

as

artfcle is also

in the

MnhanoPDaad ;
*

'

i/,

)ook/

y fyfihos, for the Kur,an,

Finally, iio

smxsU

Is

wfl

mm

German and French before nonns denotito^ aa abeteact idea in

*
'

general, in which instances we

s XC^-O
s -^o-O s 9 s"Q ^o f 13 S 9

it

4-jlyi

J^aagr;

employ *t> Oracle to English; thus,

"
J^! b by activity the reward is
'

208

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,

not by slothfulness;"
regions, etc.

it is

as <u.(Jl

"

"Irak;" fllM

used before names of sciences, arts

also

"wisdom;"

Syria/' or

"

Li^\

government ;'

Damascus."

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.
Of
252,

the

The nominative

Nominative Case.
case

Is

often employed at the

"be-

ginning of a sentence in an absolute sense, independently of

any grammatical construction with what

amploj the sentence

"To God

heavens and upon the earth/'

"^^

y^

^ -0

<*

J*jl\ ^LB j
God? ) to

cj\jHll ^J

Mm

(is)

the earth ;

is

9S

9*, *"

aiM

Ps

(is)
*

thus expressed in Arabic,

literally,

"God,

in the heavens

(or, as to

and upon

"*

so,

^^ ^j M

Le.

"the prophet of God

??

among you/'

$>?

"belongs whatever is in the

whatever

Oj* S<*

For ex-

follows.

use of the nominative absolute

"As

to God, his prophet is

is

is called

such a mode of construction

among

??

yon.

This

the Inchoative case,

by no means rare
In our modern Anglo-Saxon, both English and Scotch, as in
the following couplet from the exquisite ballad of "Auld
1

|jo^Ji;

is

EobinGray:"
"

My Mart

it

But tho wind

a.

We

said nay, for 1 look'd for Jamie back ;

it "blow high, and the
sMp it was a wrack/*

mentioned (158, a) that the verb "to bo/'

in the present tense except when. Its omission

is

seldom

tased

might occasion an
r>

"*

/w X

"Zaid Is learned;" L^ <dll "God (is)

jjj
j*H
Here we see that the
uJj/^ <^3t "thou (art noble)/

ambiguity; thus,
"

boulxtifixl;

verb

IB entirely

omitted, and both the subject and attribute put in the

nominative case in the order described,

250,

In

many

instances

209

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,

it is

thus we
or

make

optional to

say J*\

may

j^i* HlJ

"

the subject precede the attribute or vice versa;

<dS!

or

"
<d!!^1

Muhammad
Of

(is)

God

(is)

very great;" U*J

Jo^sr"

our prophet."

Genitive Case.

the

253. "When In Arabic two substantives are so combined

that the

which we

may

is

indefinite in its signification, is re-

second, such a construction is called SS&\,

by the

stricted

is

which

first,

translate

"

state of

termed uJl^il "the regent;

The

regimen."

Ox
75

CJ-o

governed;" as

is

<u:>-

called ^"
^\X uJl**J! sor
x

"the
f

The governing word has very

j?/-C-x

t/&~"

effect of

is

the wisdom of God; ?? ^U^Ls c^?u^

"the book of Solomon."

quently the

x 7 Cv

<d!l

word

and the second, which

X
9

case,
always put in the genitive
^0

first

an adjective ; as

lj

fre-

abundance

of sleep/' i.e.
much sleep;" c^Will Jj^k "length of ex"
ie. "long experience."
Such is uniformly the
periences5
construction of the

our words

to

governed

^UT J^
a.

Like
)

feminine

men?"

is

"

"

"the
a

all ?

totality/

"

all

which answers
tho word

according as

singular or plural; thus 3

#^

J^ "everything;"

men. ??

are also construed the interrogative

"
denoting

what ?

]^1 il "what

similar a?ule applies to the

gation;" for example,

"

every" or

-&s"

I>1

noun

"

"

which ?

woman ?

>?

3js

n
(jwlS

pronoun /cf and

^t "what or which

1$ "for what reason f

"
7

wordjlc signifying

jJLt^Js

"incroate;'*

the Wazlrs and Kadis and others besides

difference/ hence

Ife^

its

i'laaj^

^Tij^

them came/'
27-

"ne\Jl4"

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

210

TIio

of

stato

regimen frequently expresses superiority or ex"

cellence in a snpeiiatiTO sense

"

as

<LJJj

"When the governing word

things

the best of created

j*cL

an adjective the

is

latter is

sometimes restricted in its signification by the word governed; as

"
c-jll^
quick at calculation," instead of t^Uu^ %&L . j
-/-*
^

*"

"*

"possessed of readiness at calculation;"

u^UUM Jj^i

"

violent in

'

chastising/' instead of

c^UU

Of

Wo

Case.

104) that every noun In Arabic may

converted Into an adverb by "being put in the accusative

254*
"be

ike Accusative

stated

The

eaBO,

In this language is frequently

accusative cu&o

used adverbially IE instances where the Latin would employ tho ablative, or tlio accusative with a preposition ;
a
ho perished of hunger/' mortuus est
thus, lij>~ cjU
a

fame] SjjDU

Uljfl

\yty*

do ye

days,"

per cerium

diemm

ticiple

with

accusative

the

during certain specified

fast

An

spatium*

adjective or par-

termination

frequently

cor-

responds with tho Latin gerund in do] as C^\J 1^ "he

"
^ oats standing,"
came riding/ venit oguiiando l!w\J 3^^t
9

<&9

tjws^

xf^^p

OJ?

c^Ul y^al

enter the gate in adoration."

sative Is sometimes equivalent to the Latin

as

a
Ccujt?

^?J^

wudicndum*

l struck

him

gerund in dmi\

pnr

with

m to;

rfisnoct to his

reason of/

"by
^OX/xO^X

??

thus

Uii

ad

et simple^ expresses

in Arabic the sense of the Latin quoad,

to," or

accu-

for (the sake of) instruction,"

Finally, the accusative

"with respect

The

J^\.

M^

mind, or disposition,"

Isaac

a
".<?.

he

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,
well disposed;"

Is

<?s<^

-$>s

xx Tx

x-

-3.

J^uJ jj*l^ i^Urfl

The

a.

6rod

a31 ^

LS^

to)

(hearts) are like

sometimes put before the sub-

is

9?^"$.

great (as

to hardness."

predicate in the accusative

Is

^ese

tr

more intense (than stones) as

or

dJ1

??

power

Lias

l^Sj

211

& x o y

xoti3-o

>-

^ -o

t,

Uk^s^ tjflj Jscdlj [He it is

"the palin-tree and the corn-crop of which

ject; thus in the Kur,an vi. 42; <dl

?

who hath brought

x

JS"

jxL 3

*x

"}

d\

uJUjs^
in

variety of food;"

Is a
/ 99

there

forth]

"

^^

IJ^ll

where

??(^i

& x o

<difl

Uksr

SlfcS

^1^
u

[They

^5

they

may

jbil

XJ^lJJ.

as above ; the

Is

equivalent to

it

admonition

unto sport, their hearts

^^

is

<3utoU

equivalent to

In connection with quotations from the

N.B.

Eonian numerals indicate the

So

various."

listen not to the

turn

being taken up with delight;" where

X"

is

the food (resulting) from which

of their Lord except that]

sllrat or cliaptor 5

Kur an
?

and the

Arabian figures, the ayat or verse.

58
effect

The present participle put In the accusative lias sometimes the

of what in Latin is called the subjunctive mood which in
?

Arabic

"
45*

expressed

by

the preterite preceded

although/* "even

if/'

as In the following verse

Is

x x

UU- ^K U

-05^3

*U1

^ xx*

*U3

&

vSxx

x-

xO"-0

J^ UU jU

the conjunction

by

oSx

^ J^U
y

from the llamasa:

"verily, I will

wash away dishonour from me, even if the decree of God should
draw upon me whatever it may draw;" where Qlp- (when It first
x

""

x-

c/x

occurs) is equivalent to c-^icf- j^

x
x 03^ &
x ^x ox ^ xx
#
&

xxx

L^>-

l^uS ^l^

USl^

xys? &\j&

coveteth anything, his avarice leadeth

So in the following sentence

x
a;j

JU

him on

xx

U^

^^

<^C

to

it,

o x

whatever

"whoso
it

may

be, foul or fair."

c.

In Arabic the accusative

Is

very frequently employed where wo

SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES.

212

should use the nominative, as in the following verses" from the

''
0*' '
J?OXOO S ' S
s-&si><j
S
^y^^O
Uo- uJj^lb
Kiir/an, ii, 242:
cjUlk^l^ "and
**

^^\

g^

to the divorced (wives is due) a reasonable provision (according to

the husband's means)

incumbent on the pious

this is

where we

;"

&

see

l&5>-

Si~o

<dll

in the accusative.
xx
*$ s
tv~a

aL*j LJUbJ

So

also in iv. 15,

"

^ ?^

l^

should be more (brothers or

in the third part (of the estate)

(equal) sharers
&

from God;" where we see

<dll

the following

c x

"

and

if

there

than these (two) they shall be

sisters)

-O

^^Uy ^ u ^

c_*3 3

^3

we have

'<*&

this is

^ ^a^S

an ordinance

& -O

xx

#* x-

xx

5"x

used for <dH

in Apposition,

255,

way
in

"When one substantive

subjoined to another by

two are said

of description or designation, the

"

19

as in the Kur,an, xiv.

jj
(

s 9 s

xxiv.

35

* P

L^JJ KjU*

lighted with the

rule holds

xx-

oil

when

xOX

9 s

S^

j^ d^

ate half the cake/' literally,

(the lamp)

is

The Bame

*'

*"
,*-

^"^

confimatkm"

or

I ate the cake, the half of

it."

thus, **U3 (^jL^J

corroboration

the soul" or "solf," and

to

them the

to the first substantive*

XX

^^\

first

rule also applies to certain, words added

having subjoined

So

\*

the second substantive defines the manner,

of

it

ail(l

poison."
/

1 1

"

is)

\jpl}

of a blessed tree, the olivet

measurc or quantity^ of the

The same

"

*U

there shall be drinking of water (which

in

be

to

and must agree in gender, number, and

apposition/

ease,

is

??

(SuSy) ? such as JuiJ

"the eye ?? or
affixed

by way

"
essence,"

pronoun appropriate

They thus become equivalent to the

Latin imc* wsa. and imum.

Thcv a^ree in render, number,

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

213

and case with the leading substantives, the forms used

for

both dual and plural being JJuT and ^^-t, as may be seen in
u
the following examples: Ii5j 5Jj *If
Zaid himself came;"
* -t"' d T
* '
*' VT
? '*"
'
^_ rr
T
i
i
Ji
i""* V x
5
<wj \joj cuo'j
I saw Zaid himself; 77 1$^
v^cjj ci> l>(

**

"Zainab herself came;" Ujllft ^J^ySl cLvVj "I saw the

two princes themselves. 35 The words JJu and ^^ may also
be put in apposition

after the affixed

lytj "I saw

'
\\ ' S^'
L-5u\ L^CJli Of

pronouns

which may

thyself,"

also

for

example,

be expressed

"5,

**??
w-OJ

a.

**

In a manner similar to the foregoing are used the words

or "universality,"
jl*>- denoting "totality,"
in general;" as <*&

"

the

tribe

((

*$!

the whole

stances the words

H,

"people

"the whole army came,"

"

literally,

so

all

<LJil

l$l

"I saw

"I passed by

army came."

as also <ut&

it ;"

*j&\ c^-ol;

*J b ei/fpi
X X

XX

*\J=>~

the whole of

army came,
came;"

(jL*s!\

J and

the

cp^ li-

the whole

the multitude, all of them;"

women;" 4x*U

(jfc-jJt

*t>-

In order to express duality in such

fem.

as in the following examples

UK
:

or

UiK

in-

"both," are employed;

"
j^ij 30 -s\^- both Zaid and
lsi,

'Amru came;" U^J^ J^c^ |^c. L^O]^ "I saw both 'Amru and

\^^\ ^^j
Fatima." When the

'Umar;" t*^I3^ Ma\^j

**

both Zainab and

gave unto him as wives

X

words

XX

and l^K precede the

substantives which they qualify they become indeclinable;

GXX^
^
X/OXO^ x^
"
"
I saw both thy brothers ;
ujC^l liij
cu^Vj
u30^^

"

thus,
^ CXX-

cj^

passed by both thy sisters,"

JT

5.

To

the

f x o ^

word 3^ thus used in apposition, the words +^s>\ fem.

214

SYNTAX OE THE NUMERALS,

a>-,

together with their plurals

*Ji>-

fern.

^y^>-!

may

bo sub-

number, and case with the leading word;

-VC-0 s S s

joined, agreeing in gender,

^

9s

j&9

^f^\

thus,

<&35US

*$&

&?"*

The word f^r\ thus Applied

(<

and

all the

angels did worship/'

not used in the dual, either masculine

is

or feminine*

The word ^u>*\ applied

c.

or

may

be accompanied

by one

of the following words, which are of the same signification,

all

viz*:

as above

jjufj,

^La>f ?

and

*\MJ, and jUs^; and

^e);

fern.

^JL,

are all used at the

^\

whose feminines are

respectively, i\xu,

^*2>U

and

ami

f
;

xo

XC2

^\

*a*\

"the whole of the army came;" which

The

and

j-^,
^S, Sometimes these three words
same time in addition to Ji4-i in, the order ob-

served in the following example

verbatim.

^of

their plurals niasc,

last three

j?

x o* '*'

y Ox>0 '*

^\ <^>~\ & (J^

it is

""

sUf

impossible to translate

words are very rarely used either singly or

.*

in combination, except

when preceded by

and

SYNTAX OF THE NUMEEALS.

Of
256*

We

have

"the

soon. (

Cardinal Numbers.

GO) that the cardinal numbers from

8 to 10 inclusive have this anomaly^ that

when they

refer

to a masculine noun they assume the feminine termination

$~
to

whereas the feminine nouns require tho same numerals

"be

i^Ji&.

AVxx

of the masculine form; thus, $JU

tLlij

five daughters.'

noun

As

^J

"throe sons;"

adjectives they are placed

which they belong, and agree with <ko

same in gender and case. At the same time they may be
used as suTbstatives^ and prefixed to their nouns which they
after the

to

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

215

S
then govern in the genitive ease
s

thus ?

1XL

Jjbl

As a

"five months."

9^

"

+\l\
U

six days ;"

general rule the noun thus

-*v

governed by the numerals 3 to 10 must be a broken plural.

The number

a.

txiT and

3^^

feminine.

The

object

one, as

first

numbered

is

form of each

not expressed

also

"

^^^ ^

t/^1 "oae

The forms iL^j and

tives; thus,

H^lJ

uf^\

and Sx>.]J for the

^?^r ^ "no

there

was no one

of the

1\^^ are

fj^ "one

thus,

JI^-JS!

adjectives,

gender with the nouns which they represent;

"each one of these gulphs

(or bays);"

each one of these cities."

of them/'

"one

still

^ g^\j Jg
J^
^

^ls^ x&&

^JMO! *Wb

Ifi^-tJ

are also used in the sense of

They

O.-O

J*3T

Uu$
^

"the other
fc

"
thus, 1j^-lJ ljo-V^ ^JU-

sl^y

*.*j>

^1.

distribution $.

repeated

individuality;

then, with regard to the

cow*

they came one by one."

The number

"
two/'

is sufficiently

represented

terminations of the objects numbered;

"two
],

When

half."

o^

and used adverbially, they imply

5.

or "the one "in contrast with "the other;" thus

Ju^lJM uJ^oill

"the one-half;"

sellors,

degree."

agreeing in

"one"

the

and follow their substan-

5^^ ^j3

object;"

They

"one of

Oo-T

women;" ^ilil "one

They may, however, be employed by themselves,

"

one (masc.)

(fern.)/'

govern a genitive case;

men;" *LJ1

expressed by the words

&

used as a substantive when the

is

as di~1

is

69,

and by

for the masculine,

came unto me;" ^j^-\

may

we shewed,

degrees/'

by

thus, tJk>>j

the

mere dual

"two men;"

Sometimes the numeral "two/'

fern.
^ISJ,,
"*

or ^l^j are employed as adjectives after nouns in the dual,

In such instances the numeral

"

two

"

appears to be redundant tet

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

210

adds more emphasis

it

perhaps
c"*

\&\

c^

(&&~3) \jr^ L

where the numeral ^Jul

for

expression;

example^

a pair of each
species/'

create(i

apparently superfluous.

The numerals 11

257.

"^ c

cr*^

is

the

to

99

to

"both inclusive,

govern the

substantive to which they refer In the accusative singular

S
jf

-0

&^y&

as

"eleven stars;"

Jolt

^Ls^

their multiples, govern the

OGO

ejiS

together with

three hundred

a thousand dinars;" jlio

tJj3!!

JA^

"a hundred
so

men;"

X 0x xx-x

J^ U

the genitive singular; thus,

itjX
men;" j4y
***"**

ninety-

jllj

nouns denoting the objects num.*

* s

"bored, IE

^^-^

The numerals 100 and

nine sheep."

(^ff

4^1

.liuj
"*

"^

"eleven thousand

SS-1

Numerals made up of decades and units, when

they exceed 20, place the unite first and then the tens;
u
*j^
eighty-throe years" (literally, threethus, l^l^
dinars*"

^^J

and-eighty

noun expressive

is

is

ti*a

;POXX

^ye-u*^

1,

xO*^

f.

numbered

the

classes,

put after the

is

governed by the concluding numeral,

/ O

^l^**^

fi;li

two-and-twenty

composed of several

according to the rales already stated;

j*x-X

"

u^

^/ty)

of the objects

number, and

total

VJli j

number

If a

dinars."

XO X

years)

J^XX

i^T SSU

-Ji

*O

^U^yi

for example,

thus,
x-

O,v"

^^

</

O-*O

t/?7

X OX

^rf

be-

and the Deluge (there elapsed) 3,974 years,"

In Instances of this kind, however, tho substantive may be

tween the

llijra

repeated after each class of the numerals; as follows,

s

o*

x ^xo

5 /***

/-

cS

y^^j ^b jW,i? ^^
X^XXjCXXx"^"
uJil

Uj9 ^yUJj

/3S.

</

^oft,

^i^J^^t? ^-^ ^^

Tho revenue

x^

^*

o x

ljlj*ar*

viz.,
Oxop^o

jf-0

I*J

Jill

of Gharblya (a province of

Egypt,) isrcckoEod at 2,144,080 military dinars."

OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

In order to express any large number, consisting of millions

a.

(or upwards), together with, hundreds, decades,

}

it is

and units of thousands;

<ss

usual to repeat the wordt^sH after each class of the numerals

Ull

j^yUj
x

x^ iujl
literally,

sv^s: ^

&Ujl

"

the

(S'XX^X

UJlS!

<UUwu/^>-j

amount of

it

U-c!1 uJiil

(is)

this,

dXuJ

thus,

U-Xlt) 4W4T>~
X*

9,584,264 dinars,"

"nine hundred thousand of thousands, and

five

hundred of

thousands, and four-and-eighty thousand, and two hundred, and four-

and-sixty dinars."

In expressing a number of thousands, ranging from three io

b.

*r

'
s>

uJST

Js>~j

^
is

used In

"three thousand men."

"^

***

from 11

to

tlio

genitive plural 4^J3J; and

numbered follow the same in the genitive singular;

P"'

the objects
9

ox

both inclusive, uJ!l

ten,

When

thus,

the thousuiidri range

*"-

99 (both inclusive) 4jSI

is

used in the accusative singular,

and the objects numbered in the genitive singular, as

just stated;
thus,

dinars."

L^\

yL*

<f

20,000 Ibs.;" j\L* L^\]

l^ ^\ "11,000

"When the number of the thousands consists of a hundred

& <"

or

any

used in the genitive singular, and the

multiple thereof tJll

is

numbered in the same

case, as

objects

"

Ox

above; thus,juj<j c^oH

'

iU

f s+

ej!0

300,000 dmars.

258.

Not only the cardinal numbers from throo

Inclusive (

may

to ten,

256), but also those of a higher denomination

employed In apposition to the nouns denoting the

objects numbered, as may bo seen in the following example
s
^ss*s\,*% +s *,
o
o^o~0 x x^^o ^-x^x
5"Sxo/^
fiLAjj
<.#**} &&> ^jU IjUS Ula^
oU^Sl
"be

L^ ^

"and he drew the net

fishes,

to the land;

lo, It

one hundred and three-and-fiffcy. ??

J1
was

M*^

full of large

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS,

218
259.

When

a unmoral

is

employed

to

denote a certain

of a collection, or class, or -whole genus,

number out

it

is

usual to express the relation "between the numeral and the

"from" or "out of; ??
class by means of the preposition
"
?5
nine (men) out of the family
for example
kijf
"
u
three birds from among the
three birds" i.e.

j>

JjT^t

to be observed that the numeral

genus bird." It is further
with the objects num.in such instances, agrees in gender
-v 0^,0
is"
"
35
<3iS
three sheep;
"bored; thus, in the expression

^1

the numeral
so

culine;

feminine

is

uT

because

the gender

is

added immediately

is
?

masis

If an epithet indicating

feminine.

is

genus

where eJj

eJ5 "three ducks;"

after the numeral, the latter

'I

xVO"*C

such epithet
agrees in gender with
u

as a

masculine because

thus,

f&\

*^C-O ^

three females of the genus sheep ;" kJl

5>

s<"

e^W eJ3

P^ 9sss

^ j/3

three

<31$

males from among the ducks,"

a.

as in the science of arithmetic, are

Numerals need abstractedly,

53

masculine form
always put- in the
half of six."

and the same

When

nouns of

tiros,

&#

Sxxx

t*i<w

"

tliree as the

fiSJ

different sexes are included

provided

immediately following

it,

extending from HI* to

"

ton,

*'

^XX'J O'SC/'Xx'
il

to

mo

under one

with the noun

numeral, the latter agrees in gender
the numeral denotes a number
both inclusive

as

$*U

**&\

L^ ^

and [eight] female servant*/'

(belong) eight slaves

If

we

be as follows
hero reverse the objects numbered, the expression will
^
e ht handmaids and {eight]
to mc ^ bo lo:Q
4^* J
(J
:

^ \J$

slaves,"

If the objects

numeral must bo added

'

^ %

numbered be under
to

six,

then the appropriate

each of the two species,

219

OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

When

b.

compound numerals above

the

apply to rational

ten

beings, they always take the masculine form, as in the following

if-S

."X

^1^

examples:

>?

OX

\<+&

XX

XXC X

.X

slaves and [fifteen] female slaves ;"

me

belong

fifteen

"

<uo^ L/^

j&s.

to

me

fifteen

belong

Ju^ *ij^r j&* ^^>~

female and [fifteen] male slaves."

male

^^ "

to

If the numerals

apply to irrational beings they take the gender of the nearest subif -"X
X X
O
XX G X
X-" X
"
<?

stantive

thus, &l5^ iUs>-

j&& <w*>-

there are in

<j$&*&

my posses-

sion (chez moi,) fifteen male camels and [fifteen] she-camels

^x xx 4s x 'S o -" x O x
O

"
or,

by

transposition,

and

[fifteen]

L*^ SU ^Lc

he-camels.

If,

a qualifying word such as

"

^^^c^ t^^f

^-

ave fifteen she-camels

however, in the case of irrational objects

^j U,

etc.,

interposes immediately after

the numerals, the latter are of the feminine form

XXX
XXxOX XX." OX XOX
O

J^>-

<SUj

^U

Xj&^>

"
is,

and the same construction holds, as

we

partly male and partly female;"

to the

numerals

if

in this last

transpose the last two words and read

"seven years;" because

a year,"

& "three

So cjClIi.

singular.

is

feminine in the

baths," for the singular

masculine; and this rule holds "whea tto 3aanae of

the objects numbered

is

suppressed

jj}j

^^ ^^^ U

creatures) that

walk on four

example;
n

what

^^

singular

is

The numerals agree in gender with that of the

number of the objects numbered; thus,

260.

jiUcH

I possess fifteen camels,

u^*^ <-?^

between males and females/' that

expression

thus for example

"

-.

feminine.

,
^
So also

"Yerily, I beheld seven fat

as

in the following
,

"and among them (are

(feet)," l-j "a foot/ being

1JL/

S',,x'iroxl|i

u^U

$%&

"^ |x
l

Mne which
3

xxx

Cx

sevjen lean

x?

L5

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

220

word "kino"

"being

numbered are of a vague or general

nature,

devoured/ where ^.^

5

Is

feminine, the

understood.

a,

"When the

such as

may

objects

apply to either sex, the

numeral agrees with the same

according to the grammatical gender of such objects. For example,

"
denote
a person" or "individual," the
the words JAST& and

^s

former being masculine and the latter feminine

S

9SS**

>as^\

$515

f O

^
,

hence they say

**'*'

"three persons/' where

<8XJ is

used in the masculine form

f G

s-

ss

cji5
whether the objects be male or female. In like manner
"
"
whether
to
females
or
throe persons" or
individuals/'
applicable
(

males.

^\

however, another noun or epithet be added to sucb phrases

If,

num-

as the foregoing serving to indicate the real sex of the objects

bered, tho numeral will agree in gender with the

Gx

9 P

**s

tS3-

t"

word

or words

s ss

annexed; i}m*,jax*j
(j^y^ *$* <^\ &-*
LS^?>
"
and 1 had for a shield against those whom I feared two (young)
9 *s/

^V^

Here we

maidens and a (marriageable) woman."

9

is

^UsK

aiulJ^wJo

word

numbered than

male sex

ytSA

"soul,"

JJftJ

tiiiij

the

is

to

is

by

the

applicable only to females,

had more

to tho signification of the

grammatical gender; thus the

their strict

feminine; bat

numeral agrees with

"ilirco souls"

is qualified

is

each of which

Sometimes, however, fegard

objects

see that eJ.5 fein,

used with ^j^sr^ masc. because the latter word

epithets

u^

it

when

the
applied to persons of

in the masculine gender; thus,

(meaning males), because

in this instance

the same signification as

J^uJ has
r

If the

name

of the objects numbered be suppressed and

supplied by an epithet descriptive of

in render with -the

noun understood

its
;

its

place

quality, the numeral agrees

thus in the Kur,an,

vi.

160

OP THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

*U-

"he who

221

hath done a good (deed)

Here

shall receive (as his reward) ten (times) the equivalent thereof."

the numeral ^uJs

the latter

is

is

is

feminine, although \$&*\

considered as a

mere

masculine; because

epithet of cbl^li. (plural of dllJL)

understood.

The

261.

cardinal

numbers may be

according to the rules

numeral

is

laid

by the article
1. "When the

restricted

251.

down,

used substantively in an abstract sense

<ttLn clo^u ayhH

/'the (number) three

When the name

is

thus,

half of the (number)

of the objects

numbered

six."

2.

stood,

having been previously expressed,

is

under-

and hence

"well

yb ^*lwJ! -!>y "and the seventy (disciples)

returned with joy."
3. When the numeral is employed in

known;

as

apposition as an adjective after a definite noun ; for example

*
^ ' "
s O -"V"
ilX^) \ ^r)\
the five men."
4. When the numerals from
:

3 to 10 (both
inclusive) precede the objects
state of regimen, ia

which case the

s-

""

fixed only to the latter; as

Jls^jH

"the

trio

of men."

JL^ilM 2U5

uJLJ\

name

in a

article is generally pre-

"
&N
9

<f

the three

Occasionally, however,

takes the article as well as the

as

numbered

men"

or

the numeral

of the objects

numbered

"the seven fundamental precepte of

the law."

a.

name

When

the numerals from 11 to 19 (both inclusive) precede the

of the objects numbered,

govern the

same

and as we already remarked,

in the accusative smgttlax, the article

#

fixed to the first

member only

or to both; thus,

xo

S57,

may sbe

ss s

pre-

XGX

U^oyks ^i\

or

SYNTAX OF THE NHMKltALS.

222

^J'

*r

i?0 to IHt ibutli

h-

"the eleven clirhams;"

L^l
^

<SU

elusive),

when

numeral

the

and

consists of a imtliiplo of

such multiple

if

^^O^> x

I'oJi^

With regard

i.

"

be combined
F

thus, /LR^

both take the article;

*xx

From

bJlN "the twclvo she-camels."

the article;

the article either to

(lie

for

*?*

>

of*

is

CM*

II

I.H

fu <!H*

nanut of

ilii"

"
fiirou lanifl

ilw,

;"

HO

^j

where

laai>

itl^nUjj wJI wJ!2

tlio d^nioiiHfnilivi*

ihe

Ordiiialrt

are oxprc^sed
tlio

tiro

im^ro ucljtiCtiv^H,

By

"tlio
an

may

first

tlife

all

In

*^A>
."iicfi

riiiji]tv*<I f

ami

tlntt

CIIHI*

Htat*Hl,

ubow

iiji

Hint

hey are

<n

not,

be,

rc^tmtod
u

J^r^l!

plmw<,

fliey take

Ijy

7*1,

If tat

ruua1r,

ecw,>;iiler<ij

Tint

the nriieln; UH

tlm ilmt

Uo

f}n

with th

gtnidor, as thoy aro iiicleeJinuhle.

year;"

last

Wc%

multiples of ten

tho ctmlinalH, HO

oommou

ordinals may, or

i;

pron<;u

in grander, nimibor, unit

"the twentieth," and

'ft

UU!

Ordinal Jtfwnbew.

substantives to which, they relate*

^1

prefixed to the wore! iinmudiaiely li)llwvii**r.

The

of

^<

>

ninotoeaflx they

"bo

!*;"

f<

ojifiuiin!

thr^c Ihoiiflflwl tlirhaum ;" w>

O/
262*

titfy

a Imndrwl or a

this million (literally, ihoimand of ihou,-<nnd^) of <limuv/

the article

to

dia

'"'

"*

the two hundred thotisftnd dirlmwn

examples as the

ukiv

/-

example; ^UjoJI iSLylj

f>/>xx

"the
^bj$\ ^XTSSU

nuifs

t\v<*uiv

llin

^^A!^

oufiro niminrnl,
<*t

xo,^0

wifh

iho s<jv<m<y-4jev<'n cumolrf/'

<

numbered;

it

only,

niimoruk connirtting

to

tu

together with their miilfiph^ and ucflcwori<M,

tff

SjS+s

XxxxC.*O xxO Ox

ss"*'

also <3 J

cliiimte/*

artidi^ Uiev

re

203

SECTION

VII.

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, SUBSTANTIVES, ADJECTIVES, AND

PRONOUNS,
Analysis of Sentences,
248. In the preceding Sections

we have

treated of the

and words of the Arabic language. We

now come* $ the most important part of our work the conletters,

syllables,

struction of sentences, or, in other words, the rules for speak-

We

have all along

ing and writing the language correctly.
taken for granted that the student i$ acquainted with the
ordinary terms of grammar, and
various parts of speech
another.

It

is

(common

able to distinguish the

is

to all languages) from one

probable, however, that he

may

not have

turned his attention to the analysis of sentences, which ought

to form a
preliminary step to the Syntax of every foreign

On

tongue.

this account,

we

request his attention to the

following general, or rather universal principles of

an acquaintance with which will enable Mip. to

$($
more fully some of the rules which we

a.*

A simple

agent ;

"Fire

a verb
is

&

sentence consists of three jwta, vl&, & nominative or

;

and

art

attribute, predi<fefe%

hot;" "Fire oonsiimeB wood."

'

<# complement ;

In the

first

thus,

sentence,

204

ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES.

the nominative, or subject of affirmation

is

that which

is

affirmed of the subject, fire

to express the affirmation.

wood," ^7*0

wood

is

hot

is

the attribute, or

and the verb

Again, in the sentence

or agent, consumes

the nominative,,

the object or complement.

is

"

serves

is

Fire consumes

is

and

the verb,

Frequently a simple sentence

"

?
consists in appearance of only two words ; as
winds blow ;' "ships
"
"
which expressions arc equivalent to
sail ;
winds are blowing,"

"

ships are sailing/'

must

It

appears, then, that the

shortest sentence

consist of three words, expressed or understood

be found that the longest

and

will

it

always reducible to three distinct parts

For the sake of illustration let us take the
following
sentence from the Loiters of Junius, viz., "An unmerited
outrage
is

and no more*

good man

offered to a great or

naturally excites

some emotions of

resentment even in hearts that have the least esteem for virtue,"
In this sentence the verb
verb,

h.

is

the nominative

"
is

naturally excites

and what follows

Although every simple sentence

is

parts, yet it is not easy to find a general

it, is

"
;

what precedes the

the complement.

reducible to three distinct

term that will accurately

apply to each individual part with the exception of the verb. When
"
is expressed by means of the verb
to be," the three
1

the sentence
parts

may

attribute

by

be called the nominative or subject, the verb, and the

"
Zaid is diligent." When the sentence is expressed
thus,

any other neuter verb, the parts

and complement

as

"

the verb of the sentence

verb,

and

object

as

may

Zaid went from

be called nominative, verb,

Mecca

to

When

Isfahan."

active or transitive, the parts are agent,

is

Zaid purchased a horse/'

Lastly,

when the

expressed by moans of a passive verb, the three parts

"
as
a horse was purchased by Zaid."
nominative, verb, and agent
sentence

is

are

0,

compound

sentence, or period, consists of two or more simple

sentences connected

by a conjunction, expressed or understood

thus,

ARKANGEMENT OF WOBDS IN A SENTENCE.

"

Knowledge
to

the niind with entertaining views

a perpetual series of gratifications

it

fills

fills

a public station with suitable

with complacency,

it

it

abilities

and administers

gives ease to solitude

and,

when

above compound sentence

two clauses
to this

merely

The leading

simple sentences, in

The

the nominative.

amount
lustre

it."

principles of Arabic Syntax do not differ

European languages.
its

It

himself, the

sentence, for they

upon the whole, from those that prevail

with

by

mixed

it."

Knowledge, mixed with complacency, adds

such as are possessed of

249.

five
is

it,

make but one simple

"

to

which consists of

of which, knowledge, or its substitute

last

it is

adds lustre to such as are possessed of

will be a useful exercise for the student to analyze,

all

205

As

in our

a general rule

own and

other

the verb agrees

nominative in number, gender, and person;

the

adjective agrees with its substantive in

number, gender, and

case ; and the relative agrees in number and gender with its
There are, however, in the Arabic language,
antecedent.

some exceptions to the preceding general principles, together

with many idiomatic peculiarities which may startle the
European student, whose notions of grammar are derived
from the languages of ancient Greece and Eome.
Arrangement of
250.
sists of

We

Words

the

have just shewn

in

a Sentence*

248, a] that & aetite;^, con-

three distinct parts; and the attentlvej'^tedlent will

find on examination that there are six

ifastfi

of arranging

In Arabic prose compogltjoim, the general rule

put the verb first, then the nominative, and lastly

th$se parts.
is

to

the complement

thus,

pi

"
jyj

tlJJ*

Zaid struck

ARRANGEMENTS OP WORDS IN A SENTENCE.

20 G

cT

So in the following sentences,

' i&~o

said to

the

Ms

SOIL

beginning

otS*j

the
a

created

"

ail!

^j(l

Lukman

^-x-xo-O

"In

iljJl ^J

jU,

heavens and the earth,"

Zald came from Isfahan to

*T>-

2J

When

Baghdad.

c^UJt

Jo^\ j

J^ ^1^1
5 '

**"

??

God

^J

^U^l
'"xyt3^ ^. -0 x^x
viz.,

one substantive governs another in the

cl^&l
genitive case the governing word comes first; as CjlsT
"
O *H"?O
^
a
"loyo of the world;" uls*' u- listening unto wisdom."

In like manner a Hubstantivo precedes the adjective which

u
serves to qualify it OH tJai cl^S a great "book;" J^l^T jjx2jf
u
;

the sincere friend."

Languages abounding in case terminations^ Buch as the Sanskrit,

Latin, and tho Crock, admit of any of the six modes of arrange"

a.
tlio

ment

aT>ove alluded to

thus the simple sontorice

Osesar vanquished

Pompey/* wMch, we cannot arrange with perspicuity, except in one

"
"
way, may in Latin be expressed, C^sar vicit Pompeium," or Csesar
u

Pompoium

vicit ;"

vicit Caesar

i{

OfiBsar;"
Csesar/'
is

Csosar vicit," or

Pompoium

lastly,

The Arabic

more

is

Poinpoimn," or

"
vicit

Pompeium

"Pompeium

restricted iu its arrangement

a curious coincidence that the Gaelic exactly agrees with

example, the

"Anns an

first

infer,

it

it

for

verse of Q-enesis (above quoted) runs thus in Gaelic:

y

Dia na ncanxhan agus an talamh/

word with tlie Arabic* The reader is

toiseach chrathaich

which corresponds word

not to

vicit

and

for

however, that

least affinity with

consider the two languages to have the

one another,

merely point out occasionally

certain striking resemblances between the two, as to arrangement

and idiom, which

hold to bo purely accidental,

SYNTAX OF TUB AETIOL&

251,

The drfhute

article

Jt*

of the Arable generally cor-

SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE.

responds in

207

use and application with the

its

For example, when a substantive

Greek.

the article, and at the same time qualified

%,

<$,

TO of the

restricted

is

by an

by

adjective,

the adjective as well as the substantive takes the article;

P
S OX
SCst+O
"
the great (or valuable) book/ 7 % A/3^o?
thus, *Ji*n c^l^li
f>

f)

In like manner when the substantive

a&a.

name (and consequently

definite in its nature), its qualifying

adjective (if any) takes the article

ham

the faithful/

a proper

is

Afipaap

^^

thus,

The

mcrro^

"
\

!*/].

article is

Abra-

always

9 ?/<sS

names of peoples and

Jews;" cj^l^li, "the Christians ;"

prefixed to

used

sects;
<4>/3t

o^Jl "the

thus,

"the Arabians;"
nouns

Jw/n "the Persians."

It is

to express collectively a
& S
/O-P s

whole species ; as in the following

9
s^< "
The dromedary is preferable
&**&

-*

example

J^s)

'

j+

also before singular

to the camel."

The

a,

article is

sometimes employed, as in German and French,

instead of an affixed possessive pronoun,

mistaken
trouble

"
;

thus,

the possessor cannot be

thine absence thou hast troubled

s s
-'OljJ
o
flsS^^s

By

my reason has

when

departed," Jlj

J|j-!jJ

f OXO/'

^ JA!

lj

me, and in

my

x^i^O

^G^G/-

L5^J ^r^V*

t^'

The

^here we see JJUll employed for ,J&z

"

article is also used,

!

as

other languages,

in

"the prophet,"

^-Sl
book,"

f)

before

general, in

S
J

Trp^r^,

^8*^X09, for the Kur,an.

German and French

S ""O-O

per antonomasiam,
for

s'-Q*^
1

t-jrlyj

&S

Finally, the arficle is used as in

nouns denoting an ab&tract idea in

SS<^~G

J^aasr

J^ U

in the

Muhaamriad

which instances we employ no

f

as

"by

article in

activity the

English

reward

is

thus,

obtained,

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

208

ul?o used before

not by slotlifuhiess;"
P

regioiiH, etc.

"'Iridt;"

as

it is
OX

"

<us'i

J? X"

wisdom
"

"Syria," or

fl&

j> J?

names of

OX

sciences, arts
S

Ijs

government;" jl

*S|

"

;" LijlsH

Damascus."

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES,
Of

Nominative Case,

the

The nominative

252.

case

often employed at the be-

is

ginning of a Hontcnco in an absolute senso, independently of

For exuuy grammatical eoiislruclum with what follows.
the son ton co

ample.,

hoavonft

J*$\

and upon the

Mm

(is)
G

tho earth;

79

whatever
XO

CC

//

"tho prophet of God

modem

mode

God, his prophet

to

i.e.

of tho nominative absolute

in our

(or, as to

in the heavens and upon

(IB)

^^^ ^^j

rntah

God

4]^ literally,

**

in the

is

thus expressed in Arabic,

"

w>,
9

among you/

belongs whatever

oartli," is

cpt^ll

rjtf.

God,) to

"To God

is

IB called

of construction

among you,"

is

This

the inchoative case

is "by

no means rare

Anglo-Saxon, both English and Scotch, as in

the following couplet from the exquisite ballad of

"Auld

EoWnGray:"
*<

My bwui

it

mid

Bufe tho wlnci

a.

Wo

it

nay,

ambiguity; thus, fi& *

"
bomtiful ;

^\^ ^\

is

I look'd for

Jamie back
it wan a wrack,"
;

fillip

mentioned (158, a) that tho vorb "to bo/'

in Iho prosont tcimo eieopt

verb

fr

blow high* and tho

eatirely omittod,

tiomteativo

CMC

when

""Mel
**

its

is

is

seldom used

omission might occasion an

learned;"
1

thoa (art noblo)/

J^

Here we

and both tho subject and

in Uio order dcscribod, | 250*

4)1

"God

(is)

see that the

attribute put in the

In

mmj

instances

209

SYNTAX OP SUBSTANTIVES.

make

it is

optional to

thus

we may say^Sl
"

the subject precede the attribute or vice versa ;

or

<dil

Muhammad

or jJLir* lllj

When

that the

by the

stricted

17

which we may

God

very great;" L*J

(is)

&*?*

our prophet."

Genitive Case.

in Arabic two substantives are so combined

which

first,

(is)

the

Of
253.

"
<d!1^-^

is

indefinite in its signification, is re-

second,' such a construction

is

called

&&\.
^

The

translate "state of regimen*"

first

word

*""*

is

termed ^J>\^\ "the regent;" and the second, which

'
p

always put in the genitive case,

7

governed;'

as

*.

alii

is called

"the wisdom

<_JuuJ1 or

^\

of Grod;"

is

' ?*"

the

^^^ cl?l^

The governing word has very fre~a ?stss

an adjective; as
^\ '^ "abundance

"the book of Solomon."

s-

quently the
of sleep,"

effect of

"much

i.e.

i.e.

periences,"

noun j

"the

Such

is

totality,"

uniformly the

which answers

words "every" or "all," according as the word

our

"*

^
is

governed

J^

(jwUSl

"length of ex-

J^t

c-^lasSl

"long experience."

construction of the
to

sleep;"

"

singular or plural; thus,

all

$^L J

"everything;"

men."

Like 3^ are also construed the interrogative pronoun ^T and its

"
" "
"
feminine <L1 denoting
what ?
which ?
(jwUi ^} "what or which
a.

men?"

5U*1

>1

"what woman?"

similar *ule applies to the

\

gation

"

for example,

<Lc

iX

* s

s's

a
for

wordjlc signifying

j^lir^i

difference,"

<,??<.'

s^s'tt
increate;"

fy^

what reason?"

"

s^
Juiw
*

the Wazlrs and Kadis and others besides them came."

hence "ne**~*

SYNTAX

HlO
state of

Tlio

1).

01?

regimen frequently expresses superiority or

"

cellence in a superlative sense

When

tilings/

as

'

i-ij**

IcL

the best of created

an adjective the

is

latter is

by the word governed;

its signification
5

instead of

"possessed of readiness at calculation;"

0*0

c^UU
x
xxi'zL

as

^-^
^

ex-

quick at calculation/

'

TJ3

the governing word

sometimes restricted in
"

c-^lU

8UBSTAMIVES.

t^UUH
jj^i
x

"

violent in

chastising," instead of c.^1%

Of

254

We

stated

Accusative Case.

the

194) that every noun In Arabic

may

bo converted Into an adverb by being put in the accusative

Tlio accusative case

ease*

in this

is

language

frequently

used adverbially in instances whore the Latin would employ tiio aTblttiivo, or tlio accusative with a preposition;
"
^ perished of hunger/ mortnm est
thus, l^jpf*

^^

oJU
5

/
ticiple

Ccljft

\yy*

do yo fast during certain specified

An

per cerium diemm spalium.

tho

with

accuBative

adjective or par-

termination

frequently

cor-

responds with the Latin gerund in do\ as \^\j *U>- "he

a
^ ea^s standing,"
came ridlng " vcnit eguitmdo ; l&jVj

^^

<a>

x yc^o

^9

\^^ cjLH l^al

sative) IB

enter the gato in adoration*"

The

accu-

sometimes equivalent to the Latin gerund in dum ;

a
for (the sake of) instruction," ad
1 slnick

as C? jtf iSjlJ
ermliendimi*

Mm

Finally, tho accusative,,

pur

et simple^ expresses

guo^ "by

reason of,"

"with, respect to," or "as to;" thus, \L^ jU^J,

c^i "Isaac

in Arabic tho sense of the Latin

wif.li

Tftsnoet to

Ms

mind, or

"
cliSDOsitioB,"

i.e.

he

SYNTAX OE SUBSTANTIVES.

power;"

The

Sj^

*j\??^

"God

^\

"and

^9

more intense (than

stones, or

a.

Lk

#yj? *xAl^

yw

jji

well disposed;'

211
is

great

'

sometimes put before the sub-

is

9?<J$

to)

these (hearts) are like

stones), as to hardness.

predicate in the accusative

(as

4 s o ?

^Gi o

O-GJ,^

42; <d\ Uksr* ^j!1J J&iHj [He it is

who hath brought forth] "the palm-tree and the corn-crop of which

ject; thus in the Kur,an, vi.

there
5-

a variety of food

is

9? $

--

<~s

d\ ^^\

t^jiUs^
in xxi. 3

"

99&

* ' o

<d^l

Ulxs^

the food (resulting) from

J^j <^

where

;"

u^i

they

may

turn

being taken up with delight;" where

&&

N.B.

"+&J&J.

which

is

equivalent to

So

various."

it

unto sport, their hearts

^^

is

%*$

equivalent to

In connection with quotations from the Kur,an,

Eoman numerals

as above, the

is

listen not to the

admonitio^
f*j [They

"

of their Lord except that]

S>

indicate the surat or chapter, and the

Arabian figures, the ayat or verse,

The present participle put in the accusative has sometimes the

effect of what in Latin is called the subjunctive mood, which in
b.

Arabic

is

expressed

"although," "even
&

./

UU-

"

-"

CS^o

^1

by the

preterite preceded

by the conjunction

if," as in the following verse from the

s s ^cO
f
&/";>?ss
oS<--

-Ui3

Jua UU-

^ J^iL

jU!l

Jfamasa:

"verily, I will

wash away dishonour from me, even if the decree of God should
draw upon me whatever it may draw;" where \^[^ (when it first
s

occurs)
s

o^

iL*^~

ji

<s*

is
.#

equivalent to c r
s

U^Js

s s

^U

&
U5l

"""

C^V

J^
9s

y$

<*s

^0^

So in the following sentence

^s

^|yb

coveteth anything, his avarice leadeth

s s

JU

him on

&<*

L&
to

it,

s-s

t^yb

o ^

whatever

"whoso
it

may

be, foul or fair."

c.

In Arabic the accusative

is

very frequently employed where we

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

212

should use the nominative, as in the following verses" from the

Kur,an ?

ii.

^- U^

842: ^^Jb^M

uJjyc^b gL* c^UUaAilj "and

(t

to the divorced (wives is due) a reasonable provision (according to

the husband's means)

So

see IA>- in the accusative.

<dS|

^#

M^

<JUbJl

^y

incumbent on the pious

this is

^l^w*

should bo more (brothers or

also ia iv. 15,

*3 uJ33

we have

^^1

nee <dM

the following

^ "and

lyl^

if

there

than these (two) they shall be

sisters)

the third part (of the estate)

(equal) sharers in

from God;" where we

where we

;"

^ ^/

this is

used for <dH

an ordinance

in Apposition.

255*

way
in

case,

Wlicn OHO

Biibstantivo IB subjoined to

of description or designation, the two arc said to be

apposition," and

must agree in gender, number, and

as in tlio ]Cur,axi, xiv. 19

oocxi

xxiv.

35

ijajj

lighted with the

rule holds

oil

when

^C

S^c^

is)

a
oJjJ

it

L/^^

and
So

poison."

(the lamp)

is

The same

of a blc$8C3d tree, the olivet

the second substantive defines the manner,

x

measure, or quantity, of the

ate half the cake/

The same

>C

there shall be drinking of water (which

in

another by

first:

"

literally,

thus,

^^o

^Lu ^Ju&}\

"I

??
1 ate the cake, the half of it

rule also applies to certain words added

^^

ciJ^\

by way

??

as Ji5
eorroboration
confirmation^ or
(Suf/), Buch
a
"the eye" or "ossenoo,"
"the souP or self, ?? and

of

haying subjoined

to

them the

to the first substantive.

affixed pronoun, appropriate

They thus become equivalent

Latin ipW) ipm^ and if sum.

to the

They agree in gender, number,

SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES.

md

213

case with the leading substantives, the forms used for

and plural being jjuf and ^^t, as may be seen in

both dual

]he following

examples: il*j juj *!> "Zaid himself came;"

i'

fC-r

rr

i/

Zainab herself came;" \^Ju\

\^ju

and

put in apposition after the affixed pronouns

"I saw

\J

5.

which may

thyself,"

'*"

the

^e may

also

"

'

ci^li-

s-^J

$j "I saw

J**}\

The words Jj

o princes themselves."

c'^V'T

11

I saw Zaid himself ;"

l^

also

for example,

be expressed

'

or

In a manner simHar to tie foregoing are used the words J and

"
"
L**i>denoting "totality," or
uniyersality/' as also Z^Lc
people
^" ^
*
'
^,

'

?$*
as <d

n general;"

<-

t--

whole army came,"

^ttte

(jV?' *^r

S>S

<">*?
'

the

came, the whole of

army

O^<5^

,ribe

came
Xt*"10

w^

;"

t,

'the whole

army came,"
^

the words

l$l

^^ "
cps l>-

saw the multitude,

all

SS

both Zainab and

women;" <x*U

of them
* CXO-<J

JM?

I passed

or

U^

To

<^V,J;

"I saw

t)th 'Amru and

uSij ^J "I g as^ e u^to ssMm as wives

Fatima," When the words K and UK precede the
<X::

<u^Uj

'-^IJ "I saw fcth thy

by both thy

the

in-

brothers;'

clC^Xl

IsiG

thus,
<->]/*

sisters."

99
5.

z\&~

S(j

mbstantives which they qualify they become indeclinable;

M ^

;"

"both," are employed;

U>K $/&} $j *l>- " both Zaid and

lal^

Amra came;" C^J^ JXcJ ^Xc

Ue^
x

the

literally,

the whole

In order to express duality in Buck

fern,

^,

all

-^^ '

passed by

in the following examples

Umar;"

x-0>0

aiLJil

xx

cuJX "I

is

"

j^ *LJ b
stances

O'Sr'

*$ c^Jj

+$
a

x-C/^0^0

so

it ;"

word 3^ thus

tised in apposition, the

words

x-

-*

^s>\

fern.

SYNTAX OF THE OTMEBALS.

214

c"> together with their plurals

&?

?<* -"VC-iO

<S35U!

The word

^ras

^Jisf-1

be sub-

applied

s-

'*

'^f^r\ * $i

thus,

may

*^u>-

number, and case with the leading word

s ss

joined, agreeing in gender,

^

fern,

^y^>~\

*xs*"*

and

the angels did worship."

all

not used in the dual, either masculine

is

or feminine.
f

The word

or

x*

**"

--*>- 1

applied as above

j2l,

tr^sfU

*Ud,

and

jiUs^;

f;

fern,

and

and

<g\,

whose

their plurals

and

u, ju^ab,

are all used at the

same

femiriiQ.es are

masc.

serrod in the following example

xj2

9 xi?

The

last throe

in combination; except

J^iidijf,

and

j^*c>-|

in the order ob-

x o^

^^ t^W

it

is

"<*
^

"~

^f

impossible to translate

words are Yery rarely used either singly or

when preceded by j and

SYNTAX OF THE
Of

ihe

256. "Wo hare soon

NTT ME HALS,

Cardinal Numbers*

69) that

tlio

8 to 10 inclusive haTO this anomaly^

to a masculine

and

^\ ^*&\ <g\ ^*s*-\

the whole of the array came;" which

verbatim.

respectively, *Uej,

^^1,

time in addition to
"

by one

Sometimes these three words

s.

be accompanied

of the following words, which are of the same signification,

all

viz;,:

may

cardinal
tliat

numborw from

when

tlioy refer

noim they assume the feminiao tcnnination

whereas the feminine nouns require the same numerals

6V xx

"

throe sons;"
be of the masculine form; thus, <3i5 ^^4
"
As adjocfcivos they are placed
fiye daughters."
tijlw
after the noun to which they belong, and agree with "the

to

J^

same in gender and

case.

At the same time they may be

used as substantive^ and prefixed to their nouns which they

?

215

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

9^

^f

then govern in the genitive case

$&\

<&*.

As

"five months."

thus,

^\

<EL "six days;"

noun thus

a general rule the

governed by the numerals 3 to 10 must be a broken plural.

a.

The number

j^-T and

o^VT

feminine.

The

object

we shewed,

one, as

numbered

is

form of each

expressed

is

used as a substantive when the

came unto me;" k/***\

uz~3\

"there was no one

S w*"^

may

also

govern a genitive case;

\^>\ "one

men;" *LJ^
The forms

j^J

tives; thus,

of the

and Slis^ are

3^\J

"

not expressed; as a>-1

LS^^" ^*

f^

thus,

Jls^JM

women;"

They

a*J "one

of the

U U^

gender with the nouns which they represent;

each one of these

(or bays);"

"one

'

^
^

*&&

^.uM Sx&b

degree."

agreeing in

still

j^tj J^

x*t*\j

&

cities."

of them."

^i^-V^ i>-ji

They may, however, be employed by themselves,

"

"one

and follow their substan-

adjectives,

one object;"

no one (masc -)
(fern.)."
S

IfcJ^Lt

*j

"each one of these gulphs

the words

by

and by t^^j, and i^.\j for the

for the masculine,

first

is

69,

are also used in the sense of

They

O*0

"one"

or

"the one "in contrast with "the other;" thus

"the one-half;" ^y^T

U^\
'

"the other

and used adverbially, they imply

thus,

^^ Ij^J \jV

sellors,

b.

^VJJ^I

ft

When

half."

distribution

iX^-ljSl

or
^P

-Ox-

uJ^zJl

repeated

individuality

^ p "then, with regard

to the coun-

they came one by one."

The number "two,"

is sufficiently

represented

terminations of the objects numbered;

^1^5
^
o

"two

degrees."

thus,

by the mere dual

^J-j "two o men;"

Sometimes the numeral "two/

^131,, fern.

as adjectives after nouns in the dual.

^IS], or ^l^j are employed
"
two" appears to be redundant but
In such instances the numeral

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

216

perliaps

adds more emphasis io the expression;

it

0~0

j^

e^fjy ^ur^
where the numeral

257.

"

^ \& o^
^\

is

for

example

^- e create <l a pair of each

species/'

apparently superfluous.

The numerals 11

to

99,

"both,

govern the

inclusive,

substantive to which they refer in the accusative

singular
as

C^ y

lUt "eleven stars;"

nine sheep."

uj*^i>

The numerals 100 and

their multiples, govern the

nouns denoting the objects num*"%

'

/>

LU

J^

^U

o>

a thousand dinars;"

"ninety-

1,000, together with

"bored, in the genitive singular; thns,

*
9 r*
%
"
3?
three
hundred
^JJ
men;
J^-j
X"
^
*

^u^

'*

men;

""

?J

a hundred

so

j&o
"X

cjili

"*

uJSljA^ j^|

eleven thousand

Numerals made up of decades and units, when

they exceed 20, place the units first and then the tens;
dinars."

thus,

Ctlfi

and-oiglity

years);
If a

dinars."

AJHJ

j^USj

a
eighty-three years" (literally, three-

\j&$

number

&$*)

&W

"

two-and-twcnty

composed of several classes, the

noun expressive of the objects numbered is put after the
total number, and is governed by the concluding numeral,
is

according to the rales already stated; thus, for example,

s #fxx A xOx
*
$>*ss
% ft*
s
c
x ox
i -*o x o^/>
yso
i^ ^yu^j J^jl) ^l^***^ uJ^T -315 ^U^aSI ^j.-jj ^r?; ^^ <C bO"

+rs

tween the Hljra and the Beluge (there elapsed) 3,974 years."
In instances of this kind, however, the substantive may be
repeated after each class of the numerals; as follows,

viz.,

yUJj ^Thc revenue of Gharblya (a province of

Egypt,)

is

reckoned at 2,144,080 military dinars."

OF THE CABIOT AL KXJMBERS.

2 IT

In order to express any large number, consisting of millions

a.

(or upwards), together with hundreds, decades,

and units of thousands,

SO^

it is

usual to repeat the worduJl^ after each class of the numerals

VX~

^Lj
literally,

thus,

u^

j "the

amount of

it

(is) this,

9,584,264 dinars/'

"nine hundred thousand of thousands, and

five

hundred of

thousands, and four-and-eighty thousand, and two hundred, and fourand-sixty dinars."
b.

In expressing a number of thousands, ranging from three to

ten, both inclusive, t*J&\ is

the objects

numbered follow the same in

Jj^J uJST

from 11

and the

to

used in the genitive plural uJST; and

99 (both inclusive) u-aH

dinars."

or

uliil

^ Jig

When

the

20,000

number

any multiple thereof

thus,

the thousands range

used in the accusative singular,

numbered in the genitive

objects

JtJ

is

genitive singular

When

"three thousand men."

33

"
thus,

th

Ibs. ;"

singular, as just stated)

^\

^%

"

*fa 1^]

11,000

of the thousands consists of a hundred

uJil is used in the genitive singular,

and the
f.

? ss

objects

"

numbered in the same

thus,jujj cj^ <LU 4*Jo

300,000 dinars.

258.

Not only the

inclusive (

objects
s

cardinal

numbers from three

in apposition to the nouns denoting the

numbered, as
s

may be
s

seen in the following example

.,-',."

and he drew the net to the land

fishes,

to ten,

256), but also those of a higher denomination

may be employed

"

case, as above;

lo ? it

one hundred and three-and-fifty."

was

full of large

SYNTAX OP THE NUMEXLLL8,

218

When

259.

number out

a numeral

is

denote a certain

to

employed

of a collection, or class, or whole genus,

it

is

usual to express the relation between the numeral and the

class "by

for

means

example

Jail

^f*

kj&jiT

"

S!L

of the preposition
"

^ &Z3

"from"

or

"out

of;'

nine (men) out of the family

93
;

"three birds from among the

further to be observed that the numeral

three birds"

i.e.

genus bird," It is
in such instances, agrees in gender with the objects num.?/'"
XXO^c,

bored; thus, in the expression

the numeral
so

culino;

is masculine
*XO*0 ^
9 '*

kJi

dl$

^1

<3ilS

"three sheep;"

because 11& as a genus,

is

'

three

ducks;"

where

mas-

LL?HS

is

~s

feminine, because

the gender

is

&

is

added immediately

an epithet indicating

If

feminine.

after the numeral, the latter

XVC.-0

agrees in gender with such epithet

"

*xt-O ^

throe females of the genus sheep ;" kll

"S.

A&\

thus,

,S

^\j\ CD^J

?? j'xx^

^ j/j

Uj

"three

males from among the ducks,"

a.

Numerals used abstractedly, as in the science of

U5

always put "la the masculine form

half of six*"

When

thus,

ff

<*>

uJ*oJ

<&**?

-Sv^x
<5515

arithmetic, are

"

three

is

the

"nouns of different sexes are included tinder one

and the satno numeral, the

immediately following

it,

latter agrees in

gender with the noun

provided the numeral denotes a number

?^% 9s s s
^^
iJU) ^J
as
$U1
both
to
from
nix
inclusive;
ton,
% $e\
extending
/-

&i

to

me

(belong) eight

lavs and

[eight] female servants/*

If

we

hero reverse the objects numbarod, the expression will be as follows

x
***
/
"
to mo (belong) eight handmaids and {eight]
Ouft\
^
^J

-*

**

iW ^UJ

slaves/*

If the objects

unmoral must bo added

numbered be under
to

six,

then the appropriate

each of the two species*

OF THE CARDINAL NUMBEBS.

When

b.

compound numerals above

the

219

ten

apply

to

rational

beings, they always take the masculine form, as in the following

PS X X 4- Cx XX X
O
XX O X
"
to me belong fifteen male
examples: Jjjl>-j 1jujjkc. <Lu^>~ t/^^
^
O
x x xxO x
& x x s*/ x
"
to
slaves and [fifteen] female slaves ;"
<Lu^
L#J^5
Ju^j
y**
,-

^jV

me

female and [fifteen] male slaves."

fifteen

belong

If the numerals

apply to irrational beings they take the gender of the nearest sub&' 's

stantive

thus,

&Uj

**

sion (chez moi,) fifteen

tf*X

[fifteen]

-&S

"

<L^^- ^5xxc

^.^LC

there are in

male camels and

[fifteen]

X XX OX

L*^ ^b ^L&

transposition,

and

XX

xx x xx

x x

L*s>-

he-camels.

If,

a qualifying word such as

"
^

^5^5^

(juu^i.

k ave

Xx

OX

X-'O

^U

<SUj J^.^-

XJ&.A

^j U,

X O X

etc.,

"

u^>. L.?^

between males and females," that

"
is,

and the same construction holds, as

we

expression

singular

interposes immediately after

;

thus for example

I possess fifteen camels,

what

partly male and partly female;

to the

numerals

3'

if in this last

So cpCCU-

singular.

is

feminine in the

"three baths,"

for the singular

<8ib

"

a year/'

masculine; and this rule holds

the objects numbered

example

she-camels

transpose the last two words and read

"seven years;" because

is

by

The numerals agree in gender with that of the

number of the objects numbered thus, ^~> jll^

260.

*Ud

fifteen

or,

however, in the case of irrational objects

the numerals, the latter are of the feminine form

X XX

my posses-

she-camels ;"

creatures) that
n

feminine.

^j

j-Tjt

rv

is

suppressed;

^^ ^

wait on four
I

"
Xf^>

as

(feet)," Jjjfy
^

^^ ^^y

the joame of
the following

and among them (&re

S'.i^^'ffC.xtf ?$%& 1^4^

So also t-jUsf

when

^JU^

"a

foot,"
4^^ x Ox

^y^

being
xf

t/^ ^;
5

^1

"Verily, I beheld seven f$t kine which Sevan lean (one$)

?

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS.

220
5

where

devoured/

j^

is

??
feminine, the word "kino
being

understood.

a.

When

such as

numbered are of a vague or general

the objects

may

apply

to either sex, the

grammatical gender of such

according to the
x"

the words J^s^*

and J^c denote

"a

person" or "individual," the

hence they say

Psss

V,xv

For example,

objects.

<

former being masculine and the latter feminine

POX

"

asff&\ <SAj

&

three persons/' where

JjJU is

usod in the masculine form

P

whether the

objects

"throe persons" or
males,

nature,

numeral agrees with the same

l>e

"

male or female,

lu like manner

CI

O^

individuals," whether applicable to females or

num-

as the foregoing serving to indicate the real sex of the objects

agree in gender with the word or words

bered, the unmoral will

p

"and

bf s

thus,^^

had

**

P $

^Ucl^

^^^

used with

Ox

s ss

^\ ^ ^ \J^ (^
<&$,

whom

for a wliicld against those

ss

ijii

1 foared

*.

two (young)
oxx

Here we

maidens and a (marriageable) woman/*

is

ss

djilo

however, another noun or epithet be added to such phrases

ff,

annexed;

^\

see that

c^U

fern.

^y^

inasc. because the latter

word

is qualified

by the

to females.
andJUt* each of which is applicable only
Sometimes, however, fegard is had more to the signification of the
thus the
objects immbnrod than to their strict grammatical gender;

epithets ^C^lS'

word JJaJ "soul," is feminine; but when applied to persons of the

male sex the numeral agrees with it in the masculine gender; thus,
/{

X"

u&\
^ij
b.

<'-

*>S

J3HS

"iliroe souls" (meaning males), because in this instance

has the same signification as Jj>"j

If the

name

of the objects

numbered bo suppressed and

its'place

the numeral agrees

supplied by an epithet descriptive of itg quality,
in irendor with 4hc noun understood; thus in the Kur,an, vi. 160:

OE THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.

_
<di

<LwJv sU-

"he who

221

hath done a good (deed)

shall receive (as his reward) ten (times) the equivalent thereof."

the numeral
the latter

^Lc

is

feminine, although

mere

considered as a

is

J\L1

is

Here

masculine; because

epithet of cblilrL (plural of

a^&-)

understood.

The

261.

cardinal

numbers may be

according to the rules

numeral

is

j&LM Jjuw

laid

restricted

251.

down,

used substantively in an abstract sense

M\ /'the (number) three is half of the

When the name of the objects numbered

six."

2.

stood,

having been previously expressed,

as

known;

by the article
1. "When the

yb ^j*$\

returned with joy."

"and

^frj*

3.

When

thus,

(number)
under-

is

and hence well

the seventy (disciples)

the numeral

is

employed in

apposition as an adjective after a definite noun ; for example

*
s M'
S O ^^C ?
"
<w*js)
the flve men."
4. When the numerals from
J^r)\
:

3 to 10 (both inclusive) precede the objects numbered in a

state of regimen, in

which case the

,,

~&

article is generally pre?<""'

fixed only to the latter; as JU^JI &W>

"the

of

trio

men,"

Occasionally, however,

takes the article as well as the

35

as

?^

^.*+o

a^*Ul

or

the numeral

of the objects

numbered

s-

aiXll\
jwlfii

name

men"

the three

"the seven fundamental precepts of

the law."

a.

name

When

the numerals frora 11 to 19 (both inclusive) precede the

of the objects numbered, and as

same

we already remarked,

in the accusative singular, the article

# so
fixed to the first member only or to both; thus,

govern the

"may
s

257,

be pre-

XEC-'

Ufc^^&x j^DH

or

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS,,

222
"$

"

'the eleven

"

i\A*H

(wJUl
*

when

elusive),

the article

dirhams;" also

5.

and

^otS^o ^xc33

With regard

such multiple be combined

if

x*

"

thus,

1u

<Lsr

f O

*&^\ L^T

to numerals consisting of a

-*O

x-

it is

so

optional to prefix

name

of the objects

P**"***"

OX

$15 "the three thousand dirhams;" so *&j&

X

last,

so also,

Of

word immediately

the

J?

nineteenth they agree in

tlie

all

C5tO*0

is

In such

employed,

following.

and up to the
gender, ntimbor, and case with the
adjectives,

substantives to which, they relate.

twentieth," and

Ox

Ordinal Numbers.

The OrdinalB arc mere

by

OX

xX

USUJ1

uJS! L^^l $&&

jL>o
V

where the demonstrative pronoun

the article is prefixed to the

are expressed

<*J&\

thousand of thousands) of dinars,"

this million (literally,

tlio

takes

a3UvK "the three hundred dinars;"

example: jbjjJ!
*

for

examples as the

it

hundred or a thousand,

xx

"the two hundred thousand dirhams;"

262,

in-

the twenty sheep;"

"

99 (both

the seventy-seven camels."

or

<f

^/k*H

the article either to the entire numeral, or to the

X C w *o

to

ss O Ox

luiSI

with units they

OX

together with their multiples and accessories,

numbered;

.c

the numeral coasists of a multiple of tea only,

^ X 0>

ss o s

&U

From 20

the twelve she-camels."

both take the article;

& s x

#s '

We

stated,

73, that

multiples of ten above that number,

cardinals, so that they are considered

The
gender, as tliey are indeclinable.
ordinals may, or may not, be restricted by the article; as
o*^
*
jptflaso-o

to bo of the

"(&

When,

common

"the

first

year;" J^l

"tho

first

climate."

j^iS!

as in this last pkraso, they take tho article, they aro

223

OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS,

connected with

sequel of the sentence, not in a state of

tlie

by means

regimen, but

U
3

of the preposition

or

^3

A1 Hakim bi-Amr-Illahi was born on the

month

night of Thursday, the three-and-twentieth of the

?

Babi n-l-awwal

by the

at the ninth hour."

When not

accompanied

the ordinals are usually put in a state of

article,

regimen with a noun or pronoun following thus

X
~0 Ox O
0;5OXG- XX 0-0
X XxX OX X
OX

for

W UU,^

thus,

^-X-fa

5J

^.U

was hailed Caliph

m\

tf.

#.j&\

&\A\

example

OXX X-

^ fa "He

the twentymid-day on xWednesday,

O
x-O x
? ps

after

x-

5 J&U1U ^j J <mA- ^Jj^

eighth of the month of Eamadan ;" xx^
xx TTx
x
x
"
On the twenty-third (day) of it, (YIZ., month), proclamation
,

**

""x-

was made in Cairo."

a.

An

ordinal

number, from the second

found

clusive) is often

a state of regitnen with

in.

X 0-O

its

correspondirig

OX

^\ ^U c^ol

cardinal; thus,

to the tenth (both in-

"then

art a

second of the two/' that

"

"

j^

so
thou art one of the two ;
l^h^
"
one of the ten/'
tenth of the ten," i.e.

is,

or

(fern.)

j& S^U

"With regard to the

"

com-

pound numerals from 11

to

19 (both inclusive), the same xule holds,

with this difference, that

it is

optional either to use the two component

to suppress the second of

parts of the ordinal, or

them ;

in which case

the remaining part becomes declinable, agreeing in gender with the

noun

which reference

to

or (fern.)

is

made;

xxOx

xC-0

LA^ j^3\ ^A^

j\5

We may

also say (omitting

x o

(fern,)

xx

ilL& iJ^^ 4^^

thus,

"
(^\ "thou

the decades),

art

j&&

one of the twelve."

^\
""

^IS c^>l

or

S^^*

Sometinaes the mere ordinal, inde-

22 J

SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS,

clinable, bears a similar cons traction to the preceding; as

"

""

lie is

a thirteenth/'

There

/>.

regimen, not with

latter

mode

another

is

own

its

of employing the ordinal in a state of

cardinal, but with the one less than the

^\

thus,

by unity;

yL&LLJlS 1&

one of the thirteen."

i.e.

d-JU y*

''he (forms) a third to two."

This rule holds with regard to the ordinals from the third to the
ninth (both inclusive); which in fact are viewed by
grammarians
as the present participles of the active verbs <JLJj

"ho made

(out of two) ;" ^.Sj

as

may

thus,

hence they

nouns of agency govern the genitive as in the example

ISU

^LjVj

y&

"ho makes

the

compound

may

govern the accusative;

three into four/' literally,

three;" so in the feminine, U15 <bu^

When

he made three

four (out of three)/' etc.

or as active participles they

above;

"

\IQ

"she makes three

from the eleventh

ordinals

{S

fourths

into four."

to the nineteenth

(both inclusive) are thus employed, the units only are declinable,

but not the Ion; thus,

to

XX s

xG-Ox-X-X

y*#

^\ jJLz
*

-*

ciJlj
xxL

x?

"

y&

he adds a thirteenth

*-vO,*C ''X

X*

twelve;" so with the feminine, iyus ^^xJI

<5JJj

"

she," etc.

In a similar manner are employed the numerals composed of units

and decades, only that the decades are usually suppressed;

x

xxv

^jUs.}

ajSj

twentioth."

sf

*j\j yb or

^y^

The multiples

xx-"x

of ten,

sf

j-^lj

j&

it

viz,,

"he makes a

20, 80, etc,,

considered as modifications of quadriliteral verbs

thus,

modification of j^j/^j the participle active of which

ployed as above;

lionce,

wo may

say,

yu

up

is

thus,

four-and-

to 90, are

^Mu$

is

^yux^, em-

Lj ^^-^

"he

tmntiftelh nineteen/' which in honest plain English signifies that he

"
is

one out of twenty/*

203. la expressing

tlio

year of an

a^ra sucli as tho

Alex-

OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.

andrine, the Hijra,

etc.,

225

the Arabs employ the cardinal

num-

bers as

we

state of

regimen with the following numerals, which agree

with

in gender;

The word

do.

"year"

(fern.)

put in a

is

^Vx-

it

with

article as

but in this case SL* does not take the

The numerals,

us.

as

we

are

79,

stated,

arranged in the following order, viz., first the units, then

the tens, etc., all connected by means of the
conjunction J as
in the following example:

"

SUdljj <^-5*4 5 <-^> &**

i^Lij J

u
"
then commenced the year (of the
Hijra) 396 literally

On

and ninety, and three hundred."

six,

the other hand, in

expressing the year of the age or reign of an individual the

ordinal numbers, with the article, are
^

with us

thus,

x-uco

'-('x'

^L*^ ^J^i

--oo

<_U1

employed precisely as
>->

<_<U

^
3~^>^"-o
<L j\J <LJ
1

"in the sixth year of the reign of Al Malik Al Ashraf

Sha'ban."
application

The following example exhibits at one view the

of both the ordinal and the cardinal numbers
:

la the three-and-fortieth year of his reign, and that

(corresponds with) the year three hundred and nine of the

eera of

Alexander. 53

264. In expressing the day of the month, the more recent

Arabian writers, like ourselves, employ the ordinal numbers,

counting regularly from the first to the last day of the montlu

As they reckon by
mences at sunset, as
lieve, till lately,

lunar time, the

is still

civil

the case with the Jews, *and I be-

with the Venetians. The month commences on

f&fte

the evening

day naturally com-

when

the

new moon

(ljk\

or Ji^\) becomes visible

SYNTAX OF THE OTMERALS.

22G

from the tops of minarets,

etc.

lience the earlier

Arabian

writers reckoned, not by the day but by the night.

Thus,

the

first

or

c^^j
<J

(viz.,

month Eajab,

of the

"

on the

JJ*!

that immediately following the

x x

OXX

pressed,

blst.

aLU

In

like

the third day

"

-^

^^

up

The

night)

"

cjW

would be

cfjlaoJl,
"
*"

<f-

rule is to reckon, not tho

but of those that

X X

expressed *_x>y
nights of Eajab

still

**-**>-

^ ^^ JU

word

>?

;'

<3J

The

fifteenth

expressed

to the

is

is

expressed

day

is called

O-H

v^rj

of nights that have elapsed,

XOX

^A*

remaining;

From

seventh, both inclusive, tho pi

expressed,

is

X /"CX

XX O X

5'

is

this rule

remain; hence the "sixteenth day"

the nineteenth, inclusive.

twentieth day

and

in the singular,

is

ui^Jw (<EU)

still

e-?iil
S
S

"

i?x x

number

C x X

then,

After tho fifteenth of the month the

,vT X

ex-

is

55
??
or "middle;
denoting "half
^

the jfifteonth of Eajab"

"^*

expressed

From the eleventh

to the tenth, inclusive.

(3J) i^La ^do-3.

or 1^4-j

day
^

(pi, of JLJ) is tinder-

understood; thus, "tho eleventh clay of Eajab"

"

first

AVOX

word ^lU

fourteenth, both inclusive, the

thus,

JJ
S s

three nights haying elapsed."

xx

if supplie^l

or

is

nights having elapsed

xx

three of the nights of Eajab having elapsed

holds,

-QjJ

u.^
^
&''<?>"

??

this last expression the

which

s> jf

<5J

manner, the second day

"two
x y

is

one night of Eajab

literally,

exr

*"

t^Jcd-

xx x

first

,f

<

haying elapsed,"xx

stood,

expressed

night of Eajab,"

first

x-^ x

thus, L^s^y

In

is

j-j^S, literally,

and

fourteen

this rule holds,

up

to

the twentieth to the twentyXX

JU

is

understood; thus the

OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.

"ten nights of Eajab

X X

is

expressed

^^j

pressed,

c-^j
?

of Eajab

3>

^
^

and

if

<3J
&

remaining."

l~jb

^~L1! "two nights of Eajab

is

may be
x x

^r^rj cr*

CXX X

x x

**

or

s x

*_

^-^

on

e l as*

^ ay

thus ex-

is

on the

last night

elapsed the day follow-

is

^-X.

x-

or finally,
or ^^>-j
^JUJj!
-^
C. x
^

""

"

"

^-

the last night

.

".

w*^ f
^5

still

"one night

^f& -^

the thirtieth

Finally,
4w

expressed c^>^
-^
C
^

Ox

L^P-J

x-

ing

The twenty-eighth

still
^X X

left;" the twenty-ninth

of Eajab remaining."
XX O
XOX

227

'

0^- *^ e

*x

^a

twelye hours

of sunlight) of
Eajab."

The Muhammadan or lunar months

a.

table

but in a period of thirty years,

calate the twelfth

month

instead of twenty-nine.
all

are so arranged as to con-

of thirty and twenty-nine days alternately, as in the following

sist

Mnhammadan

final short

it is

found necessary to inter-

eleven times so as to be reckoned thirty days

The months

countries,

retain their Arabian

names

merely omitting the nUnation, or

[the

vowel.

TABLE OF THE ARABIAN MONTHS.

1.

30 days.

2.

29,

3.

30

4.

29
*

5.

30

6.

29

in

228

SYOTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

add that

such months as consist of

twentynine days, the nights and days remaining in the second half are less
b.

It is needless to

by unity than those we

ICth of Sha'btin
**

is

detailed respecting Eajab,

expressed as follows

thirteen nights of Sha'ban

holds with every other

except the

last,

in

month

still

^ (^Jj

^Ux

remaining

JlSLc

cJb!

and the same rule

;"

that consists only of

twenty-nine days,

we above

which, as

For example, the

stated, is liable to intercalation

eleven times in thirty years.

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

Concord of

AUjwHwM

with their Substantives,

250 and 251,

2G5, "Wo have already slated,

that, as a

general rule, tho substantive always precedes the adjective or

epithet which

"

is

employed

estimable "book."

in

its

L&s

however, the substantive

If,

by being in a

signification

having the

to qualify it; as,

article prefixed or a

Ox

G-*O

"

by

0*0

lima, *Ai!

restricted

affixed, the adjective

&

or epithet will also take tho article

"be

"an

of regimen, or

state

pronoun

<L>ls

^^ LJc

the estimable book of Moses ;" **&\ <~>&M "the great (or
u
The same
book. ??
estimable) book;" i-JoS &$*, his estimable
\

rule holds with regaxd to proper names, which, of course, are

"Abraham
**$\
We may further observe that when the substantive

definite in their

the faithful"
is

own nature;

not restricted In

not take the article

thus,

its signification,
;

thus,

j^.
*

^i\

as above, the epithet does

^^ ^
^

JbtJI

"

I have read in

(somo) ancient book."

266*

Tho

case
adjective, or epithet agrees in

with

its

sub-

229

CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

stantive;

as,

J^UM

*>j&\

J\*n

^p

<$

"I passed by

This agreement,

the prudent, the generous, the excellent."

not a matter of necessity

is

however,

when

Zaid,

the substantive

is

a proper name, consequently definite, and followed Tby several

preceding example for in such instances

the epithets may be put in the nominative singular, the word
"
"
who is," or which is," being understood thus we may
y&
epithets, as in the

say, <J^lS

L^3

J2$\

^ cj^.

we may employ
word L5 J^ "I mean,"

or finally

the epithets in the accusative case, the

or

"I signify" being

If the substantive is inde-

understood..

terminate, as a general rule the nearest epithet agrees with

in case, and the rest

it

either in the nominative or

may be put

in the accusative.

An

267.

adjective agrees in gender

and number with

its

substantive if the latter be in the singular or dual number,

however, the substantive be a broken plural and masculine, or a regular plural

feminine, the qualifying adjective is usually put in the femi-

whether

it

be masculine or feminine.

If,

&

nine* singular, as in the following

"
sons,"

i.e.

?S

^O-O f

-"

a^C*

S^ ty\
^

"many

O-O*

a numerous offspring;" JLL^H J^Jsil "the provi-

sions arriving (in

"Men

examples

abundance);" thus in the Kur,an,

iii

12

are gratified with the love of pleasures ariang from

women, and

children,

and

silver,

In this last sentence the word

J^

ployed in a collective sense, and

an irregular or broken pluraL

and horses of great value."

is

though singular,

is

em-

consequently equivalent to

This mode of construction,

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

230

applicable chiefly to irrational animals, and to

things without life in general ; for when the substantive deis

however,

notes a rational being the adjective agrees with

it
according
substantive plural masculine^ not

to the general rule.

denoting rational beings,

the feminine plural

cbl^U

thus,

ened swords
The

we have

cl^ail XW

have the adjective in

"
??

also

S^lj

destructive lions

JL>lyi tli^L "sharp-

t)^r "mountains firmly fixed

u
?3

cblls?Vj

a.

may

??
days enumerated.

irregular concord of adjectives with their substantives, which

just detailed,

no means

rare*

is

the

more usual

but the regular mode

11

*Mx&

<KSLi "angels fierce and stern."

Ss&

is

by

substantive plural not unfrequently takes the

adjective in the plural, whether regular or broken

Ixvi.

thus, Kur,an,

There

restriction, however, that the regular plural of Adjectives is

is this

employed

only with substantives denoting rational beings,

collective

noun

in the singular nsiially takes the adjective in

xu*o

the plural; thus, Kur,an,

thou us against the unbelieving

^gg "much"

or

tribe*"

from the Kur

many

"many/ though under

an,

iii,

146

j^ ^J;

($\ ^J* ^>j&\ "Aid

In like manner the adjective

employed with a plural substantive,

"*3
t,

141; ^yjjWI

iii.

a singular form,

is

as in the following examples

^t

^3

J^J

^ ffl

of the prophets have been slain, and along with them

myriads

(of

men)?"

from these two

(viz,

and women*"

We

Also

Iv.

Adam and

1:

lUj

often

\^

il^

U^

(s

how

many

^5j "and

Eve) he hath disseminated many men

may, however,

in these expressions consider

Jli

as employed in apposition, | 255 , with, the preceding substantives.

231

CONCORD OP ADJECTIVES, ETC.

268. If a substantive in the dual or plural, that
stantive expressive of

by

is,

a sub-

more individuals than one, be followed

which has reference only to one of the

each adjective must agree in gender and case with

adjectives, each of

individuals,

the noun to which

number;

thus, tte^j

it refers

but

must be in the singular

it

0^ u^^ (J u^ "" ^

a(^ *

wo companions,

a wise, and a foolish ;" Lli^J D^C? *>/ *Ub ^^ tlfj^ u^*? J&
a
a certain ting had three wazirs, (one) liberal, (one) stingy,
^

and

(one)

elliptical

extravagant."

mode

however,

This,

merely an

is

of expression; for instance, the first of the

above sentences,

if

expressed in

fall,

would be

as follows

"

companions,
one of them wise, the other foolish ;"
j\4- *4^^!J

or it

"

^^ ^r^^

i^A^r^ (J

panions, a wise companion^

and a

<1>^

foolish

might read

^d

com-

companion."

269. If the same adjective or attribute refers to two or

more singular nouns, all of which are in the same case and
of the same gender, the attribute will be put in the dual or
plural, according to the number of persons referred to ; and
it

must agree with the

J$\&\

\**j <JLwl(j

$&

latter in

kLJik

gender and case

"I have

ttcus,

acoosted j\imro aad

I have written to Zaid, the two poets-"

Jf,

liowevar, the

substantives be not in the same caae, the predieafe will agree

with them only in gender

and

it is

optionally put either in

XI

the nominative or accusative,

cumstances ; thus

we may say,

dml

or plu#a|, according to cir-

S7OTAX Or NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

232
or

we may

t'
L^

^^U-H
X

J^ L^-,^

AJJ

understood, and tho sense

in the second, the verb

nr

<-M

u-^K.

In the

"

of these last expressions tho pronoun UJ*

first
is

\t

say 3

"they

is,

^\

they both,"

are the two

poets;"

"I mean"

"I

or

signify/' is

understood.

The verbal

270.

^U and

of the measures

adjectives

ill-xl^ are of

common

tho

gender, and some-

times assume the termination

which gives them a more

i
,

intensive signification; hence they apply alike to masculine

Sx

or feminine nouns; thus, IS^U

"a most

^j

wearied man;"

U^

"a

a most wearied woman;" so, liliL ^J>y

a
a very cunning man."
bravo man;" ^^5 ^>y
i'^jl^

very

few of

these adjectives^ however, assume the usual generic terminau

tiou; thus, Jijb "elegant," fern* S&Jb,
credulous,"

^^

fern, ii'li^;

^X^
"

SjiS

^j

"
poor? fom.

morcifuy fom*

lx>J

when

aj^;

-SL^-j

hostile," fern.

Adjectives of the measure

of a passive signification, follow a similar rule;

otherwise, they arc xmder the masculine form,

both genders, thus, Kur,an,

^for she

is

66

ii.

3?

unto

also

IxvL 8

God with

sure Ik&i

**@

iL^J %$ $\

sincere repentance."

when

****'

*5j)

,J\

\j>

(that

the

"turn yourselves

Adjectives of the mea<*

woman

till

of a passive or neuter signification, agree alike

with nouns masculine or feminine

a

to

to the yoke, nor to

cow not accustomed

$

ground

common

had boon)

by a wounded maiden."

If,

"

thus, LgS J*pi^ JL^VJ

53

slain;

-O

fpf*

^^ <^p

I saw

l passed

however, tho substantive be

CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

233

feminine, and not expressed but understood,

an adjective of

the foregoing

measure assumes the feminine termination;

-rr

J.T.

>;?

thus, Kurgan, v. 4

"it

fr

A'

*M!I <d*SJj

' 1*7?"

><$-

4*^^ f3

\?

'"'<-*n

<&~*J

>X"

AJua

"

'-

c^p-

forbidden to you (to eat an animal) that has died of

is

itself,

also blood, also (an animal) that

or (one that) has

been

(partially)

has been gored to death,

devoured by wild beasts;"

s^

which sentence the substantive <u^j "a beast," is evidently

If an adjective of this measure be of an active
understood.

in

signification, it generally agrees alike in the

masculine form

with nouns of either gender; thus, in the Kur,an, LL 41

^c-o ^ ~o
^ ^ j* ^ j. "
IjuM rtfi *&lc l3ufl
we have sent -against them a most de:

In a few instances, however, the feminine

"
added to the adjective thus, i'l^^ liJ^L a
.S/

vastating wind."

termination

is

Sf

L*3 ii^i "a

praiseworthy quality," or

quality deserving

of censure."
i

271. In Arabic the substantive

is

frequently omitted, and

then the adjective, if it refers to a living creature, is used in the

masculine form and in the feminine, if it refers to an inani;

mate object;
"

44^

thus,

*5lp "your

wonders" or

"

evils,"

wonderful things;;

good (works)" or "virtues."

<L\Q&\ "the

as in the Eur,an, ii

59

3^ j

quently,
or

Occasionally a masculine adjec-

tive is applied to a lifeless thing

IsAi

meaning "evil deeds;"

its,

"and he (who) hath done a good deed." Frewhen the substantive is thus omitted, the adjective,

equivalent, remains in a state of concord with the

former; thus, Kur,an,

Iv.

56: <-J^aH

u
cjVj^l5

T#J

ia these

(garden) there will be (damsels) of modest mien;" where

so

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

234

*s

So yL2l

understood.

who

(of one

by the two hands

(arrows)

^\ ^ ^ {JL ^^

he shoots

the most expert

is)

archer of men.;" where the word JP-J is understood as the

&
"
the
hands."
two
complement of {j> by

272.

substantive instead of an adjective

quontly used as an epithet

<

always in the singular, agreeing with

and retaining

its

"two
J^j
X

^Jl

"just men,"

JJj

thus,

asleep,"

just

men;"

The

when

sentence

own

gender; as

J^

where

&&*

&jj* "I

^^

also

the substantive

^ ^L

D4y

P a ^sed by a

l iavo

l^Sj

and

conciliating is better than alms

)j^ ^J^rj
'

SS;

man

(who)

is

So

speech familiar

which

offence accom-

man;

??

"a

Hi 181 wo have

&j cSi^

accused thee of falsehood

a just

"sleeping,"

fi

J^vij ulsjy^ JjS

Again, Kur,fwi,

cJ^ ffi u3Xf ^

"

otherwise indeterminate;

is

4^0!

panied"

substantive in case,

be a verb or clause of a

equivalent to

is

noun remains

so in the plural,

may

epithet

its

not unfre-

jac "justice," for

example,

case the qualifying

in which

just;"

^jjlfi

for

is

another example

"

ufy^

If they have

verily the apostles before thee

have been falsely accused, (men who) came with proofs (of
So in the following expression:
their divine mission)*"

^^
for

jL^J e-^5

atll

firgt

tanplo (that) hath been

built

men*"

a.

In Arabic the relative pronoun

sentences as

tlio

foregoing;

is

never used as with, us in suet

for example,

where the noun,

is

inde-

235

CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

because *yj <^jj

equivalent to

is

example:

Jdl*n cjXfll

"

^^ L/$\ cjO^

nominative of

When

251.

On

the king

the relative

who is just;"

thus,

equivalent to

the qualifying verb or participle has a

own, the same must be accompanied by the

its

when

the other hand,

we then employ

the substantive has the article

for

JQ1

-"

>

f ?t

affixed

(sS

pronoun applicable to the noun qualified ; thus, *ju

ty\ J^r^
&
s ^^/*
s
"
I have passed by a man whose father is asleep" (lit. "is sleeping");
"
e<i
ina
^y s011 to a woman
t^ss? jjpXc {J\
*^j>+\* ic^ ^~^T}]
I

"

whom 'Amru was

with

optionally suppressed

when

evident from the context

^
"

And

last

word \$*\

5, referring to

the meaning of the sentence

is

is

quite

thus

5-

be distance and length of time (that) have

or the wealth (which) they have received." Here the

know not whether

estranged them

This affixed pronoun, however,

in love."

"

it

they have received

"
(for *jj

W)

3^*> because the omission leads

omits the pronoun

to

no ambiguity or

obscurity.

273.

When

an adjective

restricted in its signification

is

means of a substantive that follows

man
etc.

first place,

the adjective (when

retains its nunation,

and the

there

came

to

me

it

restrictive

has not the article)

noun or complement
iO^O ^

put in the nominative case

*

a
"

a youth fair of countenance,

the Arabs have three modes of expressing the same.

learned in the law,"

In the

is

as in the phrases

it,

"

by
"

.S.0X

*^x

as ^Ji\

j^*^ J*rj \J?^

a man the father of whom is handsome ;"

in which expression

we may
"

also

I passed

say xjA

by a man

^>*.

Again,

of ugly visage ;"

NOUNS WITH

CTNTA.X OF

236

where wo might

may

Tbc

follows^
fair of

te~}\

ance ;

also say

Secondly^ the adjective

&-j ^J.

state of

put In a

'ADJECTIVES,

regimen with the complement,

te$\ ^1*. "j4j \J*^~ "there came

me

to

as

man

countenance;^ where we may also say a^J ^i. So

"
1 passed by a man of fair countenj4>? dfj^

^^
?)

where we may

also say *f>

Thirdly, the

<.)***

adiectlvo (in the absence of the article) retains

and the complement

its nunation^

put in the accusative case;

is

thus,

there came to me a man fair as to

t)4y Lsl*"^r
"*
O C
A x X
n or with the article
So in the
countenance ;
<fc>-Jn ^>-

U>4
*

\JH

^-

"
following example

\#>-J

^^^

J>^j
c^pi
"

1 passed "by a

man
In

fair as to

countenance;" or with the

mode

this third

fail to rceogiilHo

article

X O X"*

X X

*&$]

^^>

of expression the classical scholar will not

a well -known Greece construction, which the

"Os
Latin poets have, not unfroq[uontly, imitated; thus,
n "miloH fractus m,eml)ra >? etc.
Of
Iiumeresque d<K> hailirt
course the reader would consider a translation of these phrases
?

m an affront.
274* la the three kind** of censtruction just described, the
adjective

may

or

preceding mil^tuntivc

ment rimy

U!HO

dcfluilo, 1

by

not liuve the

may
l>o

in definite

definite

article,

according as

or indefinite*

or indefinite.

nieaiiB of the article

its

The compleIt is rendered

by an

additional

affixed pronoun;
complement having that article; 8 by an
and 4 by an additional complomont haying an affixed *,proof
It follow* an a cotisccpoaco that we have a variety
different eonstruetioiiH,

examples of which wo here subioin

COISTCOBD

from

OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

237

De

Saey, Tome II. p. 199, differing from that writer

in
our
only
arrangement of the subject, by presenting to the
reader in the first place the correct and classical modes of

expression such as are to be

met with
more esteemed Arabian authors.
1st

Classical constructions

x x

in the writings of the

employed by the best authors.

A man

ma3a

Zaid

of fair countenance.

w^ ose

who

is

father is fair of countenance.

the fair of countenance.

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

238

*1\
X

9 G

^*.^'

XGO

GW3 X

x o x

$.

AO<

^^W-WST

"^

/ x xg-o

Zaid wliose father

sox

is fair

of countenance.

&

^\
X

t>

j,Go

G x

X x'V'O

S"

tw"*'

^JJ
SadConstructions not
theless, are to

T
3t

Jo

of,

but which, never-

Zaid

fair

of countenance,

t*>

M^*>- J^TJ
x

9 o

be approved

be met with*

to-.
*AwJ
J SjJ^^

cJl

to

A man wliose

father is fair of countenance*

X xV*o A Ox

ouj

Zaid whose father

is fair

of countenance,

barely admissible, and not of frequent

occurrence*
XO XGx> A

x x

t|

&^

*cf

"^^ jp_

Gx j>xx

x o x

A man

of fair conntenaBCe,

A man

whose father

vP'x"

x x
1

fif

IIJAWU>.

is

of fair countenance,

239

CONCORD OE ADJECTIVES, ETC.

Constructions to be altogether eschewed.

4th

o x

^-

The

a.

X>

Zaid whose father

an

countenance.

fair of

adjective even

also receive

"

Zaid the

s xc-o 5-ox

,*xu^sr

affixed

when

pronoun

it

has the article prefixed to

as,

of countenance.

is fair

may

it

x^**^ \j (j^\}\ &i$J& \J&&\ !U-J3

the ugly of visage, the strong of head, and the small of it,"

"the small of head."

In

for

"

example
"

&>^1

i.e.

form of construction, the adjective

this

must ohey the general rule respecting the use of the

251

^cl

l^-j

man

fair of

article, see

countenance

;"

Zaid the handsome of countenance."

b.

in the genitive case

it

must

itself

in gender, number, and case

passed

by a man

fair of

saw a woman
to

me

fair of

two

thus, &>-p

countenance ;"

fair

te?'^

;"

&>-^l

teJL-

ing example

of countenance."

l^J

of countenance."
tive^

maybe

^/^
If,

-ii/*

"
l*j*\

c^yjj

\1^>.

c:

^1>^ J^r^

"

^>-j ^^^r

there

This concord of the

adjective with the preceding substantive, equally holds,

restrictive substantive

governs

"
;

countenance

men

it

agree with the preceding substantive

(jt-Ct

came

which

If the adjective has a substantive following,

though the

in the accusative case; as in the fallow-

"

J^r^ ^jf*

P^s^d by a man handsome

however, the complement be put in the nomina-

the adjective then agrees with the preceding substantive in case,

but with the complement in gender and number

1

P 81686 ^ ky a

as for

man whose

example

face is hand-

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

240
some ;" IJ^J
handsome.'

examples

^^

woman whose face is

handsome

;"

hearts are hard

as in the
following

"

&!**>

J^fy
^^ ^jj*

&

L>

"

faces

but woe be unto them whose

i^lSJ Jiy

j^jjls

men whose

passed by

&
i>

c.

passed by a

If the following substantive be a broken

plural, the

are

usually put in the feminine singular

is

adjective

"

^- jpy*b ^jj*

J!
!

Before a substantive masculine in the plural number, the ad-

put in the masculine singular; as in the following

jective is usually
O

example

*"

*^

& Ulg ud^ l>y ^^)j

saw a

man whose

slave-boys

adjective may, however, be put in the plural, either

9 <2s
s**s *9 s
f f.s?
or
broken or regular ; as <uU)x
>
^rj

The

are sick."

^^y

\j*

Concord of the Attribute with the Subject.

When

275,

an adjective

sentence
subject

first

is

24,8, l,\

employed as the

the general rule

and the attribute after

it,

is to

"my

a,

tlms,

father

subject,
article,

as

is

*j*

sick;"

wo have

by an

^IkLiJl
J^tr**

"the Sultan

affixed pronoun^ or

we

is sick;

when

observed in
??

J^ ^}

??
The
"Joseph
may be restricted by the

is

*~*~*ji

just soen ?

place the

the verb "to be,"

in the present tense 5 being entirely omitted, as

158,

attribute of a

by

its

own

sick

nature as being

a proper name; whereas the attribute is not necessarily so

251,
restricted, as is the ease with a mere adjective,

When

it

so happens that the attribute has the article, the

third personal pronouns yd, etc. (equivalent to

"he

is," etc.)

come in between the subject and

an ambiguity; for olJierwise the phrase might be mistaken

attribute in order to avoid

241

CONCO&D OF ADJECTIVES, ETC.

mere concord of an adjective with

for a

$f "God, he

yaT^T^

attribute agrees

^^ ^ ^

thus,

"

substantive ; thus,

The

55
the living, the eternal.

is

in gender

its

and number with the subject;

were true

his parents

believers.'

If

the subiect be a broken plural masculine the attribute may be

??^"-^
~

put in the feminine singular

"

i-W^1

^^

thus, I'gd

Jv

tL>^\

do see."
(their) hearts are blind although (their) eyes

Kur,an, Ixxix. 8:

day (men's) hearts

be) cast down."
a.

When

<*-> U- \&j\*u\ -S&&-\)

shall

be perturbed

"

C^

<

So,

that

OI1

their looks (shall

the attribute precedes the subject (which takes place in

then if the subject be dual

interrogative and negative propositions),
or plural, the attribute is to be placed ia the singular

jL^jT j.l J

"
\

do not go out."

may

do the two

men

enter ?"

"When the subject

be put in the plural

thus,

JU-JJ 1

^U-

as follows

men

the

a collective noun the attribute

?
"
&
all are obedient unto

is

^f&

him."

b.

When

the subject consists of two nouns in a state of regimen,

to agree with the governing
which

the attribute,

ought grammatically

with the noun governed

noun, sometimes agrees in gender

"every living (creature

so

j-/

rf

mittal of crimes is with

avoidance of decorum
S

nine singular
plural as

is

them

thus,

shall) taste of

^ Com-

meritorious, and

a virtue."

among them

the

In this last sentence, the femisJ~"*

word governed
agrees with the

we have just

stated above.

J^\j&

broken

31

212

SYNTAX 01 NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

1

(he

Of

Decrees of Comparison.

211 we enumerated

270* In

more usual measures

tlio

of

verbal adjectives.

The comparative and

superlative degrees

of all such arc, as

we

of the measure

and ^JSJ

for the masculine,

noun

prefixed to a

observed in

81

for the feminine*

in a atato of regimen

lute sen$e ? having the article

may

When

&j!\

Jj^yl

"he

is

*'

she

is

noun, the adjective always

a very excellent

*'

woman
^

a most excellent

man

;"

Tbe

in a state

remains in the singular number and masculine gender

u

$f

or used in an abso-

^)t "before it.

of regimen with an indefinite

These

Jl^v

;"

P^

JsfJ
^*

r^

thus,

3^1

1&

"they are very

Wliou the noun governed by the comparative

great men,"

adjective is definite, that

is,

when

it

has the

article or

an

affixed pronoun, the comparative generally remains in the

measure of

tlio

masculine singular, whatever

may be

^ w^D

the

gender and number of the noun following; as *uJl

o

"aho

most excellent of women;" ^$\*&\

you two are the most truthful of the truthful." So in Kur,an,
u
ii 90: jjw{;J\ ^j*\ ^MsaJ
verily thou wilt find them tie
IB

tlio

fi

most greenly of men,"

ovov, tliat tlio comparative adjective is

tlie

following

noun both

in gender

put in accordance with

and in number;

following examples: *TlJl JLa! ^Jr^sho

woman;"

$\

how-

It not unfrequently occurs,

is

a most excellent

i^i UX "tliey both are the most

'

as in the

excellent
*

(men) of tho tribe."

Wlion the foiaparative, liaving the

article prefixed^

DEG-KEES OF COMPARISON.

is

it

placed absolutely,

243

number with

agrees in gender and

the noun or pronoun to which,

it

refers;

"they two are most upright men;"

^ An

J^Jl IsX

<u^j

u^

^ 3*r "He

become most

is

supreme."

insignificant

Again, ^tSt

most excellent among men."

in this

as

adjective,

regular form ^La*!

and in

like

measure

last

they two
ix.

The

has caused

but the word of

may be

either

of the

may be

j*I,

see

"When the

215.

neither accompanied

is

of the regular

by the

article,

nor in a state of regimen with the

following noun,

always employed in the

and when a comparison

example

JoS

3.

s>

LXL
S'^'BQ

thou;"
is

"

"t-

^fii

<^J

iL^l jV^I

^^

followed

is

sedition is worse than

are

jfSil &*^-\
SS

is

for
equivalent to our "than;"
7

is
Ox-

2*11

than he;'

made, the adjective

is

^ which^
^ ll
j

it

form of the masculine

singular;

"we
5

God

plural masculine of the

example,

e^Ul*.?, or irregular, as

o~o

^JL&I] lb "they are the

manner, the feminine

particle

40

or of the irregular or broken form

j^l*f;

comparative adjective

by the

ll&

who have been unbe-

the word (viz. the power) of those

lievers to

"

lib

u U/u^

50-0

^iciM

So from the Kur,an,

are Tery diminutive (women)."

QiM

thus,

murder;"

more worthy of the kingdom

Ahmad
^

is

more

^1^1

^U

than

trutfcfal

-ng

HJ\ fj^

"

there

nothing more hurtful to the constitution of men. than this

vile pliant."

word

When the comparative

or is accompanied

superlative

degree;

by the

tjius,

adjective governs another

artiole, it

^^$1 U^

then expresses the

$J1

God

is

the

SYNTAX OE NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

244

Gx-O-O

most merciful of the merciful; 57

ji\

35

yj

jjj\

"God

is

most

groat"
278. "When the comparative adjective

is

indefinite complement, as in the expression

l^-j

J^\

must

"be

J^j

Q\ ^

most excellent as a man," the

complement
of tho same gender and number as the noun or
pro-

J^

constitutes the subject of tho

proposition; thus,

Ui

they two arc most excellent as men,"

"When

tho tfubsluntivo governed by the adjective of comparison

followed

by

tho words being u

Jjl

<jwUl

y*>

he

is

put in the accusative

is

tho most excellent of

little

inverted, the proposition

follow the comparative adjective, but

*

of comparison

is

In an interrogative sentence, the order of

man."

t/uoad

same

u complement, the

case; thus, l^-j

men,

Or

yb "lie is

noun which
iir*Uv

followed by an

xr

*"

^<*0

as jJi'\ ciUl
f^\
*

thou more oxcellenty ?1

**tiho prosecuted (lo UK)

is

prefixed to the object

^ "than which

<*~*^a\

&L+

LLJJ^J

the fruit of

tlu%

^ does not

of the

Jj

JiaU

two art
^

\*J-*O

L5L^JbjT;

date tree; nay, what

she presented (wan) hotter than that"

2711 Between tho adjective of comparison and the object

compared u
as 7^c

restrictive or

JL

o%

^1

jjji

complementary word may intervene;

"Zaid

in

more abundant

m wealth than

*Ainru;" d^Ii ^* ^j^ ^jii.1 v.jl thou art inoro agreeable

in njf view than any besides thoo."
In these expressions the
#

aad not simply

Js^t

and J&.\*

\*%

^^

x o*

u?^?
XCi^l and
If the noun which con-

adjectives of comparison arc in reality,

DEGREES OF COMPARISON.
stitutes the subject of

comparison be in the nominative case,

must precede the comparative adjective

it

&U ^1^1

ing example:

whose father

#y*l

as in the follow-

ji^ d^X "I

passed

by a man

handsomer than he;" but on no account

(is)

ought we to say

245

'&*

&y\

c/*, though
^^-\ J^-y
"***'

it is

quite

$.

correct to say, as

we

formerly stated,

man whose

passed by a

*\

be correct to say

man whose

father

sentence, the verb

thus

made

When

more

"

of,

c/J^

I passed

by a

as in this last

When,

the construction will run

"
I passed by a man whose

(or to a greater degree)

than he

is."

the preposition involving the comparative adjective

but preceded by a negative preposition, the

affirmative,

above arrangement will

use

lL*j&\ x^\ (j-li: Jj>~/

father is fair,

is

than he. 57

jji^ ^js* "I

Neither would

55

^^ ji^ ^j^

*sL*

is fairer
is

^^

father is handsome.

it

x\

ox

j^j jj-^

differ

VST*

^^
,<,

'

Jjs^l a^c

man

as in the following example

"*?/"

' <v-

^^^0-1 JU-^ ci-ui;

i"

UT

I have not

whose eye the collyrium is more beautiful

than in that of Zaid;" and if in this last sentence we employ
seen (any)

in

the verb ^1^- instead of the adjective ^>-?,

^,

preposition
c,x

<^

^U

cr^

^
,

we may

for the

substitute the particle els'" like;" as follows:

' p
ox
^ vf^-'
'
Cn
^i^ TJ 11

^s?

^
.

*,

^^s^ Jsr

J^-x

^/^sr; M>-J

^-+11) ^*? literally,

"I have not seen (any) man

in whose eye the

collyttuta

beautiful like the beauty of

in the eye

it

280. Verbal adjectives in the comparative state, even

is

when

derived from transitive verbs, never have the noun which they

put in the accusative case. Such of them as

are derived from verbs expressive of love or of aversion, ar&

directly govern

i"

WVNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES,

combined, with the complomcnt, denoting the

object of the
and to that deHculenoe, by moans of the preposition J
;

noting llm subject, by

"the

tnio

^^

^iJt

rf.

believer

*<J

*O

c"^

of Clod than (any) Iwsulos

cleivecl

fndli

its

Hum

''

*il

lg(

lo

j&

lm

than you."

than
is

willi

more beloved

"
or "to
recognise

m<uns

of

th<^

preposition

more*, ctonvorsant

ifn

ohjoct

with the

any other

by means

(///,

Bearchful) of

Comparative adjoctives derived from

^rbn follow tho construct ioa of their roots

i^

very ulmtinonl in (utiuiw of) the world

IB

(lo follow) the goo*l,

and moat

and very

far r<unov(d

ftirthcr ol>sorv(

d
Si

than

thaii

thus,

and very

from crime,

that in the employment of

may bo somewhat

comparative adj<c(iveH, tho coimtructiou

nio

cnuiloutf of

28 L W<* may

elliptical
1

of

scon in tho
following example:

mon* studious

is

^*>[f

himself-"
*

comparative adjective

know,"

l>y

J^

d<*riv<d from a vorb with

may bo

tlw proposition J; as
/

"I am

coiuicHjfcMl

IB

it

Higiiificatioi^

believer

liirn."

Ul

**-ir^

WliHi

you."

tril

<*omplomcni

'^ J^V

thus,

<^;

^ 1C

from a verb wgniiyuig

combined with

God more

loveth
f

*.

^ L^

J[;

*Jb'

llius,

^ ,2*

thuH.

;
*

"

'

1"

my

Sr

'

V*j\*

(am) of him;"

~)i\
</

m wowmtnilar

<jwJS\

to tho buffalo

"ho

^
^^

where

)J>

uecennity

&

in

more needful
for

^j^lJ

of

^&j^
U

"

jij

aad

than to the luxreo;" whoro

GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS.
*L

is for

extend*

still

"

^Xl5

farther,
*

tj

&**

(J*-

than

its

^ ^^^ *^

The

resemblance."
the

in

as

247

example

^**

may

already given:

"*-

u"^\ ^rj ^^j

(

\Jt

ellipsis

I have not

man

in whose eye the collyrium

appears more
"
beautiful than in the eye of Zaid ;
in which sentence *L* is
"
than the beauty of it (viz., the
ellipticaly used for
seen any

^L ^

We

collyrium) in the eye of Zaid."

or eyen

may even

say here

Government of Nouns,

"When in Arabic one noun governs another

282.

genitive case, the governing word, as

put

first,

and

the

first

place,
;

it

loses its nunation, retaining

thus,

or

c-^j

cl?l^?

governing another word, becomes

u

respectively, as Joj

cl?\^

Zaid's book," etc.

Secondly, if

plural masculine,
as joj l7l^

250

stated,

subject to the following modifications.

is

simple vowels

we

in the

it

drops

Zaid's

"

^l^

merely the

a book,"

book;" <xj (^\^

its final

Zaid's two books," etc.

In

when

c-^, and cpl^

cSlix^,

it

is

in

be a dual, or a regular
syllable

or

Thirdly,

if

Jj

68)

the govern-

ing word be a

diptote (singular or broken plural), it then

becomes a triptote, as we observed,
68, a, with respect* to

the influence of the article.

is

an affixed

some farther

when we come
a.

An

when

worf governed
pronoun, then the govemiag word undergoes
modifications, which we shall notice hereafter
Lastly,

th.e

to treat of the personal pronouns.

adjective, or a participle

need adjectively, when accompanied

-48

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

by a complement,

put in a state of construction similar to the

"
as

is

preceding examples;

J^. ^>J

^LjH

Joj cLjjli "(a man) striking Zaid/

The

be definite

arriving at

flic

BtcKlfant in

arc*

Ka'ba."

indefinite
XG-O

*)

though
"
jJU ^oJ& a

its

complement

gift (or victim)

If the antecedent or
subject

is to

be made

of cottnso lakes the article; thus,

pLaSl iJLjuSl "those

it

definite,

Urns, Kur,an, v. 96

of face;"

fair

striking or striker of Zaid)."

(lit.

employed remains

adjective thus

man

"

^^

prayer;"
t,

hoad of the winner

;"

<k>-jS

^j

"he who smites the

M^lSll
x
"
i-4^*
Muhammad who is fair of

'*r' &,

"*

who

^1^

countonanco."

b.

The
in

prefixed

tlnw, j-^t

is

mO

.J\
(jwU\
x
r

tho uiowi (w)

what

the fmst unbeliever in

IKJ

arc the

l)OKt imtioii

***"

*J *'

XCiJ C/A!]

**

^^

cl^l

283*

him;"
*

^J] ^*y

Wo

forbidden;"

"tlio tiling which pleases

to

xiSS

j>\& J^\

"do not

among mankind f

so likewise,

*"*"
J}

culj J^l

*'

verily, tho first edifice built for

y;t

worship God)

is

that (which

liavo already fttutod that

Bamo

&

u^r^yil ^la J^i ISl "you

(jwU15

that has appeared

mankind (wherein

is

serves to

it

5,

mankind

not unfrequently

a slate of regime?!! to the substantive which

kM

qualify

used adjcctively

or notin

a<Ijcctiv(i

is) at

when two

Mecca,"
substantives

and aro put in a

stato of appoHition.
"When, however, wo moot with, instances
whoro tiioy aro put in a stato of rogimon wo aro to consider
signify tho

tiling tlioy agroo in case,

tho construction aw elliptical

9

(or wallet),"

moans jjj
x
xt,o

so
^

^w-^t
'"O

u
;

thug, j^S oJj

*

^0

Zaid of the sack

(J^\ ^J

"Zaid nicknamod

"tho day of Thursday/

a oJ^"**9

f4^!1

tho

}*

tho day called Thursday;"

is
X-10-M3

,^\

for"
/X ^

X5u

249

GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS.
"the
the

elliptical

called

by

expression for

When

noun

is

generally put

cLJLtf

jJLs

turn unto

God

The words

rule, for

the house

is

by some

as (jLSJuJt ut-4?-

complement which

in the plural, but it

$\

^J\ \jj

and

(fern,)

may,

is

number

in the dual,

less elegantly,

thus from the Kur,an, Ixvi. 4:

"if you both (wives of the prophet)

(penitently), for verily

your hearts have swerved."

IsK "both," form an exception

to

this

they can be prefixed only to nouns and pronouns of the

See hereafter,

dual number.

284.

"

a noun which ought logically to be in the dual

be put in the dual or singular;

UL^J

(or temple)/'

which expression

(the epithet) holy ;"

in a state of construction with a

is

the

the prayer of

^jj& U ^LliM cLw

improperly written in a state of concord

a.

"

hour;" (jwjjuM ci4? "the holy house

first

an

is

prayer/' means ^J^\ teuM si*

first

There

285,

c.

many words used only n

are

regimen, the word governed being either expressed or under? ^

?

It is always

stood.

"

"
possessors

expressed after

"

^L

likeness

>;
;

"pos$es$0r ;"

^
exception.^

There

which the word governed may be omitted;

in which case the governing word takes the
are others after

4?

article

fo;

such a^f

the totality ;

?>

SYNTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

250

luminaries) nioveth in a (peculiar) orbit;'

where Ql

is for

J,j7

"the

U$J>, literally,

totality of these two."

^^u" ^gUi l^ij lILos J*^H u^lJ

Again,

"as to these

ii.

254:

we

apostles,

have distinguished a portion of them above a portion;"

is for *f*wu
So again in xvii 109
where
j^Le.
^1^

^^

O-O

^OrtO

x^

-*U^\

J^\

j?c/"'

<jJJ

y^<3J

by whichever (name) you

U\

voke Him, (God, or the Merciful,)

*

names

excellent

??
;

where

u $

He

verily,

*&
is for

in-

has most

o**

-Si

*J

Words

^U

which

are

indefinite

thus used only in a state of regimen remain

even when their complement

is

definite
*

thus

'
i

>j

"

Ah, many besides thee among women (have been) deluded

(by me), fair ones whom 1 have dismissed with a divorce,"
where the word j
X

noun u/ remains

though accompanied by the

affixed pro-

indefinite,

285, "Words expressive of time or portions of time, such as

^ ^
and

"timof

when employed
state of

follows

the

j^X*

^ "a day;"

in a vague

and

IX

"an

hour,"

indefinite sense are put in a

regimen with a verbal proposition or sentence that

in which ease they reject the nunation and retain
vowels

single

^lir^JEi

thus,

from

the

Kur

an,

at the time

vi 119

uL$

(when) she will arrive at her abode;"

jij

Ji53T2

lit "this (i) the day (on which)

their voracity shall benefit the righteous;"

l|^i

etc.,

"

to

him

(shall be) the

vi,

kingdom

73

(on

GOVERNMENT OF NOUNS.

that)

day (when) the trumpet shall

25 1

sounded.'

Tbe

"When

words of time such as the foregoing refer to a past event

in a state of regimen with a nominal

may be put

they

16

proposition; thus, Kur,an, ad.

when they came forth;"

when

so also

^fi jU

J~?

rQ^

^ "on
"

or*J

tlie

a* *^e

day

**

me

This rule does not apply to

a
words of time employed in a specific sense ; such, as jl^ a
Hajjaj (was) governor*"
Ss x

day/
a.

S x

as the apposite of <LU or

The words

and

*jj, <!#%

JJ

a night/

cj,

and such

etc,

also be

may

like,

employed as indeclinable, in which case they have always a fai^a

may

say jJbJ

\&&

in the phrase

(when) he conversed with ine,"

There are

b.

after

many

,*^^

we may

which the word governed

"
u "after;"
before;"

is

|*j>

also say

indeclinable words

IjJb

lj

whose

(as above),

"

^oW
final

"behind;" Jj$
the right;"

jUj& "to the

viewed as adverbs*

Whim

"on high;"

U1 "before"

"after;"

left/'

'.'^

are)

sufficient*^

is

like,

Such are

"otter;"

j^3 "above;"

*T]

"to

which are generally

''

t"

'

&&
*

)
,-^

J>*y
4i

A/^5

^*I

"*

Sni01$3%$ well wor<to n^ th$ fbregoJtag

Kur,an, xxx. 4: iS>

they are employed

absolufcdy^
^

viewed in the same phra&$

thus,

J ^*

(in presence of);

and such

or^toary j^Iet of syntax; thus,

"

j*

generally suppressed*

"without" (sine); ffi "first;"

we

from the day

vowel

JJ^ "sufficient;"^

J2

the

jj

vowel; thus instead of

for their final

tiiii^p as dedSunbl^ or

JJJ

^j^JT^J "To

3Miay

b@

indeclinablo

God belongs

252

SXOTAX OF NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES.

command

the

(both) before and after (the present time)

tence, according to

c*

either

by the

own nature,

<xw

^r

both/' or "twain/' have this pecu-

(fern.) lsi

word which they govern must be a

by an

article or

affixed

for instance, a proper

dual,

and

restricted

pronoun, or be

name

definite from its

o-o '
s
^a^

thus,

^^J^S

\3|J M-i^jll
""

**

both of these

men and

both did that;"

to the

good and

both of these

*rj

uxlJ

;"

"Verily

are expressed separately,

cannot govern the two together as with us ; thus

"
both Zaid and
are not allowed to say in Arabic, jj/*^ jjjj

the words

liK*

***

'Amru;" but wo must

alter the expression

"Zaid and 'Amrn, both of them/

ig

UK "We

Ui*l

a limit, and both of these (have)

When two nouns

au aspect and a power,"

we

women

'

^ fe-s^J^J,^ J

<

to the evil there is

K and

sen-

"

K and

The words

liarity, that the

some grammarians, we might read

which

;"

set aside

"
Both,

my

by

U&K

and say,

*&j jjj

Sometimes, however,

this

a poetical license, as in the following verse

brother and

my

friend find in

me

a support in

rule

their mis-

fortunes and adversities*'

28C. Tlic governing

word may be followed by more than

one word governed; thus3

what
u

Is

liiddon

and

^J^\

J5l<ll\j

pji

(of what is) manifest;" j*ji

"tho knowerof
\^

L^\^\ Jd^
Sometimes

tho creation of the heavens and of the earth,"

the governing

without

it,

word

is

omitted,

when

as in tho following verso

*

\ys

the sense

**

**&

is

obvious

GOVERNMENT OE NOUNS.

253

"Dost thou consider every man a man? and (every)

(shining)
find, in

"^ y

^Sj J>
of

?^

jJli'*

tfJ^C-O

Jf

/?^M fkSH

Muhammad

word J omitted before ^ I

The

contains an ellipsis of a similar kind

following sentence
X

where we

in the night a fire (of hospitality) ?"

the second line, the

fire

^^

w"

Kalawun

the son of

^^

"when

the Nasiri days

5

arrived/

which sentence,

expressed at full length, would have run as follows

5
<? 1-a
o
4 ^ ?
s
$-?
,
,, J-{f
tf
rf
f u
*^*
c<Un
when
^jij
jc^vs^^u!
^VJ ^^1
(*V^
the Nasiri days arrived, I mean the days of Malik Alnasir
if

^r

, ,',

^^^

Muhammad
a.

The

fire

by De Sacy,

i"

the son of Kalawun,"

alluded to in the last sentence but one is thus explained

viz.

"The

hospitable Arabs were in the habit of lighting

fires by night on elevated spots near their encampments, so that the

wearied wanderer of the desert might know where to seek for shelter

and hospitality."

287.

As a general rule, the two nouns in a state of construction

must not be separated by any intervening word.

may be made, however,

l^TJ dlM J

thus,

the voice,

<* jLUlJ

by God,

in the case of interjectional phrases

Sl&M

of her

^
s

bridle.

7'

verily,
'Qs

Abu

"

own master

^j^
,

3'

$omeifcp&es7 either

by an

the sheep heareth

so in

"

next sentence^
-.i

^;^4;^e
,'***)

one mi^ht

lAsim, of Zaid had beeix ^

poetic licepice, other

An exception

^flstto otit

a^i

with a

a/bu^i of langti^e or

by

word$ beside ^<%*|te,tlie Ibt^oicg are

inserted between the BOUB$

IB:^-^

af
i"

atifi th

*& regimen;

thus,

book was written by

254

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

the hand, one day, of a

they both aro

tlic

Jew;"

l!

U.U

^ cJ^Tf ^J

in war,

brothers,

Mm

of

\'j\

who has no

brother."

SOTAX

OF THE

PKONOUNS.

Personal Pronouns.
288, In a simple sentence the isolated personal
pronouns

83) placed between the subject and the attribute, supply

"
the use of the verb 'Ho bo;" thus,
Stf
God,

fj^jT^^Tji
$O
^
"

Ho

(is)

the Living, the Eternal ;" jU\

those,, they (are)

it (is)

the fuel of the

contentment."

"

place of the verb

noun of the

isolated pronoun,

which

Uiw0

as

111

dfH

last

case, followed

lit.

is

a pro"

1 am.

light of the

affixed
its

by

compensates for the verb

own
a

to

jit

cent,"

to

"opulence,

<1>)\ y& Ul

"1 am the

be;" thus cSla^\ uL%\ uXjl "verily thou

a

^1*1

then expressed by an

is

84) in the accusative

"i.

proposition begins with the particle

verily," etc., the subject

pronoun

even when the subject

to be,"

God;" jj'&Tjy

When the

world,"

yjb y*

C&J\ "as

third personal pronouns

supply the

or second person

first

the Lord thy

The

fire ;"

li

j^

(art) the munifi-

verily as to theo ? thou (art) the munificent;" so

5R

cjC|^ Ul J$\ "vorily ? I

pronoun

is

am

thy lord."

affixed

thus employed in the genitive or accusative case

(governed by a verb or particle)

for the

"When the

of emphasis?

in the aominativ

ease,

by

its

it is

frequently accompanied,

correspondiEg affixed pronoun

which, however, cannot b

so toans-

255

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
*
^ XU

lated in our idiom

me

beholdest me,

'*
\j\

tf

C,

if

thou

(I say) less than thee as to wealth

and

"*

offspring;" ?cJxJJ

uJol* Js\

thus, Sl^

^JJ

^\

^x

^ ULM

Uc^ U

"what hath
s

(I say,) from that?" ^sf

u!

<*

'

prevented
t

'

-0

<x

c.

,-

you two, you two,

ic^l^Sl 1^ ^1
"to whom (belongs) this book? to us, us, (I say);"
a
thou shalt equip him, Mm, (I. say,) and his
iplj y* ^4^
(

attendants;"

^ ^\ ^
M

{J

Ul

woe unto me,

3^j!^

^^, (I say,)

the miserable."

The isolated personal pronouns denoting the nominative case are

seldom used as such, but they are sometimes added to the verb to
a.

render the expression

more emphatic;

thou wilt come, I will come,

thus,

d-^>"

(even)."

I,

IJ1

^\& "if

uLJ!sj~
s

In such instances as these,

however, the pronouns must be of the same person, number, and

a plural verb, however,

gender as the verb

nouns singular for

its subject,

&U^

\xxs>-UL
'

LiLJ>

\j\

we

IxjU-

will

what

There

is

different persons

come,

thus,

and thou, and we

needful for us from him."

is on,e

instance where the verb

person singular, although the subject of

person singular, dual or plural

it

defender of
attacks

(fjfeejbc)

made upon

289,

rights

only

is

employed in the third

be of the

this takes place

begins with the particle Cijl "only;" thus,

tions

have several pro-

^-*

will take

b.

Ul^U

and even of
"

may

I,

or

when

first

or second

the proposition

\J\

the

their reputation/'

We

undergone by

to <iie modifica-

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

250

attached, as well as to those undergone

We

RolvGB.

and we cannot do better than

Htiidonl

De

all

to

lay before the

er
Sacy's rulen to that effect (Or. Ar. Tom. l
457).
-

on receiving an affixed pronoun the nunation

the Iriptotos disappears and the simple vowels
only

In the firt
of

them-

affixes

arrived at that stage of on?

liavo
progress
deem It most proper to treat of the subject at full

where we
length

by the

now

remain, as

place,

we

282 with respect

stated,,

2nd The

of nouns,

displaces both the

affixed

pronoun

to the

government

of the first person

numtion and the simple vowel

84 a)

hence, in this instance, the distinction of the three case terminations of the

noun

IB

we

inferred from the context, as

3rd. NeuriH ending in
affixed

final

change

"a

'^L disappear

"two books/

it

do in our
into cj> ?

and the
;

thus,

gen. and aocm*

rospoctively

^y/with
and

C^?

into

^,

if it

womon ;" ^I^J

/V
mase.

pi.

or

nem. dual

nom.

pi.

^l>^

shot ;"

'$)

gen.

become
"

^>

u^J

5th.

thy sons."

sons,"

if its

Nouns end-

vowel be dawma

bo torn; thus, sl^ "women;" ^IlJ "his

"

to

Ms women."

6th.

In the third person

^
9

of verbs, tho quiosoont alif after 3 disappears

"they assisted;"
"

of masculine

the affixed pronoun cS, become

"

ing in lumza change the samo into Jr

and

final

so,

language.

"his benefit."

with the affixed pronoun

and I^li? "your two books ;"

J\jf\ft

OWE

on receiving the

&&

benefit;*'

of the duals,

plurals ending

^^

J}

pronoun; as Xi

The

4th.

and the cases must be

entirely lost,

^S
' '

"thoyaasistedmo;"

as

s s-

^J"they^eV

they throw against them."

7th. After the

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

257

verbal termination 15, of the second person

pL masc, of the
made moyeable by damma* followed by .
*

preterite, the * is
'

S-

inert; as 1SSVJ

"y 011 saw;" /&j*J "you saw

them,"

8th.

In those persons of the aorist, which end in JjjJL ; as ^j2&

"
they write;" the final ^ is sometimes dropped before the
a
affixed pronouns
and tf ; as ^J,<J*$ for \j$ff& y u ^der
"
me;" so I^IJO yon hate us," for l2jyju. In the third person

sing. masc. of the preterite of

such verbs as have

for the

on receiving the affixed pronoun ^J the final ^

of the verb may coalesce, by tashdld, with the ^ of the affix ;

final radical,

^j& "he

thus,

has

rendered

The

me

for

powerful;"

\j&*

(Kur.
may, in
^
nouns as well as in verbs, either be retained or changed into
9th.

xviii. 94).

as

alif]

J^ "a

boy;"

&

quiescent after fatfya,

or L-J "his boy;"

L^ "he threw him."

^ qidescent after fafha,,

threw;" Jly or
terminating in

when

followed

"

by

290.

The

towards ;" i3$\

principal modifications to

selves are liable, are the following

of the

of Jcasra

first

is

"upon;"

The

affixes

them-

pronoun
instead

"sias/ Jty&&~

is to

jazm

towards thee."

which the
1.

takes

person singular takes the vowel fafh

^), heace Z/C&

the

affixed

modified according to

affix

"

when united with afty word ending

thus, tfli&L

10th. In particles

the affixed pronouns; as

^J^

"

"
upon us ;

"he

^j

"

"my

in

sins;" ^UliLc

^ , or

"two

^ inert

slaves,"

289 into Uic, (by dropping the

final

my two slaves." When the word to which the

be joined ends in

^ inert or quiescent, this last

united by tashdid with the affix; as? .J "in,"

^ "in me

;"

SYNTAX OF TEE PKONOUNS.

258
"

upon,"

two slaves/
"

^L^)

^U

"upon me;"

^iSl "of

of the

Muslims/

the word to which the affix

flamwsr-that

is,

in long

"

^iLi
the ^

7,

inert or quiescent

affix

sense

y^\

"my

which

friends," for

J^\

person singular

employed in a vocative

Is

the word to which the

then becomes
"

last

lT

so

my

^ in place of ^,

3.

Muslims."

This

when

iljT.

"my

kasra only remaining.

Mmm^

from ^tlJt and

J UT,

^A^

affix
;

Is

used when

such as

also to

and

^.

an accusative
pronoun hero always represents
words

and

when

taking this affix of the

singular, are written J*\

SrV>

In like

The

affixed

case.

The

first

person

****
-si*

-as

rule holds with the

#*'**

tit

and
^t, ^&, ^, ^,

as,

fathers," for

iolncd to active verbs, and also to particles ending in

-

the

some-

the noun

anil almost always,

united ends in

is

when

"
pi.)

is

first

its

in the case of the

^iLli (nom.

thus,

of the

times entirely suppressed,

often takes place

When

my Muslims."

affix, as

This same

(modified

changed into ^, and the

is

Muslims," (modified ^il^) "becomes

2*

^LlC

^ Is attached ends in^ preceded by

same unites by imhdld with the

final

of

^(l) "of

(modified

two slaves;"

my
3

J$i

so,

and .Jj

for

^zrv

first pern, pi.,

manner ^$ makes

nouns of the third person

5,

^\> and^x
^1

as Ut

and

* X*

and

U<3

Ui,

4,

The same
^^

^^

U1 for UJl and

*

The

UK

affixed pro-

and ^>, change

their

are united end^

^awwa Into 7wra when tho word to wMch they
"
m torn or in ^ Inert or quiescent; thus SJl5 his house ;"
"in the house of them
y \j
Ji "in Ms house;"
Ujy^
?

PEESOKAL PKONOOTS.

Mm"

two;" 4J "in

The

a.

<uU

Mm;"

shoot)

"

affix *

or

"in

on him ;" l^U

sometimes loses

"he may throw

it;" <u^j

259

on them/

own vowel and

its

(or

etc.

takes

jazm

this,

however, occurs only in poetry or in measured prose, such as the

Kur,an or the Makamat of Hariri

The

unto him."

affixes

change the final jazma into

the affix
thus,

JU

becomes

JU

{s

thus, Ajy for

a^J

we

shall give

and *& when followed by wasla,

damma

then the

but when, by a rule just stated,

* takes kasra before the

final

In this last instance, however, some

grammarians hold that
.

A transitive verb

different

or a verbal noun,

may

have attached
S

S"

s-

"he gave

me

to

them." The two

it"); so

affixes,

"

may

/^o-*,,

as
5'

gave
i

it to

^j+f*ub\
them two

the affix of the

>

first

to verbal

>

pf ike I

is

the

gave them

to drink."

made

njoveable

to

them

as

it

w
,

and the following

as in th

"

(against)

to eat ;"

UU^wL^

is

it is

"

-m^*
a rule,

and that

s&$ie riole holds

my affeotion fop

<"*

"you"

by damma and

affix J thus,

The

&^'

O? 9*
L

me

gender or

In such instances,

infinitives

of the affixes

to

differ in

person precedes that of the second

nouns or

first

it

When

two

be of the third person provided

second person precedes that of the third.

[

he gave

"it will suffice the

^^**&

however,

JlLel

as

be not identical, in other words they must

*

to it

an accusative and a genitive or dative, pro-

affixes, viz.,

vided they be not of the same person

(lit.

we may

^^

,
9?^^
say *%A& and even >^lc

5.

7fl#$fe

lulc "on you be peace;"

"on them be pe&ce."
fill! ^Ilc

pL*\

36,

"to you;" the

the letter ^
f

^Jf^>

case of the teiwiwtion *3,

or

"

is

inserted

he will shew them

289.

260

SYNTAX OF THE PB0NOUNS.

We

c.

affixes,

have already stated,

84, /. that instead of
employing two
that which denotes the accusative is in
instances used

many

separately, having the particle

C|

mode

This

prefixed.

of construction

serves to avoid all ambiguity in instances like the

preceding, where
be
first
obvious
at
which
is the accusative and
sight,
may not,

it

which the secondary case

x

thee to

him/ but
f

^^f\

but

thou wcrt thyself ")

^2^
"
I

Itol^Sc?

c*

"thou

0ave

In like manner

iJac!

me

caused thee to seize

equally incorrect to say

<$\

fK(

U5

uAn

^ 99( J
hence we must not say ujCgJa^ "

uJ3c^

thought she was she"

not sav

but ^uj uJcLaSl

;"

It is

"
I

thought thee thee"

u/U uJcl^

thotightcst

we must

So

me

be)

(to

(lit. I

for

(i.e.

"thought

^j^L& we must say

myself."

for

Lastly,

thought her her")

we must

say Ubut

rf.

"We remarked in

singular
dative;
for

added

is
it is

to verbs

*'

O" *^?

^\
"*

"

i&$y^ (j^
\

aught) shall never go

of the

first

person

denote either the accusative or

only, to

away

^
^

**

are

w^10

With verbal

camos to

disappointed

me

adjectives the affixed

complement, or the

first

truly towards

you acting

another than the Antichrist inspires

e.

often added, however, to participles and verbal adjectives;

example; <<A?<&*

\2li Siji

84, d. that the affix

of the affixes

me

(that he

L^

first

\Jpf^ Jl^-Il\^

pronoun which serves

when

of

them

With a noun

of

When

be two, ought

be expressive of the

a genitive, whether
always to bo considered as
the
or
of the verb,
complement of a verb
transitive.

be

if there

subject

as a

may

there are two,

it

complement of a verb doubly

receive

with more fear for you/'

considered as either a genitive or accusative case.

action the affixed pronoun, or the

may

me?"

active, or the first

there are two affixed

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

261

pronouns as complements of the same verbal adjective, or of the same

noun of action, the second of them ought always to be considered as

We

an accusative case.

have shewn,

are joined to a transitive verb that

84, /. that

it is

more elegant

to

is

more

add the two

With

course there occur no ambiguity.

affixes

which denotes the accusative

be separated in combination with the particle $\

verb, however,

when two

suffixes,

infinitives

may

with the simple

and

provided of

participles

it

correct to separate the last of the affixes or that denoting the

accusative.

Demonstrative Pronouns,
291.

As

a general rule the demonstrative pronouns agree

and number with

nouns to which they refer,

There is, however, one
whether expressed or understood.
notable exception, viz., a broken plural masculine or a regular
in gender

tlie

feminine plural, usually takes for

its

demonstrative pronoun
y

the feminine singular of the latter 5 for example

'3*SC"'O

"those armies;"

IbJIl
**

horses;"

j&9
^
**

O-O

$^

c33j

c*"O*^

"these days;" &s*\

**& "these
"
ss

*i
,-/*

OS.

9 02G-0

uj5H cJSlM

x*&

this million

//

>

(lit.

thousand of

thousands) of dinars."

The demonstrative pronouns, being in their nature definite words,

must have the noun which they specify also definite as is often the
"
TOVTO TO
a.

this saying/' etc,

Greek in such phrases as
pq/j&
in which the noun is the attribute, the
proposition, however,

in

^filter

may remain

delusion*"
flius,

*$&

indefinite;

Sometimes the

$&\j!**

Kulzum

yif "they say this is

expressed by an entire phrase ;

js^

attribute is

L^kf J^

shore of the sea of

as

lxa>

^^ '*and
(i,e.

the

this (is)

what

Bed Sea)."

(is

found) on

In interrogative

262

SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS.

phrases the subject

is

that?"

lli*

"

Is

put

what

after the attribute

is

thus cLl J j& tf*

this?"

The remote demonstrative pronoun which

292.

formed

is

d/ uJ", etc., of the

from the preceding by
second person, not only agrees in gender and number with
adding the affixes

the noun

it

but the affixes themselves agree in

qualifies,

gender and number with the person or persons addressed.

For example, "that book," if you are speaking to one man,
'
s '
S
^ G-o

is

c-jls&l

expressed

cL3J

and

if to

one

woman

~"*

<

c^li^l

cj3J

are addressing two men or two women you will say

you
***&
y s
G.-O
9 /
if there be more than two men c^l^l
j
U&
J3
3
<JL>1^3

if

^ o~o

and

if

more than two women, the expression

the affix
Practically speaking, however,
o

uXJo and uJoj without any

and number of the persons addressed.

alone

Of

the Relative

relative

pounded of the

either

pronoun^ or

and the demonstratiye

the word to which

by means

by being in a

of the article

thus, Kur. iv, 21:

who have suckled you;

a

those

generally

53

1S5O

3-.

Aii^t

^jjti]
**o

also IT.

14

being coms

1J

(modified

relates in itself

it

or of an affixed

)T

state of regimen, or
p

name;

tfx

and ^JJ
pronouns
'
^3^
T
o s

article Jl

^^) must have

definite,

is

Pronouns.
tf-"

The

c^l^

respect to the gender

used, as

293.

is

'<

into

being a proper

%jffi "your mothers

*

*^Uj

C"*

among your women who have come

^ i^lSl ^17
to disgrace."

-^

J^\

broken plural ox a ragnkr feminine plural take the relative in

THE RELATIVE PEOKOUNS.

263

the feminine singular ; as

o^jJLjT
<diT
fe~p
"
rely upon God in the afflictions which may befal yon ;" also
x
~
<S-0

^T

^.x?

^U

$j^

<UJ

(viz.,

Si '

'

^M

cdtt

c->U.V

those of the Kur,an),

God

believe in the verses of

which he sent down upon

his

prophet."

294. The relatives

and

^jf

as

^T,

we

stated in

*86,

are never employed in the oblique cases

singular, and rarely
in those of the dual and plural ; but the omission is
supplied
by means of an affixed pronoun that follows ; for example
:*

u<^c

me ;"
*ij\\
this

tS

??C

fcj\

"

^\

^^

f'ss-

t&i ^jj

x&

*$*>

maiden

is

~o

"the physician whose son

u-^Jal!

t^jiSt

"&

"

"

the robber

j^llll

The

verb or participle active

^ox

souls are longing;'

a^xW.

55

^&\

'-

where cXljX

is

^j&s
^i^

for

2jj^.

may

by

does not hold

<u

when

elliptieally

thee

is

a blessing ;"

affix

preposition

is

may

an4

A^

''ttafl*

fe

affix

Itself is

m ^^^* ^^ ^Js*

Sufaanmi jws@d
omiffed.

for

^Qkr* *$\ &)\ "the

be omitted when the Native

Hm whom

^* the complement

used

The same

governed by the same prepositkoa

U
I passed

is

God bestoweth on

when governed by a

and preposition

the wealth for which our

JuJ^

where

when governed by a

be seen in the following

may
c~

So in the sentence $*

sustenance which

omitted

as

;
'

L^ <j&
^ 9 j{?

whom

personal affix expressive of the

accusative case is sometimes omitted

example:

son slew ; "

whom my

J^fy i-f^^sr^ "the merchant with

found."

with

is

%;"

whare

after

This laat rule, however,

there are two distinct verbs in the

264

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

^

sentence

as

from which
s o<x

tlion

desircdst

^^J

LJS^

"I

ci?ifcj

mo;"

abstained from that

where we cannot sav

oxx

.tf~

^^J ^^

*J c^l? g^U
^J

^y*

Bitting the

last

construction may, however, be

occasionally
are to regard as a poetic licence.

word aj.

Such

met with, which

we

The

295,

relative

^ and U

like

of

which more anon,

sometimes includes the notion of an

antecedent, as follows
-<* ^ovx

^A\

tu^j

^b L^ ^ ^
*?'

~2

s?

j>

^i^jl s^H

frf

rt

"that which I

despised (would have) saved me, and that in which 1 confided has destroyed me." TMs kind of construction is

adopted

when

the writer wishes to give an emphasis to certain words

in the sentence

which will bo better understood

by a few
For instance, lot us take the
sentence, "The two

examples.

??
poets sent a letter to the waj5irs.
*

If the emphasis be on

the two poets," then the sentence will ran as follows;

o
^

x-

$,

^^jT"

^Hn

"**'

"

those two who sent

<ULy %!jj)\ \2j ylaAll literally,
to tho wazlrs a letter, are the iwo
If the emphasis
poets*"

be on "the wazlrs, ?? tho construction will be as follows:

X
"^
~s*>t"

*\jj$\

UU;

99^ f

y\j$\M\

^j

?*

^\

'

they to

whom

sent a letter, (the same) are the waz!rs,"

the two poets

Lastly, if the

"
7
emphasis be on the word
letter/ then the sentence
5JV

run thus,

t*O

*O

^J

will

tS>*

DL; 4jj^ ^lill PJ ^t.

In each of these

modes of expression it will bo observed, that the relative

begins tho sentence, and that the noun on which the emthree

phasis is to be placed,

gender, number, and

nominative ease*

and with which the

case, is

relative agroeis in

placed at the end, and in the

THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

a.

in a simple proposition,

When,

word having a reference

M^ O

^o S^S-

<u^s>

<s

we must employ

to time or place, such as,

if

we intend

last,

"

in the nominative case; thus,

$

day on which

and

I fasted

(was) Friday."

-"

intended to render the same em-

it is

with the affixed pronoun

thus, 4-jCj

with the desire of seeing thee;"

if

is

employed in a
"
I

<u; u^JU^

came

expressed emphatically will be,

'vBS

S L^Jl>-

"that

i.^.,

t^^ll,

desire of seeing thee."

We may

is

pronouns, both relative and

affix,

may

the word

is

came, was the

observe, however, that in a con-

noun

that the true antecedent

which

for

struction of this kind, if the

which

on Friday

with the affixed pronoun, and

similar to the preceding

<Uc;

a proposition includes a word expressive of "cause,"

phatic, the preposition

t^Cj

I fasted

that

"desire," or "purpose,"

manner

emphatically a

an emphasis on the word Friday,

the preposition

JJ

When

"

to lay

put the word denoting Friday

^5
"

b.

to express

L^VK^P

we wish

265

feminine, as in last example, the

The reason

be masculine.

is

^J^\ "the thing" or "object/'

of the masculine gender,

is

296. In a simple proposition consisting only of a subject

and an attribute (the verb being understood), such

"Zaid

(is) thy father

emphasis,

when

?>

"'Amra

*$

is

required,

indicated

it

^&\

be meant

to place the

thy father is Zaid;"

^s.

say, cJ^I

If

Ijlf

yj ^jJl

^*

if

^jJI

"he who

**

he who

(is)

(is)

standing

If the emphasis is to be laid on the subject,

3E

must

th,e rela-

emphasis on the attribute, the pref>

Amru."

Ij
the

together with the appropriate personal prpnouii*

ceding phrases will ran thus, Sjj d>^1 J

tSS
?

LJ^I

standing

by employing

15^

tive

is

as,

is

we

"&.

Sj j* L/^| "he who

(is called)

Zaid

(is)
34

thy

2GO

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNM.

father;"

^$\ "he who

ffi

(is

called)

'Amru

(is)

-In each, of these

examples, the personal

standing."

pronoun
288) along with the relative, the real antecedent to both being
j^T "the man," understood.
is

employed

297.

^\,

by a verb

^/*-

article

Tho^

relative

sometimes supplies the place of the

especially in those instances

where it is followed
or a preposition, as in the
following examples; viz.,

<*f}

judgment

is

p^V

"thou

&$\

satisfactory;"

Jl

art

is

\J&

ccaseth not to evince

gratitude to those

In both of these examples

%\

not a judge whose

who

^$\. So,
"from

], M'A$$\'&

the tribe, out of which

(sprung) the apostle of God."

7:

JUC4

l^

19

aSf

lyii.

who have lent unto God an

unto them."

x, w*x^
t

^^1*
a.

acceptable loan,

it shall

to those

be doubled

Here, again, the article Jl prefixed to the words

t

*."*

and CJU^A^

The

Kur,an,

1^ ^liii^ ^T^

men and women, and

"vorily to those almsgiving

who

are with him."

evidently used for

in the following
phrases, viz.:

"to

IB

article

)1

may

a nubfltitutc for the relative

pronoun

further be employed instead of the relative,

in combination with a
participle, active or passive,

when used em-

For example, let

take the
phatically as a substitute for a verb.
*s
J(*~Gj&*&
sentence JtJJI U1
"God protects the brave (man);" instead of

which we

may

say emphatically,
f

the brave

man

tects (is) i&e

God;" or

(is)

brave

man ;"

""

who
$Tji4T,J$T"he
^5

0**0

135

protects

jCo

jUi &\ $ty\

"he whom God

pro-

in which last phrase the personal

pronoun

THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

For further

may be omitted.

illustration, let us

26*7

examine the following

^ uL

examples; thus, the sentence <t!U^ ^*lw^*M ^J\ ^.^J^

"
I conveyed a letter from the two Zaids to the Muslims,"
emphatically in

expressed
Ul JLlC^

^^LUn

ij\

from the two Zaids

J>fy\

{p*

is

as

ways,

j4^H' "the

V/v

I,"

be

viz.

follows,

conveyer of a letter

where the personal pro-

'

y
-p

yz>

different

Muslims was

to the

s?

noun

four

may

In the three following modes of

omitted after iJJUSU

emphatic construction, however, the affixed pronoun of the third person

,

viz.:

the two (persons) from

^wjli

whom

&\~>j

'
i

whom

conveyed a

letter

conveyed a

to the

Muslims (was) a

\<\

ui

Uf**

j^*^

(are) the

Muslims

letter to the

from the two Zaids

"^

?^

\'

"that which

The pronouns
which," when employed
298.

It

^J]

^^^ J^ W

from the two Zaids

o/n

^^LMM]

two Zaids;" J^lliSI 111^

|^^

(are) the

to

*u"

\'<>*n

-,

must be expressed,
"

"those

Muslims;"
I

conveyed

letter."

^tfoat

as relatives, are indeclinable.

They

"he

who," and

or she

from ^jJt in this, that they include, absolutely, in

themselves the force both of antecedent and relative ; thus,
differ

j&

"he who hath

passed."

to

As

disbelieved ;"

a general rule

whatever

is irrational

or

when

and

this rule, however,

^ iM^
:

1b@

ap-

latter are per-

in one and the same sentence both rational

4*

^.

cp^lJl^

To

when the

and ^rational beings are included

$G*^
O
-O
(jcj^\j

"that which has

for instance,

plied to irrational or lifeless beings

;

refers to rational beings,

or lifeless.

there are occasional exceptions

sonified

JC

j^rt

4iS

the heavens and (on the earth)

urito

make

thtu%

God

for

those

example

who

adoration ;" or

are in

we might

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

268

"

unto

t,

and that which

la the heavens

IB

Again the

adoration."

c\jjy

whatsoever
the

(for

women

whomsoever)

(to the

number

declined In

against

espouse yo

When

so employed,

it is

^
"$>

"

i will slay (any one)

whom-

^ ^ ^^

"bring

war upon mo;"

\*a&

come unto me with) those who have rebelled

(lit,,

mo f \&

hath said tlmt."

>

^j^- ^

soever that makes

unto mis

8:

singular as a triploto, but not In the dual or

**

plural;

"and

iv.

wlio or whatsoever,"

effect of a rolativo.

tlio

tliuB,

Kur,an,

wore! ^\ (fern. &\)

somotimoH tho

to rational

of) two, throe, or four (each),"

cc

The

be applied

agreeable unto you from among

in

299,

U may

^ *& C^ ^ t>sP^

*&A\

J^

t?iij

(on the earth) make

is

to quality or quantity; thus,

from others as

that which

indicate a class of such beings, distinguished

when we

"beings

relative

God

^U
"We may
*

"

JlJlS

^A\

inform

me what

(female)

IKWO observe, that In such phrases

<&%

employ the feminine iU,*

this last, it Is not essential to

though that would bo quite correct

becomes

indoclitiablo

tion with

when

it IB

in a state of construc-

not merely understood, and followed by a nominal

proposition, tho
holongfl to

have

vfe.,

situations

an affixed pronoun, or any other complement which

IB oxprostfod,

shall

In certain

$,

ubjct of which

but which

Is

ifl

the pCTBonal pronoun which

merely understood, not' expressed;

withdraw from tho wholo army whomsoever of them

been

most

violent

in

thoir

rebellion

against

the

269

THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOTJNS.

Merciful;" &ti\
shouldst meet with

them

is

jj

In the

most virtuous."
S5

declension of the

we

sentence

word

we

J>1

<L1
"

and become respectively

\g\

first

two preceding senexpressed, or had the

of the

thus, jJSl j^

^\

So in the second

have

said,

sometimes take after them the affix U,

^^Z
and l^j
They are thus employed in
\

^ ^\ ^

noun following from

and the noun so specified

"if thou

should have to 'assume the regular

order to specify or particularise the

same kind

\*\

should, under similar circumstances,

The words ^\ and

a.

iLJb

pronoun had "been

been omitted,

affix of {j\

children of Malik, salute whichever of

tlie

tences, if the personal

^J3U

is

others of the

put in the accusative case

for

example

34^

\A

{$\

"we

^~s?

"
fj\ 12

band."
or a

If,

noun

f^\\

thus

will

Q God! pardon

act,

we on our

us, us

who

of the subject y> understood,

The words
if

the

\Q\

and

noun

\$y\

may

be omitted in such phrases as the

specified be restricted

by

the article Q], or if

be in a state of regimen with a substantive which

a
of

t~A?&A

men

(juliS\ c..g/t

t^JJ&\ (j^r

far hospitality/'

a pronoun of tto

first

Of
300.

are a special

in apposition, the latter is to he put in the nominative case

preceding,

<Ahus,

part;"

however, the word following t^J and l^ul be an adjective

*as the attribute

\sjs.\

""

We have

This

we Arabs

mode of

is

are the

expression

is

it

so resipoted

m&k

prompt

used only after

person singular or
the Interrogative Pronouns.

just

&hewu th

use and application of

270

SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS.

C, and 4/1 as relative pronouns; we shall now

the manner in which they are employed

briefly notice

In

Interrogatively.

asking a question

and

generally applies to rational beings,

to Irrational beings and lifeless
If the noun to
things-

which they

refer accompanies them,

they are not subject to

any variation on account of gender,, number, or

is
however, the noun be not expressed, then

case.

we showed

declined as

B, ^4-j
"
??

(^^

in

mm

For example,

87, a.

came

^m

mo

to

If

regularly

says to

should

ask

who? without any additional word, the expression would

"
be 1^ but if he asked, who came ?" it would be *
^

**

IE like manner,

"

should ask

tive case*

or

If,

L^

is

??

however,

<Ir**

"I Mlled

the expression

asks

youth?"
There

says 1U-J eLki'

whom ?

"whom,

\J& ^

if

is iCi

whom

alone

is

(*>

a man," and

in the accusa-

hast thou killed?"

used; as uLl0

or

however, some instances in which

aro,

declined under such circumstances; as In the following

o-CJ

f ^
o ^jf

example: ^^1 yis

fire (of hospitality)

>x}l

w^,^

^^

u^U^

plural J^J used Instead of

application of

from that of

which they
stated In

they came to

wo

my

said, the*

sec the regular nominative

^
tt

The

1^1

and I said who axe you? they

JIBES/* IE which sentence

301.

^U

$ and

inasmuch as

refer, the latter Is

If

'*

<L1 as Inteirogatlves, differs

followed by the word to

put In the genitive

case, as

we

88.

They aro also subject to all the variations of

number and ease when used alone as J&j c^JfJ a I ^w
;

two men;*' and

pression will bo

If

the speaker bo asked

u
i^jr-li

\l

^!f

what two

whom?

my

??

the ex-

friend?"

271

THE INTEKKOGATIVE PEONOUNS.

a.

The interrogative

^j\ is also

employed with an

a state of regimen, to express admiration

"

thou earnest unto

me with

(a certain)

indefinite

thus, J4-; L/^

*s
&

noun

in

&rAs L^^T
s
T
#

man, what a man !"

If,

how-

s
ever, a definite

noun

precedes, the

the accusative case; as, Jj>-j

^\

word

Jkl is to

Jjj \J*?\^

be put adverbially in

"2aid came unto me,

The noun respecting which admiration

what a man!"

is

thus ex-

pressed

by means of ^\ may be
*

prised in a verb

and

<^s\

in which the suppressed

is

itself

understood, or virtually com-

then to be put in the same case as that

noun would have been were

$.

For example, in the following phrase,

grievously vexed, what a vexation!"

^\

$Q^\
is

case, because the sentence, if stated in full,

put

X"

it

expressed.

MO

\j&\ "they were

in-

the accusative

would have run thus,

272

SECTION
SYNTAX OF

\mm

VIII.
AND PARTICLES.

Use and Application of the Preieriie Tense.

302. The Arabic preterite
corresponds with what wo call
the indefinite past, and also witli our
It has
protorporfoot
fonnor
the
meaning in simple narration when preceded by
the adverbs S^ "once on a timo ;" and others of the kind
expressive of indefinite past time

ample

Uuj^

l^L>~tS

^/J}

^ ^y, jinow1^

a time wont forth against two

together," etc.

UB in the
following ex-

bti%

^Ul

HftlS

Sjtj*

a lion once upon

they (both) united

In the following wenteneos

our protorpcrfect tensc?

"

it

corresponds with

^^ !U^f ^

wo have described the administration

now we will narrate the vissirate of those

"verily
cestor,
'

irit

^^W
my

\'

H'^

^Lc jjaLa5

:V^V
*-^
u>,4*?i
$
'

^1

J&J&

17*^

%*

of their an-

remaining;"
'**\*?*\u
-k

^\ L^*i

Ijr

remember

4 *'

have conferred upon you, and (remember)

that I have rendered you superior to
(the rest of) mankind."
bonc^fite that 1

Wo may hero observe,

the particle

wo

when

"now/* "verily,"

past time y which is

rogpeote3 as

that

the preterite
oto.,

by no uneani the

shall see immediately.

it

is

preceded by

always

case in

signifies

many

The same

other

rale holds

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PRETERITE TENSE.

respect to u]

rcdth

and ^-^

"

when," and

otlier

2*73

words synony-

mous with them.

The

303.

employed to express, with

preterite is frequently

greater energy, present or future time, especially in correla-

a general application, or proverbial sen-

tive propositions of
.

tences,

such as the following:

jj

SV^

^ ^ "he who

J^

53
conceals his secret attains his (wished for) object, literally,

"he who hath concealed,"

who

etc.

so ujCIs

^ 3& ^ "he

<

reporteth unto thee (another's secret), will report from

thee

secret

(thy

to

another);'

literally,

brought thee hath carried from thee."

propositions of this
b's.

or

3^

kind

first

When

correlative

of which begins with

-$?

"
whosoever,"

^f\

the

"he who hath

"whatsoever," Ui

"as

often as,"

"whithersoever," and such like

express only a para

ticular not
general truth, the preterites in both clauses
are to be translated by our future ; thus, Kur? an iv, 59
CtLfr-

L# { ?

tests'-

GJ^Ssix oy/ f

<.

\'\*s

U.*a ML>- ^ulo^ ^JA^L^^S.^ uis

j f
^'
f >

LC

<

shall

have been burnt out, we

/T

rn

as often as their

sMns

them

other

shall substitute for

skins."

304.

The

pluperfect tense is formed in Arabic

ing the preterite of the verb

preterite of the verb to

by employ-

158), together with the

be put in the pluperfect tense ; thus,

L!C

and

so on, bearing in -mind that the

"he had, Britten;"

cL^ <JUK

"&he

tstd written;"

two verbs must

agree * in gender, number, and perso^i throughout.

strictly

When

be expressed, instead of repeating

the particle A* is inserted between the latter

several pluperfects are to

with each,

35

274

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES,

and the preterite Immediately following, which serves to throw

the

succeeding preterites

also

into

jt

cUJ

the

pluperfect;

thus,

^i ;&

<u2L "and Eashid died at TSs; and he had

a$l

gone into Khurasan in order to fight Bafi the son of Laith

and this Eafi indeed; had (previously) revolted, and had
shaken off his ol>edience and had conquered Samarkand;
?

and Eashid in person went forth against him ? and died at

Tils."
Here we see that in consequence of the particle jj,
the verb

when

it

occurs for the second time in the

extract, throws the three following preterites

preceding
*
'

s' s,

"

jlc^3
a.

and LJju

The

that of
it

<A

into the pluperfect tense.

particle ll,

when placed

after

^,

has a similar

effect to

on the preterites that follow in the same sentence ; that

throws them

all

into

the pluperfect tense

thus,

for

is,

example

"and when

Jj ill
3

march of the enemy towards Akka had reached

Salhn-d-Dln (Saladin), he had assembled the Amirs." In such in-

the news of the

stances as these, however, the reader

must be mainly guided by

the

purport of the context*

305.

When

the particle j! "if," expressive of a supposition,

followed "by two correlative sentences,, each having its verb

in the preterite tense, the first of such
is to be ren-

is

preterites

dered by tho pluperfect of the indicative, and the second, to

which is prefixed the particle 3 "by the preterite of the subjunc,

tive

as? L3cLr*J

1oj&

cLJ^

"
j)

if

I had

known

this* assuredly

USE AND APPLICATION OP THE PEETEEITE TE^SE.

*

*&$

I should have admonished thee;"

%&]

275

Cljj&

jfj

"if Grod

we should have directed you."

however, the second member of the sentence be negative,
aorist is used with the particle
as we
p "not," which,
had directed

99 gives to the

plained in
thus,

^^]

us, assuredly

aorist the

(JlvJ

dU

life!*

power of the

If,

the
ex-

preterite

^ "if thou hadst been

here,

my

brother had not died."

If after

a.

the verb of the

Jl

member

first

of the proposition is

in the aorist tense, and that of the second in the

preterite, they

take a future signification, and the

past subjunctive, and the second

uL^

LL$j

jlo

JI^Jl

may

first

by the

future conditional;

[y^\

L5J^c Z^\j

be translated by the

J^ij

thus,

"if the miser

touched the palm of Yahya, his soul would have become generous in
5

After the

bestowing gifts/
of the

first

compound

of the correlative propositions

the construction of the second clause

particle

u3i$ JJx

"had

5)

not been

it

is

is

"if not/' the verb

frequently understood, but

not thereby aifected ; thus,

'All (i.e. for 'All),

verily

>Umar

would have perished,"

306. In a correlative proposition the
negative particle 3
35
to
the
"not,
gives
preterite of the first clause a future
especially

signification,

when

the second clause has a sub-

junctive or conditional sense; as in the following

K^LIj 5
J

jf

i/j*&

example:

l win not taste of

your food, unless you will promise me that you will not inconvenience yourselves on my account." The peculiar effect
of

tion

is

further observable in phrases expressive of a declara-

on 0$h

as

may be

seen in the following sentence^

viz.

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PAETIOLBS.

276

"I have sworn

while

swear) that wine shall not disturb me,

(I

soul is in

my

body, and

my

my

words in

my

power

of

speaking."

When

#.

the negative particle

has been preceded by another

negative proposition in which the particles

ployed, the 5 loses
thus,

} \)\ i\jj

all

and J have been em-

temporal influence on the following preterites

^\)\

4^^ ^ ^^ "I

kave ex-

perienced in (things) marvellous, what no spectators have ever seen,

^, and

JU

which

(| 195), in

51

is

on the tenses that immediately

307

The compound

no narrators have related,"

arid (what)
^^

* *

When

particles XI,

the last member, have no influence

follow.

the conditional particle

if precedes the

pretcrito ? the latter then acquires the force of the future or sub-

junctive;

as,

L^\
X

"

\j*s>

c/p

^ LZJ^\
Jc

Js<^>-1
I

j^.

\&\
&

hath been written to you, that when death hath approached

unto one of you, If ho (shall or should) leave property (let
It

??
there be) a wili

If the verb ^\

and a verb In the

*
t

signification; thus,
xnittod a crime or

present tense

"j

you
,

J\
|s

0x0*

ci^f^ ^^jA

e^ ^\
t/

"If I have com-

fault,"

When,

be expressed, the preterite of

aorist of the verb required arc

*
P
^
O^
0/0^
ff x

M ^S
^^
^

coino between

preterite, the latter expresses a past

t-x

boon guilty of a

is to

should

employed

44
"giTO thanks
IjXM
"*
X

to

after ^1 , a

and the

thus, for example

God,

if It

be him
*

serve."

When

the particle

^ comes
A

before two correlative propositions,

277

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PRETERITE TENSE.

'which the
le

first is

conditional

verbs, if in the preterite,

JU <JJ2

'he

f2

same

Ais

may

and the second by

zbjunctive,

erty ;"

&

LlOJ

&\

iili.

5\j

[3

$\ ^

first

may

then say so,"

me, I will

tell

(for

51

unto you."

"

"

but

(it is

not;"

if

as,

essential)

if not, I will

tel1

jf

^\)

The same rule holds

hand

each clause be

not

to

me

'

preterite

by our present indicative or

jlS &\ ^\

pro-

"

^ y^ ^ ^

^^^^

tell

thus,

my

do that, I shall lose

be expressed either
o *o
^5

>resent subjunctive; as,

,

by

first,

the present

Should the second clause not have a

nil not tell unto you."

the

"#

from Halab (Aleppo), and

ver the citadel to Salih."

tegative; as,

first

the simple future indicative

rule holds after the particle

^TciJL

on the

secqjid dependent

be rendered, the

d& ^ j& Q "if you

tat thou shouldst depart

ense

and the

u\^"if

thou art the son of

etc,

308. *The particle \&

signification; tinis,

\l|

"

when' gives

^ &r ^.^

to the preterite a future

S^^U^

"when

the

state shall have come (to fee realized),

promise of the future
we will assemble you together*" If U1 Tbe followed by two
correlative clauses expressive of a general statement

by means

of two successive preterites, the latter, in both clauses, are to

be translated by our present indicative

L'$

cdj^fiT^ {)

afeir, the didficulty

\\

thti^ for

"when Ta^ya

becomes easy."

example

tmdertakes the

It is needless to add,

of past events (as may be

however, that in the narration
known by the context), the Arabic, preterite, even when pre-

ceded J>y U1, must necessarily be rendered into English by

278

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

our simple past tense; thus,

Ql

\^\\\ f^ \fy

jj

"

when

they saw (a chance of) doing business, or of gambling, they

dispersed themselves for that purposed
809, In Arabic the preterite

or maledictive sense.

benedietive,

employed in an optative
For example, when an
$

Arab mentions the name

be

After naming the prophet

exalted.*'
S

"&

of God, he adds,
^li? y&

"may He

Muhammad, he adds

*&

1i5"*CJ

'

SU1
unto him, and
Ju may God be propitious
jXj feU
may
ft
he have granted unto him peace;" so, <&^ djj|
"may God
**

jfo"*

^J

have been pleased with

speaking of holy
Gt>d illumine

Ms

Mm,

35

This last formula

men

deceased, as

tomb.

3?

When

ing sovereign, the formula

is also

allunion is

Jp

used when

is
5111

made

Jjf

"may

to a
reign-

Ms

iZli

reign be pro^j "may

of
a
minister or
longed ; when speaking
commander-in-chief,
the phrase is ? ^oJ j& "may his victory be glorious,'* When
is,

3?

people apeak of ^UalaJI

spirit,

or

"

Satan," or of any other very evil

they generally add, Si

A^ " may

the Lord curse

Mm

??
;

some such pithy expression*

On

the

Uw md Application

310* This tonse

grammars and
marians,

is

of

the

Aonst.

improperly called "the future" in most

dictionaries, in imitation of the

Hebrew gram-

I consider the torn Aorist (as used

the more appropriate, inasmuch as this tense

is

by Be Saoy)
employed

'to

express not only fatority, but also time past or present, ac-

cording to eireumstaneos-

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE AQRIST.

The

a*

aorist, as

279

a general rule^ expresses our present of the in-

dicative, definite, or indefinite, except in such, instances as

out in

This

99, etc.

is

especially the case

when

it is

preceded by the

OO

"$.

negative particle

man

is

we pointed
1*>

tff

"not;"

$jl#j ^HjSI ^fjj Ci

&L-J jj&l

as,

not deemed just by the testimony of the people of his

In the following passage the aorist

house."

by our present

indicative

is to

and partly by our future of the indicative

"

conceal the book which

and who buy with (the price of)

but

fire

has sent

down

"

(from, heaven),

a thing of small value, eat

nothing

it

and God on the day of judgment will not speak to them,

He

neither will

311.

God

fifl

who

own

be translated partly

us

they

The

them."

corresponds with our future simple or

When preceded by the particle
"not at

aorist
1.

compound.
all/' ul*^,

justify

^1

or one of its abridged forms

^, ^X,

all

Jg,

of

2. When preceded
futurity.
by the negatiye
"
I
not
provided, however, that none of the other negatiye
or Ul has occurred in the
particles U,
phrase immediately

which indicate
a

we

before, as

cursorily observed

the case, there

may

102.

3.

When,

as is often

a plain indication of a future

sense; as
be seen in the following sentences,
an, iy. 34:
is

Ear,

^S>

"whosoever

that malevolently and

iniquitously,

we

shall cast

^ 5^ uIi^J ull^
(hell) fire

shalt

find

tfljlc

ujxJ3

^] & ^7 ^ J^S ^

my

unto

return

twinkling of thine eye

?>

thee

shall do

him

^ i^

into

^thou

more speedy than the

The following sentence shews the

230

SYNTAX 0? VEEBS AND PARTICLES.

influence of the particle

&H

jib

l^L

Xj

m*&J

3,

thus in Kur,an,

^ Jjj

which

"foar ye a

\^J\

make

satisfaction

it

employed

after the preterite

then serves as a complement

without the intervention of any conjunction, in which case

may be

translated "by our infinitive, or

ceded by "that,"

"they two "began

c-jylj $l

^li

fell

to

fountain of water that he

ll

Sometimes the

down

aorist thus

participle

the

kissing

^5? uLijtj ybj

as,

employed

^J^

<j*jl

may
lS^>

^JJ

(as it were)

a bridle ;"

*"

+%%

ground and weeping;"

**

by

1.'

*O

^^\

^ %

ii^

<*

^j ^y

&& " we con-

tinned to watch his return, like the watching for the

new

of the festivities."

313.

We

have shewn,

substantive verb ^tf,

804, that the preterite of the

when combined with

that of any other

verb, gives the latter the sense of a pluperfect tense.

IB

be

and he stood in the water bathing

a
jlaw ^^ he departed, leading my heart

himself;" A^tjU*

pre-

A^ilj *UJ1

moon

it

end that," etc. thus,

Jfc\&2 fedispute with each other;" so, likewise:
a hc camo to
a

by our present

"and he

by our subjunctive

to the

u %&

might drink."
translated

aorist is frequently

of another verb, to

we have

45,

any be accepted from them.*,

for another soul ? neither shall

The

l*

shall not in the least

day when, (one) soul

312.

^ir

li.

combined with the

aorist of another verb,

When
the two

together have tho effect of tho Latin imperfect indicative;

tlm% uUij y\

lio

was writing*"

Should the proposition,

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE AORIST,

281

^)

put before any other aorist, gives to the

a similar meaning. "When one or more verbs in the

aorist
latter

(of

have gone before, they communicate that sense to

the following aorist, without the intervention of J>l, as may
preterite

be seen by the following examples: U&^/b ^U-r^ Us "they

(the two bulls) were striking (or pushing) each other with
"
their horns ;"
^p l! it (the tortoise) never rested/' etc.

j&

<$\ i^/u

'x&jxjtj

&~*j

(jSy^Jlt

among- the wild

,

5ylsL*l

"his companions from

y\

came unto him and

beasts

visited

him;"

S-

u-Qg^ j

i;
^

c^^sr
^= -x

c-^-a

*M

&

"!A

*' 'KI X ^

.
^AXC
<u)U ^u\oj5
s- j
s <>s

^T
^
Jatar

rode to the chase; and he sometimes drank, and at other times

amused himself; and presents and gifts came to him from

Eashid; and Bakhtishu'a the physician was with him, and

Abu Zakkar the

a.

blind sang to him."

Sometimes the

aorist bears the signification of the past indefi-

nite,

without being preceded by either the preterite or the aorist of the

verb

did
is

you

$3

thus,

kill the

<dSl

sllJl

&j^ {*$

"

prophets of God,' hefore (now) 1"

^ a7
In

(to

them) why

this sentence it

evident that the attending circumstances are quite sufficient to

determine the sense in which

particle

jjl

"if/' precedes the

^j&& must

combined

be translated.

"When

aorists, the propo^itiw will

fcbe

Mve

the sense of the Latin imperfect subjunctive; a$ ii Ili^fdllolving expression

i-osr

eu%3

<Kjyu

cui

3 "if thou W6rt

to

know him, thou

wouldst love

314. In addition to, the pluperfect and imperfect^ which,

the Arabs express

by

pwfodbftg the preterite of the yerb

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

282

to the preterite

and

aorist of other verbs,

which in our grammars

tense,

"by prefixing

the aorist of
^

"$

j?

the future perfect,

to a preterite, sometimes in-

between the two verbs

serting the particle aJ

f^

is called

they form another

^^U* {& J\

Jj

uJc>J yifa Ji J^S(

for

t"*O

\&

tXCjl

example
f

^
"

"they say

when

will this

menace (take

ySy

effect) if

yon Tbo trustworthy ? Say thon perhaps somewhat of that which

yon wish to hasten, will have (already) mounted behind you."
>*>

Uj

j^<?

upon

.$

UU

\# s

U^

^ ^?

their camels ?

have taken

O^

and

/'*

**.

%*.{<*

ss

^s

Eush

^iXe^Ub A^JU
(j^f^
^JLC Jj^l

UJe>-} Ja

us seize them, and then

lot

retaliation for

what has been done

to us.

we

shall

55

315, "We have already pointed out the three modifications

to

which the

ticles

aorist is subject in

which may precede

it,

consequence of certain par-

Tho

aorist apocopated,

drops the vowel of the final radical,

which

99, is employed

etc.,

in conditional, hypothetic, or retributive propositions; thus,

&\ ^f^~\ uXll

^aC ^

he who

may have benefited

thou (in return) benefit him f cjy^

you may

be, death will overtake

thee, do

^^ \j>3 U2j ^wherever

you;"

"wherever thou mayest go, I (also) will go f

^it thou shcmldst go out, I will go out with thee."
sitions of this kind, if

each of the verbs indicates futurity,

both of them arc put in the apocopated form

of

them only denotes future

time, the same

of the apocopated or common, form, see

imperative

i0

In propo-

but

may

if

the last

optionally be

99, a*

accompanied by a verb expressive

When
j>f

the

a con-

USE AND APPLICATION OP THE AOBIST.

tional future, the latter is

"

J<\
When

a.
;ter

s^s sister? ?

*aJJ

j^&j

When

The

b.

comes

the apocopated aorist, the

is prefixed to

ss

&~* tX^ ^^j

{(

loses its

after the eonjunc-

before, it denotes prohibition

and whosoever among you

$

"*'

vowel

fast (during) it."

thus,

shall see the

,*&

x&L

*^*M

"approach not

!ll

IJ^AJ

this tree."

aorist apocopated preceded

lot yet,"

ji

*<j

him

)nth, let

u (two)

command, and the

ms uJ and J.
?

put in the apocopated form; thus,

me, (and) I will assist thee,"

assist

the particle

expresses

283

by

the particle

always bears a past signification

4&11J

^ J^Sl "he
&

but found

(it)

not;"

so,

"not," and di

thus, for

example

sought for something that he might eat

S
?
O*O

J^ ^

^JjSl

J^

*r

"

ill

when he

at-

he was not able."

apted to ascend,

316. The aorist antithetic, whose

peculiarity is to change
9 damma of the third radical into
faffa, and to reject the
al
^ of the terminations (except in the feminine plural)
1

100 we
responds to the Latin present subjunctive. In
ve given a list of such particles as
require this form of
3

aorist after

ill

now add

aotes

them, on the more important of which

we

a few observations.

"scope/'

"end,"

Their general signification

"
"aim/' or
purpose/Mjifce cr

^io lie 0^(1 that/ 7

functions "that/' "in order that/'
/
7

.t

.j

"I

bread witlx

>

When

me

desire that tfeou mayest assist;"

i wigit

tMt thou mayest

(ches moi} this night."

the particle

^,1

is

followed

by

"not," as in 5f

(for

y!+fc,

284

'SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

after

and requires the

retains its governing power,

it still

If the verb following

ii.

^1

aorist antithetic

intended to express
simple, pre-

is

sent, or future time, the regular form of the aorist is employed

as
~
s
^ &
y ps O-T j>. o
^^or o* XCT
_. ,
(t
3
I lmow tlmt lie sl eeP s ;
1 know that he
v*
^\ Ae]
<$.

'$.

p&

j*u

'

f^

After yerbs expressive of "doubt," "opinion/' "think-

will assist/

"^

r*

ing/' "considering/' etc., such as

form of the

^, v*^">

^J,

etc.,

the regular

employed, but the antithetic form

aorist is generally

is

sometimes to be met with/'

It

i.

sometimes happens that the particle

words "that not/' "lest" (Lat.

nc).

We

corresponds with our

are not to conclude, how-

ever, that ^\ of itself bear** a negative sense, but there

some word

which

in the proposition

hibition; thus, in the K,ur,Sn ix. 46,

"they who
that they

and

may

not

their persons

"
verily

stand

it

God and

believe in

we have

fight,

so, xviii.

occur

we have

the following example:

the last day will not ask leave of thee

(for

may

may

imply a negation or pro-

the true faith), with their substance

^w

58:

^1 $&\

^Ls

^5^

^*f

cast veils over their hearts lest they should under-

(the Knr,fin)/'

c.

The

particles jjf

and J, denoting "that/ "to the end

order thai/' invariably require the

"ho came
same

aorisfc antithetic

as,

that/'

"in

LjC^ L/*^"

that he might beat thee/' or "in order to beat thee/*

The

and LJ, "lest, as also

to the

tioA

XX

XX

rule applies to the

might

"\

eat it/'

thus,

The

compounds

1L

S^O Ci J"^^ *^ e 80t|g^t f r something ifcat he

"
particle

^^i.

that/ "in order that/' "until/ re-

quires the antithetic form in like iimmier

thus.

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE AOBIST.

"
"

me

inform
I will

d.

that I

march on

The

may

fly

away from

tliee ;"

285

<

the sun sets."

till

when

particle j\ (which properly signifies "or," or "else"),

denoting our conjunctions "that," "until," "unless," requires the antithetic aorist

.J^.

thus,

thee, or thou shalt give

o

my

due;"

ILxJ

so,

me my
*
0<

<?

LXl^jJ 3

jjl

due/

verily I will persecute

me

"until thou wilt give

i*e.,

'&''?<?"'

^^jlH

"verily

cA

will slay the unbeliever,

"

Muslim

or he shall become a

"

^if

L5

;"

*>J^\

j\

'^J^l

him

wait for

I will

<?

come

until he

Sometimes

out."

cation of our words

X

"

"
whether,"
ps

c->ji>

ifl

when

repeated, has the signifi-

me)

or" (Latin

G X

j\

SS

^ uJo

^\ s^-fc ^ij)\

thus, for example

t-.

j i

it is

^w^i

no anair of

thine whether (God) be gracious unto them, or chastise them."

x

<*
^

^.

The

particles ^,31
&

and Ui "good!" "well!" when employed in a

&

on a preceding proposition, require the

conditional sense depending

which then bears a future

antithetic aorist,

This will be

signification.

sV*

^s*

by the following examples,

best understood

viz.

"

LjCJI ,<?^1
X
*

I "will

..

come

for protection to thee;"

when

the reply
^j

"good

I will assist thee;" or

c/J^^

^j

"

aid thee;" or

cJ^l

it

^\

""

"welf!

examples we see that the particle

verb, or

different

aorist is

or lastly,

by the Lord

^^

g^

my

friend

will not assist thee,"

t ) J\

may

I will

In th0se

be used $lone before the

by a negative

particle.

If,

however, any

from the above intervenes, the common form of the

used; thus,

the pronoun

good

^\

be accompanied by a word expressive of an oath ; by

may

a vocative case

wojd

I)

rf

c^yjUl

^*

f '

^
c3^^
'
is s ,5-^

be,

^\

jilij

I will assist thee ;"

may

151

t^aJt Ul^Jl "good!

I will assist thee,"

intervenes^ the emphatic negative

^JS

"not

When
at all,"

286

STNTAX OP VERBS AND

PABTICLE13.~

always requires the aorist apocopated, and gives

^
UU

* s ?<*S

tion; thus, Kur,an

Gehenna)

shall

When

ii.

74: a^j**

by no means touch

the conjunctions

a future

it

^"^

"

-f

'

jUl lLJ3

XI

sigrdfica-

<$

"the

fire (of

us, except for certain limited days."

uJ and j

two propositions,
indicating,
in the second, an immediate dependence on the first, of which it is a
jf.

join

consequence, they require to be followed

w

s"

^ifcl

't

*r

own

6&

inhabitants;"

he forbade any

*Y.

-"C*

houses, until

^^
woman

*-*/%

(J^**-

bL*j

MB

Zaid in
followed

may

house, that I

The

expresses

of

them

is

other, it has

317,

may

go

*rf

ye

^ 10 ^

particle ula,

"is

when

$,

"punish

LJ and ^

me

not, lest

that the former

is

When

either

mere connective of sentences not dependent on each

no influence on the verb that follows.

and

is

aorist la

.*<"<"

#^yi

of'iioX'

cA^

used always with a future

formed by affixing

may be

strongly asserting; as

P#M tji*

^^ %Z*

"pardon me,

order of things, which the latter does not.

commanding^ urging,
"

The

^^ly

chief difference between

aorist antithetic^ as

in

^J^l

lj

him?"

to

c31^

as,

The paragoglc

signification

|yl

^J\

&\ ^aXU jloJ!

tlao

do not enter any

jJS

imperative, corresponds with the Latin "iie,"

and the English "lest;"

I perish/'

as '

permission, and salute

j^

*3h^\

entering the palace of the Caliphate until he

enter paradise ;"

by a negative

lyjsL

you ask

knew who she was;" jsh JXjll ^JJ

Lord! that

F ^
**f* <t

**

the aorist antithetic

by

"

^^ Aj^.j^a

lyiUwj j I^M^U^U

^^s

house, except your

its

0<r.

tfl

r*

seen in

,^T

or simply

101*

forbidding,

may be

is

wisliing 3

to the

employed

asking,

or

seen in the Knr^anj cii 6;

u
&<*
U
i

ox {'VfSi

^^ c^*

shall see toll, again (I jsay)

It

ye

'

f r^-

^^

venly

shall surely see it

with

USE A.ND APPLICATION OP THE INFINITIVE.

the

eye of certainty

287

then shall ye be examined on that day

soncerning the pleasures (in which ye had indulged during

It is also

life)."
)f

^\

and U); thus, Eur.

children of

jhall

Adam,

SJ

after the particle &1 (compounded

' S?
f ? C/ 's^s <t
S '
0^0

vii.

*&+ l^j

33:

among

f^

^^

yourselves

used when preceded by the

or by any expression denoting an oath
thus,
-

>

It is also

-o

"3-

"by God he

.JJ0V dUlJ

{-**$,

verily apostles from

come unto you."

^article

he (the devil)
[

employed

will deceive

will assist;

said, verily (I

them

*f.s

75

^M^T\ HMjsS
J>y thine

swear)

t-^&j*^ JlJ

eminence that

all."

318. The imperative

used only in the second persons

singular, dual, and plural of the active voice, as may be seen
n the paradigm
94 and in
The first and third
103.
is

persons of the active voice are

we have

,he aorist as

made imperative by means

In

just shewn.

its

ilready mentioned in

319.

The

infinitive or verbal

Infinitive,

noun, as

we

stated in

>o

105,

own verb

frequently combined in a sentence with its

in

we have

103.

U$e and Application of the

use and application

imperative has no peculiarity beyond what

.he

of

in

adverbial sense, with a view to give additional

me

expression;

mte
^*M>

*>

U*lw ,^-y*

thus,

$~*

$'

saying ;" so in this paseoge fro;&

^j Los?

j+&3* \jy*

U^U

jvv

|*

*>

is

12

*-

fed

titte

Kur,

^!"^

^p^Ke
Hi. 9

day on winch.

iii6

leavens shall be shaken with, commotion, and the mountains

jhall
Et is

utterly

move away n

u
(lit.

inova

away by moving

u
alsg used adverbially to express
purpose,"

').

cc

iateutk%

SYNTAX or VEBBS AND PARTICLES,

288
or

"

design/
**"*

ilpr

jj&

etc.,

like the Latin

llS

"Zaid stood up

dum

gerund in

honour

jjj

to

Amru. 3?

the complement alone, they

may

115: <uS
'

'/ s>

J^tA] o^j"
part) of Abraham

'
Ijb^t
''

pardon (on the

see that

"and

tf

Abraham, the

God,"

Kur,an

thus,

"understood,

governed in the genitive

subject, is
,

where we

for his father;"

the object of the sentence being

which

will

be more manifest

if

express the sentence by means of the finite verb;

<uJ *1H
/*

^J>\J&^\
*

xx

"man

Abraham begged pardon

father/

C""*O

Again, in the Kur.

is

for

"

fij\

expressed,

was a prayer

there

'

the infinitive Jll*^

*

by*

is

governed in the

"be

genitive "by the infinitive of a transitive verb

ix.

for (the purpose of)

doing

320. "When the subject of a sentence alone

or

as follows

(.

xli.

-rf

49 JLS *12j
:

not wearied in asking for what

is

of

God

thus,
for his

OO

^ ^Ci

5'

good

we

(or

jLCJ

"for

happiness ")*

The noun denoting the object, may be put in the

the infinitive and
accusative, if any word intervenes between
321.

the object so as to prevent their being in a state of regimen ;

thus,

Kur. xe. 14

C^ I^Ti '^ ^ ^

feeding the orphan in a day of famine

sentence
llcy the object of the

thus*/

the accusative case

\AP\ '<&\d\
X*
x*

JLtS
** <**

??
;

"(thp act

may

by the

of)

where we see

put in the accusative

If the infinitive should be preceded

object in

article

case.

Jl, its

immediately follow^it;

"feeble in huxting his enemies;"

^"^

^ ^ "I do not timidly abstain from^smiting

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE INFINITIVE.

tie

tie

When

both the subject and object connected with

infinitive are expressed, the subject is usually put in the
ear."

and the object in the accusative

lenitive,
Lll

289

#3J*

|pCw>-

<LU^

J^j

"

thus, for

was in

it

example

this year that the

"

the slaying Ja'far (on

put JVfar to death/ literally,
bie part) of the
Caliph took place in this year ;" so, likewise
"
Jufi
a memorial of the mercy of my lord to^Jj <u^j jJ
3

Jaliph

is

The preceding

rards his slave."

onstruction, but the following is

D

is

the most

common mode

by no means unusual

that

of
is

say, the object is

tie

put in the genitive and the subject in

This is more especially the rule when the

nominative.

bject is a
'
^s s - S~
lyoj

nto

UcU^o

'

SS

<T

""

whether in speaking

*J1

j^l teJb\&*

<te-jlCj

*"

*?**

Z$

people whatsoever to style

all

laster

pronoun and the subject a noun; for example:

"
'
'""^

Qa\

4r4-3l
it is

to him, or in writing to
*

ouse by whomsoever

^US\ f-^<* "he forbade

him our lord and our

him;"

a pilgrimage to the
(holy)

practicable."

322. Infinitives of intransitive verbs govern the

subject
.here being no
the
in
case
for example
object)
genitive
;
:

'&&

^ J>ffij\

)ok place in this

f

yj

manner."

intransitive verbs follow

1th regard to th
**

samples: ^J33
iat,. w..
P

its

"the

As

falling of

Zaid to the earth

a general rule the infinitives*

the construction of tocb Y6rb#

use of the prepositions ; as

&

fjjj ^J

"I have

121

tfce

following

not the power over

"I

cannot do that;" %L* $*\

^C^\ "the expulsion
inhabitants from it." The infinitives of abstract or sub-

antive verbs have their subject in the genitive and their at37

200

SYNTAX OF VERBS

tribute in the accusative ; thus,

"

man must have boon

that

of religion ."
sitive

verb

Is

AJ8TD

jJt

J^\

created

Sometimes an

PARTICLES.

is

one of the foundations

infinitive derived

from a tran-

employed in a vague and indeterminate manner,

9

j^ ^ ^

without a complement as all die j&\ ^ y&j <JJ

a
deviation from the way of God, and disbelief in him,
7>
most heinous sin in the siht of GocI
\

Use

nd Application of

is a

the Participle*

323. Present participles follow the construction of those

verb* from which they arc ilorivod; thus, &

"7
Anmi whose father slew Mahraful ; n which is the same as
^OX
f.":
/OX / X X yx- O^
r
^ 1.X Ox 7 .*< ^of ^<"|X i?0x
if WO Said UJJAS^ ^1 Jis *9 i/^ 4/^" ^ ^^j '^ ^'
'Hj

"

J5aid

to the

whoso son

is to

same thing an

??

wed j^ubaida to-morrow which

9
^ s*"f ^^ frf V;T
MT ^*"'
^\
;

^j

ing tho aorint of the verb

324
sitive

The proBont

^^\

\&&

comes
i

T.

by employ-

a)j?

instead of the present particle*

participle or

noun of agency

of a tran1. It

verb admits of two modes of contraction,

maj

tho object in tho acoraative case, like tho Yerb froir

"

which
trol

it

as

has been

CKW)

atiRw;

J4afe

^ ^^

(with thy face) their Kibla*

the ccmitivo case

wily
a

as

fcff&$fa\

^uT
^

2. It

athou

may

^oso who
sMt

not

t,^"^ ;x

qjyM

^
IE

take tho article

JV

may

in

^j

shall to^tc of death."

e?ery (croaturo) living

of

MOT

gOTorn tho object

"

^^ C&

thou shdt assemble mankind;"

mode tho

con-

this

lasl

USE AND APPLICATION OF THE PABTICIPLES.

the object or complement be also definite

"the

striker of the slave;"

here to say

nor

ox
dj

u^

c_^uLll

-53

thus, j^!

^VJ cl^llM "the

&\

x-

the head of the slave."

291
c

striker of

x-

be incorrect, however,

It "would

neither ought

we

to say j^J cl

7?

j^c c-jUoJ] nor

When the noun

of agency governs

complement in the genitive

and this complement is accompanied by another noun which ought to
agree with it in case, such other noun may be put in the genitive
#.

its

agreeably to the grammatical concord, or

tive as the object
(to labour) is

thus,

u^j

may be

it

"

Hu^ A^~

^Jc^

a seeker of rank or of wealth,"

"

jllll

verily,

grain and the date stone to put forth

it is

put in the accusa-

whoever

rises

up

So, Kur,an vi. 96

God who

causeth the

he bringeth forth the living

from the dead, and he bringeth forth the dead from the
It is
living.
he who causeth the morning to appear
for rest,

b.
its

and the sun and the moon

When

the

and he hath ordained the night

for the

(of time)*"

noun of agency governs the accusative case

nunation in the singular as well as the

and plural as we see in the

first

rejected, as if the

final

and

it

retains

of the dual

quoted expressions of the last p^rs-

Sometimes, however, both

graph.

computing

tlie

two words were in a

nunation and

state of

final

regimen, (vide

aue

382)-;

two (men) striking Zaid;"

thus, \%j
tSJJ t^L^If "the
\yi]?"tte
(three or

more men)

striking Zaid."

in theaccusative be a pronoun,
participle, ot the particle

When

the pronoun

is affixed

it

If,

may

290

c),

however, the object tins put

be either

may

affixed directly to the

intervene between them.

directly, the participle loses its

292
in the singular

but

strikers of

"
iJI

optionally retain or reject the final

may

we may say

dual and plural; lience

two

VERBS AND PABTICLES.

SYNTAX

Mm,"

So

either

"
*$>j&\

or

'

in the plural

of the

*lijlSjl "the
s 's ?
-CS'*

we may say u^JjUlS!

or

the (throe or more) strikers of thee."

325, The noun of agency of a verb doubly transitive,

a verb governing two accusatives,

verb from which
the accusative

it is

or it

derived,

may

follow the rule of the

by putting the two

may govern

the

first

may

say either

may

say either

***

"C

xtf

***<

-*

objects in

of its complements

in the genitive and the second in the accusative.

*
'"&<*

i.e.

Hence we
"

Ox

si?

or

\js?" by juj ^tf \$\

\ji" uy \^jj (jwtf U^
"
1 have clothed Zaid with a precious garment,"
So we

"

iUli

iJXc ^Ife

dost thou consider

when

observe that

Amru

c^j

$b

or

5iJiU

j^

^fe dLJl ji

We

may

***

a wise

man?"

further

the participle, thus doubly transitive,

complement in the genitive and its second

in the accusative, the latter may be placed between the
its first

governs

participle

^Ixi^l
tute?

and the word governed in the genitive;

dJdj

jjU

So ? in

refusing his bounty to

Kur 5n

ady.

48

"do not imagine that God will

??
(made) to his own apostlos.
826.

When

*UJ *&%

him who
Jjsllr*

act contrary to

thus,

is desti-

2M ^^l^i*

Ms

promise

the present participle expresses a quality in-

herent in the subject^ and independent of any reference to

it

time,

may

may

govern

its

a
say

mnrfn

A-P

^TplsTSjj
ivvneffiii/fin'n

subject in the genitive;

Zaid whose father

?

ftAlrlA-m

fntns

nl^fiA.

is

thug

standing."

fYJTftfiTyfc

we

This

wh&TL the

USE

AJSTD

participle is derived

from a neuter verb.

found, however, with participles that

when such

verbs,

c.

o-o

293

APPLICATION OP THE PABTICIPLES.

It is sometimes

come from
mere

are used as

participles

transitive

adjectives;

tf-o

thus, L.JJS1 f^\}\

The noun

"the merciful of heart."

agency accompanied by the

article

is

)1

of

equivalent to the

pronoun and a verb; thus,

\^> x\ Z$&\ 13J* is
s
equivalent to \^ xj\ '^ ^&\ US "this is he whose father

relative

-C5-.O

killed >Amru.

a.

The present

with
participles of intransitive verbs are applied,

regard to the use of the prepositions, in the same manner as the

verbs from which they
?

unto him

o4^w

;" *-^
L

came ;

"

Jil

* ^ >

^Jj \$ S j
"
U^ God is not

<dll

are obedient

all

thus,
& f^

heedless of what

ye are doing,"
327.
is

The

subject to

which the passive

generally put in the nominative case

l\

sentence:

participle is attached

as in the following

^f&* ^J "Zaid, whose

2Ul

father

is

now

may, however, be put in the genitive, being then

governed by the participle, or it may be employed adverbially
It

slain."

in the accusative case

or

\>\

its

<

hence we

may say either

c_^

'

'jf&

^J

/"*

Jjiul

doubly
of

\ .

If the passive participle belongs to a v

transitive, it preserves in the accusative

complements

thus, li^J j

(J**!*

&J

"

t^

Zaid has been presented with a dirham."

328.

The

construction of the passive participle, and of

verbal adjectives derived from the passive voice,

more

clearly explained as

follows:!.

By

may be

substituting, for

294

SYNTAX OP VERBS AND PARTICLES*

the participle or adjective, the verb

either in the
pre-

itself,

terite or the aorist of the passive voice,

necessary, the subject or nominative which

understood.

restoring, if

may have been

in substituting, for the article

3, Lastly,

In

2.

.#3;

relative

pronoun

^ oooU
or

**

11.

233

as

may be

PO f\
ypjj ^
tf

^ ^ J&& ^ ^
*t

'S

<

o*To

i">

-d

/-

*,-"."To"?

viz.,

incumbent upon the father

is

it

tribute to) their (the mothers') subsistence;"

"

<**

/*

i<O

**!*

is

bom,

?J

So,

234

*<jfy

*^

npon the

15^

child,

man

to

5s

a mother shall not be compelled (lo do what

on account of her

(to con-

where S j

equivalent to Sij S olj ^ASI J4>S^

whom a child
a

the mothers shall give suck unto their children for two

years entire, and

is

the

or if there be no article the relatives

seen in the following

examples,

}<-**

$
*"*'

is

unreasonable)

nor shall a father be compelled on

account of Ms child ;" where A!

is equivalent to
% A! j
SlJ
a
*
ho to whom a child has been born*
So Kur. i. 6 and 7

3^

direct us in the straight way, the

thou hast been gracious, and

In

thine anger,"
<f

o?v

Afljus

***>**??

t<

CP^MJ 1^

whom

who have

of those to

whom

not been subject unto

the three last words, viz.,

x v^ c T ^ M^ti
t
Tx
are equivalent to A^ic u-^iy J ^3J
against
this passage
*

there has been no inveighing "wrathfally;^ or more

exactly in Latin, contra qnos non est

Concord of a Vert with

S29,

way

We

mmcfum cum

it

Nominative*

huve already mentioned in

jrole (liable!

howeve^

to

iracundia*

numeroBS

250

that,

as a

exceptions), the

CONCOED OP A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.

verb, in a simple sentence or proposition

comes

295
then the

first,

nominative or subject, and lastly the object. When the verb

thus precedes the subject, if the latter be singular and mascuthe verb always agrees with it in gender and number ;
"
thus,
^^4^ *U5\ Satan made him forget the naming

line,

j^3

of his Lord."

however, the subject be a feminine singular,

If,

the verb must agree with

it

in number, but not necessarily in

If the subject be really of the female sex,

gender.

and

if it

the verb must then be in the

immediately follow the verb,
f-a
c*o

But
its

if,

l^\

feminine; thus, j>J&\

L^Jli

"the wife

of 'Aziz said."'

however, any word intervenes between the verb and

feminine nominative that follows

it,

the verb

in the masculine

thus, Sj^Vj

may be

used

"

s^ i*\ ^\ verily a man

In such instances, how-

J^

whom

one of you hath led astray*"

ever, grammarians consider it to be the more correct mode to

put the verb in the feminine.

330. If the subject be merely a grammatical feminine, the

verb

may be

immediately

"

of either gender,

not

or

the pure milk

is

thus

that from

whether
in

it

the

precede

its

following

which the scum

is

gone ?

subject

example

"but

wlten

gone the milk is bare." When a&y word interthe verb should rather be ia the masculine; thus,

the s^um

is

^
.wUU

^^

'Qs

$Q "in

pretence against yotu"

order that

men may have no

If the verb is separated from the

o

nominative feminine

by the

particle $[ "unless," or
^s
C**O

cept,"

is

put in the maamline

as JUM

*o

^1

SlSS l\

"exs

J0

l^

29 G

SYNTAX OP VERBS AND PARTICLES.

"there
?

no one innocent except the handmaid of Ibnu-1-

is

?3

The verb may however, here agree with the noun

in gender the word Sls3 would then be understood
Ula.

directly

after the verb

praise 1*J and

uLf;;

Slx3

thus^

JUu,

when

174,

cLSj U.

Hi

the subject

The verbs

is

feminine

of

may

be employed cither in the masculine or feminine, but the

masculine
"

is

excellent

When

woman Zainab/ than by

the subject

^
??

opinions

^l^LJl

believed?'

*!&

putting the verb

is

a masculine plural, the verb

in the singular; thus. Ear, an

"

who were impious

J^T l^ ^^\ "do we believe

When

ul^J $*$

as

maybe

it

preceding

better to say
?

the

is

in the feminine

331,

it is

preferable ; thus,

those

the subject

ii.

58:

altered their
as fools

have

the broken plural of either

is

a masculine or feminine singular, the verb preceding

it

may

be optionally put in the masculine or feminine singular;

thus,

their
<

"

-rr-

j-i

*-^s^

u.

/A
69

""

cJJa

Kur,an
hearts became hardened
a

^ D^J c~4<^ ^3

were treated

as liars.

When

^ ^
Ox-

*"/

OPP fp

>^jb

after that

??
;

<u

<*

Li^uud

tff

*j

,,

then

again in vi 34

verily apostles (sent) before thee

a regular plural masculine^ the

verb must not be put in tho feminine, but it may be so with
382,

^w

plural of

tho subject
"

^1

is

a BOB? ?) and with such like words; which,

though having tho termination of regular masculine plurals,

do not preserve the forms of their singulars, for these pluials
are in fact broken ones; as
Israel said*"

^Tpl

The verb may

also

cu!^

the children of

b put in the feminine, and

297

CONCORD OF A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.

even in the plural feminine, when the noun following is a

"
"
nation ;" or when it is
a tribe" or
as
collective one
jjy
"
the name of a whole species; as Ixc
sheep;" J,i "bird,"
;

etc.

as SL.

-TX

Ic.

jlLlT ffi

^7

>

x<

"the birds eat thereof;"

ox -TX ^-^^T
7,^

Kur.

so,

'<

-.xtf,?

>

107;
Ti<

Jj$ CUuJ ^Ua3\ t-^Juj \5-& i^ u^UaJl i-^r^ J|jfcJ Sr>!^

u
the Jews have said (that) the Christians are (grounded)
'

2^

ii.

^\T

on nothing and the Christians say the Jews are grounded

u
the one sect accuses the other of not poson nothing," i.e.
;

mere grammatical or conventional feminine, or a feminine broken plural,

the verb preceding it may be put in the singular feminine,
^
^
x
If the subject be a

sessing the true religion."

<jf

or even in the singular masculine; thus,

"women

\Z U c^V*

in the city said;"

which they have earned

evils

p^

them."

assail

t.

&*&\

^-

^3

"J\i

"and

the

Occasionally,

though rarely, a regular feminine plural may have the premasculine thus, Kur, an he 10
ceding^verb in the singular
^
O^o
:

~Q

oTx

.,*

x ?

J^i^uU u\j>\k

(.

*^

ff

?\'*'?\i*s\''
cj^^iH &\s>>

\A\

when

1*

believing

women

faith with

come unto you seeking refuge then plight ye

them."
333.

The names of Arab

tribes are generally of the femi-

nine gender, but as collectives they are not unfrequently found

with their preceding verb in the masculine plural; thus,

,^0-c*?

^jJOl

"

ox
L-ft-^s

o^/,

i"f

fft>

^ l^Ujj^^y-jJuu^^x
iC/v.-'x'x

0,"

<s><? Cxxt^ex

J.JU 4yax^

Pb

ix

^^U

x^i^^

L^nX^sf

and there congregated together (the tribe of) 'Amir son of

Sa'saJ, of 'Ukail, and of Eushair, and they complained one
after

another,

Saifa-d-Daula."

of

what

befel

them from (the conduct

of)

298

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

334.

The dual

C3
plural ; thus, U
**

follows the

^ ^^

JX

as the

there entered the prison with

im

him two youths ;" ^r}\

same rules of concord

"
j

v^Jtf "tho

two men

said."

Although,

when

the verb precedes the

subject to put the verb In the singular,

with a dual or plural

as

we have

just

seen, it is

subject, yet the verb

may

usual

agree regularly in number and in

s'

<*

t"*"
fiS'"

^^\

gender with such subject; thus, ^^l* ~S

\J^^ '&&
u
the young damsels have seen the grey hairs glisten upon

my

face (or cheek),"

335.

When

the noun which

is

tho subject of the proposi-

tion is put in the inchoative case,

25 2, and consequently

precedes the verb, tho latter must agree in gender and number
"
with the noun thus, <Lx> IS jL$$\ J^lf Sjl
God produces
;

creatures,

then he gives them

"this money
o

of ours that

o^s>

7'

life;

(k\

<JLsjj

11x^1^ *$>

has been returned unto us; ??

have the true believing women come

^>-j c^lx^^iSl J^
back?" The same rule holds when the subject, having been
previously expressed,

is

evidently understood; for example:

from

Ms

prayer, he put

Iris

and when the Shaikh had ceased

hand

into his wallet,

and he took

out thence sundry papers which had been written in various

colours at the time of
x-

verbs

3^ and

Ms

leisure-"

Hero wo

the
see that
*

xxt?

jjjl

being tho pronoun

are IE tho Bingular masculine, the subject

referring to Itlll understood.

Again,

299

CONCOED OF A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.

the plural feminine, the pronoun

is

^j,

referring to

l^

^L being understood,

"the papers."

must be observed, however, that if the subject be a broken

whether it come from a masculine or a feminine noun, or if it

a. It

plural,

may be, and usually is, emmay be seen in the following

be a regular plural feminine, the verb

ployed

feminine singular;

in the

o ^c-o
^

example JJ^\
"
\

doves

who

rest

^Ju

as

s '' s

~+*>

<&

s'

^l^-^^U^r

on the branches of the Arak

/:

jt"-o

C/VjSl
!

cyU*U^

t>

31

bear the message of

a lover, who cannot recover from his intoxication/'

If the broken plural be that of rational beings of the masculine

b.

gender, the verb

may

be put in the masculine plural ; for example

#&i ; jS b Xy& jj

j$\*
who by

turns watch over

?
5<#

day;" l^julil
they lay

\\

S3fc

*JJ

God

has angels

angels in the night and angels in the

F*-"**

u-^UJl ^\ "when kings enter a town

waste."

In such compound tenses as are expressed by the union of the

<?,

verb

it

^j Ijl^-J

you
'

^&j

"

and the preterite or

aorist of another verb, if the subject is

put between the two verbs, the verb ^l follows the rules of concord
of the verb which precedes its subject, and the second verb follows
those of the verb placed after
collective noun,

in the plural; thus,

men

^/^Lj

51

are not grateful;" ^JwUI

afraid of

its

subject.

and precedes the verb, the

(jwUnJ&T

When

latter is

^^

the subject is a

commonly

"but

placed

the generality of

^yksc *&* <J&* "some

of

them

are

men."

336.

The

rules

which we have hitherto

laid

down

respect-

ing the Concord of verbs with their nominatives apply only to

300

SYNTAX OF VEBBS AND PARTICLES.

The verbs

the third persons singular, dual or plural

of the

and second persons must always agree in gender and

number with the noun or pronoun which constitutes the sub-

first

ject of the proposition, unless the verb

subject

by the

ciJl

S I>"^

SI
95

is

one,

thou

Ul llJU-

"no one came except

be separated from the

besides ;" as follows:

thee

5?

where 5dl

*Ts-

any

the subject consists of several nouns or pro-

X
??

the real nominative to the verb

s.

except/

$\

precede them in the plural as

"
I and thou camo/ literally,
we came, I and

singular, the verb

cJij

particle

When

337,

nouns

"

may

or the verb

may be put

in the singular and agree

with the next nominative

thus, \J*y
&ify p/* JuilX;
"
Maryam and Haran spoke against Moses." When the subject consists of two nouns or pronouns, and precedes the verb,
;

the latter requires the dual number; as in the following

example:
tortoise

J^sd

W$l-j

jueM iU>-j UbUu3 S^

i*-*3j\j

and a hare once upon a time contended one with

the other (in running) and

tween them."

made

the mountain the goal be-

If the subject consists of more than two nouns

or pronouns and precedes the verb, the latter

plural

5usr*^

thus,

\j&? $>$)

(once) had a dispute.

is

'J$ "the belly and

\

put in the
the two feet

33

When

the subject consists of two or more nouns of

different genders, and is placed before the verb, the latter is
338,

usually employed in the dual or plural, as the case

a
thus,

^fJLjiJ ailT^

J^f-;

f$^?%

<3*^

may be

idleness

and

CONCORD OP A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE.

301

withdraw (men) from God and bequeath, (as an

If the subject consists of a noun in
inheritance) poverty,"
the singular and another in the plural, provided it be a broken
too mucli sleep

plural, the

#j

tence:

"

verb

put in the dual, as in the following sen-

is

\^ JV^j u^Stl c^U^j $Ac*.\ji*>jjd\ J*

and when there

sounded on the trumpet a single

is

and the earth and the mountains

shall

shall

blast,

be carried away and

be broken to pieces."

339.

"When the subject

consists of

two nouns in a

state of

regimen, the verb not unfrequently agrees with the word

governed, instead of the governing word, which is the general
'
'
'<"
**<
1
.LI
T7"
00
T x x
*\/ ?
111.
28
c^>U^
JCST
Js
rule; thus, Kur,an
^^.

"

u ^^

on the day when every soul shall find whatever

rt

..

done of good;"

|-gS

(jwulJ

,,-53-f

s<*

opo^,

c^-^1 ^1 j-^- /^

nation that has been produced from

340.

'

which rule

also holds

the same person.

If,

when

has

it
_

you are the best

among mankind."

The verb must always agree with

person, whether such nominative

//

its

nominative in

be expressed or understood,

there are several nominatives of

however, the same verb has several

subjects of different persons, the verb agrees in person with

the nearest subject

and in such

case, the first person takes

precedence of the other two, and the second of the third;

ft
.*
^O
.xi'
9.,xx x Jx ,^-V " ,x
T
we have come, I and
thus, <& uos;~b~ \>&~\j e^ulj U] UJU>,

/*

I j-,

-,

..

and we have taken from him what may be necessary

us," where we see the verb put in the first person plural,

th&u,
for

because

its

nearest nominative is of that person.

Again, in

SYNTAX OF VEBBS AND PABTICLES.

302

S>s

s s

^y*

ju*

*t

the example,

's
<dn

"

^
s>

^jj

"S

" G

9 9

'

<

.1

Li.

u->^y^j u^ol

l^/**-

thou

and thy multitude shall present yourselves before God (lit.

between tlie hands of God) along with. Aaron/ where the
3

nearest nominative
it

of the third

of the second person and the next to

is

liencc the Tcrb is put in the second person

plural

Government of Verls.
341.

transitive verb generally governs its

complement

or object in the accusative case, without the intervention of

a
any particle ; as in the sentences \^ &*j cS^ Zaid struck
?5
5
Amxu;
4>/^ !3 "ho does not drink wine at all."
?

^iX
When, however, by an
verb precedes

it,

inversion, the object of the transitive

the object has the preposition

prefixed to

J
*"'

it

as Jjj^S? t[jjU

&\

"if you will interpret the

vision."

342. Verbs doubly transitive govern two accusatives of

and

different pcrsons 3 or of different things, or of a person

thing both; as

1^1^ $U

xo

<?

^IkU!

his wasslr poisoned water to drink;"

#*

gave thy son flesh to eat;"

pressive of

"
ing/'

tl-sl

L^>\ cu^tl "I

f*

f*

\j&*$$

the Sultan gave

$*

"$>

^jH

Zaid

Amru

presented

^X

"

Verbs exwith a splendid garment."

"
a
doubtbelieving/ "thinking/
knowing/
5

considering/* and such like, govern two accusatives,

i&5 that of a direct object

L^

"I
\}

(as) dead

and that of an attribute ;

believed

Zaid

^$\^^

who have been

slain in the

(to

be)

thus,

intelligent;"

do not consider those

way

of

0od"

(i.e.

in de~

GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.

303

Q^
^

fending the cause of God and the true faith);

u
"
they received the (true) faith as a (matter for) jesting.
There are, however, other modes of construction applicable to
this class of verbs, as
9

&.. s

^'i

^s

ff

{[ rr

may be

-i

seen

IT

the following examples

by

ji

i*

-^..i"^

cuu JjU jjj Zaid is intelligent, I think ;" or JjU

"
or lastly )3l&
Zaid, I am thinking, is intelligent
3JjJ
,

??

"I

think, verily, Zaid

343.

When

is intelligent.''

employed in the passive

transitive verbs are

voice they of course lose their objects or accusative cases,

which then become the subject.

manner, lose the

like

first

of their

Yerbs doubly transitive, in

objects, which then becomes

the subject, while the second object

still

remains in

its

preced-

ing form; thus, in the active voice, l^IJl^ U xjfj ^iLilll

"
the Sultan gave his wazir poisoned water to drink," bea
the wa#ir
comes, in the passive voice, l^i^* z& Jjj^l

J*

received poisoned water to drink."

Q ]pi

^Zaid gave

^L

In a similar manner,

Amru

a splendid garment,"
a)
in the passive voice becomes, VpL^
Amru has
{Ja*\
o o
*^
been presented with a splendid garment
&^ uj] '**L\ u thy
son has been given flesh to eat."
So in the Kur,an, ii, 95:

l^s^

joj JUcl

"$

'

9^

,>*"***

-j&]\ \^\
i.e,,

*>

^\\

those to

whom has

been brought the book;"

the Kur,an*

344. It sometimes happens that the same

noim may be the

and the object of another that folIf the verb wMch governs the noun as its object

subject of one proposition

lows

it.

comes
ject,

first,

and then the verb

the objective case

to

is left to

whieh ttat noun

is

the sub-

be tmder$tood, and the noun

304

SYNTAX OF VEKBS AND PARTICLES,

appears only in the nominative ;

me ;"

and Zaid struck

(Zaid),

Amra), and

Amra

^^> eLu^

as, 3SJ

'$

"

^& ^ ^

passed "by me."

J ^H;/*

"I

struck

I passed
(by

It is permitted,
however,

according to some grammarians, to give an affixed pronoun as

its object to

to

the

verb

first

which the noun

is

thus, joj

^^

the subject comes

6^

If the verb

and then

first,

that

which governs the object, the latter is in like manner suppressed, and the usual rules arc observed in the agreement of
verb with the subject thus, ^l^fj cLJjJ J
53
two Zaids struck me, and I struck (them).

the

first

The noun may

345,

the

first

verb

having

also

be put in the accusative

the

termination

that

"

^^

the

case,

indicates

its

agreement with the understood pronoun, which represents

noun

that

for ^Jjj^n

in the nominative case

struck therou

and an

subject

"

^^ i^^/^

ciop J
??

as, ^tjjjj

uLj^J ^

\jj

me

and I

the Zaids struck

If such a verb bo employed as requires a

became;" and

andjl^ "he" or "it was," or

that attribute be common to two proposi-

attribute, like
if

such as "I was

and Zaid was

the attribute

may

be given only onco or may bo represented by a separate

pro-

tions,

ill,

ill,"

noun;

as,

ill," or,

fejjX ojj

&^i
s

$\ Ck^i ojj
a
I was ill, and

or

is

^
^ uL^

SuJ

j JCl
&

jj

so

uL

"I waB
I was

(ftl>)

so,

an<l

but

subjects should be of the

all

first

of

^ a^

and Zaid was

I was, and Zaid was,

was Zaid." The

the OEO most in use

two

^^

u>^^

ill

;"

ill,"

that

is,

of these three methods

them

require that .the

same gender and number,

wise the attribute must be repeated.

was

other-

305

GOVERNMENT OP VEKB3,
^ S

346.

The same

rule takes place with such verbs as

deemed;" Ll*ui. "he supposed," when governing

believed, or

by means

a complete proposition, formed

attribute both in the accusative case; as,

The

believed Zaid (to be) learned."

to

of a subject and

CJJ.lc

different subjects

and the noun, which in one of the propositions

of the verb "to believe/' may, in the other,

of the proposition

which

"Zaid has believed

UJli \*

believed

me

ty

so,

\*j uLolb j

CLSli

"he has
is,

believed

"I have

and he has believed me to be

peated; thus,

and

Amru

as

me and I
?

have

believed Zaid to be

The

so."

method most approved of by grammarians.

of different genders

^^

x$\

"&.-'

believed Zaid learned ;" that

learned,

be the subject

and I have believed Zaid learned;"

uiojJs j
loSj
^jJk

C*J

the subject

me learned, and I have believed Zaid

JLZ& j u~2k "he has believed me, and I

,x

or

is

governed by that verb; thus,

is

have believed Zaid learned;" or

"he has

"I

L^olk

IjJj

may be common

attribute

two propositions, and, of course, to two

learned."

J^ "he

first is

If the subject be

and numbers, the attribute must be

J.\ \^ j

\*

&.!

^jj^^

the

"
J&\

re-

I regard Zaid

(my) two brothers, and they (two) regard me

as

a brother,"

a.

For a more detailed account of such

Grammar
the reMer

as

peculiarities of Arabic

lave been treated of in the four preceding paragraphs,

is

246 to p. 252,

referred to

From

De

Sacy's Gbramnaaire Arabe,

that excellent

alluded to bave been abridged,

Tome

ii.

p.

work the four paragraphs here

30C

SYNTAX OF VERBS

Of

Abstract or Substantive Verbs.

"he

The verb ^l

347.

AN!) PAETICLES,

(or it) was," expressing the ex-

istence of the subject of a proposition, and its relation to the

attribute, takes the subject in the

attribute in the accusative;

be a (truo) sage until he

lls>U Jjjwll

Ms

ness for

ll^pi

shall

jJiian

^ w\ "God

have subdued

^^

It

"there

Jj

no

is

and

its

merciful;"

all his passions

??

has greedi-

^K;

l^od

The same

(either) stones or iron."

tribute precedes

??

-i*

thus,

l\

^\

'

^x ^

ij^

rule holds

(real) science except

1

concealed in the breast

is

is

"he who

o"

what

ease,

tS-O

steed will have poverty for his companion;'

^ Cj&^ ^ U

j^\
x

A!

asCL&J

nominative

u
VjLi"

"

ty/

when

bc

it

be ye

the

at-

great or

ranall."

348* There arc in Arabic several verbs denoting existence,

a
tlio sisters of Mna" which
called by grammarians
cJ>V^.l

are construed like the latter, such arejjli and JoT "it

Tbe-

^^

"i*

camo

5J
?

was"

or

or

"

"came

to pass

etc.

are best acquired

?

happened at eve

the morning/

^l

??

To

by

ili
j"

those

"it returned/'
"

ip^

it

was or came

practice.

All of them

L5

to pass on

which

however,, like

require their attributes to be put in the accusative; thus,

0^1

All
x

"

we might add many more

UjS jli djj "Zaid has become rich;"

by the favour of God become

n
T have become the brother of poverty ;

are

etc.

<u^ ^iaS^y "ye^

XXI

brethren;" |U* lit

t4

307

ABSTRACT OB SUBSTANTIVE YEEBS.

"

became black;"

face

^1*X aL^^M

scorching;"

be worthy of praise;'

The verb

uLjJj

"virtue never ceases to

"

is

march ye

employed along with the preposition

a

to denote possession, in

"the heat became

\^^^ j$\ ^3 U V^j

whilst daylight continues.'

349.

tf^ J^M ^-^

manner

similar to the Latin

the Arabic language not possessing any

"
to have," or
word that corresponds exactly with otix verb

rule, est

pro habeo

This mode of construction will be

with the Latin hdbere.

uXiX "a
obvious from the following examples, viz., j^jj &
^
"
a king, there was to him a
king had a minister," literally,
minister ;" again,
jjj

^S

'Jtj^r^

of this

(is),

The

ject

"
it

mere

had a camel;"

and among the examples

those (people),

it is

not? "

in the accusative.

existence, without

^^

iS^i. SJ

^1

^U

"$

c3CJSj1

In a similar manner the negative verb

(
173) requires its attribute to be put

Sometimes, however, for the sake of em-

the attribute is
phasiSj
*

combined with the subject by means

*>

of the preposition c->; as

^

^Wheu

<"*"

SI

not for them that they should eater

it is

unless with fear. 55

often employed in a

is

any reference
a copula or connective between a sub^
^
&
$
?

preterite of the verb ^l

and an attribute thus,

unjust.'

^j

father

was (once on a time) a merchant and

and serving as

JJ3 "he or

^ Umy

55

general sense denoting

to time,

^^

%\ c33J JlU^

that there

he had a son.
350.

2&r

Jl&
y ^

$>

W3

Jill

*'

'

"
Ju!3

the exceptive particle

$
St

God is not (assuredly)

"

<c

unless,"

except/'

SYNTAX OF "VERBS AND PARTICLES*

308

intervenes between the subject and the attribute, tie latter

"

put In

tide

nominative;

thus,

JQL

J51j

^ s

i,

s^S"**3

*^\

l\

""

the

JlJ

nothing but a transitory pageant.'

is

(present) life

is

times

employed, without any variation, in the third

tjLj3

is

Some-

person singular masculine with the affixed pronouns

LLj "it
5

they/

is

not he;

??

l^lJ "it

not she;" l^lJ "it

is

thus,

not

is

etc.

Varh of Praise and

Censure.

851. Verbs of praise and censure are very restricted in

their inflection,

being principally employed in the third per-

son singular masculine of the preterite, and occasionally in

the third person, singular feminine of that tense.

The

very rarely used in the dual or plural.

this
1*J)

Ij^l (made

"When the noun that

accompanied by the
a

ho

a$J^o2l PU

a bad dwelling.

man

principal verbs of

kind are, as we stated, 174, ^J (sometimes 1*3 or 1*5", or

a
he or it is good; ?? JJu "ho or it is bad; ?? to which we

may add

it is

are

They

is

up of
is

article J1 it is

an excellent

When

is

Zaid

Akin to JJu
manner;

is

clslXe lou*

ti

"

it is

thus, 5JJ cj4^1

without the

+ \3) "this

is

delightful."

the object of praise or censure

3 '

"

JJb

J0

without the

SbfJ

is

"wicked

article, SJ I !ta' >X^

is

lj "an

"

a bad

is

article

excellent

a bad servant thy servant

bad/ which

&ty\ JJu "it

assistant;

thus,

is

put in the nominative case ;

the same noun

put in the accusative

??

^^

is."

construed in the^same

is

the

man

is

man

??

Zaid;

Zaid."

or

309

INCHOATIVE AND APPROXIMATE VEBBS.

Verbs of Admiration and Surprise.

primitive triliteral verb

Any

352.

verb of admiration in two ways, as

3*j*

and

Jjjjft

When

tlie

may be converted into a

we stated in
173, viz.,

former expression

is

used, the

name of the person or thing admired is added to it in the accusathus,

tive case, without the intervention of any other word
the
"When
Zaid!"
is
handsome
U
"how very
jj ^-1
of admiration is a pronoun the affixed pronoun is em;

object

fe

ployed; thus,
acute

is

him

jj& U

liSS

"

how, very

and how conspicuous are the proofs of

When the second form of the verb of

his genius,

excellence in

!"

employed, the object admired, follows

in the genitive case governed by the preposition L^> ; thus,

admiration,
it

J^Osfoj^

viz.,

jf

is

t-3&

j^&? +j\

"how

very noble

is

the disposition of a

prophet!"
Sometimes the noun or pronoun which is the object of admiration
omitted ; but this very rarely happens, and only in such instances

a.
is

as lead to

no obscurity in the

sense.

Between the verb of admiration

and the object admired, it is allowed to admit words expressive of

time or place, an adverb or a word in the vocative case; for example:
%

c~o

UJ*U| ^Isajl

jJ
"

^-juo-l

"how

beautiful is her rushing on in the

battle-field!"

Inchoative

853.

The

and Approximate

peculiarity of these verbs

is,

Verbs.

that of themselves

they convey merely a vague sense, and require another verb

after them in the aorist, as a complement, with or without the

SYNTAX OP VBEBS AND PARTICLES.

310

Among

that,"

conjunction ^\

^v G

note "beginning the action or state expressed

which

aorist,

thus,

-^

the inchoatives are iS^l, x^l

3

"by

will be best illustrated "by a

the following

few examples;

two "began to dispute one with the

w ]/rl&3J H*>- "they
^
S
f S\* *
uQj <wsH 3?M "he "began to lick it with his tongue;"

""

""

other
o

??

^tf

-^

?/"

/|
u
j^^. ^jl J^j

^yw

c?

^ L5^c>rji

P.

^j*

V.

Jyy. c)^

Moses pity
?
receive them P

(Korah.) "began to say 3

to say 3

earth.

Among the

354.

3'

pened that;
(Lat.

parum

me

%s

uXjl

&, and

abfwit gum).

tlJj*

s, , ,
_
b J^^r aTr
ly-arun

^i "it nearly hap-

little

The verbs

and Moses (began)

approximate verbs are

"

^^

was wanting that"

and cly are used

which case they assume the meaning

??
A few examples
of our adverbs "perhaps," "it may be.

only in the preterite, in

will

show the use of these better than a long

tion; thus,

jr%

tlr*

^^ ^ 45^

S0
"

^loft

^A^ Jpt
H

descrip-

Zaid may go out; ??

perhaps the wayfarer

??

(of hospitality) ;

H "perhaps
L5

may

see thy fire

iUj "the lightning very

nearly took away their sight;" Jjyf JJJSl cf?5K "the spirit
5*
All of these rarely require the
was nearly departing.

^y^j however^ when expressive

of apprehension of any thing, and which may then be considered as an impersonal verb, requires the conjunction
interposition of ^1; the verb

thus,

^^L^Lj 11S \fi! ^

"

355.

may happen that you

may bo good for

it

^js.

a thing and (novortheless)

it

There arc several other verbs whose mode pf eon-

311

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PARTICLES.

Such are

struction is similar to the preceding.

1.

Verbs

a place ; such as
expressive of entering or tending towards
"he went or preceded;" thus,
"he entered;"

^^

2\ u&y ^J\ Ji-5 "he entered into a certain cave that

'
~ *
'

"

'

'

*~^*o

f>

'**

?s

o^x^-

hemightenjoytheshadeinit;"LlaLsM +p* u^^i c-JUi!] ^lU^Ui

"
then they went to the foxes that they might enter into a
"
2. Yerbs expressive of
continuing,"
league with them."
"
"
as
such
persisting," "remaining," or persevering ;"
{ju and

"he continued"

+\9\

or "persevered;" as aujT

"Zaid continued sending

applies to the verb

"

CJ

"
33

he was accustomed

(during the day)

;"

to

he was firm" or "unmoved;"

c>lJ

"

and cjC01

Cc,

rule
oli

Jb "he continued," "he ceased not

;"

<a

1J U, JS

5JJ {j

The same

he remained or put up (during the

So the verbs negative, 3lj

o

night)."

"Jj\ 3~>Vjj

Ibn Buwaih."

U "he

"he

failed not,"

ceased not;"

"he

i.e.

per-

severed (until the end of the period indicated in the proposition)."

a.

When

going, the

a negation

is

employed in such propositions as the

same must be put before the

"he

is

you

will not do (it),"

hardly able to speak plainly;"

$yntm
356. In Section Y.

Ijliaj

of Indeclinable

we

first

verb

thus,

fore-

^!j oUj

^\ vxll^ Ui

"

perhaps

P<wUd$

treated of most of the indeclinable

and in the present section

we have occasionally noticed the mode in which some of them
the tenses of the verb more especially the aorist.

particles of the

Arabic language

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES,

312

"We

shall

same

now conclude

few additional remarks on the

with, a

subject, observing the order

adopted in Section V. above-

mentioned.
All prepositions,, whether separable or inseparable
~o

35V.

&

118,

"

<&
**

goyern the genitive case; thus,

etc.),

God

to

*CJU^

"*

'~

>>*

the house;" JlllM

"

<xjpr

^J\

<d!b

under the heavens

?

J"~

<~*j&\ 4*r &*

"in God;"

;" jlSif
-'

^ "in

from the quarter

of the south to the quarter of the north."

We have

a.

341, that, as a general rule, transitive

already stated,

verbs govern the accusative case direct, without the aid or intervention

This rule, however,

of any particle.
instance,

tlio

phrase

pressed -sr*? LS *J
<u

lie

X'

"

"

he knew

lj!s?-

^j

"he threw

It."

The

***

he was conversant with

is liable to

"he threw a

some exceptions

may

stone,"

also

for

be

ex.-

(or shot) with a stone;'* so <uic and

latter phrase,

however,

may

be rendered

it."

358* Intransitive or neuter verbs arc naturally connected

with their complements by means of a preposition; thus,

U
k camo * a fo^^teia of water*" "When,

^ J^

<J\

however, an intransitive verb governs a complete proposition,

either verbal or nominal, beginning with the conjunction ^1

or
its

^,!

the proposition which ought to connect the verb with

complementary proposition

&

&\

j^^

not do that
revolts against

??
:

me/

is

instead of
so,
3

frequently "omitted;

u^J

3^

^ 4^ ^ ^^

instead of

^\

"

^j^t. ^

thus,

"J16

J wonder that te

c4f^

^o likewise,

313

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PARTICLES,

-$.

.!J

4-f.

J)ot[

,,-ss

<&\ * JA>

SI

'* *

"he ordered him

that he should not grant

*
<
one," instead of u ob Sb ; the last example
x

permission to any

remarkable, as

is particularly

+&&

position c_> that

a. It is to

omitted, if

it is

"
signifies

only by means of the pre-

he ordered."

be observed, however, that the preposition must never be

a doubtful meaning should be the result

S f

for example,

"

u33J Jx&?

I desire that

omitted

we should have been

^ "
^ i*?$j

preposition, such as
S s

be

$.

LXjp Jxi
359.

^\

:" for if

left to

am

is

in this

book;"
In

house."

jllll

cause the words j\d\

When,

conjunction, the

j]&\

s~

the noun forming the

no word intervenes between

i^j j

j>

2t

Jt\
<r

"

c^l^ll tj3p

^
,llfy

yjUotf
<dll

C<*O

there

t-&

2*\2*}j

the house/' or

there

is

no

man

is

after

5,

two nouns

second of them

is

it aztd

follow,

no

is

no doubt

there

^ intervene between

nomijiative or the accusative;

*O

by some other

in the

we may also say ^Cj\ j^jJl

word ^UUl is now in the nominative,
*

&~

tive

this last sentence

in whicti case the

^^j

had been

averse from thy doing that."

subject; thus,
f

god but Allah;"

place

^\

generally put in the accusative case, but

vrithout the nunation, provided

its

J^AJ*

which case the sense would

After the negative adverb

subject of negation

its

not say

"

the 'preposition

supply

for instance, in

the negative and

^ cLw^ instead of uj33

thou wouldst do that

we must

<*

be-

the nega-

coupled by a

optionally put in the

hence we

may

either say,

**

^Jij 1

cc

we may

there is no

man and

(no)

woman

in

^e

negative

1,

say, i**\j J4"j

If

314

STOTAX OF VEBBS AND PABWCLES.

Iiowever 5 be repeated before each noun?

It

of the nouns In the accusative case? or

it

one of thenij no matter whether the

it

may
may

Influence each
Influence only

or last, or ?
finally,

first

Influence neithor? "both nouns being used In the nomi-

may

M^U&^ J^y

we may say,

native case ; thus,

"O
X-^-Ox-^^^X
or x*\\ $j D^j y or finally, ^St
no man and (there Is) no woman
*>

^ S*]^

^ J>J

or h\^\

'

~*

-^

f~

j O^-J

In the house."

"

there

SS

Is

So in the

formula of exclamation frequently used by good Musalmans

when anything surprising or extraordinary occurs to them

&

*O $

s<$ ?

41 b SI

*S

i-

or lastly , Allb

$\

'S3.-Ol3S6i3i.P-'"

or AJJU

5t

*j>

J| *

j^*

x'Cij'

viz.,
x

or

"there

**O

tf

-*

no power and no

Is

strength but in God."

a. If the subject of

negation bo qualified by an adjective the expres-

^^ xx

sion admits of three varieties; thus,

or

djU

Js>-j

J),

or 1SU

j4y

we may say

"there

^s JU J>-J S,

1dSI

no man sleeping

is

in

the

house."
**

360* The negative particles

simple proposition^ whose verb

attribute to
Is

no

man

Is

and U, when prefixed

bo put in the accusative;

present;" Ujll l>j

order that this rule

may

<

understood? require the

a
thtiSy

Zaid

Is

l^C 54y ^

particle

In

hold, however, it is necessary, 1st,

tween the subject and attribute the

;

there

not standing."

that the attribute should follow the subject

$

not Intervene

to a

particle 2|

3rd, that the particle

2nd, that be-

U may

"
except/^toay
not liave the

^1 (ia a negative sense) combined with

it:

and

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PAETICLES.

when

lastly,

must be

used, tlie subject, if an appellative noun,

is

Should any of these four conditions be

indefinite.

wanting, the particle

which

attribute
3jj

1S\-

<14&

"the
a

ptf

secret trusted to

Zaid

is

not

"

The

361.

there

3JU

4-^ ^ ^J ^* "Zaid is
"
Muhammad is not
^1* U
73

is

i-u3

not a liar;"
J^

them

not betrayed;"

is

"With an indefinite noun

ill."

on the

used in the nominative case; thus,

God is

iJJU

their influence

lose

not standing;

is

nothing but a liar;"

S "&*+Q +
"
asleep ;"

and

is then,

"Zaid

315

we

should say

no man immortal."

^ and

interrogative particles

^l^ or

how

how many ?" govern the accusative ; for example

%s
"
U
l
how many dirhams ? J> l^y c^^ ^"W ^aany men ?"
&a>j
If a preposition be prefixed to these particles they govern
"
for how many dirhams
the genitive thus, J&}j* 1L "by" or
much ?"

<t>

They also govern the genitive

(hast thou bought this) ?"
when not used interrogatively but merely as part of a
c
^
* *
"
I know not how many
narrative
j[ 1
thus, c^Jo/ Jl^j 1^
S
s
;

men thou mayest have

killed."
s

"55

362.

The exceptive conjunction

sides," etc.,

accusative,
IjuJ

in

When

the proposition

^J^r

is

is affirmative

a the men came

the proposition

excepted

"

except," "be-

(^1 +2)

governs the person or thing excejpted in the

when

(J*&\

1\

is

may

me

for

example

except Zaid,"

negative, and the person or thing

may be

put either in the

agree with the subject from which

expressed, the latter

accusative case, or it

to

SYNTAX OF VERBS AND PARTICLES.

316
tho exception

me

accosted

Is

made;

thus,
3?

..

In which

except Zaid;

tS

substitute U'T
optionally
J.
J

)H

"I have

L^ ^ " no one

a^-1

SI

\ju[j

sentence
**O

pc*o

"55

S\
so also I>jIS\
<*SJ

we may

c^i3b

&

>

"3.

cLJjl C*

not brought tho books, except the Pentateuch

'
C-S**

??
;

x-"""

where instead of LjfJl we may

substitute 4/!f31 in the same

case as

3C3. If the person or tiling from which the exception

be not expressed, but understood the object excepted

5

must be In tho same case in which would have been

n<o

'-55

expressed subject
interpretation of
so \jj

"^

SI
>

cLiVj
M-/

lastly,

God

except

??
?

no one knows the

whore oo^

^^ U

"I

we have J^U

the word which precedes

Is

>?

"
*.

Ja'far is

as

but a

4>9&

v)

SI

liar ;"

^^U

general subject, the noun following

me
a.

"

JA^ ^
X

Ja'far Is not but a

^Jilfl

<

"
verily

If the person or thing

bo not of tho nature of that comprised in the

cxcopted

to

When

understood*

the subject, and that which

the unbelievers arc but accursed."

tive CUBC

lli-1 is

the attribute of a proposition, the two words must

it

bo In the nominative
?

understood;

passed not (by any

one) except by Ja'ia?/' where

follows

is

^^

HH

un-

5 ^^

I saw no one except Zaid," where

j^c,l\
X
/
>

tlie

-X

t/

it

"

>

Jjo
thus, <dSH^ <^/0*
x

understood;

Har

is

thus,

Cl
-^

5l

l*Ll

>

,3*1^
v"
.

X]

"

must be

in the accusa-

EO one (creature) came

53
except a horse.

When

tho particle
Sj

not merely used

for the

is

fresh exceptions, and

repeated, forming

purpose of greater energy, tho general

subject

SYNTAX OF USTDECLINABLE PARTICLES.

being understood, and not expressed, the
cepted

is

name

of the

317
first

thing ex-

and the others in the accusative ;

"
I*
no one stood up except Ja'far,

put in the nominative case,

thus, Slsr*
\

^ yif
z^

Ju*^
"

except Sa'ld, except

JH flj

Muhammad.

If the general idea be expressed,

and

the proposition should be affirmative, all the exceptions are put in the

accusative case; thus,

were

1M

jpiiHjXe

Ijjj

$]

slain except Zaid, except 'Uinar, except

"the people

J;xj

l^Sl

'Amru."

If the general

idea be expressed, and the proposition negative, and if there should be

'
ss o
^r *
#'<*,
an inversion, the same rule holds; thus, &o.\ &***\ l\ ]'!*&- JH lr I*
'

"

no one has escaped except Ja'far, except Ahmad." If there be not

an inversion, one of the nouns will be in the case in which would have
&

been the noun following

511

there be but one exception, and all the

if

"G5'^5$x'C'rf*
$\ S>.\ Ju ll
^-" r

"ui

others will be in the accusative; thus,

^f

^j&i*

1\

\^ 1H oj^
-*

$>

s>

no one has been saved except Zaid, except 'Amru, except

Ja'far,"

&,

364. The exceptive particles

and 1j^, 185, may

lU-,
the
them, indifferently,
accusative, the genitive, or
even the nominative, according to the light in which we view

take after

them.

If

we

them

consider

If

&U. |^U " they

we view them as

prepositions, then

they of course govern the genitive

as

active verbs, then .they

juj

naturally govern the accusative

are dead except Zaid."

as

thus,

as

joj

ll>-

^U

and lastly,

mere adverbs, they may be followed by the nominative

t

When, however,' the expressions &.

\j3Li.
a
"that which is free from," and lie U what goes beyond,"

as ojj liU-

ar# employed, the object excepted

tive case

thus, CC!c
?

alight ^excepting

L,

Abbas."

must be put in the accusa"

^^jjli

and they made them

3 18

SYNTAX OF VEKBS AND PARTICLES.

The exceptive

365.
of

all

which

particles Jlc ?

^, ^, and ?T^,

3,

In reality,, substantives,
signifying "dif-

are.

ference/ govern the person or tiling excepted in the genitive

and are themselves always put

in the

same

case in which the

**

person or thing excepted would be,

*

used; thus, **jj+&

me

to

except Zaid

have not

djj^
JA*S>-

^0JP "no
i^p \^L ^-AiU culil U

Un

L*

^Jp\*r

J^ Ux
ll

"

OI10

came

I have passed

"I have

a horse.'

^^

and

had been

31

to

one has spoken

"
or

&$\21

J?

the

Pentateuch

me

except Zaid;

me

J?

??
except Ja far;
?

by no one except

Ja'far;"
?

one except Ja far;"

crca ^ ire )

came

me

to

be observed, however, that the

It is to

^^

to

struck no

i*^" ^ Ullt0 ono

3

except

men came

the

LS i*^

or

books

the
u

brought

gwQl

j^

the particle

"^^

^^^ I*

Ix>.1
7?

if

except

particles

being indeclinable, or rather having their three

cases alike, follow the preceding rule, only virtually, though

not apparently.

366. The exceptive compound particle

less" (nisi or ti

it is

"if

prefixed

thus, LXfJjJ Suj

)?

thee,
rt

So
"

and

ie,

TT

ijJ

rt^o

God

f *^iT

before

wore not Zaid, I should have

"if Zaid had not existod," or

Kur. u. 252
if

if it

"un-

and the verb of the hypo-

thetic proposition that follows takes the particle

"

??

not,

no influence on the subject of the

nori), lias

sentence to which

8jl

^^<f

ox

it;

visited

"had

not prevented."

o#/o^

x $rf ^rf / <"'<+

^^ ^&MJ$ i^^ ^M ^uli

^JJl

jJ**>JljJ

had not prevented men, the one (party) by the

other, verily the earth

would have been corrupted."

r SoHie-

SYNTAX OF INDECLINABLE PARTICLES.

319

times the affirmative part of a hypothetic sentence of this kind

is

when

omitted,

it

thus, Kur. xxiv. 10

be easily inferred from the contest

may

"had not

the clemency of

his

[verily

mercy

verily

a.

God

When

God

(been) npon them, and also

he would have punished the

the subject of the proposition

following the particle SJ

generally used in the affixed form

a pronoun

example

^ ^ U&M ^c
S

~G

2""**^

'

*S$ "if it had not been for

the isolated pronoun

uJ

jJuUjl

is

is

as in the following

' S

world would not have come out of

nothing."

i*}*?***

perjurers], for

gracious (and) wise."

is

it is

'*% #& &\'j&

&\l

gy

him

the

Sometimes, however,

employed; thus, from the KurSn xxxiv. 30:

"had

it

not been for you,

verily

we should have

been (true) believers."

The

367.

particles

or

^ "verily," ^"indeed;" ^

"but;" L^J "I wish," "would

that they require the

put in the accusative case

space;"

iS^sr*

^j

noun

66,

thus,

have this pecu-

J),

that follows
$ ^^

^jjL iU ^
I

fi#

&3

& and

*% \g>

them

to

"
verily

be

God

$$ jy "she

between herself and him there should be a wide

JJU-

Muianunad

"like as;"

were!" (utinam)

forgiving (and) merciful;"

desires that

3^l>.

it

"perhaps," "peradventure"

liarity,

is

"that," "with regard to," "anent;"

or

is

tl*i

ill SuJ

sitting;" 111 tSJj

L^J3

\jJiss4

"as

if

is

standing,

but

Zaid were a lion;"

that

Muhammad

were present!"

perhaps

Muhammad

is

"would

1$

"Zaid

"

returning to-

SYNTAX OF VERBH AND PARTICLES.

320

day." That these particles, however,

ing power,

it is

between the

necessary

particle

tliat

and the noun, with the exception, perhaps,

it

governs

as

When

a sign."

verily in this (consists)

particles are

retain their govern-

no other word should intervene

of a preposition with the noun

may

combined with another

LA

uJ3<i ^J

the preceding

particle, so as to form

one word, their governing power ceases, as in the sentence

"
33
Jj] SL iLl
U^ verily knowledge is with God.
1

197 we noticed the more ordinary interjections.

Of these the most frequent of occurrence is U", corresponding
368. In

"

0," used in addressing or calling a person and it

takes after it the nominative case, and occasionally the ac-

to our

cusative, there being

no distinct form of a vocative

An

the Arabic language.

elliptically, as in

use of

"the

lion!

so jlill

the lion

tho

vocative case,
referred to

enemy
or

67.

our

exclamation

is

own language;

that

is,

sometimes made
s^*v*

thus,

x41

,,*<>*

<xJt

"bewarfc of the lion!"

For a more detailed account

rather of its

case in

of the

substitutes, the student

is

321

SECTION
^>"

369,

u^^\ *b

Prosody

The prosody

IX.

Ilmu4-'ArucL

of the Arabs, from

which

derived

is

and the Musalmans of India,

is founded on the following simple principles.
In the first
place, every word in the language begins with a consonant,
that of the Persians, the Turks,

which consonant

is

moveable by one or other of the three

primitive vowels

22).

Secondly, a syllable consisting of

merely one consonant, moveable by a primitive vowel, is

.naturally short; but if such syllable be followed by an inert
consonant, the primitive vowel becomes long

by

position.

For the sake of simplicity and perspicuity, we intend in

this Section to make a free use of the Eoman character
and
;

in so doing let

it

be observed that the three vowels

when unaccented, represent the fatha

damma
These vowels are,
respectively.
said, naturally short

when

0, f9

Jcasra

and

-7-,

&,

and

we have

just

followed, in the next syllable,

by a

as

and they become long by position

;when followed by an inert letter ; hence it will not be necessary for us to perplex the student with & superfluity of long
single moveable consonant,

and short marks, very ridiculously applied, as they

are, in
41

PROSODY,

322

we have

every work on Eastern Prosody which

The accented vowels

5,

J,

and

yet seen.

are always understood to

w,

be long, as they are the representatives of the three

of prolongation
In

a.

<</y3,

atif,

present Section, with a view to

tlio

sure/' the short vowels arc

happens

to liave tho

quantities

made
!"^Lf

to

ilras,

in

marked

assurance doubly

Anapsesttis

^^

Fadilun, the
it

vowel

first

is

from the Amphrmacer

In tho tables representing the sixteen metres, pp.

3S8 and 320, we have

also

marked

when two consonants

long, except

"make

as another foot, but of different

same vowels
tlie

respectively.

in those few instances where one foot

bear the short mark, to distinguish

fladilun.

li

andj waw,

letters

the short vowels as well as the

follow

tho former, or a single

consonant at the end of a hemistich.

Of
870*

adopted

the Metrical Feetr-'ifr (plnr. sT^rO-

Wo

mentioned,

tlio

verbal root J*i with

50, that the Arabian Grammarians

various modifications, as

Its

a more formula for representing the various forms and measures

This is not all, however they have
of nouns and verbs.
:

applied the same root together with

for exemplifying tho

i\^\

Its

formations, as models

or metrical feet in prosody.

instead of saying that tho

word

]&., for example,

of the meastire

lmlu&) they simply say that

it IB

a similar rule applies to

the other

all

feet.

Thus,
is

)j*s,

an

and

The Arabian

feet is exceedmethod, then, of exhibiting the various poetic

and to
clear and simple^ as it appeals at once to the ear

ingly

the
i

eye.
,

is,

The only
as

we

objection to the

formerly stated, that

employment of the

it Is

root

altogether raroitablft

OF THE METRICAL FEET.

323

European students, however satisfactory

to

We

the Arabs.

It

prove to

may

here, therefore, select as our formula tho

J^s which Bears a close resemblance in form to Jju

with the important advantage of its having for its middle
root

consouant a letter whose sound a European ear can

easily

realize.

a.

The structure of the Arabic language

that of the ancient

in Arabic

we have

such as
that,

tongues of Greece and Borne

we never meet with

"a vowel

in

"a vowel

sonant

is

The

classical rale

if

IB

short," can

the

in

followed by two consonants becomes

last syllable of

every foot ending with a con-

The reason

always long in Arabic verse,

foot

Latin

and Greek,

following

may,

for

and

(369),

another classical

munis syllaba

rule,

versfts/' does

is,

often

begin

cloas,

viz.,

that the foot

This rule

an equally obvious

if

Finally,

have no place here.

have tho following rule in common,

following must begin with a consonant

hold

viz.,

Hence our

M%tXr/o<?,

before another vowol

long by position."

one particular,

more vowels

U^X^laSew

naturally Bhort,

in

a concourse of two or

All the three languages, however,

viz.,

most widely from

differs

Ultima

not apply in Arabic

with

a
est

vowel.

com-

for in tho latter

tongue, the last syllable of a verse must be cither absolutely long,

position, or if naturally short, It is artificially

371.

The Perfect

or

Standard

Arabic arc eight in number.

literal,

Uteral,

Of

not

reason, viz.,

cuj usque
:

(loos

by

prolonged*

foot

those,

eL?UJC*

talm&t in

two arc quin<ae~

each consisting of three syllables; four arc septieach consisting of four BylkblcB

two are also

septilitoral,

but consisting

and tho remaining

<aolx of five syllables*

324

PBOSOD7.

All of these, with their measures, and their corresponding

Latin names, may be seen in the subjoined Table of
STANDAEJ) FEET,
IATIN NAME,

MEASURE,

NO,

2.

JupU
c

3.

(/

"'

Ampbimacor

Mafadlhm

Epitritus primus

*"

quartos

^iLpl^.*

Mafftclilatuu

lambo-Anapccsius

8.

^L^l^vn Mutafadiltm

An&p&sto -Janibus

The eight foregoing Perfect

several modifications,

either

by

tlxe

feet

vil/tf or

iL

"which gives rise

to

^7fo/,

called ghair mlimai^ ix\

appears to bo of

ever,

^-^

*x

\-y

s*x

admit,

of

eaeh^

This result

called

is

"deviation," or "infirmity/'

i.o. ?

some

^^

s /

addition or abstraction

of one or more letters or syllables.

tliUlj
X

MaiVlulillu

7.

8T2.

v - /<

lertius

cujA^-

6.

"^

sectindus

Fadiliitun

^L^xLuu* Mustafdilun
"

^J'SloU

6,

"Ffidiluu

^l.MtflL

4.

Bacchlus

(^y^i 3?adulun

1.

QUANTITY.

thirty

or

Imperfect*

little

more

additional feet,

Tliis distinction^

how-

utility, for in

most

practical

poetic compositions the Bo-callccl Imperfect feet occur, inter-

mingled with

make

tlio

himself

Perfect.

acquainted

Tho

student, therefore,

with

all

the

feet

had

better

established facts, without troubling his head about the

cumstance of tlmir being Perfect or Imperfect*

(A

ample,

the

regular

BaccMns
f

by becoming

MA

'^ -^

i-

^t

^Jlai

f "

dy**

^^

as

simply

cir-

3?or ex-

S lve nse

^
JL

O"^

but then, the regular

feet

a
<

^U

OF THE METRICAL FEET.

325

according to certain rules which our restricted limits here do

not permit us to enter upon. The
Imperfect Feet of ordinary
occurrence may be reckoned at about nineteen in number but
;

to these the native

grammarians add several more

which,
however, being matters rather of curiosity than of practical
utility, are here passed over.

TABLE OP IMPEBFECT FEET.

LATIN NAME.

326

PROSODY.

a. It

may

be observed that the preceding

list

of metrical feet

regular and irregular, corresponds,

number and

Romans

quality,

is

the

with those

The Arabs, however, have neither the

Tribrachys

of old.

nor the Dactylus in

This

very nearly, both as regards

in use among the Greeks and

more

have been able

their list, so far as I

to ascertain,

surprising, as the greater part of the verbal roots in

the language consists, theoretically of three short syllables.

9

Of

the

373. "We shall

Metre

-jy*&\ (plural

now proceed

of

to lay before the reader a Table

of tho Sixteen Standard Metros employed In Arabian verse.

It

These,

may be

observed, are wholly composed of perfect feet,

and are thence called perfect motroK

in the last paragraph,

but, as

we hare shown

372, since there arc a great number

of Imperfect feet, so there are numerous imperfoet or secondary

metres.

Here again the

for the great

body

distinction is whimsical

and

useless

of tho poetry of the language, especially

poems of any length^ are found to admit of Imperfect metre,

probably because tho perfect would prove too monotonous by
long continuance*

It

would have occupied

too

much

of our

space to have Inserted, in our Table, tho translation of the

Arabic names of tho various metres

great use if

name

Is

we

did, for in

nor would

mont Instances the aptness of the

not very perceptible.

We

also in this Section dis-

pense with giving the equivalent of the nunation in

technical terms

when printed in

terms? however,

wo

shall

be of any

It

make

the

Roman

all

character.

Arabic

Of such

a sparing use, as our object Is

to explain clearly the principles of the art^ not to enlarge

ar* nnwrftA ftwWiAma of
UTXXft Its flrv tftrthnirtfllrfctas

WA

OF THE METBES.

"

rivalling the
to

name
a.

fact,

J?

Rhetorician,

whose

327

rules teach nothing but

his tools."

The Arabs consider a verse

to consist of

what we

with them, viewed as a single verse,

which they

call

a couplet

u^Jo

call

is,

"
bait, i.e.

a tent" or

"

two equal members

in

a house ;" as will be seen

in the following extract (a little corrected) from Gladwin, viz.,

"
It is

generally allowed that a bait, or verse, cannot consist of less than two
S"

hemistichs

and each of these hemistichs

a
j?J*32 misra',

is

"

word which

si*

j^

called

misra? or

-?

one of the two folds

literally signifies

of a door ;" and the resemblance between a distich and a door of two
folds, consists in this, that in

folds

may

you

the same

open or shut which

when you shut both together

manner

as with a door of two

you please without the other ; and

it is

still

but one door; so also of a

you may scan which of the hemistichs you please without

when you read both together they will form but one
The first foot of the first hemistich, in a poetical composition,

distich,

the other, and

verse.

is called

Jj^

sadr, and the last foot thereof

second hemistich, the

cL-^J

darb or J^f

general

name

first

foot is called

The intermediate

'qyz.

hashw,

jJ*L>-

"chief," and ibtida signifies

The meaning

Jo^c

f Jcyl

ibtida,

feet of

"commencement;"

the

first

for, as

hemistich

is

called 'arud, as signifying the

Of the

and the

last

both have the

"

of sadr is the
first

The

the distich, as the other does the second hemistich.

the

'arttd.

first" or

beginning

last foot of

"pole of a tent;"

the pole is the support of the tent, so is the distich supported

"on this prop

complete, nor

hemistich

and
its

is called

until this foot is determined, the hemistich is not

measure known.
"
darb,

i.e.

The

last

of one kind," or

foot

of the second

"
alike," it resembling

the 'arttd inasmuch as both are at the end of a hemistich.

"
signifies, literally,

situation in filling
feet are 80 caflled,"

the stuffing of a cushion,"

up the

Hashw

and on account of

their

interior of each hemistich the intermediate

PKOSODY.

VJ

'

H
W

pq

d
#

cf

pf

J3
.55

1
5
S

f
I

PH

A
T*

T3

|
a

rt

1
I

j*q

te

^
S

<r"i

OP THE METRES.

329

)
_[_
I

1
I

i
f
J

i
$
ft

a
3
I

1
1

330

I'HOSODY.

314. In the general treatment of the various metres 1 have

adopted an entirely new plan of my own, which, I flatter myself

will be found far more perspicuous than the clumsy method
?

by the native grammarians and their servile imitators

In the first place, I have adopted the Eoman
in Europe.
character throughout, which is a great saving of space,
followed

Secondly,

marked the

I have carefully

quantities of the

only in those cases where there might possibly

For instance, when a vowel is followed by
occur a mistake.

vowels ?

"but

single consonant at the end of a

two consonant^ or by a

word, as in the foot Mtisfafdilun, it is quite superfluous to

mark the quantities of the first, second, and fourth vowels,

and

to write the

Mmtajllun^

on the

as

wo have
It

wibjoot.

seen

followed

it is

and consequently

it

it

still

or,

would be equally superfluous

marked the third vowel of

onco see that

more absurdly,
figure in some recent works

word MustafflUun,

this foot as short, because

we

at

single moveable consonant,

by a

short

is

to have

rule (sec

by

369).

Lastly,

the root J^i as

by our adopting the various modifications of
wo aro enabled to explain, in a satisour standard of

measure,

of Arabian Prosody, in accordance

factory manner, the subject

with

its

a, If

true principles

the inadequacy of employing the

proof be requited to shew

modifications of the root

find it in the second

yoi

of

in the

Bo

Roman

character, the reader will

Grammar,

Saey's

p. 618,

where the

thus represented, viz., Fd"0-ln,

eight Perfect foot are

v -v-.

>.

The grand

defect here

tive of tlio nondescript consonant 5

is,
,

that

which

we have no
is

representa-

altogether ignored

OF THE METBES.

331

the consequence Is that the learner is not only perplexed, but utterly

The proper course would

misled.

eschewed the

Roman

clearly have been, either to

have

character entirely, or to have employed a

more

appropriate Arabic root for the purpose of illustration.

With a view

375.

to exhibit, in the clearest manner, the

affinity or relationship that holds "between

of each, class, I have

made use

the various metres

of the straight

line,

which

leads more directly to the point, than the circles used

Prosodians of the East,

I.

Let

us, for instance,

where we see at a glance

two

by the
examine Class

that,

by taking away the

first

syllables of the

metre Tawll from the leginning of the

hemistich, and by transferring the same to the md> we have
the metre Madid, which comes next.
In like manner, if we
transfer the first three syllables of the

ginning to the end of the hemistich,

and

on with

Madid from

we have

the be-

the metre Hasty

In Class IV. I have slightly

altered the usual arrangement, by placing the Sar7 metre at the
end of the class, rather than at the beginning, as it is formed

by

so

beginning of the latter to

Werve
otvfc

the rest

transferring the first three syllables of the

ifoe

>,

all

#*

MyjtatMh from

We

its close.

may

further

that all the metres of Class IV. consist only of two

of the

four

What we have

Epitriti

feet

of

the

here denominated the

fee Arabs, called the

Mve

Circles

of the metres in each

Fwe

ancients,

variously

Classes of metres, are,

because they describe the re-

by means of

circles,

of which the

see specimens in p. 9 of Oletk, and in p. 147 of Freytag*

i

ircle

they

call the

Discordant

the second, the Associated

332

PROSODY,

the third, the Extracted,

its feet

being taken from the

fourth they call the Resembling or Similar

The

cordant.

common to

two

first

first circle

and the

circles are peculiar to the

fifth,

Arabs

the

the Coa~

the rest are

the Arabs and Persians, with this difference, however, that

with the former the Hexametric form. (See

376)

is

preferred

when

they employ the third circle,

370. Tlio student will bear in

foregoing Tables

each stanza or

we have

that throughout the

given only the

first

hemistich of

the second hemistich "being a mere

vorflc,

repetition of the first;

irwflt consist

mind

of an even

consequently every complete verse

number

A verse

of feet.

consisting

of eight foot, as in the metres of Class L,

is

Muf/mmman

foot, like

Class IV*

or Oetametcr

called (J^^JZo

it is

if it

be of six

we

&

those in

Mttmdfhs or Hexameter.

of the metres are used in both forms,, as

Some

shall see here-

and some of the Hexamotrio metres by dropping a

in each hemistich become what is called
^jj^ MurabM

after
foot

said to be

or Tetrameter,

Wo

shall

now

proceed to offer a few brief and plain

observations on such metres only as are of most frequent

occurrence.

These are the

!Fbw~il\

the JBa*if 9 the Wafir,

the Kfimil) the Khafif^ the &arV, the MntaJcaril and the Hq/ae.
XI) o

remaining metres are

especially

among the

of

comparatively rare

older writers.

We

usage,

have already ob-

a sparing use of the

Thero are 3 ^however, a
technicalities of the "Arfl Motrica."
few teraw, such as the Mrff$ the Dart, and the IlasJw (See
served

JJ78),

373, a) which

that

wo

should

we must

make

horc employ for the sake* of con-

OP THE METEES.

Those who have a

ciseness.
this sort

may

333

taste for additional matters of

consult Freytag, in whose

copious

find at least three

hundred of them, more or

the

Of

Metre Tawll, or

the

work he

will

less.

Long*

Standard, Fadulun, Mofadllm, Fadulm, Mafodlfan, (twice).

378. This
poets.

It is

a favourite metre among the older Arabian

Octameter, and subject to one deviation (zihaf)

is

in the last foot or 'Arud of the

first

hemistich, which

become Mafadllun instead of Mafadllun,

final foot of the

second hemistich

it

sionally the intermediate feet or

may
a.

deviate into Mafadllun

Hashw

and Fadulu

Of the seven famous Arabian poems

posed about, or a

little

three, viz., that of

metre

the

admits of two deviations,

Mafadllun and Mafadl instead of Mafadllun.

viz.,

of each hemistich

com-

called the Mu*all&,h$t}

Muhammad,

Amm-l-Kais, of Tar ofat and

Taml.

Occa-

respectively.

previous to, the time of

}

The Mu'allakat

may

In the Darb or

are

the

first

of Zukgir, are in

what we

may

call

the

"Competition Poems" of Arabia; and they derive their title from

the circumstance of having had the high honour of being written in
letters of gold,

and suspended

for public perusal in the portico

of the

temple of Mecca.

Of

the

Mvtre Bant^ or the

Standard, Mustaf$fan> F&4il^,

J^^?*% MdiU^

(twice),

f%

379. This, like the preceding,

older gpets.

It Admits of

is

a fawurite metre with the

we .derkeon

ia

&e 'Amd,

viz.,

334

PROSODY,

fddilun Instead of Fadilun

and In the Darl

Fadilnn and Fading for Fadilun*

By omitting

it

admits

both.

the fourth foot

in each hemistich, the verse becomes a

Hexameter, in which
ease the "Arud may be Mustafdil instead of
Mustafdilun; and

the Darb

may

Mustafdil.

deviate from Mustafdilun into Mmtafdildn or

Fibaaliy, all

the feet in this metro admit of several

For instance, Mustafdilun may, in addition to

those wo have mentioned, become Mutafdilun^ Mukadilun, or
deviations.

Muiadil&n,

Of

Metre Wafir^ or

the

the Exuberant*

Standard, Mafa$ilatun, Itn/adilalun, MaftiQitatun, (twice).

380. This metro

is

occasionally (though very rarely) em-

ployed as an Octamctcr by an additional Mafadilatun in each

hemistich.

Its

general form, however,

Hexameter; in

is

which case both the ^Arud and the Darb generally admit
the deviation MafSUlil instead of Mafadilatun.

By

withdraw-

ing Mafadilafun from each hemistich of the Hexameter,

occasionally employed as a Tetrameter

Dar"b or last foot of the verso

into Mafadiltun*
?

The

fifth

may

poom

and

of

it is

in such case, the

deviate from Mafadilatun

of the Seven Mu^allaMt^

by

Amra the son of Kulthum, is composed in the Hexametric form

The poet lived, in " the days of ignorance" as

the Arabs express it, which moans that he flourished before
of this metre*

the time of Muliammad,

Of

the

Metre J&nl, or

the Perfect*

Standard, Jlfutafl$il!unt Mwtqftl$ilwt, Mvtafa$ilvn 9 (twice),

381. This metro, like the preceding, with whict

it

is

OP THE METRES.

33$

employed occasionally as an Octameter ; but

most commonly as a Hexameter or Tetrameter, As 4 Hexclosely allied, is

ameter

admits of one deviation in

it

In the DarI

for Mutafddilun.

it

may

'Ar&d,

viz.,

Mutafa

deviate from the regular

The fourth of the Mrfallakat

or MutafddiL

foot into

tlie

Mutafd
by Labid, and the sixth "by 'Antarah, are composed in the
Hexametric form of this metre.

Of

the

Metre Khafif, or

FadUatm,

Standard, Fadilatun, Mmtafdilun^

382. This metre

is

the Nimble.

(twice).

of frequent occurrence both as a

Hex-

ameter and as a Tetrameter, the former being the more

common. It admits of one deviation, both in the 'Arud and
J)arb of the Hexameter,

In the Tetrameter, the

Fddilatun.
verse,

by dropping

may

the last syllable of

ZtorJ, or last foot of the

deviate into Mutafdil in lieu of Mwtafdilun.

seventh and last of the MtfalfaMt

by

The

Harith, the son of

composed in the Hexametrie form of the Khafif.

This metre is also a great favourite with the Persian poet%
who
employ (as the Arabs sometimes do) Mafddilm

Hillazah,

is

generally
instead of Mmtafdilun, as the middle foot of the hemistich

Of

the

Metre Sarf, or

Standard, MBttafftiw,

83. This
poets.

metre

is

the

MMafdilm, MfduUtu,

(twice).

a favourite with the earlier Axabiaa

It is employed only in the Hexametric form;

admits *of several deviaticm

boh
:

in the

and

'And and Darl

of

336

PROSODY.

tho verse,

t^

Sari

is

In the former, Mafdulatu may "become

Mafdufa,
or Mafula ; and IE the latter it
may deviate Into

MafduU)

With

or Mafdu.

the Persian poets the

of Tory frequent occurrence, only the last foot of the

hemistich generally deviates into Fadil&t^

Fadulun,
or
instead of
?

JM

Of

Metre Mutafcarify or

the

Mdntm,

Standard* Fadnlun,

384. This metre

is

the

Faffl'km,

Proximate*

Fadulun

(twice),

generally employed as an Octameter,

may deviate into Fadul^ Fadu, or

la which case tho Darb

F^

instead of

F<$ulw<

It is occasionally used as a

Hexa-

meter? in which form both tho *Arud and tho Darl admit of

As an Octamoter it is
Persian poets who generally

tho deviation of Fadulnn into Fadu.

with the

groat favourite

change the

last foot of

each hemistich into Fadul, Fadiij or

Fmlal

Of

Metre Hq/a&9 or

the

the Tremulous.

Stadord, Jfw^f/(l/fe% Jfwtqffflm, Mustaffilunf Mwtaffifan

885. This

is

(twice),

a favourite metre both with the Arabs and

Persians? the former preferring the Hexametric forai^ as

intimated in

the

foot,

pose In

876

a.

It admits of several doyiations in all

In consequence of

it

as if it

which

were plain prose

ployed when didactic or

treated of In verse.

we

it in
;

almost as easy to com-

hence

It Is

scientific subjects of

Of works

of this nature

generally em-

any length

are

we may mention

the Alfiya (or Quintessonco of Arabic Grammar), bv Jamalu-d-

OF THE RHYME.

The

Din, commonly called Ibn Malik.

peculiarity in

which

metres

the

viz.,

it

differs

337

from the

Ra/jaz has another

rest of the

Arabian

hemistich of each verse generally

first

rhymes with the second

Darb of each Terse does

as in our heroic

metre; and the

not, as is usual, necessarily

rhyme

with that of the verse following, though there is no rule to

the contrary.
The deviations to which the standard foot
Mustafdilun

is liable are,

In the Darb or

dilun.

Mustafdilun

may

Mutafdihw, Muftadilun, and Mutalast foot of

the second hemistich,

deviate into MustafdiL

This metre

who employ

a favourite with the poets of Persia

it

is also

both as an

Octameter and as a Hexameter.

a.

The eight metres which we have

frequent occurrence

come down

among

the oldest Arabian poets whose works have

to us, such as the collection of poetical fragments entitled

the Hamasah, to which

to,

most

just noticed are those of

and the Dlwan of

we may add

'All

the Mu'allakat, already alluded

Bin Abl Talib, the son-in-law of Muhammad.

Our* limited space does not permit us to notice the remaining eight
metres.

Suffice it to

deviations as

Darb of the

say that they are

we have above enumerated,

all

subject to

verse, but occasionally deviations are to be

B(tskw or interior part of a verse.

The

some such

chiefly in the 'Arftd and

met with

in the

classical student will at

once

most of the ZiJiafat or deviations of the Arabian verse, are

*
similar in principle to those that occur in the Iambic metre of the

perceive that

Greek tragedians.

Of
386.

the

Rhyme bill (pi

The rhyme of the Arabs

^/\

).

agrees, at least, virtually,

that. of other nations, viz., the last syllable of

one verse

PKOSODY.

338

corresponds In pronunciation with the last syllable of the verse

There

following*

however, in the poems

is this peculiarity,

of the Arabs, that with the exception of the species called

or "wedded" (See
390), the
^jjjl mmdawty) "paired"
same rhyme is continued in the Darb of each Terse through-

"When the verse ends with a consonant the

out the piece*

rhyme
It

said to

is

"be

$Ju* mulwiyodah) "fettered," and when

5vxG

ends with a vowel,

The

it is

said to be

&Lk* mutlaJmh^ "free."

consonant of a verse constitutes the essential part of

last

the rhyme, and is called the tVJ rawl^ "that which binds"
"
The species of poem called jwaj Jcafidafa (See
unites,"
or
389),

may bo further

qualified

by a

relative adjective formed

For example, if the

rawi bo the letter * mim, with or without a vowel, the poem
in called iu*!* 51*09, and so on with regard to any other
letter constituting the rawl*

from the

letter,

with the exception of

coded by

tlicir

homogeneous

when

pre-

is

the rawi*

When

the
(

moveablo by a short vowel, such

the same as if it were foltheoretically lengthened,
tho letter of prolongation with which it is homo-

consonant of a verse

vowel

inert,

short vowels, in which case, the

consonant bearing the short vowel

last

and

is

is

lowed by
geneous

and

this easily accounts for

stated respecting the letters

the

mwl of a

1,

j,

what we have

and ^,

just

as not constituting

verse ; for virtually their presence does not affect

the quantity of tho final syllable*

Of

the

Di/mnt

Jfibwk of

Poem.

387, Tho poetical compositions of tho Arabs, like those of

other nations, are called

by various names, conformaMe

to their

OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF POEMS.

manner of

subject, the

Of

treating the subject, and their form.

kifah y the l*^3

&

these the principal species are, the

and the

Jcaiidah)

j*j+

339

each of which

muzdawaj ;

we

shall

here briefly describe.

Of

the

Kifah

388, This species of

in use

among

(pi.

and

to

poem appears

&

have been extensively

the Arabs previous to the" time of

Muhammad.

The collection of ancient fragments of poetry called tib&llamasah

is chiefly, if

to native writers,
or, as

we

The Kifah^ according

of not fewer than two verses,

not entirely, of this form.

must

consist

should call them, couplets, nor does

than one hundred and seventy-five.

between the KiV&h and Kasidali

hemistichs of the

first

Kifah) but whatever

stich of the first

is

The

admit of more

it

difference as to form,

that the

merely this

couplet do not necessarily

rhyme

two

in the

the rhyme of the second hemicouplet, the same must be continued in the

may be

In conclusion,

second hemistich of every succeeding couplet.

we may observe, that both the lEasldah and the Kifah may
Hi composed in any metre which the poet may choose though
of most frequent occurrence are the seven metres we
;

Bt**V

iefly noticed

from

Of
l"f

378

the * Ju*o

pL

ootf*)*

resembles the Idyllium of the

generally, are praise of great per-

subjects,

living or deceased;
Deflections,

384, both inclusive.

Kasidah

p0em

"This kjn(j Of
Ife

to

In the
f

the

satire; elegy;
first verse,

'JLriid

also paoral

or as

we

and

should say,

must always rhyme with

340

PROSODY.

the Darb) and

as in the case of

rhyme must continue

JKXt'ah, that identical

in the second hemistich of each verse

When

to the end of the poem.

is

tlic

the subject of the Kasldah

panegyric, the poet generally finishes with a benediction

or prayer for the health and prosperity of the person addrcssed, such as ?

"

May thy

us long as the sun and

life,

health,

and prosperity endure

moon revolve!"

According to the

author of tho Char Qulmr^ a valuable treatise on Arabian

and Persian Prosody, the Kamlak must consist of not fewer

limn t\vcnty-fivo couplets, nor must it extend to more than
hundred and

0110

uppearn
in

for,

to

haw

the

first

fuivonty-fivo.

This statement,

however,

boon made without due consideration;

place, thoro are numerous KasldaM of

fewer than twenty-five couplets.

further states, that,

Secondly, the same author

among the Arabians,

the Kasidah seems

been unlimited as to length, as they have sometimes

made it exceed five hundred couplets. This last assertion,

to liuve

ought 1 know to tho contrary, but I

have never yet soon a Kjmdah of this extreme length. The
Mtftdfakat) or seven Arabian priase poems, suspended of old

may bo

alao,

111

true, for

tho temple of Mecca, to which

we

formerly alluded, are

tho Kaiidah species.

all of

Thoro are two other species of poetical composition derived

>,>?

a.

from tho Kasflda/t, which

Ilubtfl,
sists

and tho

wo may

$s Ghazal,

here briefly notice,

Tho 2iul&\

of Four hemlBtichs, of which tho

Imvo tho salne rhyme,

t&ko the
wliicli

first

Imfe

first,

as its

name

two stanzas out of the KagtdaA we

flic

the

^j^j

imports, con-

second, and fourth must

not necessarily the third.

nearij correspond* with

viz.,

In

fact if

have the

we

Rub&\

epigram of the ancients "both in

its

OP THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF POEMS.

form and in the mode of

its

more

It is

application.

341

especially

em-

ployed in order to express the date of any event by the <xsrl mode of
numeration.
5.

(See

The Ghazal

39.)

a short

is

As

twelve stanzas.

poem

consisting, at

an average, of

five to

in the Kasldah, the first two hemistichs

must

rhyme, and that same rhyme is continued in the JDarb of eaqt stanza
to the end of the composition.
The ordinary subjects of a Ghazal
are extravagant descriptions of the beauty of a mistress, and the sufferto which we may
From what we have just

ings of a lover (from the cruelty of the former)

add the commendation of wine and

stated then,

it

hilarity.

Ghazal

will be obvious that the

from the Kasldah, except in regard

the Mu'allakat,

by

to length.

'Arnru the son of

Kulthum

differs in

no respect

In fact the
is to

fifth

all intents

of

and

purposes a Ghazal, so far as the subject of

The

differs as to form.

Of
390.

the

l^oj^

the Arabs.

among

Mwdawqf,

i.e.

"paired"

The term Mwdawaj (called by the Persians Mathnawl)

generally applied to compositions of greater extent than

we haye

those
,

it is concerned ; it
merely
and the Ghazal are more in use

the Persian poets than they are

among

is

JRuba'l

already described.

It is

unrestricted as to

from three couplets upwards to any number, according to the nature of the subject. It consists of a succession
of stanzas or couplets, all of the same metre, and the *dond

length

of each stanza

must rhyme .iriife

Ifee first

but the

themselves do not necessarily rhyme with one another,

*
The metre generally assigned
the Kifah and Kasidah.

a,s

Muzdawaj
3,

as

we

is

the Raja%) or some of

its

numerous modi-

hence such compositions

denominated by the general term $jj>-j\ (plur.
intimated in

385

342

PROSODY.
**

>

The Mu^dawaj

in Arable corresponds

with the
hoxamotric poems of the Greek and Latin, or with such of
our own poems as are composed in the Iambic metre of ten

j*r\j\).

with rhyme.

syllables,

Most Arabian poems

a,

from

classes described
still

more

it treats

under one or other of the three

general

888-390.

poem, however,

the subject be eulogy,

place, or tiling, the composition is called

**

poem

is

"?

called

i^ ^

4-Jr* (#"

t^]/).

paniment

is

'

or l*s&\ (pi.
**

sj,

/Vr^l
*

have a

called Ju^cl (pi.

^Jllt

are prefaced

wo

Q* the praise

^r^
).

"**

of any person,

A
^uu),
^-

(pL

An

which

is

elegy

called

satiric
-M

&, or
-V
1

poein intended to be sung with musical accom).

When

troduced into prose compositions, which

otc.> as

may

restricted denomination, according to the

subject of
thus,, if

fall

is

poetical quotations are in-

very frequently the case, the

by the general terms Jx^ "poetry/

noticed in

or Iku "verse/

42, a.

Poetic

891.

The

poots of Arabia appear to have availed thorn-

Vatum much more

solves of tho LiQ&totia

freely than their

tunoful btothtoE of Europo ovor did, with, the exception,

s^

of the

of

may bo

poetry

The Arabs,

like the

to tho strict grammatical rales that apply

Tho

may bo

Italy,

to possess a language peculiar to poetry,

and not amenable

to plain prosa

modem

principal licences that obtain in Arabian

classed under tho following species; vi& 1.

The shortening

of long vowels in tho middle or end of a

by

tho letters of prolongation*

they
to it tho

may

2.

By

word

a contrajy

lengthen a short vowel either by adding

homogeneous

letter of prolongation, or

by doubling

343

OF POETIC LICENCE.
the following letter according to certain rules.

3.

They may,

in certain triliteral words, altogether suppress the short vowel

of the middle letter, and substitute jazma instead of

They may add a

it.

4.

short vowel (generally a Jcasra) to certain

verbal terminations, in a

manner

wash

respecting the symbol

similar to

36, a.

siderable liberties with the nunation

what we

stated

Lastly, they take con-

and other case termina-

tions of the nouns, both in the singular, dual,

and

plural.

All these peculiarities, however, I do not here enter into at

greater length, for reasons mentioned in our concluding para-

graph which immediately follows.

392. In conclusion, I have only to observe that

my

object

been merely to explain the true and

simple principles on which the prosody of the Arabs is
founded.
It would have occupied too much space in

in this last Section has

elementary

Grammar

like the present to

The student who

subject at greater length.

information, however,

have treated the

may

desires further

have recourse to one or other of

the following works, viz. ? "Tractatus de Pro&odia Arabioa,' 7

by Samuel Clerk, and

work by Edward Pocock},
fe
Clerk's work
^f

Oxonii, 1661, 12mo.

This Treatise

is

to a

generally appended

"Carmen, Tograi,"

etc.

is

and repulsiv^ j^p^^L'^40 aft the

of
tech&ies! Utois
tJxe wt are ffiffiffiM with Latsja

V^^B im|^0
(

tions

lajbour.

but

still

The

a perusal of

it

wilt

amply

best work,
t<>WOT^, 0m

that of Dr. Kreytag, ^titled

8vo. ?

fcepay

Aiatea Prosody

^Ito^Eimg

Boto% i$S%^4^^!T,

ife

is

der Arabisc&a

It feeate the sub-

PBGSODY.

ject In a clear

and

manner, illustrated throughout

and
from tlie
fully pointed,

satisfactory

with numerous examples

poets,

The only

accompanied with translations,

objection It be)

is,

not nearly so well

that

it is

known

objection to

it

(if

a language
composed in German,

in this country as ours

is

throughout

Germany.

SlWd

a,

edition of
the reader be possessed of the second

lie will
Grammar, a wort now exceedingly scarce,
end of .the second volume a very neat Treatise on Prosody.

De

find at the

Sacy's

Professor

in 1885 a small 8vo. volume on

Ewald, of Gottingen, also published
in
of the merits of this last it would be rash
tfce same subject; but

mu

to express

any opinion,

as I never

had

fathom thaf gentleman's Latinity, which

that of Cicero and Quintffian,
ever, I

am

So

sufficient

differs

perseverance to

very considerably from

far as I can understand him,

led to believe that he labours to

make

how-

the metre of the

Arabs square with that of the ancient Greeks and Komans. In order
in every one
to effect this object, Professor Ewald is forced to set up,
of the sixteen metres, a standard of

Ms

bnm, which

all

preceding

mere deviations from other established

grammarians have considered as
this is mere matter of careful investigation, wherestandards.
Well,

upon

my

own

authorise
experience does not

a positive opinion.

metre are the

he

may

preface,

rule,

If Prof.

me

Ewald can yrou

and those of

all others

to give

that

sublimi feriam sidera vertid"

established, I prefer following in the

wake

why

then,

prtmatwly

i& his

Till this proof,

however,

is

of the native grammarians,

BND,

WJtnnBDt AUSTIN,

standards of

the exception,

well exclaim, once more, as he does rftdxaf

"

anything like

Ms

JHUQftfcBH, BttKEtfOftD.